User's Manual for Model 354N Universal Loop Controller (UM354N-1, Rev.2; May 2001) - PDF 4 MB

Siemens
Energy & Automation
USER'S MANUAL
UM354N-1
Rev. 2
May 2001
Supersedes Rev. 1
2 4 2 3. 4 5
T C2 0 5 3 . P
S
PB1
100
P
L
S
80
ACK
60
D
PB2
40
A
M
20
UNITS
0
LOOP
0
|
||
100
OPEN
AG00219a
CLOSE
|
MODEL 354N
UNIVERSAL LOOP CONTROLLER
UM354N-1
Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION AND TITLE
PAGE
PREFACE ........................................................................................................................................................... x
1.0 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FUNCTION BLOCKS............................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 LOOP Function Block Types .......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Power Up Initialization................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT............................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING ........................................................................................ 1-7
1.4.1 Factory Shipment ........................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.2 Receipt of Shipment ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.3 Storage ........................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.4 Typical Shipment Contents............................................................................................................. 1-7
2.0 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 STATION HARDWARE I/O BLOCKS ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.4 LIL GLOBAL DATA I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS .................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 ETHERNET DATA I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS....................................................................................... 2-3
2.6 LonWorks REMOTE I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS ..................................................................................... 2-3
2.7 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.8 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON-LINE CONFIGURATION............................................................. 2-5
3.0 FUNCTION BLOCKS ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.1 FCO LIB - Factory Configuration Library....................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 SECUR - Security........................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 STATN - Station Parameters .......................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.4 CLOCK - Real Time Clock (V2.0/2.2)............................................................................................ 3-7
3.1.5 ETHERNET - Ethernet Communication Network (V2.4)................................................................ 3-7
3.2 I/O AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.1 A/M - A/M Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2 ACS - ARCCOSINE..................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.3 ADD_ - Addition.......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4 AG3 - AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas............................................................................ 3-11
3.2.5 AG7 - AGA 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters ................................................................ 3-13
3.2.6 AG8 - AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas ................................................................ 3-14
3.2.7 AIE_ - Analog Input - Ethernet (V2.4) ......................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.8 AIL_ - Analog Input - LIL............................................................................................................ 3-16
3.2.9 AIN_ - Analog Inputs................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.10 AINU_ - Analog Inputs, Universal ............................................................................................. 3-18
3.2.11 AIP_ - Analog Input lev_Percent............................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.12 ALARM - Alarm........................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.2.13 AND_ - AND Logic ................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.2.14 AOE_ - Analog Output- Ethernet (V2.4) .................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.15 AOL_ - Analog Output - LIL...................................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.16 AOP_ - Analog Output lev_Percent ............................................................................................ 3-25
May 2001
i
Contents
UM354N-1
3.2.17 AOUT_ - Analog Outputs........................................................................................................... 3-26
3.2.18 ASN_ - ARCSINE...................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.19 ATD_ - Analog Trend Display ................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.20 ATN_ - ARCTANGENT ............................................................................................................ 3-28
3.2.21 BATOT - Batch Totalizer ........................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.22 BATSW - Batch Switch.............................................................................................................. 3-31
3.2.23 BIAS - Bias ................................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.2.24 CIE_- Coil Inputs - Ethernet (V2.4)............................................................................................ 3-33
3.2.25 CHR_ - Characterizer ................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.2.26 CMP_ - Comparator ................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.2.27 COS_ - COSINE ........................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.2.28 DAM_ - Deviation Amplifier...................................................................................................... 3-35
3.2.29 DID_ - Digital Input lev_Discrete............................................................................................... 3-36
3.2.30 DIE_ - Digital Input - Ethernet (V2.4)........................................................................................ 3-37
3.2.31 DIL_ - Discrete Input _ LIL........................................................................................................ 3-37
3.2.32 DIN_ - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.2.33 DINU_- Digital Inputs, Universal............................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.34 DIS_ - Digital Input _ State........................................................................................................ 3-40
3.2.35 DIV_ - Division.......................................................................................................................... 3-41
3.2.36 DNC_ - Divide by N Counter...................................................................................................... 3-41
3.2.37 DOD_ - Digital Output lev_Discrete........................................................................................... 3-42
3.2.38 DOE_ - Digital Output - Ethernet (V2.4).................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.39 DOL_ - Discrete Output - LIL .................................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.40 DOS__ - Digital Output State..................................................................................................... 3-44
3.2.41 DOUT_ - Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................... 3-45
3.2.42 DTM_ - Dead Time Table .......................................................................................................... 3-46
3.2.43 DYT_ - Delay Timer .................................................................................................................. 3-47
3.2.44 E/I - External/Internal Transfer Switch....................................................................................... 3-48
3.2.45 ESL - Events Sequence Logger ................................................................................................... 3-49
3.2.46 EXP_ - NATURAL EXPONENTIATION .................................................................................. 3-50
3.2.47 EXT_ - EXPONENTIATION..................................................................................................... 3-50
3.2.48 FTG_ - Falling Edge Trigger ...................................................................................................... 3-51
3.2.49 GB_ - Gain & Bias ..................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.2.50 HLD_ - Hold .............................................................................................................................. 3-51
3.2.51 ID - ID Controller....................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.2.52 LL_ - Lead/Lag .......................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.2.53 LMT_ - Limit............................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.2.54 LN_ - NATURAL LOGARITHM ............................................................................................... 3-54
3.2.55 LOG_ - LOGARITHM BASE 10................................................................................................ 3-54
3.2.56 MTH_ - Math ............................................................................................................................. 3-55
3.2.57 MUL_ - Multiplication ............................................................................................................... 3-56
3.2.58 NND_ - NAND Logic................................................................................................................. 3-56
3.2.59 NOR_ - NOR Logic.................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.2.60 NOT_ - NOT Logic .................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.2.61 ODA - Operator Display for Analog indication & alarming (V2.2)............................................ 3-58
3.2.62 ODC - Operator Display for Controllers ..................................................................................... 3-60
3.2.63 ODD - Operator Display for Discrete indication & control (V2.2)............................................... 3-62
3.2.64 ODP - Operator Display for PushButtons (V2.2)......................................................................... 3-64
3.2.65 ODS - Operator Display for Sequencer ....................................................................................... 3-66
3.2.66 ON/OFF - On/Off Controller ...................................................................................................... 3-68
3.2.67 OR_ - OR Logic ......................................................................................................................... 3-69
ii
May 2001
UM354N-1
Contents
3.2.68 ORSL - Override Selector ........................................................................................................... 3-69
3.2.69 OST_ - One Shot Timer ............................................................................................................. 3-70
3.2.70 PB1SW - PB1 Switch ................................................................................................................. 3-71
3.2.71 PB2SW - PB2 Switch ................................................................................................................. 3-72
3.2.72 PB3SW - PB3 Switch ................................................................................................................. 3-73
3.2.73 PCOM - Phase COMmunication................................................................................................. 3-74
3.2.74 PD - PD Controller ..................................................................................................................... 3-76
3.2.75 PID - PID Controller .................................................................................................................. 3-78
3.2.76 PIDAG - PIDAG Controller ....................................................................................................... 3-80
3.2.77 PRSEQ - Program Sequencer...................................................................................................... 3-82
3.2.78 QHD_ - Quickset Hold ............................................................................................................... 3-84
3.2.79 RATIO - Ratio............................................................................................................................ 3-85
3.2.80 RCT_ - Repeat Cycle Timer........................................................................................................ 3-86
3.2.81 RLM_ - Rate Limiter .................................................................................................................. 3-87
3.2.82 ROT_ - Retentive On Timer ....................................................................................................... 3-87
3.2.83 ROUT_ - Relay Outputs.............................................................................................................. 3-88
3.2.84 RSF_ - RS Flip-Flop ................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.2.85 RTG_ - Rising Edge Trigger ...................................................................................................... 3-89
3.2.86 RTT_ - Real Time clock Trip (V2.0) .......................................................................................... 3-89
3.2.87 SCL_ - Scaler ............................................................................................................................. 3-90
3.2.88 SEL_ - Signal Selector ............................................................................................................... 3-90
3.2.89 SETPT - Setpoint ....................................................................................................................... 3-91
3.2.90 SIN_ - SINE ............................................................................................................................... 3-92
3.2.91 SPLIM - Setpoint Limit .............................................................................................................. 3-93
3.2.92 SRF_ - SR Flip-Flop ................................................................................................................... 3-94
3.2.93 SRT_ - Square Root.................................................................................................................... 3-94
3.2.94 SUB_ - Subtraction..................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.2.95 TAN_ - TANGENT.................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.2.96 TH_ - Track & Hold ................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.2.97 TOT_ - Totalizer (V2.3) ............................................................................................................. 3-96
3.2.98 TSW_ - Transfer Switch ............................................................................................................. 3-97
3.2.99 XOR_ - Exclusive OR Logic....................................................................................................... 3-97
4.0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 FCO101 - Single Loop Controller w/ Tracking Setpoint........................................................................... 4-2
4.2 FCO102 - Single Loop Controller w/ Fixed Setpoint................................................................................ 4-3
4.3 FCO103 - External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint.............................................................. 4-4
4.4 FCO104 - External Set Controller with Non-Tracking Local Setpoint...................................................... 4-6
4.5 FCO105 - Ratio Set Control w/ Operator Setpoint Limits......................................................................... 4-8
4.6 FCO106 - Single Loop Controller w/ Operator Setpoint Limits.............................................................. 4-10
4.7 FCO107 - Dual Loop Controller ............................................................................................................ 4-11
4.8 FCO121 - Cascade Control .................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.9 FCO122 - Cascade Control w/ Operator Setpoint Limits........................................................................ 4-15
5.0 LONWORKS COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 5-1
6.0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 MODBUS DATA MAPPING .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 LIL DATA MAPPING ............................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.1 Station Data.................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Control Loop Data.......................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Sequence Loop Data ....................................................................................................................... 6-6
May 2001
iii
Contents
UM354N-1
6.2.4 Analog Indicator Loop Data ........................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.5 Discrete Indicator Loop Data ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.2.6 Pushbutton Loop Data .................................................................................................................. 6-11
7.0 DATA MAPPING ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 CONNECTING TO APACS 39ACM, MYCROADVANTAGE, ProcessSuite, i|ware PC......................... 7-1
7.1.1 APACS........................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 MYCROADVANTAGE ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.3 ProcessSuite ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 i|ware PC........................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 STATION DATA.................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Integer Data (16-bit Integer) ........................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Station String Data (8-bit ASCII Char - 2/Word)............................................................................ 7-5
7.2.3 Station Coil Data (1-bit) ................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.4 Station Status Word (SSW)............................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3 LOOP DATA .......................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 Dynamic Loop Integer Data............................................................................................................ 7-7
7.3.2 Variable Loop Integer Data............................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3.3 Static Loop Integer Data ............................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.4 Dynamic Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE)......................................................................... 7-11
7.3.5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE).......................................................................... 7-12
7.3.6 Static Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE) .............................................................................. 7-14
7.3.7 String Loop Data (8-bit ASCII Char - 2/Word)............................................................................. 7-16
7.3.8 Coil Loop Data (1-bit) .................................................................................................................. 7-19
7.3.9 PCOM Block Status...................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.10 Sequencer Loop I/O Coil Data (1-bit) ......................................................................................... 7-33
7.3.11 LonWorks Remote I/O (Models 352P, 353, 354N)...................................................................... 7-35
7.3.12 Trend Data (Loop Defined by MLTP)......................................................................................... 7-43
7.3.13 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop ........................................................................................... 7-46
7.3.14 LIL Alarm Type Word (ATW) ................................................................................................... 7-48
8.0 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................. 8-2
8.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.1 Controller Mounting, Model 354N... .............................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.2 Faceplate Display Remote Mounting, Model 354N_R..................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3 Faceplate Display Direct Mounting, Model 354N_ _ D................................................................... 8-7
8.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 8-8
8.4.1 Wiring Guidelines .......................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4.2 Analog Signal Input Wiring (4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc, and mV) ........................................................... 8-12
8.4.3 Analog Output Wiring (4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc) .................................................................................. 8-14
8.4.4 Digital Input and Output Wiring................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.5 Thermocouple Input Wiring ......................................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.6 RTD Input Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.4.7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring ................................................................................................ 8-19
8.4.8 Relay Output Wiring .................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.9 Local Instrument Link Wiring ...................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.10 LonWorks Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.11 Modbus Wiring .......................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.12 Wiring to a Model 363 VIEWPAC Recorder .............................................................................. 8-23
8.4.13 Power Wiring ............................................................................................................................. 8-23
iv
May 2001
UM354N-1
Contents
8.4.14 Display Cable Connections......................................................................................................... 8-24
8.5 CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT CABLE CONNECTIONS...................... 8-26
8.6 FACTORY CALIBRATION.................................................................................................................. 8-26
9.0 LOCAL FACEPLATE OPERATION........................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1 NORMAL OPERATION MODE ............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 CONFIGURATION MODE..................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 AUTOTUNE PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 REMOVABLE CONFIGURATION BOARD .......................................................................................... 9-7
9.5 REAL TIME CLOCK/CONFIGURATION BACKUP BOARD ............................................................... 9-7
10.0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST.................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND TEST................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.1 Connections and Power .............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.3 Input/Output............................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.4 Auto/Manual .............................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.5 Modifying an FCO ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.6 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.7 TAG........................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.8 QUICK....................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.9 TUNE......................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.10 View mode ............................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ....................................................................................................................... 10-7
11.0 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 UPGRADING A CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3.1 Environmental Considerations.................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3.2 Visual Inspection........................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3.3 Cleaning..................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3.4 Circuit Board Handling .............................................................................................................. 11-3
11.4 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.5 ERROR CODES.................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.6 ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................... 11-10
11.6.1 Removing the Controller Assembly .......................................................................................... 11-10
11.6.2 Removing the I/O Expander Board........................................................................................... 11-11
11.6.3 Changing the Power Input Fuse................................................................................................ 11-13
11.6.4 Removing the MPU Controller Board....................................................................................... 11-13
11.6.5 Removing an Accessory Board ................................................................................................. 11-16
11.6.6 Removing the Faceplate Display............................................................................................... 11-19
11.6.6.1 Replacing a Faceplate Display.......................................................................................... 11-19
11.6.6.2 Replacing the Bezel or Circuit Board ............................................................................... 11-19
12.0 CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 ANALOG INPUT (AIN1-4)................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 ANALOG OUTPUT (AOUT1-3) ......................................................................................................... 12-3
13.0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD............................................................................................................ 13-2
13.3 I/O EXPANDER BOARD.................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.4 LonWorks BOARD.............................................................................................................................. 13-3
May 2001
v
Contents
UM354N-1
13.5 LOCAL INSTRUMENT LINK (LIL) NETWORK BOARD................................................................. 13-3
14.0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 14-1
14.1 MODEL DESIGNATION.................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 ACCESSORIES................................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.3 SERVICE PARTS KITS...................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................... 14-5
14.5 POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 14-5
14.6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 14-6
14.7 I/O EXPANDER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 14-6
14.8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS........................................................................................................... 14-9
14.8.1 LonWorks Board ........................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.8.2 LIL Network Board (Local Instrument Link) ............................................................................ 14-10
14.9 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................... 14-10
14.9.1 Standard Mounting................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.9.2 Enclosure Mounting ................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)...................................................................................... 14-10
14.10 AGENCY APPROVALS ................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.10.1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions ................................................................................... 14-11
14.10.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use.............................................................................................. 14-12
15.0 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS................................................................................................. 15-1
WARRANTY
SOFTWARE RELEASE MEMO
vi
May 2001
UM354N-1
Contents
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE AND TITLE
PAGE
1-1
Moore 354N, Exploded View.................................................................................................................... 1-3
2-1
Configuration Road Map .......................................................................................................................... 2-6
3-1
PCOM Logic Diagram............................................................................................................................ 3-75
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
Major Assemblies and Mounting Variations ............................................................................................. 8-1
Controller and Controller Mounting Tray Dimensions.............................................................................. 8-4
Faceplate Display Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 8-5
Faceplate Display Cutout Dimensions....................................................................................................... 8-6
Flange Mounting Clip, Local Faceplate Display........................................................................................ 8-6
Terminal Blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Controller Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments ......................................................................... 8-10
Analog Input AIN1, 2-Wire Transmitter................................................................................................. 8-11
Analog Inputs ANI1, 2, and 3; 4-Wire Transmitters ............................................................................... 8-12
Universal Analog Input AINU1 .............................................................................................................. 8-12
Analog Output AOUT1, Current Output ................................................................................................. 8-13
Analog Output AOUT1, Voltage Output................................................................................................. 8-13
Digital Inputs DIN and DINU................................................................................................................. 8-14
Digital Output DOUT1, Resistive and Inductive Loads ........................................................................... 8-15
Universal Analog Input AINU1, Thermocouple Input............................................................................. 8-16
Reference Junction Locations and Connections....................................................................................... 8-17
Universal Analog Input AINU1; 2, 3, and 4-Wire RTD Inputs................................................................ 8-17
Universal Analog Input AINU1, Ohms Input.......................................................................................... 8-18
Universal Analog Input AINU1, Slidewire Input..................................................................................... 8-18
Universal Relay Outputs ROUT1 and 2, Resistive Load .......................................................................... 8-18
LIL Network Wiring............................................................................................................................... 8-19
LonWorks Network Wiring .................................................................................................................... 8-20
Modbus Communications, Personal Computer to Moore 353 or Moore 354 ............................................ 8-21
Moore 354N to Model 363 VIEWPAC Analog Input Wiring .................................................................. 8-22
Controller Power Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 8-22
Daisy Chained Power Wiring.................................................................................................................. 8-23
Controller to Workstation and Faceplate Display Cabling ....................................................................... 8-24
Cabling for Configuration and Application Development........................................................................ 8-25
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
Moore 354N Exploded View................................................................................................................... 11-5
MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W8......................................................................................... 11-6
MPU Controller Board with RTC Jumper W7......................................................................................... 11-7
I/O Expander Board.............................................................................................................................. 11-15
Accessory Board Installation and Replacement ..................................................................................... 11-16
LIL Network Board............................................................................................................................... 11-18
LonWorks Board .................................................................................................................................. 11-18
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup Board ..................................................................................... 11-18
13-1 Moore 354N Block Diagram................................................................................................................... 13-1
May 2001
vii
Contents
UM354N-1
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE AND TITLE
PAGE
1.1
Contact Information.................................................................................................................................. 1-7
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Security Level vs. Accessible Operations................................................................................................... 3-4
Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters .......................................................................................................... 3-6
Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Revisions.............................................. 3-6
Input Types............................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Calibration Input Values......................................................................................................................... 3-19
Sen Min/Max & Min/Max Scale Parameters........................................................................................... 3-19
8.1
8.2
Rear Terminal Assignments...................................................................................................................... 6-8
Factory Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 6-26
9.1
9.2
Autotune Errors........................................................................................................................................ 9-6
Autotune Warnings................................................................................................................................... 9-6
11.1 RTC/CB and RCB Boards, Off-Line Error Codes.................................................................................... 11-9
11.2 On-Line Error and Status Codes ........................................................................................................... 11-10
14.1 Moore 354N Model Designation ............................................................................................................. 12-2
Changes for Revision 2, May 2001
Significant changes for Rev 2 are indicated by change bars in the page margins. Some of these changes are listed
below. The User’s Manual has been reorganized to move the FCO and Network Communications appendices into
the body of the manual, as in the Procidia i|pac User’s Manual. The Function Block section is now followed by the
FCO section and the Network Communications section is now followed by the Data Mapping section (previously
Appendix A Network Communications).
SECTION
CHANGE
Cover
Banner revised to carry the Siemens Energy & Automation name.
Contents
The User’s Manual has been reorganized. Preface section added to show
conventions and symbols and state other important information.
1.0 Introduction
Section descriptions have been updated to reflect the reorganization of the
manual. The Conventions and Usage Notes have been moved to the Preface.
Product Support and Equipment Delivery and Handling sections updated.
International Standard Organization Symbols section deleted and equivalent
information added to Preface.
2.0 Configuration Overview
Function blocks forV2.2 and V2.4 added. Configuration Roadmap updated.
3.0 Function Blocks
Function blocks forV2.2 and V2.4 added. Corrections and additions made to
other function block descriptions.
4.0 Factory Configured Options
This section was Appendix A. Corrections made to function block parameters.
5.0 LonWorks Communication
This section was titled Remote I/O Communications.
6.0 Network Communications
Updated.
7.0 Data Mapping
This section was Appendix A Network Communications. Updated.
11.0 Maintenance
Error messages updated and on-line error information updated. Display
Assembly bezel replacement details added.
viii
May 2001
UM354N-1
Contents
SECTION
CHANGE
14.0 Model Designation and
Specifications
Equipment label drawings added. Model Designation table updated.
15.0 Abbreviations and
Acronyms
This section was Appendix C Abbreviations and Acronyms.
Warranty
Updated to reflect Siemens Energy and Automation ownership.
Appendices A, B, and C
These appendices have been moved into the body of the manual, as described
above.
Parts List
Discontinued as a separate section and publication. Service parts are now
listed in the Model Designation and Specifications section, Service Parts Kits.
Exploded views of the controller appear in Sections 1 and 11.
Procidia, i|pac, i|config, i|station, i|ware PC, APACS+, PAC 353, 352Plus, VIEWPAC, and XTC are trademarks of Siemens Energy & Automation,
Inc. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of information
included in this document. The information herein is subject to change without notice.
Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are considered sound
practice. Neither Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. nor these agencies are responsible for repairs made by the user
n
May 2001
ix
Contents
UM354N-1
PREFACE
Conventions and Symbols
The following symbols may be used in this manual and may appear on the equipment. The reader should become
familiar with the symbols and their meaning. Symbols are provided to quickly alert the reader to safety related
situations, issues, and text.
Symbol
DANGER
Meaning
Indicates an immediate hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Important
Note
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
Indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable
result or state.
Identifies an action that should be taken to avoid an undesirable result or state.
Identifies additional information that should be read.
Electrical shock hazard. The included Warning text states that the danger of
electrical shock is present.
Electrical shock hazard. Indicated that the danger of electrical shock is present.
Explosion hazard. Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists.
Electrostatic discharge. The presence of this symbol indicates that electrostatic
discharge can damage the electronic assembly.
Conventions and Usage Notes:
•
In this User’s Manual, a Moore 354N can be referred to using the term Moore 354N, Model 354N, or simply
354N. The terms controller and station are also used to prevent repetition.
•
Several chapters of this manual are also used in manuals for sister controllers and may contain references to
those controllers.
•
This manual describes the functionality provided by the current MPU Controller board firmware version.
Where necessary a firmware version is identified by a phrase such as “in version x.x and higher” or simply
4.”
x
May 2001
UM354N-1
Contents
•
Part numbers are for items ordered from the Process Industries Division of Siemens Energy & Automation,
except as noted.
•
Date format is Month-Day-Year, except as noted.
•
Time format is 12 hour (a.m./p.m.), except as noted.
Qualified Persons
The described equipment should be installed, configured, operated, and serviced only by qualified persons
thoroughly familiar with this publication. A copy of this publication is shipped with the equipment. The current
version, in Portable Document Format (PDF), is available at www.sea.siemens.com/ia/.
For the purpose of this publication and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction, and operation of the equipment, and the involved hazardous. In addition, he or she has
the following qualifications:
•
Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance
with established safety practices.
•
Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves, hard hat, safety glasses or
face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety practices.
•
Is trained in rendering first aid.
Scope
This publication does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be
desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the
matter should be referred to one of the support groups listed in the Product Support section of this manual.
The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or
relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract
between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements continued herein do not create new warranties
or modify the existing warranty.
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
This equipment contains hazardous voltages, and it has been certified for use in the hazardous locations specified
on the product nameplate and in the Model Designation and Specifications section. Death, serious personal injury,
or property damage can result if safety instructions are not followed. Only qualified personnel should work on or
around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warning, safety notices, and maintenance
procedures contained herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon proper
handling, installation, operation, and maintenance.
The perfect and safe operation of the equipment is conditional upon proper transport, proper storage, installation
and assembly, as well as, on careful operation and commissioning.
The equipment may be used only for the purposes specified in this publication.
May 2001
xi
Contents
UM354N-1
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge can damage or cause the failure of semiconductor devices such as integrated
circuits and transistors. The symbol at right may appear on a circuit board or other electronic assembly
to indicate that special handling precautions are needed.
•
A properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever an electronics module or circuit board is
handled or touched. A service kit with a wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available from Siemens
(PN15545-110). Equivalent kits are available from both mail order and local electronic supply companies.
•
Electronic assemblies must be stored in anti-static protective bags when not installed in equipment.
n
xii
May 2001
UM354N-1
Introduction
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This User’s Manual contains configuration, installation and service information for the Moore 354N Universal
Loop Controller. It is divided into fifteen sections.
•
Section 1, Introduction, has general information about the organization of this manual, the controller, product
support, and the contents of a typical shipment.
•
Section 2, Configuration Overview, contains a list of the functions blocks available for use in configuring the
controller and a procedure for configuration. Function block availability depends on controller model and
MPU Controller board firmware version.
•
Section 3, Function Blocks, contains a detailed description of each function block.
•
Section 4, Factory Configured Options, provides a graphical presentation of the function blocks used in FCOs
and a listing of changes made to default function block parameters.
•
Section 5, LonWorks Communications, provides an overview of LonWorks® communication.
•
Section 6, Network Communications, furnishes overviews of Modbus, LIL, and Ethernet communication data.
•
Section 7, Data Mapping, contains network data details for Modbus, Local Instrument Link (LIL), and
Ethernet.
•
Section 8, Installation, contains drawings and steps detailing mechanical and electrical installation. Electrical
connections to the controller are identified and numerous wiring diagrams are included.
•
Section 9, Local Faceplate Operation, describes and illustrates the Display Assembly’s operator controls and
displays. Use of these for on-line operation, for configurations and for autotuning is described.
•
Section 10, Controller and System Test, has procedures for testing the controller and the installation.
•
Section 11, Maintenance, lists the tools and test equipment to service a controller. It also has preventive
maintenance and servicing procedures, including error codes. Assembly replacement steps are included as are
detailed jumper selection criteria and jumper setting steps. Refer to this section when adding an assembly to an
on-site controller.
•
Section 12, Calibration, provides step-by-step procedures for calibration of analog input and output circuits.
•
Section 13, Circuit Description, furnishes a block diagram level description of the controller’s circuits.
•
Section 14, Model Designation and Specifications, shows controller model numbers; a list of accessories;
mechanical, electrical, and environmental specifications; and a list of current agency approvals.
•
Section 15, Abbreviations and Acronyms, is a convenient reference for new users that explains many
abbreviations and acronyms appearing in this manual.
1.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The Moore 354N offers the control system designer the ultimate in flexibility and capability for the implementation
of continuous solutions and batch solutions. An exploded view of the controller appears in Figure 1-1.
At the heart of the controller is a powerful MPU Controller board that uses the latest in microprocessor technology.
It includes on-board I/O and reusable function blocks, and it is capable of solving a vast array of control
implementations including single loop, cascade, and dual loop.
Modbus communication is standard and a port (RS485, half-duplex) at the rear terminals provides for network
connection of up to 32 controllers (e.g. Models 352P, 353, 354, 354N, and Procidia™ i|pac™) to an operator
workstation, Human/Machine Interface (HMI), or DCS, enabling integration of controllers into a plant-wide
system. A popular HMI is the Procidia i|station™ running i|ware PC™ operator interface software. A DB9
communication port (RS232) on the underside of the controller is available for configuration and/or debugging
when using i|config™, the optional PC-based Graphical Configuration Utility.
May 2001
1-1
Introduction
UM354N-1
An optional I/O Expander Board can be added to the base controller. It includes direct thermocouple, RTD, and
frequency inputs and additional I/O for direct process measurement of temperature and frequency variables,
improving accuracy and control.
When even more I/O is needed for multiple-loop applications, advanced control, or batch sequencing, a remote I/O
option board that uses the popular LonWorks protocol can be installed. This LonWorks board provides
connectivity via a high-speed digital fieldbus to a large selection of standard I/O products: analog inputs and
outputs and digital inputs and outputs using relay or solid state technology.
Although the controller can be connected to and operated entirely from a central operator workstation, such as
i|station, a controller faceplate is included. This local operator interface is for applications where loops need
individual attention during startup, troubleshooting, maintenance, or emergency conditions. The convenient
faceplate layout and sophisticated software allow process and configuration changes to be made quickly and easily.
The controller can be completely configured from the operator faceplate or, as mentioned above, configured
remotely using i|config™, the optional PC-based Graphical Configuration Utility. An optional Real Time
Clock/Configuration Backup board (RTC/CB) is available to quickly transfer a configuration from one controller to
another when downloading a configuration over a network is not available. The RTC/CB also provides a real time
clock function.
Network communication options are listed in the following table.
Protocol (Select One)
Modbus
Local Instrument Link
Available
Standard
Optional
Connection
Rear Terminals, NCA and NCB
Rear Terminals, NCA and NCB
Option Board Needed
None
LIL Communication
Modbus communication is standard. An optional Local Instrument Link (LIL) network board is available in place
of the Modbus communication to provide higher speed networking and peer-to-peer communication between
controllers. This provides connectivity with an array of network-enabled products, including those listed below.
Current Controller Models
Procidia i|pac Internet Control System
Moore 352P Single-Loop Digital Controller
Moore 354/354N Universal Controllers
Previous Controller Models
Model 352 Single-Loop Digital Controller
Model 351 Triple-Loop Digital Controller
Model 382 Logic and Sequence Controller
Regardless of the selected communication option, the RS232 port on the underside of the controller will
communicate using Modbus. Controller hardware architecture is designed to accommodate other emerging fieldbus
technologies. This includes field communications that require lower power for intrinsic safety and higher speed for
interplant networking.
For small retrofit applications, the Moore 354N with operator faceplate is a replacement for a simple stand-alone
single-loop controller. It is easily upgraded with additional I/O and communication options for advanced control
strategies and plant networking.
1-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Introduction
Controller Power
Input Fuse
LIL Network Board
H
N
GND
LonWorks Board
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup or
Removable Configuration Board
Future Use
Controller Mounting Screw
F1
Controller Mounting Tray
3
I/O Expander Board
MPU Board, Component Side,
Upper Left Corner
MPU Controller Board
Display Cable to
Faceplate Display
AG00204b
Controller Cover
Model 354N_R,
Display Cable to
Remote Mounted
Faceplate Display
Model 354N_D,
Faceplate
Display
Nameplate Label
and Other Product
Labels
Modbus Display Cable
to HMI Operator Interface
FIGURE 1-1 Moore 354N, Exploded View
Often in this publication, reference is made to the labels on the controller to ensure that the controller being
installed has the correct power input, I/O, communication options, and approvals. This is particularly important
when non-incendive requirements are present or a critical process is involved where a custom configuration or
calibration has been created. Label locations are shown in Figure 1-1 and typical labels are shown in Section 14
Model Designation and Specifications.
1.2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
Controller software is built on proven function block designs from previous LIL products and from Siemens
APACS® products that support the IEC1131 standard. In many cases, the controller has been enhanced with
features only now possible with state of the art technology.
Function blocks are selected for use within a LOOP. Multiple loops can be configured, and each loop can be
associated with an operator faceplate. Certain blocks are used once within each loop (e.g. controller, setpoint,
auto/manual), others can be used as many times as needed. Some notable features include Auto Tuning within the
PID function blocks, an expandable Sequencer that allows configuration of up to 250 steps, and up to 256 discrete
inputs and outputs. In addition, the Graphical Configuration Utility can be used to design the logic in a ladder
diagram. Combining these features with continuous control loops within the same controller offers a wellintegrated solution for small batch operations.
Several function blocks are available at the station level for configuration of STATION level parameters, such as
the station address and station tag name. Function blocks include the CLOCK block (when the RTC/CB option
board has been included and the controller contains firmware V2.4 or higher). All other function blocks are used
for configuration within an individual LOOP. Control implementations are configured in the Moore 354N by first
creating a loop, then entering a unique loop tag name and selecting function blocks for use within that loop. A
number of loops can be configured in the controller and a number of function block types are available as described
in the sections that follow.
May 2001
1-3
Introduction
UM354N-1
1.2.1 LOOP Function Block Types
Local I/O Function Blocks are provided on both the MPU Controller Board
and the I/O Expander Board. These blocks can be used in any LOOP, but as
fixed resources are expendable. When used within a loop, the unique block
name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g. TC2053.AIN1 for Analog Input 1 used in
loop TC2053).
AIN_
AIN_+
ANALOG INPUT
EXTRACTOR
AIN_c
O1
Output 1
QS
Quality Status
Fixed Loop Function Blocks can be selected for use within each configured LOOP and include those blocks which
define the major functions of a loop. The operator display function block (e.g.
ODC Operator Display for Controllers) defines the loop type, the function of
P
Process
O1
Output
the local faceplate as well as the processing of commands coming from a Setpoint
S
PID
remote workstation. A single controller function block can be selected from Feedback F CONTROLLER AE Absolute Error
A
Auto
one of five available choices (ID, ON_OFF, PD, PIDAG, & PID) within each
AT Warning
AW
loop.
When used within a loop the unique block name becomes Initialize I
<loop>.<block> (e.g. TC2053.PID for the PID controller used in loop
TC2053).
PID
Arithmetic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks
and can be used as many times as needed in each loop. Each use of a block
is automatically assigned a unique name (i.e. MATH01, MATH02) within
each loop so that the unique block name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g.
TC2053.MATH01).
Logic Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function blocks and
can be used as many times as needed in each loop. Each use of a block is
automatically assigned a unique name (i.e. AND01, AND02) within each
loop so that the unique block name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g.
TC2053.AND01).
MTH_
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
MATH
O1
Output 1
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV
AND_
General Purpose Function Blocks are also designated as LOOP function
blocks and include blocks that do not fall into the arithmetic or logic
categories. These can be used as many times as needed and each use will
automatically be assigned a unique name (e.g. HLD01, HLD02) within each
loop so that the unique block name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g.
TC2053.HLD01).
ESN = 000
ESN = 000
AND
HLD_
O1
Output 1
ESN = 000
O1
HOLD
Output 1
Remote I/O Bus Function Blocks can be used as needed in each LOOP to provide a method for sending and
receiving both analog and discrete data to and from remote devices over the
remote I/O digital bus. Each use will automatically be assigned a unique
ANALOG INPUT
Output 1
O1
name (e.g. AIP01, AOP01) within the station so that the unique block name
LEV_PERCENT
Quality Status
becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g. TC2053.AIP01 for Analog Input-lev_Percent
QS
used in loop TC2053). The second AIP block used within the station will be
assigned AIP02 even if in a different loop so that the remote I/O blocks have
unique names within the station. This will enable unique names for station variables on the LON network.
LONWorks
Network
AIP
nviAIPnn1
nv * SNVT_lev_percent
LIL Global Function Blocks are used as needed within a LOOP when the LIL option board is installed to enable
global data communication over the LIL. They will automatically be
AIL_
assigned a unique name (e.g. AIL01, DIL01) within each loop when it is
Output O1
O1
ANALOG INPUT - LIL
configured so that the unique block name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g.
Output QS
QS
TC2053.AIL01). Input and output data blocks are available as needed and
will be assigned unique names as used (e.g. AIL01, AIL02 for Analog InputLIL blocks).
LIL
GLOBAL
DATA
1-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Ethernet Function Blocks (V2.4) are used as needed within a LOOP when
the Ethernet option board is installed They will automatically be assigned a
unique name (e.g. AIE01, DIE01) within each loop when it is configured so
that the unique block name becomes <loop>.<block> (e.g. TC2053.AIE01).
Available in Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available in
Moore 352P and 354/354N controllers.
Introduction
AIE_
OR
Output OR
O1
Output O1
QS
Output QS
ANALOG INPUT
ETHERNET
1.2.2 Power Up Initialization
The controller will retain, in the station NVRAM, calculated block values (e.g. outputs, elapsed time, last
input/output logic states), including the time since power was lost. Three power up modes (hot, warm, and cold)
are utilized in the controller that affect the initialization of function blocks. These modes are configured by two
power up timers (warm and cold), included in STATION parameters. The station will initialize a hot start when
power up occurs prior to the expiration of the warm timer. A cold start will occur when power up occurs after the
expiration of the cold timer and a warm start will take place when the station powers up after the expiration of the
warm timer but prior to the expiration of the cold timer.
Hot Start1 - All function block execution continues from the last state prior to power fail.
Warm Start1 - Function blocks that have a power up in a last state feature, either by design or by configuration
selection, will power up as defined in the individual block descriptions. All other function blocks will initialize at
cold start conditions.
Cold Start1 - All function block outputs will initialize at 0 unless otherwise stated in individual block descriptions.
1.2.3 Configuration
The second method is to use the Graphical Configuration program. A
configuration can be downloaded to the controller either via the DB9 port on
the controller housing or over a network (either Modbus or LIL). During a
download, all outputs will be held and the controller will retain all the
intermediate calculations of all the blocks it had been running prior to the
download. After the download, all function block parameters with the same tag
name as those held will be used to initialize the downloaded function block
parameters, thus providing a bumpless download under these conditions. If a
loop tag name is changed, the tag names of all function blocks within that loop
will change and will, therefore, require re-initialization of all of these blocks.
However, the loop tag can be changed from the local faceplate without causing
re-initialization, providing a bumpless tag change.
X03145S0
The Moore 354N can be configured either locally or remotely. First, the local faceplate includes buttons located
behind a flip-down door for complete configuration including the addition/deletion of loops and function blocks
and the editing of function block parameters. Section 2 Configuration Overview includes a road map for stepping
through configuration. Certain block parameters (e.g. gains, constants) can be edited while on-line but design
changes (e.g. block interconnections, block additions) will put the station in “configuration hold” which will hold
outputs at the current value until the Exit button is pressed. This will enable bumpless changes to be made while
on-line.
Optional PC-Based
Graphical Configuration Software
1.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT
Product support can be obtained from a customer service center (i.e. Technical Support Group in North America or
a Technical Information Center (TIC) in Asia or Europe). Each region has a customer service center that provides
direct telephone support on technical issues related to the functionality, application, and integration of all products
supplied by the Process Industries Division of Siemens Energy & Automation. Regional contact information is
1
Set the Real Time Clock Jumper (W7 or W8) on the MPU Controller board. Refer to Section 11 Maintenance for details.
May 2001
1-5
Introduction
UM354N-1
provided below. Your regional Technical Support Group or TIC is the first place to call when seeking product
support information. When calling, it is helpful to have the following information ready:
•
Caller ID number, or name and company name - When someone calls for support for the first time, a personal
caller number is assigned. Having the number available when calling for support will allow the representative
taking the call to use the central customer database to quickly identify the caller’s location and past support
needs.
•
Product part number or model number and version
•
If there is a problem with product operation:
- Whether or not the problem is intermittent
- The steps performed before the problem occurred
- Any status message, error messages, or LED indications displayed
- Installation environment
Customers that have a service agreement (ServiceSuite or Field Service Agreement) are granted access to the
secure area of the Siemens Internet site. This area contains a variety of product support information. When logging
on, you will be prompted to enter your username and password. All customers have access to the public portion of
the site.
TABLE 1.1 Contact Information
NORTH AMERICA
Telephone
Fax
E-mail
Hours of Operation
Public Internet Site
Repair Service
ASIA
Telephone
Fax
E-mail
Hours of Operation
Public Internet Site
Repair Service
EUROPE
Telephone
Fax
E-mail
Hours of Operation
Public Internet Site
Repair Service
1-6
+1 215 646 7400, extension 4993
+1 215 283 6358
[email protected]
8 a.m. to 6 p.m. eastern time
Monday – Friday (except holidays)
www.sea.siemens.com/ia/
+1 215 646 7400 extension 4993
+011 65 299 6051
+011 65 299 6053
[email protected]
9 a.m. to 6 p.m. Singapore time
Monday – Friday (except holidays)
www.sea.siemens.com/ia/
+011 65 299 6051
+44 (0) 1935 470172
+44 (0) 1935 470137
[email protected]
8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. GMT/BST
Monday – Friday (except holidays)
www.sea.siemens.com/ia/
+44 (0) 1935 470172
May 2001
UM354N-1
Introduction
1.4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Factory Shipment
Prior to shipment, a controller is fully tested and inspected to ensure proper operation. It is then packaged for
shipment. Most accessories are shipped separately.
Real Time Clock Jumper - As shipped, the MPU Controller board Real Time Clock Jumper (W7 or W8) is set to
maximize battery life. If the jumper is to be set to enable Hot/Warm Start, or to confirm that the jumper is properly
set, refer to Section 11 Maintenance.
1.4.2 Receipt of Shipment
Inspect each carton at the time of delivery for possible external damage. Any visible damage should be
immediately recorded on the carrier’s copy of the delivery slip.
Carefully unpack each carton and check the contents against the enclosed packing list. Inspect each item for any
hidden damage that may or may not have been accompanied by exterior carton damage.
If it is found that some items have been damaged or are missing, notify Siemens immediately and provide full
details. In addition, damages must be reported to the carrier with a request for their on-site inspection of the
damaged item and its shipping carton.
1.4.3 Storage
If a controller is to be stored for a period prior to installation, review the environmental specifications in Section 14
Model Designation and Specifications.
Refer to Section 11.6 Assembly Replacement to set the MPU Controller board Real Time Clock Jumper (W7 or
W8) to the storage position to maximize battery life.
1.4.4 Typical Shipment Contents
The items listed below are those typically included in a shipment and are subject to change.
1.
Moore 354N Universal Loop Controller, model number per order, qty. 1
2.
Power Input and Range Resistor Kit, PN 16354-30, qty. 1
DESCRIPTION
Resistor, 250Ω, 0.1%, 3W, WW
Sleeving
Crimp-On Connector
Kit Installation Instruction
3.
QUANTITY
3
3
6
1
I/O Expander Board Kits
PN17354-40 I/O Expander Board Kit - The I/O Expander Board is factory installed when a Moore 354N with
Expansion Board option 1 is ordered.
•
For field installation of this kit, see the supplied Kit Installation Instruction (15900-390).
DESCRIPTION
I/O Expander Board - Do not remove Board from static shielding
bag until it is to be installed.
Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit, see below
May 2001
QUANTITY
1
1
1-7
Introduction
UM354N-1
PN16353-49 Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit - This kit is supplied with the above I/O Expander
Board Kit and with a factory shipped Moore 354N with Expansion Board option 1.
DESCRIPTION
4-20 mA to 1-5V Range Resistor, 250Ω, 0.1%, 3W, WW
4-20 mA to 15-75 mV Range Resistor, 3.75Ω, 0.1%, 3W, WW
Sleeving
Crimp-On Connector
TC Reference Junction, 100Ω
Kit Installation Instruction
QUANTITY
1
2
5
6
2
1
5.
UM354N-1, Moore 354N User’s Manual (this manual), qty. 1
6.
Additional items as required by your order. Refer to the packing list accompanying a shipment.
n
1-8
May 2001
UM354N-1
Configuration Overview
2.0 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW
Configuration enables a user to select function blocks, stored in the controller, from an available list and enter
appropriate block parameters to implement a specific control strategy. Although configuration affects the entire
station, the controller partitions related control implementations into LOOPS. A maximum of 99 loops can be
configured and 25 can have operator displays that are mapped to network communications2.
Each LOOP can contain the function blocks listed in the following paragraphs. Signals can be connected between
function blocks within the LOOP as well as between loops. Also, there are several STATION function blocks that
are fixed and available in the STATION menu for setting station related values.
Section 3 fully describes all available function blocks. For tuning guidelines refer to Section 9.3 Autotune
Procedure or request AM-35 Digital Controller Tuning.
NOTE
This User’s Manual includes the functionality provided by MPU Controller Board
firmware Versions 1.3 and 2.0 through 2.40. These enhancements appear mainly in
Sections 2 and 3. They are identified by the phrase “in version 1.3 and higher” or simply
V2.4” in text.
2.1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS
Function blocks that are permanent and accessible at the STATION menu level:
FCO LIB .......... Factory Configured Options Library
STATN ............. Station Parameters
SECUR ............. Security
CLOCK ............ real time CLOCK (requires firmware V2.2 or higher and RTC/CB board
ETHERNET..... Ethernet Communications (not available on Moore 352P or 354N controllers)
2.2 STATION HARDWARE I/O BLOCKS
Function blocks that are available during configuration depend on the hardware installed in the controller. These
blocks can be selected within a LOOP but as fixed resources, once selected, are no longer available. The left
column shows the minimum and maximum quantities of each block and the right column shows the quantity for
each circuit board.3
AIN1-4 ............ Analog Input .................................MPU Controller Board (3), I/O Expander Board (1)
AINU1-2 ........... Analog Input, Universal ................I/O Expander Board (2)
AOUT1-3 .......... Analog Output ..............................MPU Controller Board (2), I/O Expander Board (1)
DIN1-4 ............. Digital Input..................................MPU Controller Board (3), I/O Expander Board (1)
DINU1-2 ........... Digital Input, Universal.................I/O Expander Board (2)
DOUT1-2 .......... Digital Output...............................MPU Controller Board (2)
ROUT1-2 .......... Relay Output.................................I/O Expander Board (2)
2.3 LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS
The following blocks are available as needed within each loop in the quantities indicated (the quantity is one if no
number is shown). Some blocks (e.g. A/M, BIAS) can be used only once within each LOOP. Others (e.g. ADD)
are reusable within a LOOP and can be used up to the maximum number indicated. Each time a reusable block is
selected within a LOOP, a new instance number will automatically be assigned (i.e. ADD01, ADD02). Each
LOOP can have one operator display block (i.e. ODC or ODS). The display block defines how the loop will be
2
3
Subject to available memory in the controller.
Model 352Plus only: Although these blocks can be selected in configuration, some may not have physical connections to the rear terminals
depending upon the positioning of the Option 3 I/O Jumper.
May 2001
2-1
Configuration Overview
UM354N-1
displayed on the local faceplate when that loop is selected and also how loop data will be mapped on the Modbus or
LIL network interface. Each LOOP can have one controller function block (i.e. ID, ONOFF, PD, PID, or PIDAG).
A/M................... Auto/Manual
ACS01-99.......... ARCCosine (V1.3)
ADD01-99 ......... Addition
AG3 .................. AGA3 (V1.3)
AG7 .................. AGA7 (V1.3)
AG8 .................. AGA8 (V1.3)
ALARM............ Alarm
AND01-99 ......... AND Logic
ASN01-99.......... Arcsine (V1.3)
ATN01-99 ......... Arctangent (V1.3)
ATD01-99 ......... Analog Trend Display (V1.3)
BATOT............. Batch Totalizer
BATSW ............ Batch Switch
BIAS ................. Bias
CHR01-99......... Characterizer
CMP01-99......... Comparator
COS01-99 ......... Cosine (V1.3)
DAM01-99 ........ Deviation Amplifier
DIV01-99 .......... Division
DNC01-99 ......... Divide by N Counter
DTM01-99 ........ Dead Time Table
DYT01-99 ......... Delay Timer
E/I ..................... External/Internal Transfer
ESL................... Events Sequence Logger (V1.3)
EXP01-99.......... Natural Exponentiation (V1.3)
EXT01-99 ......... Exponentiation (V1.3)
FTG01-99 ......... Falling Edge Trigger
GB01-99............ Gain & Bias
HLD01-99......... Hold
ID...................... ID Controller
LL01-99 ............ Lead/Lag
LMT01-99 ........ Limit
LN_01-99 .......... Natural Logarithm (V1.3)
LOG01-99......... Logarithm Base 10 (V1.3)
MTH01-99 ........ Math
MUL01-99 ........ Multiplication
NND01-99 ......... NAND Logic
NOR01-99......... NOR Logic
NOT01-99......... NOT Logic
ODC ..................Operator Display for Controllers
ODS...................Operator Display for Sequencers
ODA (V2.2) .......Op Disp for Analog Ind. & Alarm
ODD (V2.2) .......Op Disp for Discr Ind & Control
ODP (V2.2)........Operator Display for Pushbuttons
ONOFF .............ON OFF Controller
OR01-99 ............OR Logic
ORSL ................Override Selector
OST01-99 ..........One Shot Timer
PB1SW..............PB1 Switch
PB2SW..............PB2 Switch
PB3SW..............PB3 Switch
PCOM ...............Phase Communication (V1.3)
PD......................PD Controller
PID ....................PID Controller
PIDAG ..............PIDAG Controller
PRSEQ ..............Program Sequencer
QHD01-99.........Quickset Hold
RATIO ..............Ratio
RCT01-99..........Repeat Cycle Timer
RLM01-99.........Rate Limiter
ROT01-99 .........Retentive On Timer
RSF01-99...........RS Flip-Flop
RTG01-99 .........Rising Edge Trigger
RTT01-99..........Real Time clock Trip (V2.0)
SCL01-99 ..........Scaler
SEL01-99...........Signal Selector
SETPT...............Setpoint
SIN01-99 ...........Sine (V1.3)
SPLIM...............Setpoint Limit
SRF01-99...........SR Flip-Flop
SRT01-99 ..........Square Root
SUB01-99 ..........Subtraction
TAN01-99..........Tangent (V1.3)
TH01-99 ............Track & Hold
TOT01-99..........TOTalizer (V2.3)
TSW01-99 .........Transfer Switch
XOR01-99 .........Exclusive OR Logic
2.4 LIL GLOBAL DATA I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS
These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within each loop when the optional LIL Network
board is installed. The total number of global function blocks will be limited by the number of global channels
available. A controller has 256 channels. Each global data block occupies one global channel. In addition, each
configured Control LOOP occupies 5 channels, each configured Sequencer LOOP 6 channels, and the Station itself
the first 7 channels. See Section 6 for more information on network communications.
AIL01-99 .......... Analog Input_LIL
AOL01-99......... Analog Output_LIL
DIL01-99 ......... Discrete Input_LIL
DOL01-99......... Discrete Output_LIL
2-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Configuration Overview
2.5 ETHERNET DATA I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS
These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within a controller when the optional Ethernet
Network board is installed. These blocks can be selected for use within individual loops but block names are
unique station wide.
AIE01-32 .......... Analog Input - Ethernet (V2.4)
AOE01-32......... Analog Output - Ethernet (V2.4)
CIE01-32 .......... Coil Input - Ethernet (V2.4)
DIE01-32 .......... Discrete Input - Ethernet (V2.4)
DOE01-32......... Digital Output - Ethernet (V2.4)
Requires Procidia i|pac or Model 353
controller, firmware 2.4, and Ethernet board;
Ethernet is not available on Moore 352P or
354N controllers.
2.6 LonWorks REMOTE I/O FUNCTION BLOCKS
These function blocks are available in the quantities indicated within a controller when the optional LonWorks
Remote I/O board is installed. LonWorks is available for use with Models 352P, 353 and 354 controllers. These
blocks can be selected within individual loops, but block names will be unique station wide. This allows
LonWorks network managers that identify variables using the block name within an individual node to be unique.
For example, if LOOP01 uses AIP01 and AIP02 and an AIP block is selected in LOOP02 the name will be AIP03.
Detailed information on the use of LonWorks can be found in Section 5. Model 352P only: Select LonWorks by
setting the Option 3 I/O Jumper.
AIP01-25........... Analog Input lev_Percent
AOP01-25 ......... Analog Output lev_Percent
DID1-6 .............. Digital Input lev_Discrete, 16 Channels
DIS1-6............... Digital Input_State (V1.3)
DOD1-6............. Digital Output lev_Discrete, 16 Channels
DOS1-6 ............. Digital Output_State (V1.3)
2.7 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
Each controller must be configured to perform the desired control strategy. The arrangement of functions and the
numerical data required for a particular control circuit are referred to as the controller configuration. Local and
remote configurations are accommodated.
Local configuration involves the configuration pushbuttons and the pulser knob on the Display Assembly’s
faceplate. Section 9.2 Configuration Mode shows the faceplate and provides brief descriptions of control functions.
Remote configuration requires a personal computer running the i|config™ Graphical Configuration Utility and
either a configuration cable or a Modbus, LIL, or Ethernet network connection. The configuration can be created
at and downloaded from the personal computer. A network connection is made at the controller’s terminals. The
configuration cable plugs into the configuration port in the underside of a 352Plus or 353 Display Assembly or into
a 354N DB9 connector. The other end of this cable connects to a personal computer’s serial port or to a modem.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Explosion can cause death or serious injury.
In a potentially explosive atmosphere, remove power from the
equipment before connecting or disconnecting power, signal
or other circuits.
Comply with all pertinent regulations regarding installation in
a hazardous area.
May 2001
2-3
Configuration Overview
UM354N-1
A configuration is designed by first arranging the needed function blocks in a fashion similar to that of a PI & D
drawing. Parameter and calibration values are determined next and then entered on a Configuration
Documentation Form or into the Graphical Configuration software. The controller may then be configured locally
by entering the information on the form into the controller’s configuration memory or remotely by downloading
directly from the personal computer.
Nine common controller configurations have been stored in a built-in library that can be entered from the FCO LIB
function block at the STATION level. Simple changes can then be made to accommodate individual needs. As an
example, FCO101 Single Loop Controller includes the setpoint tracking feature but by simply disconnecting the
TC input to the SETPT function block, it becomes a fixed setpoint Single Loop Controller. These FCOs are fully
documented in Section 4.
FCO101 - Single Loop Controller w/ Tracking Setpoint
FCO102 - Single Loop Controller with Fixed Setpoint
FCO103 - External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint
FCO104 - External Set Controller with Non-Tracking Local Setpoint
FCO105 - Ratio Set Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits
FCO106 - Single Loop Controller w/Operator Setpoint Limits
FCO107 - Dual Loop Controller
FCO121 - Cascade Loop Controller
FCO122 - Cascade Loop Controller with Operator Setpoint Limits
Unless otherwise specified on the order, FCO101 is installed at the factory. Use the following procedure to change
the factory configured option. Refer to Figure 2-1 Configuration Road Map to move to, and then through, the
selected FCO and to enter or edit parameter values.
1.
Press the ENTER/EXIT CONF button. LOOP will appear on the alphanumeric display.
2.
Rotate the Pulser Knob until STATION appears on alphanumeric display.
3.
Press the STEP DOWN button to display FCO LIB.
4.
Press the STEP DOWN button to display FCO in the lower display.
5.
Press the STEP DOWN button until the desired FCO number appears in numeric display.
6.
Rotate the Pulser Knob to display the desired FCO number in the upper display.
7.
Press the STORE button to load the new FCO.
8.
Edit the FCO as needed. In addition to the material in this section, refer to:
•
Section 3 Function Blocks for details about configurable parameters
•
Section 4 Factory Configured Options for FCO diagrams and parameters
•
Sections 6 and 7 for Modbus, LIL, or Ethernet mapping
•
Section 9 Operation for operating controls and displays
Where an FCO is not suitable, a complete configuration can be designed to suit individual needs. Section 4 can be
used as a guide for documenting a user-created or used-edited configuration. i|config, a PC-based Graphical
Configuration Utility, can be used to design, document, and save configurations as well as download them to the
controller, through either the configuration port or using a Modbus, LIL, or Ethernet network connection.
The above steps are illustrated in Figure 2-1 Configuration Road Map. The map also provides a broad overview of
the configuration procedure.
•
Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode. Press the button again to exit configuration.
•
After entering the configuration mode, LOOP or STATION can be selected.
2-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Configuration Overview
•
At the STATION level, a factory configured option can be loaded, station parameters can be configured,
security passwords can be entered, the clock can be set, communication parameters can be configured, and
inputs and outputs can be calibrated.
•
Calibration can also be performed within individual loops containing the input or output function blocks used
in the LOOP.
•
At the LOOP level, new loops can be added, loops can be deleted, or an existing loop can be edited.
When a new loop is created, the controller will assign a default name (e.g. LOOP01). The loop name can be
changed to any valid 12-character ASCII value. It is suggested that loop names be limited to six characters so that
the complete tag name will appear in the alphanumeric display during normal operation.
A Loop can be edited by stepping down from the EDIT menu. If more than one loop has been configured, press
the STEP DOWN button and turn the Pulser Knob to step through the list of configured loops. From the selected
loop, stepping down will provide various options within the specific loop.
•
The current value of all configured block outputs can be viewed.
•
The current tag name of the loop and the ESN (Execution Sequence Number) can be changed. ESNs are
automatically assigned by the controller in the order of creation, either a loop or individual block. An ESN
should be changed when it is important that one loop be executed prior to another (e.g. cascade primary
executes prior to the cascade secondary).
•
Function blocks can be added to or deleted from the loop. Existing function blocks can be edited. Use the step
up and step down buttons to move between the function block, parameter, and value levels within the EDIT FB
menu.
If no configuration entries are made for about three minutes, the mode will time out and the controller will exit the
configuration mode. The STATN function block has a CONFG TO (Configuration Timeout) parameter to enable
or disable timeout.
Loading an Earlier Firmware Version
In rare instances, replacing the installed MPU Controller board firmware with an earlier version may be desired.
Before loading the earlier firmware, refer to the sections on configuration and load FCO 101 as the active
configuration. This will install a basic configuration and will reduce the number of error messages that appear
during the firmware loading process.
2.8 OPERATION DURING LOCAL ON-LINE CONFIGURATION
Changing a controller’s configuration parameters while the station is on-line can affect its operation and output
values. Configuration parameters are divided into four types: HARD, SOFT, READ, and CALIBRATION.
HARD - When a HARD parameter is STORED the controller will suspend execution of all function blocks and
will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed. A HARD parameter is identified with each ‘(H)’ notation in
a function block parameter listing in Section 3. When a loop or function block is added or deleted, the station
enters a HARD configuration mode.
SOFT - A SOFT function block parameter can be changed while the function blocks are executing. A SOFT
parameter is identified with each ‘(S)’ notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3. All QUICKSET
changes also fall into this category.
READ - These parameters are not changeable and therefore can be read while the station function blocks are
executing. A READ parameter is identified with each ‘(R)’ notation in a function block parameter listing in
Section 3. The configuration VIEW mode also falls into this category.
CALIBRATION - When entering the CONFIGURATION mode, the station will suspend execution of all function
blocks and will hold all outputs until the EXIT button is pressed. If an output block is being calibrated its output
May 2001
2-5
Configuration Overview
UM354N-1
will be adjusted during the calibration procedure. A CONFIGURATION parameter is identified with each ‘(C)’
notation in a function block parameter listing in Section 3. The calibration mode can be entered from the
individual block or from the CAL mode at the station level.
ENTER
EXIT
CONF
|
LOOP
X
<>
X
STATION
X
FCO LIB
X
FCO
X
~101
FCO
|
<>
STA TN
<>
X
TAG <+>
X
PAC 353
|
SECURITY <>
X
LEV1 COM <+>
X
~000000
|
STORE
STORE
STORE
CAL
<>
X
AIN1 <+>
X
CAL ZERO <+>
X
CAL
CAL ZERO
|
CLOCK
X
SET TIME
x
x
11:00
|
<>
ADD
X
~LOOP01
<>
DELETE
X
TC2053
|
|
STORE
STORE
4
STORE
176
|
STORE
i|pac and
Moore 353
controllers only
STORE
EDIT
ETHERNET
X
<+> IP ADRES <+>
<>
<+>
X
|
CONFIRM
|
STORE
TC2053
X
VIEW
X
325.80
PID.O1
<>
FC2367
<+>
<>
EDIT TAG
X
TC2053
<>
<+>
|
EDIT ESN
X
~008
LOOP ESN
|
STORE
STORE
<>
<>
EDIT FB
X
A/M <+>
X
RG PTR <+>
X
PID <+>
ADD FB
X
ADD01
<>
<+>
|
|
STORE
STORE
|
Key:
TC2053
325.80
Alphanumeric Display
DEL FB
X
A/M
STORE
<+>
|
CONFIRM
|
Numeric Display
STORE
~008
<>
Display with changeable value (turn Pulser knob)
Turn Pulser to select new parameter or value (move horizontally across map)
<+> Turn Pulser to select additional menu items
X
X03137S3
Configuration Pushbutton
Use Step Up or Step Down pushbutton (move vertically across map)
FIGURE 2-1 Configuration Road Map
n
2-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.0 FUNCTION BLOCKS
This section contains a detailed description of each function block (FB) available for configuration 4. Each function
block description is supplemented by: (1) a drawing of the block showing data inputs and outputs and control lines,
(2) a block parameter table. Most blocks are further described by a block diagram that shows the block’s circuitry
in a simplified or equivalent circuit form.
NOTE
This User’s Manual includes the additional functionality provided by MPU Controller
Board firmware Versions 1.3, and 2.0 through 2.40. These enhancements appear mainly
in Sections 2 and 3. They are identified by the phrase “in firmware 1.3 and higher” or
the two-digit firmware version (e.g. “V1.3” or "V2.4" in text.
Ethernet function blocks described in this section are available in Procidia i|pac and
Moore 353 controllers. They are not available in Moore 352P and 354/354N controllers.
Function blocks have three types of inputs/outputs: digital, analog, and special data structure.
1.
2.
Arrows with dark shading and white letters are digital (outputs are displayed as 0 and 1 in the VIEW mode
when using the local faceplate). Digital outputs are typically used to designate function block status, logical
outputs, and on/off function block outputs. Some examples are:
•
Function block status: E/I status (IS, ES, SI), A/M status (AS, NA, MS, ES, SS), and Quality Status (QS)
•
Logical Outputs: AND (01), OR (01), NOR (01), or NOT (01)
•
On/Off function blocks: One Shot Timer (01), Retentive On Timer (01), Rising Edge Trigger (01),
Alarms (A1, A2, A3, and A4), and Comparator (01)
Arrows with medium shading and black letters are analog. Internally they are REAL floating point numbers
and outputs of these types will be displayed in the VIEW mode when using the local faceplate with the decimal
point located to allow greatest resolution between 0.00000 and 999999 or -0.0000 and -99999. Numbers
outside this resolution will blink.
Analog outputs are typically output (01) for analog I/O blocks and math functions. Analog outputs may also be
specific to a particular function block such as the Analog Output (AO), Step Number (SN), Step Time (ST),
Remaining Time (RT), and Current Recipe (CR) outputs of the Program Sequencer.
3.
Arrows with medium shading and black letters but with a white tip are special data structures for range scaling
information and will not be displayed in the VIEW mode). Range scaling information is used when there is a
conversion of units within a function block, for example, the Alarm block scales the alarm limits into process
engineering units when the range pointer is configured to the process analog input block. If unconfigured the
units default to 0-100%. The output range (OR), typically used on analog output function blocks, includes
MIN and MAX SCALE, the DPP (Decimal Point Position), and the ENGUNITS (Engineering Units). The
analog output block is typically used for a 0-100% output to a valve where a minscale of 0 = 4 mA output and
a max scale of 100 = 20 mA output.
The output range is connected to the Range Pointer (input R) of functions blocks requiring scaling other than
the default 0-100. For example, an Analog input block could be scaled 0-5000 psig with output (01) connected
to the AOUT input (S) and the AIN (OR) connected to the AOUT input (R). The Analog output would then
output 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig and 20 mA at a maxscale of 5000 psig. In contrast, if AOUT input (R)
were left unconfigured the output would equal 4 mA at a minscale of 0 psig, 20 mA at a maxscale of 100 psig
and over ranged for any input over 100 psig.
4
The LonWorks function blocks used in Models 352P, 353, and 354/354N are described in this manual. The Ubus function blocks used in
ProcidiaTM (UAH, UAI, UAO, UDI, UDO, UEI, UER, UET, URI, USD, and UTI) are included in the firmware but are not described here since
they will not operate in Models 352P, 353, and 354/354N.
May 2001
3-1
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
Some users may prefer to use normalized 0-1 analog inputs for math calculations and scale outputs for display
only; in this case, the Scaler function block may be used to provide an output range (OR) for the ODC
(Operator display block).
Note how the range pointers are used in the following Factory Configured Options (FCOs). FCOs are
described in detail in the Factory Configured Options section.
•
FCO101 Single Loop Controller – The process output range AIN1 (OR) is connected to the range pointer
of the SETPT block, the PID block, the ALARM block and the process variable range of the ODC block.
As a result these blocks will be automatically rescaled when the minscale and the maxscale or the
engineering units of the Process is changed. For example, if AIN1 is scaled 0-5000, the 0-100% bargraph
on the display will represent 0-5000 when displaying the process. The A/M block, AOUT1 (Valve)
output, and the Valve input of the ODC block are scaled based on the output of the PID block.
•
FCO104 External-Set PID controller – The external setpoint is displayed as variable X in the ODC block.
Therefore, the ODC (RX) input uses the range output of the external setpoint AIN2 (OR) for scaling. The
0-100% bargraph will represent the range of AIN1 when displaying the process variable and the range of
AIN2 when displaying the X variable.
•
FCO105 Ratio Set Control – AIN1 and AIN2 are scaled 0-100% of flow. The ratio of these flows is
displayed on variable Y and the scaler function block is used to define the engineering units as a
dimensionless ratio CF/WF scaled from 0.50 –1.50.
Connections between blocks are allowed only with similar data types.
To help you quickly locate a function block:
•
In this section, function blocks are listed alphabetically by the block ID (e.g. AIN for Analog Input).
•
In Section 2, function blocks are listed by broad function (e.g. station hardware I/O).
3-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.1 STATION FUNCTION BLOCKS
Station function blocks include factory configured options (FCOs), security, and station parameters. Each is
described in the following subsections.
3.1.1 FCO LIB - Factory Configuration Library
The FCO LIB function block provides a selection of preconfigured applications. An FCO can be selected from
the library and “STORED”. This loads a complete
controller configuration, as defined by the FCO
documentation, and erases any previously stored
configuration. Station parameters and Calibration are
retained when a new FCO is loaded. This enables a user
to quickly configure the controller with an FCO without
having to re-calibrate or re-enter the Station parameter
values.
FCO LIBRARY
FCO 02
FCO 03
FCO 04
FCO 05
FCO 06
FCO 07
FCO 08
FCO 09
FCO 01
FCO LIB
FCO LIBRARY
F C O Factory Configured Option (H) ....... 0 - 999999
Upon stepping down to the FCO parameter, the last
FCO that was loaded in the controller will be displayed.
Turning the pulser knob will then display other FCOs that are available in the FCO library.
(00)
The configuration installed at the factory will be either FCO 101 or a custom configuration that was ordered and
defined by the user. FCO 101 is a basic single loop PID controller.
An FCO can be loaded at any time in the field and used as is or modified (edited) to meet individual requirements.
The FCO library file is not modified when the FCO selected for controller configuration is edited.
3.1.2 SECUR - Security
The SECUR function block enables a user to lock out
portions or all of the faceplate configuration functions.
Five levels of security are available; see Table 3.1.
Each level is factory set to 000000 (no security), and
can be changed by the user in the field to any number
up to 999999.
A security combination should be assigned to each
security level (1-highest, 5-lowest). A level that
remains at the default 000000 combination will have
no security for the involved function(s) regardless of
the security assigned to the other levels. For example,
assume that level 1 is assigned a security combination
but level 4 remains at 000000. If a controller
calibration is performed, the station will not prompt
the user for the security combination and anyone will
be able to store new calibration values.
SECURITY
SECUR
SECURITY
L
L
L
L
L
E
E
E
E
E
V
V
V
V
V
1
2
3
4
5
C
C
C
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
M
M
M
M
M
LEVel 1 COMbination
LEVel 2 COMbination
LEVel 3 COMbination
LEVel 4 COMbination
LEVel 5 COMbination
.... 000000-999999
.... 000000-999999
(S) .... 000000-999999
(S) .... 000000-999999
(S) .... 000000-999999
(S)
(S)
(000000)
(000000)
(000000)
(000000)
(000000)
If security is desired, it is recommended that all 5 levels of security be set with either the same value or different
values when different individuals are granted access to only certain functions.
The functions that can be accessed at the various security levels are listed in Table 3.1. The security combination
will be required when the user attempts to store a parameter or attempts to view a security combination. The
May 2001
3-3
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
faceplate alphanumeric will display “ENTR COM” and allow the user to enter and store the combination. A
combination is entered by selecting one digit at a time using the ß and à keys and setting the number for that
digit using the pulser. When all digits have been set, press STORE. If incorrect, the alphanumeric will display
“ACCESS/DENIED” and then return to the parameter level. Once a combination has been entered correctly,
access will be provided for all functions within that level until the user exits configuration. If a combination is lost,
contact Siemens technical support to obtain a method to enter configuration and change the security codes. Refer
to Section 1.3 for the contact information.
The PC-based Graphical Configuration Software may also have security options similar to the above. However,
there is no security in the download procedure itself. At the controller there are parameters in function block
STA_PARM that will lock out all downloads and all parameter writes from a PC.
TABLE 3.1 Security Level vs. Accessible Operations
FUNCTION
Station Function Block Edit
Loop/Function Block Add/Delete
Loop/Function Block Edit
Security Configuration
Calibration of Input/Outputs
Quick Faceplate Access*
Configuration of NEW FCO
Change CLOCK
LEVEL 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LEVEL 2
X
X
X
LEVEL 3
X
X
X
X
LEVEL 4
LEVEL 5
X
X
X
* Security does not apply, in firmware versions 1.30 and higher, to continuously adjustable quickset parameters
that include RATIO, BIAS, and QHLD.
3-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.1.3 STATN - Station Parameters
The STATN function block enables entry of station
identification and other station related information.
When the station is networked using Modbus or the
LIL option board the address is used by higher level
devices to obtain information from the station. LIL
addresses range from 1-32 or 1-64 when a Model 321
Expansion Satellite is used. Modbus can range from
1-250 but normally 1-32 is used to correspond to the
total number of devices that can be installed on a
single network.
Once the address has been assigned and higher level
devices have been configured to access information
from the station, changing the address can require
reconfiguration of the higher level device. There may
also be higher level devices that will query and assign
addressing information based on the station tag
name. In this case a tag name change will also
require reconfiguration of higher level devices.
Therefore, it is important not to change the station
identification without being aware of system
consequences.
STATION PARAMETERS
STATN
IDENTIFICATION TAG
TAG: UNIT NO. 3
ADDRESS: 24
12
STATION TIMERS
9
3
6
PC WRITE LOCKOUT
STATION PARAMETERS
T
ADDRE
WA R M T
COL D T
WA T C H D
CONF G
PARAM
SER I AL
I EEE R
RP BA
RP DEL
F P BA
F P R
F P DEL
HW PR
CT
BA
CT
B I
CM AVA
VM AVA
BAT
SERV P
CONF G
AG
SS
I M
I M
OG
L O
L O
#
EV
UD
AY
UD
T S
AY
ES
SE
AS
I L
I L
OK
I N
T O
Station TAG (S) .................. 12 Char ASCII (PAC 353)
Station ADDRESS (H) .................... 0 - 250
(0)
(10)
WARM TIMer (sec) (S) ............. 0 - 999999
(100)
COLD TIMer (sec) (S) .............. 0 - 999999
(0)
WATCHDOG timer (sec) (S) ........ 0 - 1000
(0) (1)
CONFiGuration Lock Out (S) .......... 0/1/2/3
(0) (1)
PARAMeter Lock Out (S) ............... 0/1/2/3
SERIAL # (R) ...................... 0 to 99999999 (xxxxxxxx)
(YES)
IEEE Floating Point REVerse (S) . NO/YES
(5)
Rear Port BAUD rate (S) .......... (Table 3.2)
(0)
Rear Port DELAY (S) .......... 0 - 1000 msec
(6)
Front Port BAUD rate (S) ......... (Table 3.2)
(1)
F P RTS/CTS handshaking (S) ....... (Table 3.2)
(0)
Front Port DELAY (S) ......... 0 - 1000 msec
(R)
.............(Table
3.3)
HardWare PRESent
(R)
..........
20 to 2000
Cycle Time BASE msec
(0)
Cycle Time BIAS msec (H) ................ 0 to 1000
Constant Mem AVAILable bytes(R)..varies w/ software rev
There are two timers used during power up
(R).....
Volitile Mem AVAILable
BATtery OK (R) .............................. NO/YES
initialization: WARM TIM and COLD TIM. The
SERVice PIN (S) ...... (press STORE to activate)
station takes approximately 8 seconds to perform
(YES) (2)
CONFiGuration Time Out (H) ......... NO/YES
power up initialization before the power up time is
(1) - Changed function in 2.40 0-No Lock Out, 1-Read Only, 2-Write Only, 3-Total Lock Out
(2) - Available with Firmware version 1.30 or later
evaluated. A timer should be set to a value greater
than 8 seconds to be effective. A timer setting of 0 will be considered as infinite (e.g. to always power up hot, set
the warm timer to 0). When the station powers up after a loss of power but prior to the expiration of the warm
timer, the station will execute a Hot Start. If the station powers up after the warm timer expiration but prior to the
expiration of the cold timer, the station will execute a warm start. In all other cases, the station will execute a cold
start. The adjustable range of these timers is 0-18000 seconds for firmware versions prior to than 1.30 and is 0999999 seconds for versions 1.30 and higher. IMPORTANT: The Real Time Clock jumper must be set for the
warm and hot timers to function. See the Maintenance section for details on this jumper.
bytes
varies w/ software rev
When using Modbus Network communications, the WATCHDOG timer can be set to a value other than 0 to cause
a high WD output from the loop operator display function block when the station does not receive a computer
command within the timer period. A value of 0 disables the watchdog. A Modbus communications DELAY time
can entered for both the Display Assembly configuration port and LIL/Modbus terminals NCA/NCB (front and
rear ports respectively). This may be necessary when the station responds too quickly for the modem. Modbus
masters may handle IEEE floating point numbers in a different word order. The IEEE REV parameter allows
matching the station to the Modbus master in use.
The CONFG LO (Configuration Lockout) parameter (V2.40) - renamed from DWNLD LO in earlier versions - and
PARAM LO (Parameter Write Lockout) parameter provide a method for locking out configuration transfers and
parameter read/writes from a PC over a Modbus or LIL network. The parameter lockout does not affect the global
updates on the on the LIL.
The 8-digit SERIAL # of the station is stored in memory and can be viewed when this parameter is displayed. If
only seven digits are seen, assume a leading zero.
May 2001
3-5
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
BAUD rate parameters set the Modbus port characteristics; see Table 3.2. The network Modbus port at terminals
NCA and NCB, the rear port, is RS485 and uses the assigned station address. The configuration port, the front
port, at a Moore 352Plus or Moore 353 Display Assembly’s MMJ-11 connector, or a Moore 354 or 354N
Controllers’ DB9 display/configuration port, is RS232 and uses an address of 1.
The Cycle Time of the station can be viewed as a parameter within the STATN block. In addition, a bias can be
added to increase the total cycle time of the station. This may be necessary when significant communications
activities are taking place, causing communication overrun errors. Adding bias will allow the processor more time
during each scan cycle for completing the communication chores.
The station can be configured to time out of the configuration mode after 1 minute of no faceplate operations by
setting the CONFG TO parameter to YES (default). This parameter is in firmware versions 1.30 and higher.
TABLE 3.2 Modbus Port Baud Rate Parameters
PARAMETERS
Data Formatting
Baud Rate Selections
Handshaking Selections
SETTINGS
8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit
1 - 300
5 - 9600
2 - 1200
6 - 19200
3 - 2400
7 - 38400
4 - 4800
1. No handshaking is used.
2. The station port will turn on the RTS line when it’s ready to send data but will
not wait for a responding CTS from the receiving device.
3. The station port will turn on the RTS line when it’s ready to send data and will
wait for a responding CTS from the receiving device before transmitting.
A list of the installed controller hardware and software can be viewed within the STATN block using the HW
PRES read only parameter. As shown in Table 3.3, each board has an ID and a hardware revision, and most also
have a software revision. The controller’s operating Kernel and operating code reside on the MPU Controller
board and there is an entry in the table for each. The table lists the hardware and software revisions. For example,
in Table 3.3, the MPU Controller board would be shown in the numeric display as ‘11 1.00’.
TABLE 3.3 Board Description and ID with Example Hardware and Software Revisions
BOARD DESCRIPTION
Kernel
MPU Controller - Models 352P, 353, and 354N
Display Assembly, Faceplate Display
I/O Expander
Ethernet Network
Local Instrument Link
LonWorks
RTC/CB or RCB - Models 352P, 353, and 354N
BOARD ID
0
1
2
3
6
8
9
b
HARDWARE
REVISION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SOFTWARE
REVISION
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.40
1.00
1.00
1.31
Check the NVRAM battery condition by reading the BAT OK parameter. The NVRAM, on the MPU Controller
Board, uses a sealed lithium battery that has a life of up to 40 years.5 The battery powers a portion of memory that
stores operating data when external power is removed from the controller. When external power is next applied,
the controller will read this data and return to the stored operating conditions. Should the battery fail, the station
5
3-6
With the Real Time Clock jumper properly set, as described in Section 11, up to 40 years for an on-line controller or for a stored MPU
Controller Board or controller.
Up to 4 years for a stored MPU Controller Board or controller with the Real Time Clock jumper improperly set (i.e. clock enabled).
Environmental conditions can affect battery life.
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
will power up in a Cold start using the controller configuration stored in permanent FLASH memory. Battery
condition has no effect on normal operation while external power is applied. The SERV PIN is used when a
LonWorks board is installed to identify this controller to the LonWorks network manager.
3.1.4 CLOCK - Real Time Clock (V2.0/2.2)
The CLOCK function block is available when the RTC/CB (Real Time Clock / Configuration Backup) option
board is installed in the controller and the controller includes firmware version V2.0 or higher.
This function block enables the current time and date to
be viewed when using the local faceplate. When the Step
Down Button is pressed to view the parameter value, the
current TIME or DATE at that instant is displayed. The
value can be changed using the pulser and the <-- and -> arrow buttons to enter a new value. The new value will
initialize the clock when the STORE button is pressed.
The time & date cannot be changed locally if the SRCE
ADD parameter has been configured to a value other
than 0 to have the time synchronized with a master
station on the Local Instrument Link (LIL).
When the SRCE ADD parameter (version 2.2) has been
configured to synchronize the time with a master
controller on the LIL the controller will query the master
controller at 12 midnight and synchronize its time with
the master.
REAL TIME CLOCK
CLOCK
1 7 : 36 : 00
1 2 2519 99
T I ME
SE T
S E T
DAT E
S RCE ADD
SET TIME .............. 00:00:00 to 23:59:59
SET DATE ......... 01011970 to 12313099
SouRCE ADDress ........................ 0 - 64
(0)
(0)
(0)
3.1.5 ETHERNET - Ethernet Communication Network (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
The ETHERNET function block is available when the
Ethernet Communication Network option board is
installed in the controller and the controller includes
firmware version V2.4 or higher.
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
Use this function block to configure Ethernet
communication parameters. The default IP addresses
shown are used for factory testing in a network
environment and should be changed to meet individual
system requirements. Consult your company’s network
administrator for assistance in determining IP addresses.
Also, consider any network security issues that can arise
when networking plant areas.
I P
I
I PI
E TI
E TI
T
E
P 2
E T
P 2
AD RE S
P MA S K
RE
P AD
GA
T S
E
SX
P
K
H M
DA
P L
A
P
G
T
H RAT E
X
H R
DA
P T
L E
P
H RAT E
P RAT E
IP ADdRESs (S) .. 1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn (192.168.0.2)
IP MASK (S) ........ 1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn (255.255.255.0)
.. 1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn (192.168.0.2)
IP
IP ADdRESs
GATEway (S)
(S) .. 1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn (192.168.0.1)
........ 1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn
IP
MASK (S)
(A)
ETHernet
DuPLeX
(S) . Auto, HALF, FULL (255.255.255.0)
1-nnn,2-nnn,3-nnn,4-nnn
(192.168.0.1)
IP
GATEway
(S) ..(S)
..... Auto, 10, 100
(A)
ETHernet
RATE
.
Auto,
HALF,
FULL
(A)
ETHernet
DuPLeX
(S)
Peer 2 Peer RATE (S) .25, .5, 2, 5, 10 sec
(.5)
ETHernet RATE (S) ..... Auto, 10, 100
(A)
Peer 2 Peer RATE (S) .25, .5, 2, 5, 10 sec (Rev (.5)
2)
(Rev 2)
May 2001
3-7
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2 I/O AND LOOP FUNCTION BLOCKS
This section provides a detailed description of each input/output and loop function block. Blocks are listed
alphabetically.
3.2.1 A/M - A/M Transfer
One A/M function block can be used per loop and it is
normally used on the output of controller blocks to
enable auto/manual operation of the loop. It is separate
from the controller block allowing the option of
inserting other function blocks (e.g. override,
feedforward) between the controller and the A/M
Transfer. If function block PB3SW has been used the
A/M block is not available.
AUTO allows the signal from the controller (input A) to
become the output of the A/M Transfer unless EMER
MAN or STANDBY is active. Auto ONLY forces the
operator pushbutton to be locked in the AUTO position,
but EMEG MAN and STANDBY will function
normally.
A/M TRANSFER
ESN = 000
A/M
R ange
R
O1
Output 1
Auto Input
A
A/M
AS
Auto Status
Track Variable
TV
TRANSFER
NA
Not A uto status
Track Command
TC
MS
Manual Switch
Emerg. Man.
EM
ES
EM Switch
SS
Standby Switch
P
M
R G
P U
A
O
OW E R
P U
L
CW
A N
A
M P R
E M
OC K
B
P R
I N P U
N P U T
N P U T
N P U T
P T R
M A N
N L Y
U P
A S T
MA N
C C L
I O R
MA N
MA N
I O R
T
A
T V
T C
E M
E S N
RanGe Poin TeR (S) ....... loop tag.block tag
Power Up MAN ual (S) .................... Real
Auto ONLY (S) ......................... NO/YES
POWER UP position (S) .................. A/M
Power Up LAST (S) ................. NO/YES
Clock Wise MANUAL (S) ............ NO/YES
MAN ual ACC eLeration (S) .. Slow, Med, Fast
(null )
(0.0)
(NO)
(A)
(YES)
(YES)
(S) *
Emerg Manual PRIOR ity
. 0,1,2,3,4,5
(4)
MANual allows the operator to adjust the manual value
E
Emerg Man switches to MAN .. NO/YES (NO) *
unless STANDBY is active. The manual value tracks
LOCK MAN in Emerg Man ...... NO/YES (NO) *
L
Stand By PRIOR ity
........... 0,1,2,3,4,5
(4)
S
the block output when in AUTO or STANDBY. The
INPUT A
.......... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
manual value can be adjusted when in MAN, provided
I
INPUT TV
....... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
INPUT TC
........ loop tag.block tag.output (null
I
the displayed variable is the process or the valve (e.g.
I
INPUT EM
....... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
TC2053.P or TC2053.V). When a loop is switched to
Exec. Seq. No.
................ 001 to 250
MANual the display will automatically show the valve
* Available with Firmware version 1.30 or later
(e.g. TC2053.V). The range pointer (input Range) lets
the A/M function block know the range of the auto
input signal and enables the A/M block to properly process pulser changes from the operator faceplate. The range
pointer also defines the range of the manual function as -10% to 110%. This can be useful to prevent inadvertent
changes from an operator workstation that might set the manual value well beyond the local operator’s changeable
range. In most cases, the Range input (range pointer) will connect to the controller function block. An
unconfigured range pointer will default the range to 0.00 - 100.00.
Pulser
G
(S)
(H)
(H)
(H)
)
(H)
(H)
AUTO
A
M
MAN
R
A
(S)
Auto
1
M
Output
2
.
TV
TC
EM
O1
Track Variable
3
Track Command
Auto Status
AS
Emergency Manual
Not Auto Status
NA
X03129S0
1
MS
2
ES
3
SS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-8
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
EMERgency MANual will be asserted when input EM is high (1). This causes the output to hold at the last
position and permits the operator to adjust the manual value under the conditions listed for MANual. It will also
assert an EM MAN status, at the configured priority, to the operator display.
STANDBY will be asserted when input TC is high (1). This causes the A/M block output to track input TV thus
placing the loop in a standby condition. This feature can be used to enable one loop to track another for either
redundancy applications or optional control schemes. It will also assert a STANDBY status, at the configured
priority, to the operator display.
STATUS OUTPUTS - Output AS (Auto Status) goes high (1) when output O1 is the Auto input; output NA will
go high when output 01 is not the Auto input, output MS goes high when the A/M switch is in the manual
position; output ES goes high when the Emergency Manual switch is in the manual position; and SS goes high
when the standby switch is in the Track Variable position. Two LEDs on the display identify the position of the
A/M switch.
POWER UP - The A/M function block can be configured to power up under various conditions during a warm or
cold start. If PU LAST has been configured as YES, during a warm start all outputs are initialized at previous
values and the block will power up in the same condition (i.e. same A/M switch position). When powering up in
auto, the A/M block will execute in the manual mode for the first two scan cycles, allowing a controller block to
track the last value. When PU LAST is set to NO, the A/M block does not power up in last position during a warm
start and will power up as configured by the POWER UP parameter, either AUTO or MAN. During a cold start,
the A/M block will always power up as configured by the POWER UP parameter. When the POWER UP
parameter is used and the block powers up in MAN, the manual value can be set using the PU MAN parameter.
Clock Wise MANual configured as YES, the default position, will cause the manual value to increase with
clockwise rotation of the knob. This feature is useful when clockwise rotation is desired to always open a value
whether the valve is direct or reverse acting.
EMergency MANual, in firmware 1.30 and higher, allows the position of the A/M block Manual Switch (switch 1
in the block diagram) and the associated light to be configured. When the EM input goes high (1), the Emergency
Manual Switch (switch 2) switches to manual. If EM MAN is configured as YES, the Manual Switch (switch 1)
and the indicator light will switch to the manual position, assuming that switch 1 is in Auto, and will remain in the
manual position until the operator presses the A/M button or a command is received from an HMI to switch to
Auto. The EM Switch (switch 2) will remain in the manual position until the EM status clears regardless of the
position of the Manual Switch (switch 1). If the EM MAN parameter is configured as NO, the Manual Switch
(switch 1) and associated indicator light will not change position when the EM input goes high (1).
LOCK MAN, in V2.4, can be set to YES to lock the loop in manual when Emergency Manual has been activated.
The operator can switch the loop to Auto only when the EM condition has cleared. This feature is available only
when the EM MAN parameter is configured as YES.
The MAN ACCL parameter, in firmware 1.30 and higher, enables setting the acceleration rate applied to the
pulser knob. It can be configured for Slow, Medium, or Fast. Slow is the default and is consistent with firmware
versions less than 1.30.
PRIORITIES - The priority assigned to EM or SB PRIOR will affect the operation as follows (the outputs ES and
SS will go high with all priority assignments, including 0, when event is active):
1. Bargraphs, event LEDs, and condition will flash. ACK button must be used to stop flashing.
2. Bargraphs, event LEDs, and condition will flash. Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears.
3. Event LEDs and condition will flash. ACK button must be used to stop flashing.
4. Event LEDs and condition will flash. Flashing will stop if ACK or event clears.
5. Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event is active and off when the event clears.
0. No local display action occurs when event is active.
May 2001
3-9
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.2 ACS - ARCCOSINE
ACS_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, accept an
input between -1.0 and 1.0. Each provides an output signal in
radians of which the input is the cosine.
ARCCOSINE
ACS
Input X
.
X
O1
ACOS (X)
Output 1
Input X
X
O1 = ACOS (X)
I NPU T X
ES N
.
ESN = 000
O1
Output 1
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.3 ADD_ - Addition
ADD_ function blocks perform arithmetic addition on
three input signals. Any unused input will be set to 0.0
and will have no affect on the output.
ADDITION
ADD_
All inputs should have the same engineering units. If
units are not consistent, an SCL (Scaler) function block
can be used or an alternative is to use a MATH function
block that has built-in scaling functions.
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT
ES
A
B
Input A
+
ESN = 000
ADDITION
A
B
C
N
O1
Output 1
INPUT A (H) ......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) ......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) ......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............... 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
+
O1
.
+
.
C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.4 AG3 - AGA 3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas
AG3 function blocks, which can be used on a one per loop
basis, are available in firmware 1.30 and higher, This block
uses the AGA 3 (American Gas Association Report #3)
calculation to accurately measure the flow of natural gas using
an orifice meter with flanged taps. The basic equations
calculated by this block, in accordance with AGA Report No.
3, Orifice Metering of Natural Gas, Part 3, August 1992 (AGA
Catalog No. XQ9210), are:
AGA 3
AG3
Qb = C' √ Pf1hw
C' = Fn(Fc+Fsl)Y1FpbFtbFtfFgrFpv
Qb = volume flow rate at base conditions
where:
C' = composite orifice flow factor
Pf1 = absolute flowing pressure(upstream tap)
hw = orifice differential pressure
Fn = numeric conversion factor
Fc = orifice calculation factor
Fsl = orifice slope factor
Y1 = expansion factor (upstream tap)
Fpb = base pressure factor
Ftb = base temperature factor
Ftf = flowing temperature factor
Fgr = real gas relative density factor
Fpv = supercompressibility factor
Input hw
hw
Input Pf
Pf
Input Tf
Tf
Input Gr
Gr
Input Zs
Zs
Input Zf
Zf
Input Zb
Zb
d
D
P
T
r
r
b
b
k
mu
P L AT E
I NP UT
hw
I NP UT
P f
I NPU T T f
I NPU T G r
Z s
I NPU T
Zf
I NPU T
I N PU T Z b
E S N
ESN = 000
AGA 3
Qb
Output Qb
C'
Output C'
diameter ref. for plate (inches) .................... Real (0.0)
Diameter ref. for tube (inches) ................... Real (0.0)
base Pressure (psia) .............................. Real (14.73)
base Temperature (deg F) ................... Real (60.0)
Specific Heat Ratio (k) .......................... Real (1.30)
Viscosity x 10-6 lbm/ft-sec (mu) ........ Real (6.90)
PLATE Material .................... SS=0,Monel=1,CS=2 (SS)
INPUT hw ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Pf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Tf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Gr ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Zs ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Zf ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Zb ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250 (000)
Output Qb is updated every scan cycle. Output C' is updated continuously for temperature effects and periodically
for other effects. The following conditions are considered in the calculations:
•
Standard Conditions are: Ps = 14.73 psia, Ts = 60°F, Zsair = 0.999590.
•
Nominal pipe size is 2" or larger, Beta is 0.1 - 0.75, and Re (Reynolds Number) is 4000 or larger.
•
Y (expansion factor) and absolute flowing pressure Pf are referenced to upstream tap (i.e. Y1 & Pf1).
•
hw is in inches H20 and Pf is in psia. 0 < [hw/(27.707*Pf)] <= 0.2.
The following parameters are configuration entries:
dr
Dr
Pb
Tb
=
=
=
=
orifice plate bore diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68°F
meter tube internal diameter in inches at a reference temperature of 68°F
base pressure (psia)
base temperature (°F)
The following are analog inputs to the AGA 3 function block:
hw = orifice differential pressure (in H2O)
Pf = flowing pressure at upstream tap - Pf1 (psia)
May 2001
3-11
Function Blocks
Tf
Gr
Zs
Zf
Zb
=
=
=
=
=
UM354N-1
flowing temperature (°F)
real gas relative density (specific gravity)
compressibility at standard conditions
compressibility at flowing conditions at upstream tap - Zf1
compressibility at base conditions
The specific gravity factor (Gr) and the compressibility factors (Zs, Zf, Zb) can be entered manually using HLD
(Hold) function blocks, computed, and then downloaded from a host device, or calculated in the controller using
the AG8 (AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas) function block.
The following are analog outputs of the AGA 3 function block:
Qb = volume flow rate at base conditions (SCFH - Standard Cubic Feet per Hour)
C' = composite orifice flow factor [SCFH/ √ (psia)(in H2O)]
Pf
Gr, Zf,s,b
hw
AGA 3
Tf
Qb
Application Diagram
3-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.5 AG7 - AGA 7 Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters
AG7 function blocks, which can be used on a one per loop
basis, are available in firmware 1.30 and higher, This block
uses the AGA 7 (American Gas Association Report #7)
calculation to accurately measure the volume flow of gas at
base conditions using a turbine meter. The basic equations
calculated by this block in accordance with AGA Turbine
Meter Report No. 7, 1985 (AGA Catalog No. XQ0585) are:
AGA 7
AG7
Qb = Qf (Tb/Tf)(Pf/Pb)(Zb/Zf)
where: Qf
Qb
Pf
Tf
Zf
Pb
Tb
Zb
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
volume flow at standard conditions
volume flow rate at base conditions
flowing pressure (psia)
flowing temperature)
compressibility at flowing conditions
base pressure (psia)
base temperature (°F)
compressibility at base conditions
I
I
I
I
I
N
N
N
N
N
Input Qf
Qf
Input Pf
Pf
Input Tf
Tf
Input Zf
Zf
Input Zb
Zb
P
P
P
P
P
U
U
U
U
U
T
T
T
T
T
Pb
T b
Q f
P f
T f
Zf
Z b
ES N
ESN = 000
AGA 7
Qb
Output Qb
base Pressure (psia) .............................. Real (14.73)
base Temperature (deg F) ................... Real (60.0)
INPUT Qf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Pf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Tf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Zf .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Zb ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250 (000)
Block output Qb is updated continuously and is the volume flow rate at base conditions in the same units as input
Qf. Tb and Tf are converted within the block from °F to °R (adds 459.67 to the °F input value) for the actual
calculation. Compressibility factors (Zf, Zb) can be entered manually using HLD (Hold) function blocks, computed
and downloaded from a host device, or calculated in the controller using the AG8 (AGA 8 Compressibility Factors
of Natural Gas) function block.
Pf
Zf,b
Qf
AGA 7
Tf
Qb
Application Diagram
May 2001
3-13
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.6 AG8 - AGA 8 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas
AG8 function blocks, which can be used on a one per
loop basis, are available in firmware 1.30 and higher.
This block calculates the compressibility factors of
natural gas in accordance with AGA 8 Report No. 8, July
1994 (AGA Catalog No. XQ9212). It computes various
compressibility factors and the specific gravity (relative
density) using the detailed characterization method
described in the report. The mole percentage of the gas
components and the base temperature and pressure are
entered in the configuration and the flowing temperature
and pressure are provided as block inputs. Parameter
MOL% SUM provides a read only value that is the total
of all the gas compounds that have been entered. The
AGA8 computation is time consuming and is calculated
over a total of 100 scan cycles so as not to have any
significant effect on the controller cycle time.
Zs (compressibility at standard conditions) is calculated
after a power-up or after a configuration change is made.
Zb and Zf are calculated on a periodic basis with the
actual update time dependent on the number of gas
components and the scan cycle of the controller.
3-14
AGA 8
AG8
Input Pf
Pf
Input Tf
Tf
Pb
T b
ME T H A N E
N I TROGEN
C D I OX D
E T H A NE
P ROP A NE
WA T E R
H Y SUL FD
HY DROGEN
C MO N O X D
OX Y G E N
i - BU T A NE
n - BU T A NE
i - P N T A NE
n - P N T A NE
n - HE X A NE
n - HP T A NE
n - OC T A NE
n - NON A NE
n - DE C A NE
HE L I UM
A R G ON
MOL % S UM
I NPU T
P f
I NPU T T f
E SN
ESN = 000
AGA 8
Gr
Output Gr
Zs
Output Zs
Zf
Output Zf
Zb
Output Zb
base Pressure (psia) ................................ Real (14.73)
base Temperature (deg F) ..................... Real
(60.0)
METHANE % composition ................... Real (96.5222)
NITROGEN % composition .................. Real (.2595)
Carbon DIOXiDe % composition ......... Real (.5956)
ETHANE % composition ...................... Real (1.8186)
PROPANE % composition ................... Real (.4596)
(0.0)
WATER % composition ........................ Real
HYdrogen SULFiDe % composition .... Real
(0.0)
HYDROGEN % composition ................ Real
(0.0)
(0.0)
Carbon MONOXiDe % composition ..... Real
(0.0)
OXYGEN % composition ..................... Real
i-BUTANE % composition ................... Real (.0977)
n-BUTANE % composition .................. Real (.1007)
i-PeNTANE % composition .................. Real (.0473)
n-PeNTANE % composition ................. Real (.0324)
n-HEXANE % composition .................. Real (.0664)
n-HePTANE % composition ................. Real
(0.0)
n-OCTANE % composition .................. Real
(0.0)
(0.0)
n-NONANE % composition .................. Real
(0.0)
n-DECANE % composition .................. Real
HELIUM % composition ....................... Real
(0.0)
ARGON % composition ....................... Real
(0.0)
MOL% SUM (read total % composition) .......... Real
(100.0)
INPUT Pf ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT Tf ............... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ...................... 000 to 250
(null)
(null)
(000)
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.7 AIE_ - Analog Input - Ethernet (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
Ethernet Network
AIE_ function blocks are available when the optional
ANALOG INPUT - ETHERNET
Ethernet communication board is installed. It allows the
controller to obtain analog data from other stations over
AIE_
the Ethernet network. Up to 32 AIE_ blocks are available
Output Range
OR
and are assigned in sequence with each use, station wide.
ANALOG INPUT
The data is received as a real floating-point number and is
Output O1
O1
ETHERNET
passed to the block output O1. Block output OR is the
Output QS
QS
range scaling for this real number. The Output Range is a
special data type that includes the MIN and MAX
I P
A D R E S IP ADdRESs (H) .. nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (192.168.0.0)
SCALE, the DPP, and the ENGUNITS and can be
M B R E G ModBus REGister(H) ... 00000 - 65535 (00000)
connected to other blocks having a Range (RG PTR)
R A N G E RANGE (H) ........................... Auto/Man (M)
input. The range scaling information can be
M I N S C A L E MINimum SCALE (H) ................... Real (0.0)
M A X S C A L E MAXimum SCALE (H) .................. Real (100.0)
automatically obtained from the source of the data if the
D P P Decimal Pt. Position (preferred) (S) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0 0.00
server has the scaling information packaged with the data
E N G U N I T S ENGineering UNITS (S) .. 6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
as is provided by AOE function blocks from other Moore
(Rev. 2)
and Procidia controllers. AOE blocks are defined by using
the Modbus Registers from the table below. If this feature is not available, the default setting of the RANGE
parameter "MAN" can be used. In this case the range parameters are entered manually. When the auto range
feature is used, the range in the AIE block may be out of sync for several seconds if on line changes are made to the
AOE range.
Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and will go high (1) when the data is bad. This is normally
associated with failure to receive data due to a communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source.
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
AOE01
AOE02
AOE03
AOE04
AOE05
AOE06
AOE07
AOE08
30961
30963
30965
30967
30969
30971
30973
30975
AOE09
AOE10
AOE11
AOE12
AOE13
AOE14
AOE15
AOE16
30977
30979
30981
30983
30985
30987
30989
30991
AOE17
AOE18
AOE19
AOE20
AOE21
AOE22
AOE23
AOE24
30993
30995
30997
30999
31001
31003
31005
31007
AOE25
AOE26
AOE27
AOE28
AOE29
AOE30
AOE31
AOE32
31009
31011
31013
31015
31017
31019
31021
31023
May 2001
3-15
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.8 AIL_ - Analog Input - LIL
AIL_ function blocks are available when the optional LIL
communication board is installed. They allow the
controller to obtain global data from other stations on the
LIL. AIL block numbers are assigned in sequence with
each use, station wide. The data is received in the LIL
format having a standard range of $80 to $F80. The block
output is a real number and is scaled in engineering units
using the MIN and MAX SCALE parameters. The
Output Range is a special data type that includes the MIN
and MAX SCALE, the DPP, and the ENGUNITS that
can be connected to other blocks having a Range (RG
PTR) input.
Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and
will go high (1) when the data is bad. This is normally
associated with failure to receive global data due to a LIL
failure or a misconfiguration of the source.
ANALOG INPUT - LIL
AIL_
LIL
GLOBAL
DATA
S R
SR
L I
M I
MA
C
C
L
N
X
E
E
C
SC
SC
E N GUN
ANALOG INPUT - LIL
A
C
H
A
A
D
I
D
H
A
L
L
P
T
D
N
N
E
E
P
S
OR
Output Range
O1
Output O1
QS
Output QS
SouRCE ADDress (H) ............. 00 to 64 (null)
SouRCE CHaNnel (H) ......... 000 to 255 (null)
LIL CHANnel (S) ................. 008 to 255 (null)
MINimum SCALE (H) ................... Real (0.0)
MAXimum SCALE (H) .................. Real (100.0)
0.00
Decimal Pt. Position (preferred) (S) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0
ENGineering UNITS (S) .. 6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
The AIL function can be assigned to a single LIL channel. It will then have certain data that will be accessible over
the LIL. Parameter 1 is the received data (RD) in the $80-$F80 format and will be re-transmitted by this station on
the assigned channel. This LIL CHAN parameter can also be set to 0. The controller will still receive global data
from the other station but the received data will not be re-transmitted and the other channel data (i.e. MINSCALE,
...) will not be accessible..
n
3-16
1
RD
2
SA/SC
3
4
MINSCALE
5
6
MAXSCALE
7
8
ENG UNITS
9
10`
11
Output O1
12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.9 AIN_ - Analog Inputs
AIN_ function blocks convert a voltage input, having a
range defined during calibration, into a block output
signal that is scaled in engineering units. The output is
then interconnected to other function blocks within the
controller.
ANALOG INPUT _
AIN_
AIN_+
AIN_c
A 6-character ASCII value can be entered to identify the
engineering units of the output signal. The scaled output
range is configurable and has a factory default of 0.0 to
100.0 PRCT. Ranges such as 300.0 to 500.0, representing
engineering units in degrees C, can also be configured.
The Output Range is a special data type that includes the
MIN and MAX SCALE, the DPP, and the ENGUNITS
that can be connected to other blocks with a Range (RG
PTR) input.
OR
Output Range
O1
Output 1
QS
Quality Status
ANALOG INPUT
EXTRACTOR
M I NSCAL E
MA X S C A L E
DPP
ENGUN I T S
D I G F I L T
SQ ROOT
CAL
ZERO
CAL
FUL L
CAL
V I EW
MINimum SCALE (H) .................. Real
MAXimum SCALE (H) ................. Real
Decimal Pt. Position (preferred) (S) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0
ENGineering UNITS (S) .. 6 Char ASCII
DIGital FILTer (S) ............. 0 to 180 sec
SQuare ROOT extractor (S) .... N0/YES
ZERO input (C) .................. 0 to 1.0 Vdc
FULL scale input (C) ...... 4.0 to 5.0 Vdc
VIEW input - verify cal. (C) ............ Real
(0.0)
(100.0)
(0.00)
(PRCT)
(0 sec)
(NO)
Analog Input blocks are available on the MPU Controller Board (CB) and on the I/O Expander Board (EB). Block
names (IDs) are listed in Section 8.4 together with the case rear terminal numbers. Power for 2-wire transmitters is
available at the rear terminals.
A digital filter (time constant) is available to dampen process noise. A square root extractor is also available to
linearize a flow signal from a ∆P transmitter, allowing the block output to be configured for flow units. Output QS
indicates the quality of the analog output signal O1, and will be high (1) when output O1 is bad, and low (0) when
good. Bad quality signifies an A/D conversion failure or a 1-5Vdc input signal that falls below 0.6 Vdc indicating
an open circuit or failure of a 2-wire transmitter.
A verify mode is available during calibration to view the analog input, in volts, over the full calibrated range. The
input is factory calibrated for 1-5 Vdc and should not require field calibration. However, field calibration can be
performed if another range is required or to match the exact transmitter calibration. Current inputs are
accommodated using precision dropping resistors connected across the input terminals (250Ω resistors are supplied
with the controller for conversion of 4-20mA inputs).
Power Up - During a hot, a warm or a cold start, the function block will temporarily by-pass the digital filter to
enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal.
xmtr+
Current Limit
+ 24 Vdc
ENG UNITS
R2
R1
.
NO
Digital
Filter
A/D
AI_+
Scaling
O1
YES
C1
C2
XTR
Quality Test
AI_c
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-17
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.10 AINU_ - Analog Inputs, Universal
AINU_ function blocks are available on the optional I/O
Expander Board. These function blocks convert sensor inputs
such as T/C (thermocouple), RTD (resistance temperature
detector), millivolt, ohm, and slidewire sources into block
outputs. Current inputs (i.e. 4-20 mA) are accommodated by
using the WMV type and connecting a 3.75Ω resistor across
the input. An output bias can be used to nullify any known
offset in the sensor circuit and a digital filter (time constant) is
included, to dampen process noise. Output QS indicates the
quality status of the output signal O1 and will go high (1)
when the output is of bad quality. Bad quality indicates an
A/D conversion failure or an open circuit T/C, or an out of
range process variable.
ANALOG INPUT- UNIVERSAL_
AINU_
AINU_a
ANALOG INPUT
UNIVERSAL
AINU_b
AINU_c
T/C, RTD, MV, OHMS
SLIDEWIRE
OR
Output Range
O1
Output 1
QS
Quality Status
AINU_d
(Rev.2)
SEN
SE
SE
D I G
OU T
M I N
MAX
T YPE
M I N
MAX
F I L T
B I A S
S CAL E
S CAL E
DP P
E NG UN I T S
CA L
T YPE
Z E RO
CA L
CA L
FU L L
CA L
V I EW
N
N
SENsor TYPE (H) ..Cal. Input Values Table (15)
SENsor MINimum (H) . ..Sen Min/Max Table (15)
SENsor MAXimum (H) ...Sen Min/Max Table (75)
DIGital FILTer (S) ............... 0 to 180 sec (0 sec)
OUTput BIAS (S) ............................ Real (0.0)
MINimum SCALE (H) ...Sen Min/Max Table (-185)
MAXimum SCALE (H) ..Sen Min/Max Table (1100)
Decimal Pt. P osition (preferred) (S) ..... 0.0.0.0.0.0 0.00
ENGineering UNITS (H) ....Input Types Table (1)
CAL TYPE (C) . (Sen Min/Max Table _ FLD/FAC) (FAC)
ZERO field calibration (C) . Cal. Input Values Table
FULL scale field cal (C) ..... Cal. Input Values Table
VIEW input - verify cal (C) .............. Real
The scaling function is used to establish an output range, in
engineering units, for the selected sensor range (e.g. 0-10 mv
or 50.0-150.0 amperes). Direct Temperature Measurements
(i.e. T/C and RTD) bypass sensor and range scaling and the
block output units are selected from Table 3.4. When selected,
the proper read only ASCII characters corresponding to the
type units selected will automatically be placed in the ENG
UNITS parameter. When OHMs or MVs are selected, the ENG UNITS parameter can be configured to correspond
to the process engineering units. The default SEN MIN and MIN SCALE are set to the minimum operating value
and the SEN MAX & MAX SCALE are set to the maximum operating value. SEN MIN & SEN MAX always
indicate the sensor range limits in degrees C. However, it is important to enter the actual intended operating range
in the MINSCALE, MAXSCALE, and DPP parameters so that other function blocks, such as the controller,
operator faceplate, and workstation interface, can point to this block for range and display informationBlock names
(IDs). Input terminations (terminal numbers) are listed in Section 8.4.
All input types are factory calibrated and do not require field calibration. However, for those cases where outputs
must be adjusted to meet a local standard, a field calibration feature is available to override the factory calibration
for the input type selected. The factory calibration is retained so that the input can be returned to the factory
calibration at any time by storing ‘FAC’ in the calibration selection. Table 3.5 provides the input values that are
used to perform a field calibration. A verify mode is available during calibration to view the sensor input over the
full range. The signal that is viewed, in the calibration verify mode, is in the basic units of measure (e.g. °C for
temperature, mv for millivolts) and is not affected by the temperature units conversion, digital filter, scaling, or the
output bias adjustment. The full block output with these parameters applied can be viewed in the VIEW mode
within loop configuration. During a hot, a warm or a cold start, the function block will temporarily by-pass the
digital filter to enable the output to initialize at the actual hardware input signal. Note that the field calibration is
erased when the SENsor TYPE is changed.
SLIDE WIRE
OHM
MV
RTD
b -----
+
ENG UNITS
a ----d -----
+
MV
_
RTD
T/C
OHM
.
T/C
Universal
Converter
D/A
Digital
Filter
Range
Scaling
+
O1
+
RJ
.
_
c -----
Bias
Models 353
Models 353
and 354 only
and 354 only
Quality Test
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-18
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
TABLE 3.4 Input Types
#
ENGineering UNITS
AVAILABLE ON INPUT TYPES
1
Deg C (degrees Celsius)
JT/C, KT/C, TT/C, ET/C, ST/C, RT/C, BT/C, NT/C, DRTD, URTD, JRTD
2
Deg F (degrees Fahrenheit)
JT/C, KT/C, TT/C, ET/C, ST/C, RT/C, BT/C, NT/C, DRTD, URTD, JRTD
3
Deg R (degrees Rankine)
JT/C, KT/C, TT/C, ET/C, ST/C, RT/C, BT/C, NT/C, DRTD, URTD, JRTD
4
K (Kelvin)
JT/C, KT/C, TT/C, ET/C, ST/C, RT/C, BT/C, NT/C, DRTD, URTD, JRTD
*****
*
6 Char ASCII
OHM, SLW, NMV, WMV
TABLE 3.5 Calibration Input Values
#
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
OPERATING RANGE
1
JT/C
Type J Thermocouple
-185°C to 1100°C (-300°F to 2010°F)
FIELD CAL ‘FLD’
POINTS
0°C & 800°C
2
KT/C
Type K Thermocouple
-185°C to 1370°C (-300°F to 2500°F)
0°C & 1000°C
3
TT/C
Type T Thermocouple
-200°C to 370°C (-400°F to 698°F)
-100°C & 300°C
4
ET/C
Type E Thermocouple
-185°C to 1000°C (-300°F to 1830°F)
0°C & 800°C
5
ST/C
Type S Thermocouple
-18°C to 1650°C (0°F to 3000°F)
400°C & 1400°C
6
RT/C
Type R Thermocouple
-18°C to1610°C (0°F to 2930°F)
400°C & 1400°C
7
BT/C
Type B Thermocouple
-18°C to 1815°C (0°F to 3300°F)
800°C & 1600°C
8
NT/C
Type N Thermocouple
-185°C to 1300°C (-300°F to 2370°F)
0°C & 1000°C
9
DRTD
-185°C to 622°C (-300°F to 1152°F)
10
URTD
11
JRTD
12
OHM*
DIN 43760/IEC 751 RTD
alpha 0.003850
US (NBS 126) RTD
alpha 0.003902
JIS C-1604 RTD
alpha 0.003916
Resistance
0 ohms to 5000 ohms
100Ω (0°C) &
285Ω (512.380°C)
100Ω (0°C) &
285Ω (504.84°C)
100Ω (0°C) &
285Ω (502.94°C)
0 ohms & 5000 ohms
13
SLW*
Slidewire
500 ohms to 5000 ohms
0% & 100%
14
NMV
Narrow Millivolt
- 19.0 mv to 19.0 mv
0 mv & +15 mv
15
WMV
Wide Millivolt
-30.0 mv to 77 mv
0 mv & +75 mv
-185°C to 613°C (-300°F to 1135°F)
-185°C to 610°C (-300°F to 1130°F)
* Not available in Model 352Plus.
TABLE 3.6 SEN MIN/MAX & MIN/MAX SCALE Parameters
SEN TYPE
SEN MIN
SEN MAX
MIN SCALE
MAX SCALE
1-11
12
[min. operating
value]
0 (ohms)
[max. operating
value]
5000 (ohms)
[min. operating
value]
0.0 PRCT
[max. operating
value]
100.0 PRCT
13
0 (%)
100 (%)
0.0 PRCT
100.0 PRCT
14
-19 (mv)
19 (mv)
0.0 PRCT
100.0 PRCT
15
15 (mv)
75 (mv)
0.0 PRCT
100.0 PRCT
May 2001
3-19
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.11 AIP_ - Analog Input lev_Percent
AIP_ function blocks convert an analog signal
with a lev-percent type SNVT (Standard Network
Variable Type) received from the LonWorks
network into a block output, scaled in engineering
units, for interconnection to other function blocks
within the controller. A maximum of 25 AIP_
blocks can be used, up to the limit of nodes
allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit
of the controller. Each use of the block will be
assigned a unique station wide ID (e.g. AIP06).
These blocks are available when the LonWorks
option board is installed in a 352P, 353, or 354N
controller. The input connection is established by
‘binding’ a network variable from the remote
analog node to the network variable of the AIP_
function block.
ANALOG INPUT LEV_PERCENT
AIP
LONWorks
Network
OR
Output Range
O1
Output 1
QS
Quality Status
ANALOG INPUT
nviAIPnn1
nv * SNVT_lev_percent
LEV_PERCENT
M I N S CAL E
MAX S CAL E
DPP
E NGUN I T S
D I G F I L T
SQ ROO T
NV NUM
MINimum SCALE (H) ....................... Real
MAXimum SCALE (H) ...................... Real
Decimal Pt. Position (preferred) (S) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0
ENGineering UNITS (S) ...... 6 Char ASCII
DIGital FILTer (S) ................. 0 to 180 sec
SQuare ROOT extractor (S) ....... NO/YES
Network Variable NUMber (nv*) (R) ........ 1 to 2000
(0.0)
(100.0)
(0.00)
(PRCT)
(0 sec)
(NO)
(*)
A 6-character ASCII value can be entered to
identify the engineering units of the output signal. Output scaling (MINSCALE and MAXSCALE) is provided to
establish an engineering range of choice. The number of the input network variable to the AIP block can be
viewed in the configuration mode. This is useful when other devices need this for binding. The Output Range is a
special data type that includes the MIN and MAX SCALE, the DPP, and the ENGUNITS that can be connected to
other blocks with a Range (RG PTR) input.
The block output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal O1 and will go high when the output is of bad
quality. Bad quality usually indicates a loss of communications within the LonWorks network.
LonWorks
Network and
Node(s)
LON node r
nv x SNVT_lev_percent
Controller
AIP Function Block
LonWorks option board
node u
ENG Units
NO
Digital
Filter
nv * SNVT_lev_percent
Output
Scaling
O1
YES
nv x binding
node u, nv *
XTR
Quality Test
QS
X03125P1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-20
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.12 ALARM - Alarm
ALARM function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis
and contain four (4) alarms associated with Input P (normally
the process input to the controller function block). Each alarm
can be configured as NONE, HI, LO, HDEV, LDEV, DEV,
and OR.
Deviation type alarms compare Input P with Input D, the
deviation input, normally the loop setpoint (i.e. the setpoint to
the controller function block), having the same range as Input
P. An Out of Range (OR) alarm compares the process input
with the range limits specified by the range pointer parameter
(input R). This parameter must point to a function block that
includes MINSCALE and MAXSCALE configuration
parameters (e.g. Analog Input) for proper scaling. If not
configured, 0.0-100.0 will be used as a default range.
Alarms have priorities 1 to 5, with 1 the highest and are
reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority first and
then in order of occurrence. Priority 1 causes the station
bargraphs and condition (e.g. A1 HI) to flash and requires
acknowledgment to stop flashing. Priority 2 also flashes the
bargraphs and condition but stops flashing when the alarm
clears (i.e. Self Clearing). Priority 3 causes the event LEDs
(L and S) and condition to flash. Flashing stops only when the
alarm is acknowledged. Priority 4 also causes the event LEDs
and condition to flash but stops when the alarm clears.
Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it be
acknowledged.
ALARM
ALARM
Range
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
R
Input P
P
Input D
D
R G
1
L I
2
L I
3
L I
L I
4
D B
1
2
DB
3
D B
4
D B
P U
1
P U
2
P U
3
P U
4
P R
1
P R
2
P R
3
P R
4
T
1
T
2
T
3
T
4
D
1
D
2
D
3
D
4
D L
1
D L
2
D L
3
D L
4
1
RG
2
RG
RG
3
RG
4
I N P U
I NP U
P T
M I
M I
M I
M I
A N
A N
AN
AN
E
E
E
E
I O
I O
I O
I O
Y P
Y P
Y P
Y P
L I
L I
L I
L I
OU
OU
OU
OU
B C
B C
B C
B C
T
T
E S
R
T
T
T
T
D
D
D
D
N
N
N
N
R
R
R
R
E
E
E
E
N
N
N
N
T
T
T
T
K
K
K
K
P
D
N
ESN = 000
ALARM 1
A1
Alarm 1 Status
ALARM 2
A2
Alarm 2 Status
ALARM 3
A3
Alarm 3 Status
ALARM 4
A4
Alarm 4 Status
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ............... loop tag.block tag
Alarm 1 LIMIT (S) ................................... Real
Alarm 2 LIMIT (S) ................................... Real
Alarm 3 LIMIT (S) ................................... Real
Alarm 4 LIMIT (S) ................................... Real
Alarm 1 DeadBAND (S) ...... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0%
Alarm 2 DeadBAND (S) ...... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0%
Alarm 3 DeadBAND (S) ...... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0%
Alarm 4 DeadBAND (S) ...... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0%
Alarm 1 Power Up ENabled (S) ........ NO/YES
Alarm 2 Power Up ENabled (S) ........ NO/YES
Alarm 3 Power Up ENabled (S) ........ NO/YES
Alarm 4 Power Up ENabled (S) ........ NO/YES
Alarm 1 PRIORity (S) ....................... 1/2/3/4/5
Alarm 2 PRIORity (S) ....................... 1/2/3/4/5
Alarm 3 PRIORity (S) ....................... 1/2/3/4/5
Alarm 4 PRIORity (S) ....................... 1/2/3/4/5
A1 TYPE (S) ...... none,HI,LO,HdEV,LdEV,dEV,or
A2 TYPE (S) ...... none,HI,LO,HdEV,LdEV,dEV,or
A3 TYPE (S) ...... none,HI,LO,HdEV,LdEV,dEV,or
A4 TYPE (S) ...... none,HI,LO,HdEV,LdEV,dEV,or
A1 DeLay IN (S) ........ 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A2 DeLay IN (S) ........ 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A3 DeLay IN (S) ........ 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A4 DeLay IN (S) ........ 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A1 DeLay OUT (S) .... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A2 DeLay OUT (S) .... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A3 DeLay OUT (S) .... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
A4 DeLay OUT (S) .... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60 Sec
Alarm 1 RinGBaCK (S) ..................... NO/YES
Alarm 2 RinGBaCK (S) ..................... NO/YES
Alarm 3 RinGBaCK (S) ..................... NO/YES
Alarm 4 RinGBaCK (S) ..................... NO/YES
INPUT P (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT D (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No (H) ......................... 001 to 250
(null)
(110.0)
(-10.0)
(100.0)
(0.0)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(YES)
(YES)
(YES)
(YES)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(HI)
(LO)
(dEV)
(none)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(NO)
(NO)
(NO)
(NO)
(null)
(null)
Alarm limits are in engineering units. A quickset ALARM
feature is also available allowing alarm limits to be set quickly
during operation. The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in % of range on the bargraph.
Alarms are displayed as defined by the range pointer parameter. Alarms can be set to any engineering value
within -10% to 110% of the range defined by the pointer. If a range is changed, the current alarm settings will be
changed to be the same % within the new range. For example, if a HI alarm is currently set at 100.0 with a range
of 0.0 to 100.0 and the range is changed to 300.0 to 400.0, the HI alarm will be moved to 400.0.
Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode. The configuration allows an alarm to
be enabled or disabled on a cold start. When an alarm is disabled, it will not operate but will retain settings for
return to the enabled mode. Complete operator faceplate functions, relating to alarms, are described in the sections
describing the specific faceplate design. All alarms have the following features:
Deadband - requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband
before the alarm clears (goes low). The alarm deadband is set as a fixed % of the range pointer scale.
Delay-In Time - requires that the input remain above (or below) the limit setting for the delay time before the
alarm trips (goes high). This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise.
Delay-Out Time - requires that the input remain below (or above) the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time
before the alarm will clear (goes low). This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms due to process noise.
May 2001
3-21
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
Ringback - causes a previously acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment (priorities 1-4) when the alarm
clears.
Alarm Types
HI compares the process input with the limit setting
and it will trip the alarm status high (1) when the
process is equal to or higher than the limit setting.
The alarm status will clear (0) when the process is
less than the limit setting minus the deadband.
Alarm
_Status
Alarm
_Status
LIMIT
Alarm
_Status
LIMIT
Alarm
_Status
LIMIT
Alarm
_Status
Alarm
_Status
LIMIT
HI
Input P
Input P
LO compares the process input with the limit setting
and it will trip the alarm status high (1) when the
process is equal to or less than the limit setting. The
alarm status will clear (0) when the process is greater
than the limit setting plus the deadband.
HI DEV compares the difference between the process
input and the deviation input (P-D) with the limit
setting and it will trip the alarm status high (1) when
(P-D) is equal to or greater than the limit setting. The
alarm status will clear (0) when (P-D) is less than the
limit setting minus the deadband.
LO
LIMIT
HI
DEV
Input P
LO
DEV
Input P
+
Input D
-
Input D
+
Input P
LO DEV compares the difference between the
deviation input and the process input (D-P) with the
limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high (1)
when (D-P) is equal to or greater than the limit
setting. The alarm status will clear (0) when (D-P) is
less than the limit setting minus the deadband.
DEV compares the absolute difference between the
process input and the deviation input |P-D| with the
limit setting and it will trip the alarm status high (1)
when |P-D| is equal to or greater than the limit
setting. The alarm status will clear (0) when |P-D| is
less than the limit setting minus the deadband.
+
DEV
Input D
ABS
-
P - MINSCALE
OR
Input P
Logic OR
P -MAXSCALE
BLOCK DIAGRAM
OR compares the process input with the range limits referenced by the range pointer parameter and will trip the
alarm status high (1) when the process is equal to or greater than the high limit or equal to or less than the low
limit. The alarm status will clear (0) when the process is less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater
than the low limit plus the deadband.
POWER UP - During a warm start, all alarms will be handled the same as during a hot start: outputs are initialized
at the last state, all previously acknowledged alarms are treated as acknowledged, and any new alarms will be
processed on the first scan cycle. On a cold start, all alarm outputs are initialized at 0, all alarms are reset and any
new alarms, based on the block inputs, will be processed during the first scan cycle. Also, during a cold start,
alarms will be enabled or disabled as determined by the PU ENable parameters.
Alarm Status
Alarm status is available with Modbus communication or the Local Instrument Link option for alarm management
at a remote location. The alarm status is available in coils with Modbus communication or the same information is
packed into a single word (Alarm Status Word) with LIL communication. Detailed information can be found in
the Network Communications section of this document.
3-22
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
An alarm status word is shown below.
A_=1 when the alarm is active
N_=1 when the alarm is Not acknowledged
E_=1 when the alarm is enabled (when the alarm is disabled the E, N, and A bits are set to 0)
OS=1 indicates that all alarms are identified as Out of Service which means that all alarms function normally but
the OS flag indicates to a higher level device that they can be ignored. OS cannot be set locally.
CC=1 indicates a configuration change has occurred. It can be reset by a write command.
AE=1 indicates an Active Event is present within the loop. It will clear when all the loop events clear.
NA will be set to 1 when events occur and at least one within the loop has not yet been acknowledged. It can be
reset to 0 which will acknowledge all events within the loop or when 0 will indicate all active events have been
acknowledged
BIT
1
0
15
AE
14
NA
13
CC
12
OS
11
E4
10
N4
9
A4
8
E3
7
N3
6
A3
5
E2
4
N2
3
A2
2
E1
1
N1
0
A1
3.2.13 AND_ - AND Logic
AND_ function blocks perform a logical AND on the
three inputs. Any unused input will be set high (1).
A
B
C
AND
AND_
AND
O1
.
.
AND TRUTH TABLE
A
B
C
Output 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT
ES
ESN = 000
AND
A
B
C
N
O1
Output 1
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-23
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.14 AOE_ - Analog Output - Ethernet (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
AOE_ function blocks are available when the optional
Ethernet communication board is installed. Up to 32 AOE
blocks are available and are assigned in sequence with
each use, station wide.
ANALOG OUTPUT - ETHERNET
The range pointer parameter (Input R) enables the block to
pass the range scaling to AIE function blocks in other
Moore and Procidia controllers connected over the
Ethernet network.
Range
R
Input S
S
RG PTR
I N PU T S
Ethernet Network
AOE_
ANALOG OUTPUT
ETHERNET
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .............. loop tag.block tag (null)
INPUT S (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
(Rev. 2)
3.2.15 AOL_ - Analog Output - LIL
AOL_ function blocks are available when the optional
LIL communication board is installed. They enable the
station to provide a LIL global output, received as an
interconnection from another function block. AOL block
numbers are assigned in sequence with each use, station
wide. The configuration requires the entry of a LIL
Channel number to which the data is to be assigned. The
range pointer parameter (input R) enables the block to
scale the LIL global output (GO), in the standard $80$F80 range, for the range of input S. If the pointer is not
configured the value will be scaled as 0.0 to 100.0.
n
3-24
1
GO
2
3
4
MINSCALE
5
6
MAXSCALE
ANALOG OUTPUT - LIL
AOL_
Range
R
Input S
S
L I L
CH AN
RG P TR
I NPUT S
7
8
ENG UNITS
ANALOG OUTPUT - LIL
LIL
GLOBAL
DATA
LIL CHANnel (H) ................................. 006 to 255 (null)
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .............. loop tag.block tag (null)
INPUT S (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
9
10`
11
Input S
256
105
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.16 AOP_ - Analog Output lev_Percent
AOP_ function blocks convert a function block
interconnection signal, input S, to a output which is
bound to a network variable in a node on the
LonWorks network having a SNVT (Standard
Network Variable Type of lev_percent. A maximum
of 25 AOP blocks can be used, up to the limit of nodes
allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of
the controller. Each use of the block will be assigned a
unique station wide ID (e.g. AOP13). These blocks
will be available when the LonWorks option board is
installed in a 352P, 353, or 354N controller.
ANALOG OUTPUT LEV_PERCENT
AOP_
Range
R
Input 1
1
Quality Status
LonWorks
Remote I/O Bus
ANALOG OUTPUT
LEV_PERCENT
nvoAOPnn1
nv * SNVT_lev_percent
QS
RG PT R
I NPU T 1
NV NUM
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ........ loop tag.block tag (null)
INPUT 1 (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Network Variable NUMber (nv*) (R) ...... 1 to 2000 (*)
The range pointer parameter (input R) tells the
function block where to obtain the signal’s range
scaling information. An unconfigured range pointer will use a default range of 0.00 to 100.00. The signal will be
scaled and transmitted on the network as a SNVT_lev_percent (SNVT #81) data type. The NV NUM parameter
enables viewing the output variable number. This may be needed when using a remote PC network manager to
bind this output with the network variable in a remote node.
The block output QS indicates the quality status of the Lon output and will go high when the output is of bad
quality. Bad quality usually indicates a loss of communications within the LonWorks network.
Station
LonWorks
option board
node u
1
Scaling
Output
nv * SNVT ^
nv * binding
node r, nv x
LonWorks Remote
Device
Remote
I/O Bus
node r
nv x SNVT ^
^ SNVT_lev_percent
RanGe PoinTeR
NV NUM (nv *)
X03130S0
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-25
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.17 AOUT_ - Analog Outputs
AOUT_ function blocks convert function block
interconnection signals, connected to input S, to a
block output having a range of 4-20 mAdc. Input
D can be used to disconnect the output from the
load when asserted high (1). This feature is useful
when two or more controllers are connected to a
common load. When one controller is connected to
the load, others are disconnected using the
disconnect feature. The function block includes
scaling to range the 4-20 mA output with the
block input signal. The range pointer parameter
(input R) tells the block where to obtain scaling
information. If this parameter is not configured the
block will use a range of 0.0 to 100.0.
ANALOG OUTPUT _
AOUT_
Range
R
Signal
S
Disconnect
D
ANALOG OUTPUT
4 - 20 mA dc
Quality Status
I
I
CA
CA
CA
RG
NP
NP
L
L
L
U
U
Z
F
V
AOUT_+
AOUT_c
QS
P
T
T
E
U
I
TR
S
D
RO
LL
EW
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ....... loop tag.block tag (null)
INPUT S (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT D (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
ZERO output (C) ....................... 4.0 mA
FULL scale output (C) .............. 20.0 mA
VIEW output - verify cal. (C) ............. mA
Two analog output function blocks are available
on the Controller Board and one additional on the Expander Board. Function block names and terminal
identifications are listed below. The output is factory calibrated for 4-20 mAdc and should not require field
calibration. However, field calibration can be performed if desired. The output is calibrated by adjusting the
pulser until the desired output (i.e. 4.0 mA for zero) is obtained and then pressing the store button. A verify mode
is available during calibration that will show the mA value in the numeric display as the pulser adjusts the output
over the full range.
Output QS is the Quality Status output. It will go high if the output driver detects a high impedance or an open
circuit. The alphanumeric will flash AOUT_.OC when an open circuit condition is detected. The QS output could
also be used to switch to a second output circuit in a redundancy application.
S
Scaling
D/A
AOUT_+
Output
RanGe PoinTeR
AOUT_c
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-26
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.18 ASN_ - ARCSINE
ASN__ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, accept an
input between -1.0 and 1.0 and provide an output signal in radians
of which the input is the sine.
ARCSINE
ASN
Input X
.
X
ASIN (X)
Output 1
Input X
X
I NPU T X
ES N
O1
ESN = 000
O1 = ASIN (X)
O1
Output 1
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.19 ATD_ - Analog Trend Display
ATD_ blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, can be used as
needed in loops (up to a maximum of 5 per loop) to trend
an analog variable connected to input A. The block can
store up to 170 data points depending upon the use of the
enable/disable function (see below). A trend can be
displayed using Modbus commands. Data can be retrieved
and displayed by a remote operator station that can retrieve,
interpret, and display data packets from the station. A PC
or i|station running i|ware PC operator interface software
can display trend data on a Loop Detail screen or Analog
Detail screen.
Parameter TRND TYP allows data to be stored in one of
two formats: the average over each sample time or the
peak/peak values of the data over each sample time. All
data is stored in a normalized form based on the value of
the RG PTR (range pointer) input. The range information
will be part of the data packet when retrieved over the
network communications. When this input is unconfigured,
a range of 0.0 - 100.0 will be used.
ANALOG TREND DISPLAY
ATD
ANALOG TREND
R
A
E
TF
R
S MP
TRN
OV E
I N
I N
G
P
T I
D T
RWR
PUT
PUT
E
T R
ME
YP
I T
A
E
SN
Trend Full
RanGe PoinTeR ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
SaMPle TIME ....... 0.01 to 480.00 min. (0.10)
(A)
TReND TYPe .. P-P(peak/peak)/A(average)
OVERWRITe ......................... YES/NO (YES)
INPUT A ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT E ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. ................... 000 to 250 (000)
Several inputs can control the operation of the ATD function block. Input E (enable) can be used to enable the
trend function when high (1) or unconfigured. Trend action can be disabled by setting E low (0). Each time the
function block is enabled a new trend packet will be created.
The block also includes parameter OVERWRIT that, when set to YES, will cause the block to overwrite old data
(i.e. circular file). When the parameter is set to NO, the block will stop trending when full and retain the data until
reset. When the full state is reached, output TF (Trend Full) will go high (1). This function can be used to enable
a second ATD block.
May 2001
3-27
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.20 ATN_ - ARCTANGENT
ATN__ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, output a
signal in radians of which the input is the tangent.
ARCTANGENT
ATN
Input X
.
X
ATAN (X)
Output 1
Input X
X
ESN = 000
O 1 = ATAN (X)
O1
Output 1
O1
.
I NPU T X
ESN
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-28
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.21 BATOT - Batch Totalizer
BATOT function blocks can be used on a one per loop
basis and integrate an analog input. Each provides an
output signal representing a total integrated value over
the time base selected. For example, if the time base is
minutes and input A is 5.0 for 60 minutes, output TL
would equal 300.0. The total can be displayed on the
operator faceplate as <loop tag>.T if the configuration
parameter DISP TOT is set to YES. A 6-character
maximum name (e.g. GAL) is entered in configuration
under TOT UNIT to identify the totalizer units.
Input S asserted high (1) will stop the integrator action.
Input R will cause the integrator function to reset to the
initial value (INIT VAL). These inputs do not affect the
PuLse output. The integrator output is summed with the
INITial VALue entered in configuration to provide the
count total. The INIT VAL is used as the total when the
BATOT is reset.
DIR ACT set to YES will cause the integrator to increase
its output while NO will cause the integrator output to
decrease. When INIT VAL is set to a predetermined
batch amount, decreasing action will provide a count
down counter. This is sometimes preferred since the
count output then represents the amount remaining in a
batch.
BATCH TOTALIZER
BATOT
Ext. Count In
ESN = 000
EC
Analog Input
A
BATCH
Stop
S
TOTALIZER
TL
TotaL
T1
Trip 1
T2
Trip 2
PuLse
Reset
R
PL
Trip 1 (external)
T1
A1
Alarm 1
Trip 2 (external)
T2
A2
Alarm 2
TB
T OT UN I T
I N I T V AL
D I R ACT
Z DO
PU L AST
P RESE T
1
PRES ET
2
P UL
SCAL
D I SP TOT
QU I CKSET
Q S DPP
I NPU T EC
I N PU T A
I NPUT S
I N PUT R
I NPUT T 1
I NPU T T 2
ESN
Time Base (S) .........1-sec,2-min,3-hr,4-day,5-wk
TOTalizer UNITs (S) ....................... 6 Char ASCII
INITial VALue (S) ......................................... Real
DIRect ACTing (S) ................................. NO/YES
Zero Drop Out (S) ........................................ Real
Power Up LAST (S) ............................... NO/YES
PRESET 1 (S) .............................................. Real
PRESET 2 (S) .............................................. Real
PULse SCALing (S) .................................... Real
DISPlay TOTal (H) ................................. NO/YES
QUICK SET presets (S) ..........................NO/YES
Quick Set presets Dec. Pt. Pos. (H) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0.
INPUT EC (H) .................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT A (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT S (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT R (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT T1(H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT T2 (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............................. 001 to 250
(2)
(null)
(0.0)
(YES)
(0.0)
(YES)
(0.0)
(0.0)
(1.0)
(YES)
(YES)
(0.)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
ZDO is used for setting a small positive value, insuring that the integrator will stop when the flow is shut off,
which might not otherwise happen if a flowmeter zero is out of calibration.
The function block has two trip presets: PRESET 1 and PRESET 2. These can be set to cause a high output (1)
from A1 or A2 when the count total equals or exceeds the preset values. The preset values, entered in
configuration, can also be set using the QUICK button if the parameter QUICKSET has been set to YES. The QS
DPP parameter allows fixing the decimal point during quickset to speed up changes to these settings. A parameter
value with no decimal point position, the default, is for applications dealing with the totalizer count as whole units.
An external preset can be used by providing an input to T1 and/or T2 and when used, the internal preset will be
ignored. If an external preset is used, the value can be viewed but not changed in QUICKSET.
The action of the presets is also determined by the action setting of the integrator. When DIR ACT is set to YES
the presets will be direct acting and will cause outputs A1 or A2 to go high when the integrated total is equal to or
higher than the preset. If set to NO the total will cause A1 or A2 to go high when the total is equal to or lower
than the preset. The actual preset value is available on outputs T1 and T2.
The function block can also provide a pulse output to drive a remote counter. The pulse output function integrates
the input signal using the same time base and output pulses at a rate determined by the PUL SCAL configuration
parameter. This parameter determines the change to the integrator total that must occur to cause a new output
pulse. In the above example, if PUL SCAL equals 10, a total of 30 pulses will have occurred in the same time
period. The PUL SCAL value is also the multiplier that would be used to read the exact value of gallons to a
remote counter. The pulse output function operates on the absolute value of the analog input. When both negative
and positive values are to be totalized, a CoMParator block can be used to sense the polarity of the analog input
and the CMP output can then indicate a direction to the counter.
May 2001
3-29
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
Be sure that the PUL SCAL setting does not require a pulse rate output greater than the scan cycle time of the
controller under the maximum input conditions. Using the same example, if the maximum A input is 60.0 and the
cycle time is 0.1 sec, the maximum required pulse rate is 0.1/sec. The condition is satisfied since the maximum
output requirement is less than the maximum pulse rate of 5/sec available with a 0.1 sec cycle time. The
requirement would also be satisfied if a PUL SCAL of 1 was selected which would have required a maximum pulse
rate of 1/sec.
POWER UP - During a warm start, if the configuration parameter PU LAST was set to YES, the integrator
function will initialize with the last value prior to power down and all outputs will be initialized to the last value
prior to power down. If set to NO, or during a cold start, the integrator and all outputs will initialize to 0.
Input EC allows the batch totalizer block to be used with another function block, such as the DINU that provides a
count signal. When input A is not configured it will be set to (0.0). The EC input is summed with the initial value
for use as the total. This value will now be displayed as the total on the operator faceplate and the presets will act
on this value to provide outputs A1 and A2.
BATCH TOTALIZER
EC
External Count Input
Integrator
Zero Drop Out
.
A
A(t) dt
+/- 1
ZDO
+
+
TotaL
Analog Input
DIRect ACTing ?
TOTalizer_UNITs
Display (.T)
3
S
R
TL
+
..
2 1
Stop
Reset
PRESET 1
INITital VALue
7
..
Trip 1
0 0
Trip 1 - External Setting
Alarm 1
T1
PRESET 2
8
..
Trip 2
0 0
Trip 2 - External Setting
T2
Alarm 2
PULse SCALing
PuLse
.00001 - 99999
Required:
Max. Pulse Rate =
T1
.
A1
T2
A2
PL
Available:
A (maximum)
Max. Pulse Rate =
[Time Base (sec) ][PUL SCAL]
0.5
Cycle Time
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-30
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.22 BATSW - Batch Switch
BATSW function blocks can be used on a one per loop
basis. Each is used with a PID function block to
eliminate overshoot during startup conditions. When
placed in the feedback path of the controller it causes the
reset component of the controller to be reduced (if
controller action is Rev). Without the use of a batch
switch during startup, the controller output (O1 = GE +
R) will equal full output since the reset will wind up. This
requires the process to overshoot the setpoint in order to
bring the controller output back down. With a batch
switch in the feedback path, a lower reset value will be
present when crossover occurs, thus reducing or
eliminating overshoot.
BATCH SWITCH
BATSW
Input A
H I
LO
ESN = 000
BATCH SWITCH
A
L I M I
L I M I
BP
GA I
I NP U T
ES
T
T
L
N
A
N
O1
Output 1
HIgh LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (100.0)
LOw LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (0.0)
Batch Pre-Load (S) .................. Real (50.0)
GAIN (S) .................................... Real (32.0)
(null)
INPUT A (H) .... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ........... 001 to 250
As input A equals or exceeds the HI or LO LIMIT setting, the output of the batch switch will be either decreased
(HI LIMIT) or increased (LO LIMIT), changing the feedback signal and therefore the controller reset signal. This
maintains controller output at the batch switch limit setting and eliminates reset windup.
If a controller has a large proportional gain setting, the reset can be modified too much, such that the process may
under shoot the setpoint during a startup condition. The BPL (Batch Pre-Load) is adjusted to optimize the
controller for startup conditions by limiting how much the batch switch can adjust the controller feedback signal.
When the controller output is within its normal operating output, the batch switch has no effect on the controller.
This allows the controller to be tuned optimally for normal operating conditions and the batch switch to add
additional compensation, very similar to derivative action, only during startup.
A
.
-
GAIN
+
HI LIMIT
Batch Pre-Load
GAIN
+
LO
Selector
+
+
-
HI
Selector
+
LO
Selector
+
HI
Selector
Output
O1
.
LO LIMIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-31
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.23 BIAS - Bias
BIAS function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis
and provide a means to bias a signal, such as the setpoint in
an external set application. Inputs A and E (external bias)
are summed and then added to the operator adjustable bias
B.
BIAS
BIAS
ESN = 000
Range
R
Input A
A
B
Input E
E
BIAS
Track Command TC
Track Command input TC, asserted high (1), will cause the
block output to track input TV and BIAS to be recalculated
Track Variable TV
as B = TV - (A+E). The value of B will be clamped at the
HI and LO LIMIT settings. It is important to realize that
RG PT R
B I AS
the inputs and outputs are in engineering units and the
H I
L I M I T
limits must be adjusted accordingly with the expected
LO L I M I T
I NPUT A
minimum and maximum required range values. The default
I NPUT E
values have been set to -150.00 and +150.00, which might
I NPUT T C
I NPUT T V
be the normal expected limits when using the default range
QU I C KS ET
of 0.0 to 100.0. These values can be set lower but have a
ESN
maximum setting of +/-150% of the range pointer value.
The default range is 0.00 to 100.00 if the pointer is not configured.
O=B+A+E
O1
Output 1
TO
Tracked Output
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ... loop tag.block tag
BIAS (S) ..................................... Real
HIgh Bias LIMIT (S) .................... Real
LOw Bias LIMIT (S) .................... Real
INPUT A (H) ...... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT E (H) ...... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT TC (H) ... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT TV (H) .... loop tag.block tag.output
QUICK SET bias (S) ............. NO/YES
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............ 001 to 250
(null)
(0.00)
(150.0)
(-150.0)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(YES)
If, for example, the BIAS block is used to bias a flow setpoint with a range pointer (input R) of 0-6.00 GPM, the
maximum bias adjustments would be +/-9.00. If limit adjustments of +/-50% of this range are desired, then the
BIAS block LO LIMIT should be set at -3.00 and the HI LIMIT at +3.00. If a range change is made the current
LIMIT settings and the current BIAS value will be changed to be the same % value within the new range.
The BIAS can be adjusted using the QUICKSET feature if the parameter QUICKSET is set to YES. The BIAS
value will continuously change as the knob is adjusted but the STORE button must be pressed when the final value
is reached to insure that the new BIAS setting will be retained on a Cold power up condition.
Any unused inputs to the block will be set equal to 0.
The TO (Tracked Output) is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a bias in
place of the BIAS parameter (B is then set to 0.0). When it is desired to have the output of the BIAS block track
the TV variable, the external device is forced to track TO. Input E will then equal TV- [A+(0.0)] and, therefore,
the BIAS block output O1 will equal TV.
A
.
-
GAIN
+
HI LIMIT
Batch Pre-Load
GAIN
+
LO
Selector
+
+
-
HI
Selector
+
LO
Selector
+
HI
Selector
Output
O1
.
LO LIMIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-32
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.24 CIE_- Coil Inputs - Ethernet (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
COIL INPUTS 16 CHAN - ETHERNET
CIE_
Ethernet Network
CIE_ function blocks are available when the optional
Ethernet communication board is installed. They allow
the controller to obtain up to 16 discrete Modbus coil data
from other stations over Ethernet. A configuration value
of 0000 will turn off the channel. The configuration
includes the IP address of the other device on the Ethernet
network, the number of coils requested, and the starting
coil address. Up to 32 CIE_ blocks are available and are
assigned in sequence with each use, station wide. The
data are received as boolean values that are dispersed to
individual boolean outputs. C0 gets the value of the first
start-coil and each subsequent output gets the next value.
If there are less than 16 coils, the remaining values will be
set to zero.
COIL INPUTS
16-CHAN ETHERNET
I P A D RE S
ST ART
CL
NO OF
CL
C0
Output C0
CF
Output CF
QS
Output QS
IP ADdRESs (H) ..... nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (null)
STARTing CoiL (H) .. 0000 - 65535 (null)
NO. OF COILs (H) ................ 1 - 16 (1)
(Rev. 2)
3.2.25 CHR_ - Characterizer
CHR_ function blocks provide 10 segments that can be
used to characterize the X input signal. Individual
segments are configured by entering the Xn, Yn and
Xn+1, Yn+1 points for each segment. All Xn+1 points
must be greater than the associated Xn points. Input X is
in engineering units and the Y points should be in the
engineering units desired for the characterizer output.
CHARACTERIZER
Output Coordinates
Y5
Y6
Y4
Y7
Y8
Y3
Y9
Y10
Output Y
OY
Y2
Y1
Y0
X0
X
Input X
X1 X2
X3 X4
X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
Input Coordinates
X03131S0
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
X10
CHARACTERIZER
CHR_
Input X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X 1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y 1
I NPUT
ES
X
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
X
N
ESN = 000
CHARACTERIZER
OY
Output Y
Input Coordinate X0 (S) ............................ Real (0.0)
Input Coordinate X1 (S) ............................ Real (10.0)
Input Coordinate X2 (S) ............................ Real (20.0)
Input Coordinate X3 (S) ............................ Real (30.0)
Input Coordinate X4 (S) ............................ Real (40.0)
Input Coordinate X5 (S) ............................ Real (50.0)
Input Coordinate X6 (S) ............................ Real (60.0)
Input Coordinate X7 (S) ............................ Real (70.0)
Input Coordinate X8 (S) ............................ Real (80.0)
Input Coordinate X9 (S) ............................ Real (90.0)
Input Coordinate X10 (S) .......................... Real . (100.0)
Output Coordinate Y0 (S) ......................... Real (0.0)
Output Coordinate Y1 (S) ......................... Real (10.0)
Output Coordinate Y2 (S) ......................... Real (20.0)
Output Coordinate Y3 (S) ......................... Real (30.0)
Output Coordinate Y4 (S) ......................... Real (40.0)
Output Coordinate Y5 (S) ......................... Real (50.0)
Output Coordinate Y6 (S) ......................... Real (60.0)
Output Coordinate Y7 (S) ......................... Real (70.0)
Output Coordinate Y8 (S) ......................... Real (80.0)
Output Coordinate Y9 (S) ......................... Real (90.0)
Output Coordinate Y10 (S) ....................... Real (100.0)
INPUT X (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .......................... 001 to 250
3-33
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.26 CMP_ - Comparator
CMP_ function blocks compare analog input A with an
external or internal limit setting and provide a high (1)
output when the limit is exceeded.
COMPARATOR
CMP_
ACTION - the CMP block can be configured as direct or
reverse action. Direct action will cause the output to go
high when input A is equal to or greater than the limit.
Reverse action will cause the output to go high when
input A is equal to or less than the limit.
+
Analog
Input
Output 1
EL
External
Limit
A
External Limit
EL
L I M I T
D BAN D
D I R ACT
I NPUT A
I NPUT E L
ESN
DIRect ACTing
A
Analog Input
ESN = 000
COMPARATOR
Output 1
O1
Comparator LIMIT (S) ..................... Real
Dead BAND (S) .............................. Real
DIRect ACTing (S) .................... NO/YES
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT EL (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(0.0)
(0.5)
(YES)
(null )
(null)
O1
-
LIMIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
X03132S0
DEAD BAND - the output will return from a high (1) output to a low (0) output when input A is less than the limit
- Dead BAND setting for direct action or greater than the limit + Dead BAND for reverse action.
EXTERNAL LIMIT - When input EL is configured, the LIMIT setting will be ignored and the value of input EL
will be used as the limit value.
3.2.27 COS_ - COSINE
COS_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, accept radian
inputs and output the cosine of that angle.
COSINE
COS
Input X
.
X
COS (X)
Output 1
Input X
X
ESN = 000
O1 = COS (X)
O1
Output 1
O1
.
I NPU T X
ES N
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-34
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.28 DAM_ - Deviation Amplifier
DAM_ function blocks compute the difference between
inputs A and B, amplify the difference signal, and sum
the resultant with an internal BIAS and an external signal
at input C. Unused inputs are set to 0.0.
BIAS
A
Input A
+
GAIN
B
C
.
+
+
Input B
Input C
DEVIATION AMPLIFIER
DAM_
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
G
B
I NPU
I NPU
I NPU
A I N
I A S
T A
T B
T C
ES N
ESN = 000
DEVIATION
O1`
Output 1
AMPLIFIER
+
Output 1
O1
.
GAIN (S) .................................... Real
BIAS (S) ..................................... Real
INPUT A (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............ 001 to 250
(1.0)
(0.0)
(null)
(null)
(null)
O1 = GAIN x (A - B) + BIAS + C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-35
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.29 DID_ - Digital Input lev_Discrete
DID_ function blocks convert 16 on/off signals received from
a single or multiple nodes on the LonWorks network into 16
block outputs for use by other function blocks within the
controller. A maximum of 6 DID blocks can be used, up to
the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the memory
limit of the controller. Each use of the block will be assigned
a unique station wide ID (e.g. DID02). Input connections are
established by ‘binding’ each output variable of type
SNVT_lev_disc (SNVT #22) in the remote node devices to
each network variable in the DID function block. These
blocks will be available when the LonWorks option board is
installed in a 352P, 353, or 354N controller.
DIGITAL INPUT LEV_DISCRETE
LonWorks
Remote I/O Bus
0
1
nviDIDnn_0
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_1
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_2
2
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
DID_
DIGITAL INPUT
LEV_DISCRETE
(16 channel)
nviDIDnn_3
3
4
5
The 0 NV NUM parameter enables the number that the
station has assigned to input 0. All subsequent network
variables are assigned consecutively.
6
7
8
9
Each function block output has a mode associated with it.
The mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED. When using
a PC capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands, the mode
can be changed and the forced state can be assigned a high
(1) or low (0) value. The values accessible over the network
are the two switch inputs (N and F) and the position of the
SPDT switch illustrated in the block diagram. A mode of ‘0’
is Normal and ‘1’ is Forced.
A
B
C
D
E
F
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_4
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_5
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_6
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
(Channel 0)
O0
Output 0
Q0
Quality 0
OF
Output F
QF
Quality F
QS
Quality Status
nviDIDnn_7
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_8
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_9
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
(Channel F)
nviDIDnn_A
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_B
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_C
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_D
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nvDIDnn_E
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
nviDIDnn_F
nv* SNVT _ lev_disc
Each function block output also has a quality status associated
0
N V N U M 0 Network Variable NUMber (nv *) (R) ....... 1 to 2000
with it. This status will go high (1) when the block
determines it has lost communication with the Lon node. If
any of the individual quality outputs are high the Quality Status block output will also be high.
LonWorks Remote Devices
(*)
Station
node r1
nv x1 SNVT_
node r2
nv x1 SNVT_
nv x1 binding
node u, nv *E
nv x1 binding
node u, nv *0
Remote
I/O Bus
nv x2 SNVT_
LonWorks
option board
node u
N
nv *0 SNVT_
O0
nv x2 binding
node u, nv *1
Channel 0
F0
Q0
N
nv *0 SNVT_
nv x2 SNVT_
F
OF
nv x2 binding
node u, nv *F
Channel F
Quality Test
X03133S0
FF
F
QF
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-36
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.30 DIE_ - Digital Input - Ethernet (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
DIE_ function blocks are available when the optional
Ethernet communication board is installed. They allow the
controller to obtain up to 16 digital points from another
Moore or Procidia controller over the Ethernet network.
Up to 32 DIE_ blocks are available and they are assigned
in sequence with each use, station wide. The data is
received as an integer value and is fanned out to the block
outputs D0 - DF
DIGITAL INPUTS 16 CHAN - ETHERNET
Ethernet Network
DIE_
Output QS indicates the quality of the received data and
will go high (1) when the data is bad. This is normally
associated with failure to receive data due to a
communication failure or a misconfiguration of the source.
I P
DIGITAL INPUTS
16-CHAN ETHERNET
AD RE S
MB R E G
D0
Output D0
DF
Output DF
QS
Output QS
IP ADdRESs (H) . nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (192.168.0.0)
ModBus REGister (H) .. 0000 - 65535 (null)
(Rev. 2)
Modbus registers associated with DOE function blocks for
digital inputs coming from other controllers are listed below.
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
FB Number
MB
Register
DOE01
DOE02
DOE03
DOE04
DOE05
DOE06
DOE07
DOE08
31025
31026
31027
31028
31029
31030
31031
31032
DOE09
DOE10
DOE11
DOE12
DOE13
DOE14
DOE15
DOE16
31033
31034
31035
31036
31037
31038
31039
31040
DOE17
DOE18
DOE19
DOE20
DOE21
DOE22
DOE23
DOE24
31041
31042
31043
31044
31045
31046
31047
31048
DOE25
DOE26
DOE27
DOE28
DOE29
DOE30
DOE31
DOE32
31049
31050
31051
31052
31053
31054
31055
31056
3.2.31 DIL_ - Discrete Input _ LIL
DIL_ function blocks are available when the optional LIL
communication board is installed. DIL block numbers are
assigned in sequence with each use, station wide. The block
allows the station to obtain a global word (GW) from another
station on the LIL.
DISCRETE (WORD) INPUT - LIL
DIL_
DISCRETE (WORD)
LIL
GLOBAL
DATA
The function block has 16 outputs, D0 through DF, which
represent the values of bits 0-F in the global word. Output QS
indicates the quality of the received data and will go high (1)
when the data is bad. This is normally associated with failure to
receive global data due to a LIL failure or a misconfiguration of
the source.
INPUT - LIL
S RCE ADD
S RCE CHN
L I L CH AN
D0
Output D0
DF
Output DF
QS
Output QS
SouRCE ADDress (H) ...... 00 to 64 (null)
SouRCE CHaNnel (H) .. 000 to 255 (null)
LIL CHANnel (H) .......... 008 to 255 (null)
The received global word will also be re-transmitted by this station as a parameter 1 value in the configured
channel n.
n
May 2001
1
GW
2
SA/SC
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10`
11
12
3-37
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.32 DIN_ - Digital Inputs
DIN_ function blocks can be used to sense a discrete
signal from an external source and provide a block output
representing the state of this signal. Blocks are available
on the Controller Board and on the Expander Board.
Function block names (IDs) and terminal designators are
listed in Section 8.4.
DIGITAL INPUT _
DIN_
DIN_+
O1
Output 1
QS
Quality Status
DIGITAL INPUT
DIN_-
The block output is high (1) when the input is on and low
(0) when off.
Output QS indicates the quality status of the output signal
O1 and will be high (1) when the output is of bad quality.
Bad quality indicates any hardware failure of the input
converter.
DIN_+
+
A/D
24 Vdc
Typical External
Circuit
O1
DIN_-
Quality Test
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-38
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.33 DINU_- Digital Inputs, Universal
DINU_ blocks have multi-function capability:
•
•
•
DIGITAL INPUT - UNIVERSAL
sensing a discrete input and providing a high (1) or
low (0) output representing the state of the input
DINU_
totalizing and scaling the count of input pulses
converting the rate of input pulses to a scaled analog
frequency output
Reset
R
Direction
D
OR
Output Range
DIGITAL INPUT
CT
Count Total
UNIVERSAL
SF
Scaled Freq.
Track Variable TV
Track Command TC
QS
DINU_+
Two DINU_ blocks are available on the I/O expander
board. The fixed names (IDs) of these blocks and their
terminal designations are listed in Section 8.4.
Input State
IS
Quality Status
DINU_-
Z D
F R EQ M I
F R E Q MA
K SCAL
D I G F I L
M I N SCA L
MAX SCA L
DP
ENGUN I T
PU
L AS
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT T
I NPUT T
Output CT represents the scaled (actual count x K) total of
input pulses that occurred since the last reset. This output
is a real number and can be used in a number of
applications, such as a direct count input to the BAT batch
totalizer function block or in math operations, such as
computing the difference between counts in a ratio trim
circuit.
Output IS is the current state of the input at the time the
block is executed at the start of each controller scan cycle.
It will be low (0) when the input is low and high (1) when the input is high.
O
N
X
E
T
E
E
P
S
T
R
D
V
C
Zero Drop Out frequency (H) ................. Real
(0)
FREQuency MINimum Hz (H) ................ Real
(0)
Hz
(H)
...............
Real
FREQuency MAXimum
(1000)
K factor SCALE (H) ................................ Real (1.0)
DIGital FILTer (S) ....................... 0 to 180 sec (0 sec)
MINimum SCALE (H) ............................. Real (0.0)
MAXimum SCALE (H) ............................ Real (100.0)
Decimal Point Position (preferred) (S) ............. 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.00)
ENGineering UNITS (S) ............ 6 Char ASCII (PRCT)
Power Up LAST (S) .......................... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT R (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT D (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT TV (H) ................ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT TC (H) ................ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Output SF is a scaled frequency (using the FREQ MIN and MAX parameters) that can represent flow rate, speed,
or other transmitter variable that has a frequency signal. When the FREQ MAX parameter is set to 25 or less, a 20
msec contact debounce is used. When contact debounce is used, a pulse input must remain on for 20 msec to be
recognized as a valid pulse. Output SF is linear with frequency and can be characterized using the CHR function
block if necessary. An engineering range and units are assigned to this signal using the MINSCALE,
MAXSCALE, DPP, and ENGUNITS parameters. They are available to other blocks using the OR output
connection.
Input R resets output CT to 0.0. Input D controls the direction of the count. When direction input D is low (0),
the count will move backwards, including negative values. The direction input feature enables the use of count
down counters and it allows duplication of functions performed by previous computer pulse interfaces having a
Pulse/Direction format. Input TC asserted high (1) will force the scaled count to track an external signal. This
can be used in applications where the CT output is being used to set a value (e.g. setpoint) that can be changed
from another source.
The quality status output QS indicates the
quality of the block outputs and is high (1)
when outputs CT, IS, or SF are of bad
quality. Bad quality indicates a failure in the
hardware conversion circuit.
R
D
TV
TC
Reset
Direction
Track Variable
Count
Track Command
Count Total
K
DIU_+
Current Limit < 7 mA
CT
ENG UNITS
.
.
POWER UP - With PU LAST set to YES, the
CT output will power up at the last value
during a hot or warm start. If set to NO,
during a warm or a cold start it will be set to
0.0. The digital filter will be temporarily bypassed during a hot, a warm or a cold start.
May 2001
P/A Converter
Digital
Filter
Scaling
DIU_-
Scaled Freq.
SF
IS
Quality Test
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-39
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.34 DIS_ - Digital Input _ State
DIS_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, convert a 16bit word received from a single node on the LonWorks network
into 16 block outputs for interconnection to other function blocks
within the controller. A maximum of 6 DIS blocks can be used,
up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the
memory limit of the controller. Each use of the block will be
assigned a unique station wide ID (e.g. DIS02). Input connections
are established by ‘binding’ the output variable of type
SNVT_state (SNVT #83) in the remote node to the network
variable in the DIS function block. These blocks will be available
when the LonWorks option board is installed in a 352P, 353, or
354N controller.
DIGITAL INPUT _ STATE
LONWorks
Network
0
nviDSnn0
nv* SNVT _ state
DISnn
DIGITAL INPUT
STATE
The 0 NV NUM parameter enables viewing the number that the
station has assigned to input 0.
Each function block output has a mode associated with it. The
mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED. When using a PC
capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands, the mode can be
changed and the forced state can be assigned a high (1) or low (0)
value. The values accessible over the network are the two switch
inputs (N and F) and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated
in the block diagram. A mode of ‘0’ is Normal and ‘1’ is Forced.
NV
NUM
view
O0
Output 0
O1
Output 1
O2
Output 2
O3
Output 3
O4
Output 4
O5
Output 5
O6
Output 6
O7
Output 7
O8
Output 8
O9
Output 9
OA
Output A
OB
Output B
OC
Output C
OD
Output D
OE
Output E
OF
Output F
QS
Quality Status
Network Variable NUMber (nv *) .... 1 to 2000
(*)
The function block also has a quality status output associated with
it. This status will go high (1) when the block determines it has lost communication with the Lon node.
Station
LON
option board
node u
LON node r1
LON network
nv x1 SNVT_
nv _
N
SNVT_
F0
nv x1 binding
node u, nv *0
O0
.
F
N
FF
OF
.
F
Quality Test
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-40
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.35 DIV_ - Division
DIV_ function blocks perform simple arithmetic division.
The output will be the quotient of the two configured
inputs N/D. The output will be limited to the maximum
real number and, if the divisor is 0.0, the output will go to
the maximum real number with the sign determined by
the numerator. If the numerator is 0.0, the output will be
0.0.
DIVISION
DIV_
Any unconfigured inputs will be set equal to 1.0.
Numerator
N
Denominator
D
I NPU T N
I NPU T D
ES N
ESN = 000
DIVISION
O1
Output 1
INPUT N (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT D (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
N
Numerator
D
.
O1
Output 1
01 = N/D
.
Denominator
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.36 DNC_ - Divide by N Counter
DNC_ function blocks provide a single output pulse for a
pre-selected number of input pulses. The output will go
high (1) with a positive transition of the input P and will
return to a low (0) output on the succeeding positive
transition.
DIVIDE BY N COUNTER
DNC_
Pulse Input
P
Reset
R
ESN = 000
DIVIDE BY N
COUNTER
O1
Output 1
N
Output 1
3
Divide By 3
R
Reset
Output 1
O1
.
2
.
N
PU L AS T
I NPU T P
I NPU T R
ES N
Counter Divisor N (S) ............. 2 - 999999
(2)
Power Up LAST (S) ................... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT P (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT R (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
Divide By 2
Pulse Input
P
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
POWER UP - During a hot or a warm start, with PU LAST
set to YES, the block will retain the last count and continue
at the last input/output states. If set to NO, during a warm or
a cold start, the output and count will be initialized to 0.
3-41
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.37 DOD_ - Digital Output lev_Discrete
DOD_ function blocks transmit up to 16 on/off signals
received from a controller block interconnection to
remote nodes on the LonWorks network. A maximum of
6 DOD blocks can be used, up to the limit of nodes
allowed on the Lon network or the memory limit of the
controller. Each use of the block will be assigned a
unique station wide ID (e.g. DOD01). Each input
transmitted is of type SNVT_lev_disc and can be bound
to network variables in a single or multiple remote nodes
that can receive network variables of this type. These
blocks will be available when the LonWorks option board
is installed in a 352P, 353, or 354N controller. The 0 NV
NUM parameter enables the number that the station has
assigned to input 0 to be viewed. All subsequent network
variables are assigned consecutively.
Each function block input has a mode associated with it.
The mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED. When
using a PC capable of sending LIL or Modbus
commands, the mode can be changed and the forced state
can be assigned a high (1) or low (0) value. The values
accessible over the network are the two inputs (F and N)
and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated in the
block diagram. A mode of ‘0’ is Normal and ‘1’ is
Forced.
Station
LonWorks
option board
node u
0
nv *0 SNVT_
N
nv *0 binding
node r1, nv z1
Q0
nv *1 SNVT_
1
N
nv *1 binding
node r1, nv z2
Q1
......
FE F
E
nv *E SNVT_
N
nv *E binding
node r6, nv z1
QE
FF
F
QF
F
nv *F SNVT_
LonWorks
Network
nv*0
nvoDODnn_0
SNVT _lev_disc
nv*1
nvoDODnn_1
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*2
nvoDODnn_2
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*3
nvoDODnn_3
SNVT _lev_disc
nv*4
nvoDODnn_4
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*5
nvoDODnn_5
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*6
nvoDODnn_6
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*7
nvoDODnn_7
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*8
nvoDODnn_8
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*9
nvoDODnn_9
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*A
nvoDODnn_A
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*B
nvoDODnn_B
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*C
nvoDODnn_C
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*D
nvoDODnnD
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*E
nvoDODnn_E
SNVT _ lev_disc
nv*F
nvoDODnn_F
SNVT _ lev_disc
DIGITAL OUTPUT
LEV_DISCRETE
(16 channel)
Input 0
0
Quality 0
Input F
(Channel 0)
Q0
F
Quality F
Quality Status
0
Remote
node r1
(Channel F)
QF
QS
......
NV
NUM
I NPUT 0
...........
I NPUT
F
0 Network Variable NUMber (nv*) (R) .... 1 to 2000 (*)
INPUT 0 (S) ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT F (S) ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
nv z1 SNVT_
nv z2 SNVT_
F
F1
DOD_
LonWorks remote
I/O devices
I/O Bus
F
F0
DIGITAL OUTPUT LEV_DISCRETE
node r2
......
......
......
nv z1 SNVT_
nv z2 SNVT_
Each function block input also has a quality status associated
with it. This status will go high (1) when the block
determines it has lost communication with the Lon node
bound to that input. If any of the individual quality inputs are
high, the Quality Status block output will also be high.
node r6
nv z1 SNVT_
nv z2 SNVT_
N
nv *F binding
node r6, nv z2
X03139S0
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-42
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.38 DOE_ - Digital Output - Ethernet (V2.4)
- Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers; not available on Moore 352P and
354/354N.
DOE_ function blocks are available when the optional
Ethernet communication board is installed. Up to 32 DOE
blocks are available and are assigned in sequence with each
use, station wide.
Ethernet Network
DIGITAL OUTPUT - ETHERNET
DOE_
Up to 16 digital inputs can be configured. The block will
pack inputs I0 - IF into a single integer word which can be
accessed from another controller having Ethernet
communication capability.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each DOE block is automatically assigned Modbus
registers that can be accessed from any device having the
Modbus Ethernet capability.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Input 0
I0
Input F
IF
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ETHERNET
INPUT 0 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 1 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 2 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 3 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 4 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 5 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 6 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 7 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 8 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 9 (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT A (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT D (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT E (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT F (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(Rev. 2)
3.2.39 DOL_ - Discrete Output - LIL
DISCRETE (WORD) OUTPUT - LIL
DOL_ function blocks are available when the optional LIL
communication board is installed. They allow the station to
output a global word GW with bits 0-F representing the
state 1 or 0 of each of the Boolean inputs D0 - DF.
Unconfigured inputs are set to 0. DOL block numbers are
assigned in sequence with each use, station wide.
n
May 2001
1
GW
2
3
4
5
6
DOL
Input D0
D0
LIL
GLOBAL
DATA
DISCRETE (WORD)
OUTPUT - LIL
Input DF DF
L I L CH AN
I NPU T D 0
LIL CHANnel (H) ......................... 008 to 255 (null)
INPUT DO (S) ..... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
I NPUT
INPUT DF (S) ...... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
7
8
D F
9
10`
11
12
3-43
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.40 DOS__ - Digital Output State
DOS_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, transmit up
to 16 on/off signals received from a controller block
interconnection to a remote node on the LonWorks network as a
single 16-bit word value. A maximum of 6 DOS blocks can be
used, up to the limit of nodes allowed on the Lon network or the
memory limit of the controller. Each use of the block will be
assigned a unique station wide ID (e.g. DOS01). The transmitted
value is of type SNVT_state and can be bound to a network
variable in a remote node that can receive a network variable of
this type. These blocks will be available when the LonWorks
option board is installed in a 352P, 353, or 354N controller.
Each function block input has a mode associated with it. The
mode can be either NORMAL or FORCED. When using a PC
capable of sending LIL or Modbus commands, the mode can be
changed and the forced state can be assigned a high (1) or low (0)
value. The values accessible over the network are the two switch
inputs (N and F) and the position of the SPDT switch illustrated
in the block diagram. A mode of ‘0’ is Normal and ‘1’ is Forced.
DIGITAL OUTPUT _ STATE
DOSnn
Input 0
0
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Input 1
1
STATE
Input 2
2
Input 3
3
Input 4
4
Input 5
5
Input 6
6
Input 7
7
Input 8
8
Input 9
9
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
Input D
D
Input E
E
Input F
F
Quality Status
The function block also has a quality status associated with it.
This status will go high (1) when the block determines it has lost
output communication with the Lon node bound to that input.
LONWorks
Network
nv*0
nvoDODnn0
SNVT _lev_disc
QS
NV
NUM
I NP UT
0
...........
I NPUT
F
Network Variable NUMber (nv*) .. 1 to 2000 (*)
INPUT 0 ............... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
view
INPUT F ............... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Station
LON
option board
node u
F0
nv _
0
LON node r1
LON network
nv z1 SNVT_
SNVT_
N
nv_ binding
node r1, nv z1
F1
1
F
N
FE
E
F
N
FF
F
F
F
N
QS
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-44
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.41 DOUT_ - Digital Outputs
DOUT_ function blocks are used to turn on remote
devices powered from an external source. The negative
terminal of the external power source must be connected
to station common. The transistor switch will turn on
when the block input S is high (1) and will turn off when
low (0). Two digital output function blocks are available
on the Controller Board.
DOUT_+
S
RELAY
D/A
DIGITAL OUTPUT _
DOUT_
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Switch
S
I NP U T
Open Collector
Transistor Switch
S
DOUT_+
DOUT_c
INPUT S (H) ...... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
24 V dc
DOUT_c
Terminal Connections:
Typical External
Relay Circuit
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
DOUT1 ----- DOUT1+ (8) -- DOUT1c (9)
DOUT2 ----- DOUT2+ (10) -- DOUT2c (9)
3-45
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.42 DTM_ - Dead Time Table
DTM_ function blocks provide shift registers to hold the
analog input signal A for a period of time and shift it from
register to register to provide an overall delay between
input and output as configured in parameter DEADTIME.
DEAD TIME
DTM_
Input AT can be used to adapt the DEADTIME to an
external signal. The actual shift register used as the block
output will equal the whole value of input AT (e.g. 0.184
= register 0, 1.897 = register 1).
Analog Input
A
Enable
E
Adaptive Time
DEA
I N
I N
I NP
Output MA will provide the moving average of register 0
to the output register divided by the number of registers
[e.g. output register = 50, MA = (R0+R1+R2+......+R50)/51].
ESN = 000
O1
Output 1
MA
Moving Average
DEAD TIME
AT
DT I ME
PU T A
PU T E
U T AT
ES N
DEAD TIME (S) ........ 0.0 to 10000 min.
INPUT A (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT E (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT AT (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .............. 001 to 250
(0.0)
(null)
(null)
(null)
Input E asserted high (1) will enable the operation of the DTM block. When this input is not configured, it will be
set high. A low (0) input will cause all registers and the outputs to equal the input A.
POWER UP - During a warm or cold start, all outputs will be initialized at 0 and all registers will be initialized to
the value of the input on the first scan.
A
Enable
Analog Input
n
n-1
n-2
.
.
.
.
n-48
Register 0
Register 1
SHIFT REGISTERS
E
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Output 1
O1
n-49
n-50
AT
Register 50
Moving Average
Adaptive Time
MA
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-46
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.43 DYT_ - Delay Timer
DYT_ function blocks perform either an ON or OFF
output delay as determined by the TYPE configuration
parameter.
DELAY TIMER
ESN = 000
DYT_
ON Delay - When input P is low (0), output O1 is low.
If P goes high (1), the elapsed timer starts and sets O1
high upon reaching the DLY TIME, provided P is still
high.
OFF Delay - When input P is high (1) the output is
high. If P goes low (0), the elapsed timer starts and
sets O1 low upon reaching the DLY TIME, provided P
is still low.
Pulse Input
DL Y
P
T I ME
T YPE
PU L AS T
I NPUT P
ESN
DELAY TIMER
ET
Elapsed Time
RT
Remaining Time
O1
Output 1
DeLaY TIME (minutes) (S) .............. Real (0.0)
Timer TYPE (S) ........................ OFF/ON (OFF)
Power Up LAST (S) .................. NO/YES (YES)
INPUT P (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
In firmware 1.30 and higher, the DLY TIME is adjustable over the full range of the display, which is 0.00000 to
999999. In earlier versions, the minimum time setting is 0.1. If the delay time is set to less than the scan time of
the station, the delay time will equal the scan time.
Output ET (elapsed time) will ramp from 0.0 to the value of DLY TIME and remain there until P resets the output.
Output RT (remaining time) equals DLY TIME - ET.
POWER UP - During a warm or a hot start, with PU LAST set to YES, the block will initialize with the
input/output states and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down occurred. A cold start, with PU LAST set
to NO, will initialize the input/output states and elapsed time to 0.
OFF
1
O1
0
DLY TIME
ET
ON
0.0
ET
RT
.
O1
1
O1
0
DLY TIME
ET
0.0
1
P
0
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-47
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.44 E/I - External/Internal Transfer Switch
E/I function blocks can be used on a one per loop
basis to select an analog signal, connected to input E
(External) or input I (Internal), as a setpoint for the
loop controller.
E/I TRANSFER SWITCH
E/I
The position of the E/I switch can be changed on each
positive transition of input ST and will normally be
connected to the PS output of pushbutton block
PB2SW, configured for momentary action. The SE
output will normally be connected to the MD input of
pushbutton block PB2SW. E/I switch position will be
shown on the operator faceplate by a lighted LED:
green for E, red for I.
ST
E/I
External Input
E
TRANSFER SWITCH
Internal Input
I
Switch Transfer
Internal Override
IO
P OW E R U P
PU LAST
I N PUT
ST
I NPU T E
I N PU T
I
I N PUT
I O
E SN
The E/I switch position can also be changed by
command over the Modbus or LIL network.
ESN = 000
O1
Output 1
SE
Switch position E
SI
Switch position I
IS
Internal Status
ES
External Status
(I)
POWER UP position (S) ......................... E/I
Power Up LAST (S) ....................... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT ST (H) ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT E (H) ............... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT I (H) ................. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT IO (H) .............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ...................... 001 to 250
When PU LAST is set to YES, the E/I switch will
power up in the last position during a hot or a warm
start. During a cold start, it will power up in the position set by the POWER UP parameter. If PU LAST is set to
NO, the E/I switch will power up in the last position during a hot start, but during a warm or cold start will power
up in the position set by the POWER UP parameter.
The IO (Internal Override) input enables a HI (1) input to temporarily select the Internal Input as the function
block output O1. This input does not affect the position of the E/I switch.
Outputs SE and SI indicate the actual position of the E/I switch. SE is HI (1) when in the E position and LO (0)
when in the I position. SI is HI when in the I position and LO when in the E position. Outputs IS and ES indicate
the actual source of the block output. IS is HI when O1 is the Internal input and is LO when O1 is the External
input. ES is HI when O1 is the External input and is LO when O1 is the Internal input.
EI Transfer Switch
ST
Switch Transfer
Switch Control
Network Command
1
0
Switch position E
0
SI
1
Switch position I
E
External
I
Internal
E/I
IO
SE
Output 1
Internal Override
O1
Internal Status
IS
External Status
ES
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-48
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.45 ESL - Events Sequence Logger
ESL function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, can be
used on a one per loop basis to log events within the loop.
Each ESL input can be assigned a user tag (up to 8 ASCII
characters) that will be displayed when viewing the
logged events from the front panel. Events, once triggered
by a positive transition 0>1 input, will remain in the
logger until reset. Reset can be initiated either by setting
input R high (this input is edge sensitive and will reset the
events on the leading edge) or by entering configuration
and setting the parameter RESET to YES.
EVENTS SEQUENCE LOGGER
ESL
Input 01
01
Input 02
02
Input 03
03
Input 04
04
Input 21
Events logged to the ESL function block can be viewed at
the operator faceplate by pressing the ACK pushbutton
when displaying the loop containing an ESL function
block having logged events. The alphanumeric display
will first step through any active alarms, status conditions
or errors and then all the logged events that occurred
since the last reset. The configured 8-character name will
be shown in the alphanumeric display and the order of
occurrence (ESL-1, ESL-2...) will appear in the numeric
display when stepping through the event log. Other events
such as alarms, status conditions, or errors can be
similarly viewed if logged to the ESL function block.
Input 22
21
01
22
Input 23
23
Input 24
24
Reset
R
I N0 1
I N0 2
M SG
MSG
EVENTS
SEQUENCE
LOGGER
ESL-1
ESL-2
ESL-3
EA
Event Alarm
NE
Number of Events
HI PRESS
PUMP OFF
V1 OPEN
INput 01 MeSsaGe ........................ 8 Char ASCII
INput 02 MeSsaGe ........................ 8 Char ASCII
(null)
(null)
................................................................................................
I
I
I
I
N
N
N
N
2
2
P
P
3 M
4 M
U T
U T
SG
SG
0 1
0 2
INput 23 MeSsaGe ........................ 8 Char ASCII
INput 24 MeSsaGe ........................ 8 Char ASCII
INPUT 01 .......................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 02 .......................... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
................................................................................................
I NPU T 2 3
I NPU T 2 4
I NPU T R
RESET
INPUT 23 .......................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 24 .......................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT R ........................... loop tag.block tag.output
RESET reset the logger ...................... NO/YES
(null)
(null)
(null)
(NO)
EVENT SEQUENCE LOGGER
01
HI PRESS
1
2
02
V1CLOSED
3
4
5
23
V1 OPEN
24
PUMP OFF
6
7
8
R
Block Diagram
May 2001
3-49
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.46 EXP_ - NATURAL EXPONENTIATION
EXP_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, perform the
natural exponentiation function, base “e”. The output will be the
value “e” raised to the power of input X.
NATURAL EXPONENTIATION
EXP
X
Input X
.
X
eX
Input X
Output 1
ESN = 000
O1 = e
X
O1
Output 1
O1
I NPU T X
ES N
.
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.47 EXT_ - EXPONENTIATION
EXT_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, will provide
an output that equals the Y input raised to the power of X input.
All negative values of input Y will be treated as 0.0. When input
Y is 0.0 and X is negative, the output will be set to the maximum
number (i.e. 1.17...e38).
X
EXT
Input X
X
Input Y
Y
I NPU T X
I NPU T Y
ES N
Input X
Y
.
EXPONENTIATION
X
Output 1
ESN = 000
O1 = Y
X
O1
Output 1
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT Y .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(null)
(000)
O1
.
Y
Input Y
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-50
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.48 FTG_ - Falling Edge Trigger
FTG_ function blocks provide a high (1) output for one
scan cycle each time input P transitions from a high (1)
input to a low (0) input.
FALLING EDGE TRIGGER
ESN = 000
FTG_
Pulse Input
FALLING EDGE
P
TRIGGER
Output 1
Output 1
O1
O1
.
Pulse Input
P
.
I NPU T P
ESN
INPUT P (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.49 GB_ - Gain & Bias
GB_ function blocks provide action, gain, and bias
adjustments to input signal A. Although this block can
provide signal scaling, it should not be used if needed as a
reference for a range pointer. The SCL function block
should be used when scaling is required for this purpose.
INput A
BIAS
DIRect ACTing ?
A
Input A
+/- 1
INput A
GAIN
+
+
GAIN & BIAS
OUTput
BIAS
OUTput
GAIN
+
I
O
I
O
+
Output 1
ESN = 000
GB_
O1
.
.
Input A
A
N
U
N
U
D
I
A
A
I
I
A
T
E
A G
T G
A B
T B
I R
NP U
GAIN & BIAS
I
I
A
A
C
N
N
S
S
T
A
SN
O1
Output 1
INput A GAIN (S) ....................... Real (1.0)
OUTput GAIN (S) ....................... Real (1.0)
INput A BIAS (S) ....................... Real (0.0)
OUTput BIAS (S) ....................... Real (0.0)
DIRect ACTing (S) ............... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT A (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............ 001 to 250
O1 = GO(+/-AGI + BI) + BO
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.50 HLD_ - Hold
HLD_ function blocks provide an output equal to the
HOLD VAL set in configuration for interconnection to
other function blocks.
HOLD
HLD_
ESN = 000
HOLD
HOLD VALue
Output 1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
O1
Output 1
O1
.
HOL D
VAL
HOLD VALue (S) ........................... Real
(null)
3-51
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.51 ID - ID Controller
ID is an integral only controller and one of five controller
types that can be used on a one per loop basis. It uses
external feedback to provide integral action and,
therefore, allows interaction with other function blocks or
external devices, such as pneumatic controllers and
shutoff switches while eliminating windup that can occur
with other controller types. Derivative action is provided
when the parameter TD is non-zero.
ID CONTROLLER
ESN = 000
ID
When input A is high (1) the controller will operate in the
normal auto mode and when low (0) will cause the output
of the lag function to track the feedback signal. This will
cause the controller output to track the feedback within
the limits. When the controller is switched back to auto,
the value at the input of the lag (GE+FB), if the GE is
non-zero, will cause the output to integrate to a new
output at the TI time constant.
Range
R
Process
P
ID
Setpoint
S
CONTROLLER
Feedback
F
Auto
A
RG
D I R
P TR
AC T
T I
T D
DG
M I N S CA L E
MAX S CA L E
DPP
ENGUN I TS
I NPU T P
I NPU T S
I NPUT
F
I NPU T A
E SN
OR
Output Range
O1
Output
AE
Absolute Error
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ................... loop tag.block tag
DIRect ACTing (H) ............................... NO/YES
Time - Integral (S) .................. 0.001 to 4000 m/r
Time - Derivative (S) ............ 0.00 to 100.00 min
Derivative Gain (S) ....................... 1.00 to 30.00
MINimum SCALE (H) ................................. Real
MAXimum SCALE (H) ............................... Real
Decimal Point Position (preferred) (S) .......... 0.0.0.0.0.0
ENGineering UNITS (S) ................6 ASCII Char
INPUT P (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT S (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT F (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT A (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ........................... 001 to 250
The process range pointer parameter points to a function
block that has range scaling, such as the analog input that
is providing the process variable signal. This enables the
controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the range of the process input. If this parameter is not
configured, the controller will use a range scaling of 0.00 - 100.00.
(null)
(NO)
(100.0)
(0.00)
(10.00)
(0.0)
(100.0)
(0.0)
(PRCT)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
POWER UP - During a warm or cold start, the output will be initialized to the value of the MINSCALE parameter
and all dynamic states will be initialized to their current input value on the first scan cycle.
ID Controller
Process
P
Engineering
INput units
scaling
t
t
D S
D
DG
S
+
+
e
-
.
S
ENG UNITS
Lag
Lead
+
+
+1
A
-
Engineering
INput units
scaling
+/ - 1
GE +
+
1
t IS + 1
Limit
-3.3 < O < 103.3%
scaling
Output 1
FB
O1
Setpoint
inverse scaling
RanGe PoinTeR
Feedback
F
Auto
A
Absolute Value
.
Abolute Error
AE
3-52
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.52 LL_ - Lead/Lag
LEAD/LAG
LL_ function blocks provide both lead and lag functions.
The block can function as lag only by setting the TLEAD
time to 0.0. The lag function is always active and has a
minimum setting of 0.01 minutes.
LL_
Input E asserted high (1) will enable the Lead/Lag
function. When asserted low (0), the Lead/Lag function
will be bypassed and the output will be set equal to the
input. If input E is not configured, the block will be
enabled.
A
E
Analog Input
t Lead + 1
t +1
Output 1
Lag
Analog Input
A
Enable
E
T LA
T LEA
I NPUT
I NPUT
ES
ESN = 000
LEAD/LAG
G
D
A
E
N
O1
Output 1
Time - LAG (min) (S) ....... 0.01 - 10000.0
Time - LEAD (min) (S) ..... 0.00 - 10000.0
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT E (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
(0.10)
(0.00)
(null)
(null)
POWER UP - During a warm or cold start, the dynamic
elements and the output will be initialized to the value of
the current input on the first scan.
O1
Enable
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.53 LMT_ - Limit
LMT_ function blocks are used to limit a real signal.
Input A will normally pass through the function block to
the output O1. If the input exceeds one of the limits, the
block will output the limit value.
If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT, the block
will output the high limit value. The output statuses will
be high (1) when the block is in a limit condition.
LIMIT
LMT_
Input A
A
H I
L I M I
LO L I M I
I NPUT
ES
.
A
HI SELECTOR
LO LIMIT
LO SELECTOR
Output 1
O1
High limit Status
HS
Low limit Status
LS
ESN = 000
LIMIT
T
T
A
N
O1
Output 1
HS
High Status
LS
Low Status
HIgh LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (100.00)
LOw LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (0.00)
INPUT A (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............ 001 to 250
.
HI LIMIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-53
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.54 LN_ - NATURAL LOGARITHM
LN_ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, will output the
natural logarithm of input X. When the input is <= 0.0, the input will
be treated as the smallest number greater than 0.0 (i.e. 1.17....e-38)
and the LN will be computed accordingly.
NATURAL LOGARITHM
LN
Input X
X
I NPU T X
ES N
.
X
LNe (X)
Output 1
Input X
ESN = 000
O1
O1 =LNe (X)
Output 1
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
O1
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.55 LOG_ - LOGARITHM BASE 10
LOG__ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, will output
the logarithm to the base 10 of input X. When the input is <= 0.0,
the input will be treated as the smallest number greater than 0.0
(i.e. 1.17....e-38) and the LOG will be computed accordingly.
LOGARITHM BASE 10
LOG
Input X
.
X
LOG 10 (X)
Output 1
Input X
X
I NPU T X
ES N
O1
ESN = 000
O1 = LOG (X)
O1
Output 1
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-54
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.56 MTH_ - Math
MATH
MTH_ function blocks provide universal arithmetic
capability. As shown in the block diagram, each input has
gain and bias scaling. The resulting signals are then
applied to configurable math operations (DIV, MUL, ADD
and SUB). Operation A will be performed first on inputs
A and B. Operation B will be performed next on the
resultant and input C.
Unused inputs to a MUL or DIV operation will be set to
1.0 and those to an ADD or SUB operation will be set
equal to 0.0. The operation of those inputs will function
normally so it is important to insure that the bias and gain
settings are set properly.
MTH_
OU
I N
I N
I N
OU
I N
I N
I N
In a DIV operation, when a divisor is 0.0 the output will go
to the maximum Real number with the sign determined by
the numerator. If the numerator is 0 the output will be 0.
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
T
A
B
C
T
A
B
C
GA
GA
GA
GA
B I
B I
B I
B I
OP
OP
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT
E
I
I
I
I
A
A
A
A
N
N
N
N
S
S
S
S
A
B
A
B
C
SN
ESN = 000
MATH
O1
Output 1
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV
OUTput GAIN (S) ....................................... Real
INput A GAIN (S) ....................................... Real
INput B GAIN (S) ....................................... Real
INput C GAIN (S) ....................................... Real
OUTput BIAS (S) ....................................... Real
INput A BIAS (S) ....................................... Real
INput B BIAS (S) ....................................... Real
INput C BIAS (S) ....................................... Real
OPeration A (S) ...................... Add,Sub,Mul,Div
OPeration B (S) ...................... Add,Sub,Mul,Div
INPUT A (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............................ 001 to 250
(1.0)
(1.0)
(1.0)
(1.0)
(0.0)
(0.0)
(0.0)
(0.0)
(Add)
(Add)
(null)
(null)
(null)
MATH
A
INput A
Input A
GAIN
+
+
INput A
BIAS
B
.
INput B
Input B
GAIN
+
+
OPeration A
Add, Sub, Mul, Div
INput B
BIAS
INput C
C
Input C
GAIN
+
OPeration B
Add, Sub, Mul, Div
+
OUTput
GAIN
+
+
INput C
OUTput
BIAS
BIAS
Output 1
O1
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-55
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.57 MUL_ - Multiplication
MUL_ function blocks perform arithmetic multiplication
on the three input signals. Any unused input will be set to
1.0 and will therefore have no affect on the output.
A
.
Input A
B
X
Input B
MUL_
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
MULTIPLICATION
O1
Output 1
O1
Output 1
.
C
MULTIPLICATION
Input C
I NPU T
I NPU T
I NPU T
ES
A
B
C
N
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
O1 = A x B x C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.58 NND_ - NAND Logic
NND_ function blocks perform a logical NAND on the
three inputs. Any unused input will be set high (1).
NAND
NND_
A
B
C
NAND
O1
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
NAND
O1
Output 1
NAND
.
.
NAND TRUTH TABLE
A
B
C
Output 1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
I NPU T
I NPU T
I NPU T
ES
A
B
C
N
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-56
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.59 NOR_ - NOR Logic
NOR_ function blocks perform a logical NOR on the three
inputs. Any unused input will be set low (0).
NOR
NOR_
A
B
C
O1
NOR
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
O1
NOR
Output 1
.
NOR TRUTH TABLE
.
A
B
C
Output 1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
I NPU T
I NPU T
I NPU T
ES
A
B
C
N
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.60 NOT_ - NOT Logic
NOT_ function blocks perform a logical NOT on input
A. Any unused input will be set low (0).
NOT
NOT_
Input A
A
.
A
ESN = 000
NOT
O1
Output 1
O1
Input A
Output 1
.
I NPUT A
ESN
INPUT A (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-57
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.61 ODA - Operator Display for Analog indication & alarming (V2.2)
ODA blocks are one of five operator displays that are used on a one
per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions and
network parameters. See the i|ware PC faceplate on the next page.
.
Operator Display for Analog indication & alarming
ODA
The block will display up to four process variables P1 to P4 in both
analog bargraph and digital form. Two alarms are associated with
each process variable. They can be configured as HI or LO alarms.
Each alarm function has associated block outputs that are high (1)
when the alarm is active. Output LE is high (1) when a loop event
is active. Output SE is high when a station error is active. LOOP #
parameters are used to index reads and writes to Modbus and LIL
network parameters. See Sections 6 and 7 for network parameters.
The VIEW OD parameter, when set to YES, enables the operator
display to be viewed and accessed locally. In cases where it is
desired to view display or operation parameters only from a network
workstation, the parameter should be set to NO.
Range pointers (i.e. R1 to R4) for all four process inputs must be
configured to define the range of each variable input (i.e. P1 to P4).
If these parameters are not configured, the bargraphs will be scaled
using the engineering range of 0.00 to 100.00. This information also
defines the scaling of the loop information provided to a remote
workstation over the network (i.e. Modbus or LIL).
Each process variable can be displayed on the local faceplate using
the D button. When first stepping into a loop using the Loop button,
the loop tag will be displayed (e.g. AnDisp1). However, if there is a
point within the loop that has an unacknowledged alarm, that point
will be displayed alternating between the point tag and the alarm
condition (e.g. PI693/3B LO). Press the D button to scroll through
the analog points displaying the point tag (e.g. TI712) in the
alphanumeric and the value of the point in the digital display (e.g.
348.47). Press the UNITS button to display the units of the point.
Press the Loop tag to return to displaying the loop tag.
Alarm Types
HI compares the process input with the limit setting and trips the
alarm status high (1) when the process is equal to or higher than the
limit setting. The alarm status will clear (0) when the process is less
than the limit setting minus the deadband.
LO compares the process input with the limit setting and trips the
alarm status high (1) when the process is equal to or less than the
limit setting. The alarm status will clear (0) when the process is
greater than the limit setting plus the deadband.
A1
Alarm A P1
B1
Alarm B P1
A2
Alarm A P2
B2
Alarm B P2
A3
Alarm A P3
B3
Alarm B P3
P3
A4
Alarm A P4
Process Range 4
R4
B4
Alarm B P4
Process 4
P4
LE
Loop Event
Process Range 1
R1
Process 1
P1
Process Range 2
R2
Process 2
P2
Process Range 3
R3
Process 3
P
P
P
P
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
L I
V
I N
I N
I N
I N
R
R
R
R
P
P
P
P
L
L
I
P
P
P
P
G P T R
G P T R
G P T R
G P T R
T AG
1
T AG
2
T AG
3
T AG
4
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
L I M I T
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
DBAND
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
PU EN
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
P R I OR
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
T Y PE
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL I N
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
DL OUT
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
RGBCK
OO P
#
C H AN
EW OD
U T
P 1
U T
P 2
U T P 3
U T P 4
Operator Display
for
Analog Indication
&
Alarming
SE
Station Error
WD
Watch Dog
Process 1 - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Process 2 - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Process 3 - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Process 4 - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Process 1 TAG (S) ................................8 ASCII Char (P1 TAG)
Process 2 TAG (S) ................................8 ASCII Char (P2 TAG)
Process 3 TAG (S) ................................8 ASCII Char (P3 TAG)
Process 4 TAG (S) ................................8 ASCII Char (P4 TAG)
Process 1 Alarm A LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (110.0)
Process 1 Alarm B LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (-10.0)
Process 2 Alarm A LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (110.0)
Process 2 Alarm B LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (-10.0)
Process 3 Alarm A LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (110.0)
Process 3 Alarm B LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (-10.0)
Process 4 Alarm A LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (110.0)
Process 4 Alarm B LIMIT(S) ............................. Real (-10.0)
Process 1 Alarm A DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 1 Alarm B DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 2 Alarm A DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 2 Alarm B DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 3 Alarm A DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 3 Alarm B DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 4 Alarm A DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 4 Alarm B DeadBAND (S) ..... 0.1/0.5/1.0/5.0% (0.5)
Process 1 Alarm A Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 1 Alarm B Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 2 Alarm A Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 2 Alarm B Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 3 Alarm A Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 3 Alarm B Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 4 Alarm A Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 4 Alarm B Power Up ENabled (S) .NO/YES (YES)
Process 1 Alarm A PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 1 Alarm B PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 2 Alarm A PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 2 Alarm B PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 3 Alarm A PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 3 Alarm B PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 4 Alarm A PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 4 Alarm B PRIORity (S) ................1/2/3/4/5
(3)
Process 1 Alarm A TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (HI)
Process 1 Alarm B TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (LO)
Process 2 Alarm A TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (HI)
Process 2 Alarm B TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (LO)
Process 3 Alarm A TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (HI)
Process 3 Alarm B TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (LO)
Process 4 Alarm A TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (HI)
Process 4 Alarm B TYPE (S) ............ .none/HI/LO/or (LO)
Proc 1 Alarm A DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 1 Alarm B DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 2 Alarm A DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 2 Alarm B DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 3 Alarm A DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 3 Alarm B DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 4 Alarm A DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 4 Alarm B DeLay IN (S) ..... 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 1 Alarm A DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 1 Alarm B DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 2 Alarm A DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 2 Alarm B DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 3 Alarm A DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 3 Alarm B DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 4 Alarm A DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Proc 4 Alarm B DeLay OUT (S) . 0/.4/1/2/5/15/30/60
(0)
Process 1 Alarm A RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 1 Alarm B RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 2 Alarm A RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 2 Alarm B RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 3 Alarm A RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 3 Alarm B RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 4 Alarm A RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
Process 4 Alarm B RinG BaCK (S) ............ NO/YES
(NO)
LOOP # (S) ................................................ 01 to 25 (null)
LIL starting CHANnel (n) (H) ................ 008 to 250 (null)
VIEW Operator Display ........................... NO/YES YES
INPUT P1 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT P2 (H) ........................ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT P3 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT P4 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
OR compares the process input with the range limits referenced by
the range pointer parameter. It will trip the alarm status high (1)
when the process is equal to or greater than the high limit, or equal
to or less than the low limit. The alarm status will clear (0) when the
process is less than the high limit minus the deadband or greater than the low limit plus the deadband.
3-58
.
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
Alarms have priorities 1 to 5, with 1 the highest. Alarms are reported to the operator faceplate in order of priority
first and then in order of occurrence. Priority 1 causes the station bargraphs and condition (e.g. A1 HI) to flash and
requires acknowledgment to stop flashing. Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs and condition but stops flashing
when the alarm clears (i.e. Self Clearing). Priority 3 causes the event LEDs (L and S) and condition to flash.
Flashing stops only when the alarm is acknowledged. Priority 4 causes the event LEDs and condition to flash but
flashing stops when the alarm clears. Priority 5 displays the alarm but does not require that it be acknowledged.
Alarm limits are in engineering units. A quickset ALARM feature is also available allowing alarm limits to be set
quickly during operation. The settings are in engineering units but will also be displayed in % of range on the
setpoint bargraph when viewing a point. Alarms are displayed as defined by the range pointer parameter. Alarms
can be set to any engineering value within -10% to 110% of the range defined by the pointer. If a range is
changed, the current alarm settings will be changed to be the same % within the new range. For example, if a HI
alarm is currently set at 100.0 with a range of 0.0 to 100.0 and the range is changed to 300.0 to 400.0, the HI
alarm will be moved to 400.0.
Each alarm can be enabled or disabled when in the quickset ALARM mode. The configuration allows an alarm to
be enabled or disabled on a cold start. When an alarm is disabled, it will not operate but will retain settings for
return to the enabled mode. Complete operator faceplate functions, relating to alarms, are described in the sections
describing the specific faceplate design. All alarms have the following features:
Deadband - requires that the signal either drop below or exceed the limit setting by the amount of the deadband
before the alarm clears (goes low). The alarm deadband is set as a fixed % of the range pointer scale.
Delay-In Time - requires that the input remain above (or below) the limit setting for the delay time before the
alarm trips (goes high). This can help prevent nuisance alarms that may be tripping due to process noise.
Delay-Out Time - requires that the input remain below (or above) the limit setting plus deadband for the delay time
before the alarm will clear (goes low). This can help prevent inadvertent clearing of alarms due to process noise.
Ringback - causes a previously acknowledged alarm to require acknowledgment (priorities 1-4) when the alarm
clears.
AnDisp1
.1
2 4 2 3. 4 5
T I 2 435
P
P1
R1
<process 1 digital value>
<process 1 tag name>
Process
UNITS
Process DPP
<loop tag>
d e gF
<process 1 units>
R1
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
UNITS
R1
1A
P2
D
P3
Process 1 Alarms
.4
1B
2A
R1
Process 2 Alarms
2B
Process
UNITS
3A
Process DPP
R4
Process 3 Alarms
R4
P4
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
3B
4A
Process 4 Alarms
R4
4B
LE
Station & Loop Error Handling
i|ware PC Faceplate Display
May 2001
SE
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-59
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.62 ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
ODC blocks are one of five operator displays that are used on
a one per loop basis to configure the local operator display
functions and network parameters from a remote operator
workstation associated with the loop. See the i|ware PC
faceplate on the next page.
OPERATOR DISPLAY for CONTROLLERS
ODC
The following features are in firmware 1.30 and higher.
2.
3.
V
X Range
XR
Variable X
X
Y Range
YR
Variable Y
Y
User Status 1
U1
User Status 2
U2
Input A
Output LE is high (1) when a loop event is active. Output
SE is high when a station error is active.
Range pointers for both the process/setpoint and valve
bargraphs must be configured to define the range of the
variable inputs to P, S, and V. If these parameters are not
configured, the bargraphs will be scaled using the
engineering range of 0.00 to 100.00. The range pointer for X
and Y define the displayed decimal point position and the
units code. This information also defines the scaling of the
loop information provided to a remote workstation over the
network (i.e. Modbus or LIL).
S
VR
Valve
A new parameter, VIEW OD, when set to YES, the
default setting, enables the operator display to be viewed
and accessed locally using the LOOP button. In some
cases, it may be desired to view only display or operation
parameters with a network workstation and not allow
operation or viewing of the control loop from the local
display. Here the parameter should be set to NO.
The LOOP # (this parameter was MB INDEX in version
1.21) is used to index reads and writes to Modbus
parameters. The LIL has 25 parameters: C1S, C2S, C3S,
..... C25S. When an ODC block has been selected and
the LOOP # has been configured, the corresponding C#S
LIL parameter will contain the LIL starting Chan (n)
location. The LOOP# must be entered to enable either
LIL or Modbus communications.
P
Process
Setpoint
Valve Range
1.
PR
Process Range
A
Console/Local
CL
Emerg. Local
EL
OPERATOR
DISPLAY
for
CONTROLLERS LE
SE
Global
Alarm
Management
NETWORK
INTERFACE
P
V
X
Y
U
U
U
U
H
V
H
H
L
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
1 S
2 S
1
2
B
N
B
B
L
I L
V I
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
NP
NP
NP
NP
G P TR
G P TR
G P TR
G P TR
T ATUS
T A TUS
PR I OR
PR I OR
AR AC
E T
AC
AR L D
AR RD
OOP #
CHAN
EW OD
P
PUT
S
PUT
PU T V
PU T X
PU T Y
PU T A
U T U1
UT U 2
UT C L
UT E L
Loop Event
Station Error
PN
Pulse oN
PF
Pulse ofF
CN
CoNsole
CM
CoMputer
LO
Local Operation
NL
Not Local
WD
Watch Dog
Process - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Valve - RanGe PoinTeR (S) ............. loop tag.block tag (null)
Input X - RanGe PoinTeR (S) .......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Input Y - RanGe PoinTeR (S) .......... loop tag.block tag (null)
User 1 STATUS (S) ......................... 8 Char. ASCII (U1 STAT)
User 2 STATUS (S) ......................... 8 Char. ASCII (U2 STAT)
User 1 PRIORity (S) .............................. 0,1,2,3,4,5 (5)
User 2 PRIORity (S) .............................. 0,1,2,3,4,5 (5)
Hor. BAR ACtion (S) .................................. Rev/Dir (Dir)
Valve Bar NETwork ACtion (S) .................. Rev/Dir (Dir)
Hor. BAR Left Display (S) ................. 5 Char ASCII (CLOSE)
Hor. BAR Right Display (S) ............... 5 Char ASCII (OPEN)
LOOP # (S) ................................................ 01 to 25 (null)
LIL starting CHANnel (n) (H) ................ 008 to 251 (null)
VIEW Operator Display ........................... NO/YES YES
INPUT P (H) ......................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT S (H) .......................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT V (H) ......................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT X (H) ......................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT Y (H) ......................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT A (H) ...................... Global alarm acknowledge (null)
INPUT U1 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT U2 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT CL (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT EL (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Rev. 3
Input variables P, S, V, X, and Y are shown in the numeric display, using the engineering UNITS and the
preferred DPP of the range pointer. The Total from the BATOT will also be displayed when configured within the
BATOT block. If a value is greater than allowed by the DPP parameter, the decimal point will be shifted to allow
the display to show the full number, until it exceeds the maximum available digits, at which time it will indicate
over range.
When input U1 or U2 goes high (1), the 8-character user status (U_STATUS) will be displayed as configured by
the status priority (U_ PRIOR). A priority of 0 will disable that status function setting the bits in the status word to
0. See Section 9 Operation for a description of display actions using priorities 1 to 5.
The horizontal bargraph can be selected as direct or reverse acting. This feature allows it to always indicate an
OPEN valve when fully lit. The labels on the basic faceplate are fixed, but paste on labels can be used to change
the indications. The V NET AC parameter allows the LxVI network parameter to be set for direct or reverse
action. This enables the valve bar on the HMI to operate similar to the valve bar on the faceplate. The left and
right bar labels should be set accordingly (e.g. Left = “OPEN & Right = CLOSE).
3-60
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
An operator display must be configured to map controller loop data to network data. Loop network data is mapped
into registers or coils when the standard Modbus interface is used and to channels/parameters when the optional
LIL interface has been added. Mappings for both Modbus and LIL are listed in the tables included in the ‘Network
Communications’ section. The ‘LOOP #’ and ‘LIL CHAN’ parameters enable configuration of a loop index
number (x) for Modbus data or a starting channel (n) for LIL loop data.
Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network. When input CL is not configured,
the three status outputs LO (in 1.21 firmware this output was named L), CN, and CM will be set high (1) and
changes can be made from a network command or the local faceplate. When CL is configured, it can be changed
locally from a pushbutton switch such as PB1SW output PS (configured as momentary) and will change from local
to console or console/computer to local with each positive transition of the input. Also, when output LO goes high,
output CN will also go high and CM will go low, indicating that the control source will change to Console
whenever Local is disabled, either by a positive transition on input CL or from a network command. The
Computer CM state can be set high using a network command. The NL output will normally be connected to the
MD input of pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate the C/L switch position on the operator faceplate, a green LED
for C and a red LED for LO.
Output WD will go high (1) when the controller fails to receive a Modbus network command within the watchdog
time. The watchdog time is set in the STATN (Station Parameters) function block. Input A can be used to
acknowledge all the alarms in all of the loops in a controller. Output PN (Pulse oN) will go high for 0.5 seconds
(or one scan cycle whichever is longer) whenever the bargraph flashes. Bargraph flashing is controlled by the
priority setting of alarms or events. Output PF (Pulse ofF) will go high for 0.5 sec when the flashing bargraph is
stopped (e.g. pressing the ACK button).
.S
.P
2 4 2 3. 4 5
Process
UNITS
Process
UNITS
T C 2 0 5 3 . P
P
S
P
P
Process DPP
Process DPP
P
P
S
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
V
.V
Valve DPP
V
.
Valve
Engineering
INput units
scaling
Process
RanGe PoinTeR
P
Valve
UNITS
CLOSE
OPEN
H BAR LD
H BAR RD
U1
Valve
RanGe PoinTeR
V
User 1 STATUS
X
Input X
RanGe PoinTeR
U2
User 2 STATUS
.X
Input X _ DPP
.
LE
Input X
UNITS
Loop Event Handling
Y
SE
.Y
Input Y _ DPP
Station Error Handling
Input Y
UNITS
Input Y
RanGe PoinTeR
A
i|ware PC Faceplate Display
May 2001
Pulse oN
PN
Pulse ofF
PF
Alarm Bargraph Flasher
Global Alarm Acknowledge
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rev. 3
3-61
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.63 ODD - Operator Display for Discrete indication & control (V2.2)
ODD function blocks are one of five operator displays
that can be used on a one per loop basis to configure the
local operator display functions as well as network
parameters. See the i|ware PC faceplate example on the
next page.
The ODD function block displays up to 16 discrete
variables. Each input has a corresponding block output
that is equal to the input when the variable mode is in
Auto. Each input variable can be assigned a mode. The
value of the output can be changed while in Man by using
the pulser and pressing the ACK button. When a variable
is switched to Manual it will always equal the input value
until changed.
The LOOP # parameter is used to index reads and writes
to Modbus and LIL network parameters. When using the
LIL, the LIL CHAN parameter must also be configured.
See Section 6 for more information on network
parameters.
The VIEW OD parameter, when set to YES enables the
operator display to be viewed and accessed locally. In
cases where it is desired to view display or operation
parameters only from a network workstation, the
parameter should be set to NO.
During a cold or warm start, each input variable will
power up in the auto mode. During a hot start, the mode
and manual value will equal the value prior to power
down.
Each discrete input variable can be displayed on the local
faceplate using the D button. When first stepping into a
loop using the Loop button, the loop tag will be displayed
(e.g. DigDisp1). Pressing the D button will scroll through
the discrete points displaying the point tag (e.g. SV-103)
in the alphanumeric and the value of the input on the left
3 positions of the digital display (e.g. On) and the output
in the right most 3 positions (e.g. OFF).
The A/M button will display the point mode and enable
switching the point between auto & manual using the
A/M button. The manual value can be changed by
turning the pulser and pressing the ACK button. If the ACK button is not pressed within 4-5 seconds, the display
will return to the actual output value.
3-62
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
DigDisp1
O F F
I0
A
T
Manual
SV-103
A
T
Manual
O0
M
On
IF
On
On
SV-206
OF
M
Block Diagram
i|ware PC Faceplate Display
May 2001
3-63
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.64 ODP - Operator Display for PushButtons (V2.2)
ODP function blocks are one of five operator displays
that can be used on a one per loop basis to configure local
operator display functions as well as network parameters.
See the i|ware PC faceplate example on the next page.
.
Operator Display for Pushbuttons
ODP_
Operator Display
for
Pushbuttons
The ODP function block can provide up to 8 groups of
two pushbuttons and one selector switch. Each group
includes:
•
•
•
One normally open pushbutton, identified as PB1, on
the local faceplate. It can have a 6-character tag to
identify the button function on a HMI display.
Each group also has a set of 6-character messages
associated with the status of a feedback signal (1/0).
Each pushbutton has a configuration parameter that
controls how long the button function will be held in the
pressed position. The default value is 1 second but can be
set from 0.1 (or scan time if greater than 0.1) to 10
seconds.
The LOOP # parameter is used to index reads and writes
to Modbus and LIL network parameters. When using the
LIL, the LIL CHAN parameter must also be configured.
See Sections 6 and 7 for more information on network
parameters.
11
Input 12
12
Input 1A
1A
Group 1
11
Output 11
12
Output 12
13
Output 13
Input 1M 1M
One normally closed pushbutton, identified as PB2
on the local faceplate. It can have a 6-character tag
for display on an HMI.
One two-position selector switch identified as A/M
on the local faceplate. It can have a 6-character tag
for switch position identification on an HMI.
Input 11
Input 1F
1F
Input 81
81
81
Output 81
Input 82
82
82
Output 82
Input 8A
8A
83
Output 83
Group 8
Input 8M 8M
Input 8F
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
L I
V
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
I N
8F
G1 T AG
P 1 T AG
P 1 H I T
P 2 T AG
P 2 H I T
S A T AG
S M T AG
F 1 T AG
F 0 T AG
G 8 T` A G
P 1 T AG
P 1 H I T
P 2 T AG
P 2 H I T
S A T AG
S M T AG
F 1 T AG
F 0 T AG
L OOP #
L
CHAN
I EW OD
1 1
PUT
1 2
PUT
PU T 1 A
PUT 1 M
PU T 1 F
8 1
PUT
8 2
PUT
PU T 8 A
PUT 8 M
PU T 8 F
Group 1 TAG (S) ............................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 PB1 TAG (S) ....................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 PB1 Hold In Time (S) ............. 0.1 - 10 sec
Group 1 PB2 TAG (S) ....................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 PB2 Hold In Time (S) ............. 0.1 - 10 sec
Group 1 Switch Position A TAG (S) .. 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 Switch Position M TAG (S) .. 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 Feedback 1 TAG (S) ........... 6 ASCII Char
Group 1 Feedback 0 TAG (S) ........... 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 TAG (S) ............................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 PB1 TAG (S) ....................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 PB1 Hold In Time (S) ............. 0.1 - 10 sec
Group 8 PB2 TAG (S) ....................... 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 PB2 Hold In Time (S) ............. 0.1 - 10 sec
Group 8 Switch Position A TAG (S) .. 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 Switch Position M TAG (S) .. 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 Feedback 1 TAG (S) ........... 6 ASCII Char
Group 8 Feedback 0 TAG (S) ........... 6 ASCII Char
LOOP # (S) ................................................ 01 to 25
LIL starting CHANnel (n) (H) ................ 008 to 254
VIEW Operator Display ........................... NO/YES
INPUT 11 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 12 (H) ........................ loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 1A (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 1M (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 1F (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 81 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 82 (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 8A (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 8M (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 8F (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
(Group1)
(START )
(1 sec)
(STOP )
(1 sec)
(AUTO)
(MAN)
(ON)
(OFF )
(Group8)
(START )
(1 sec)
(STOP )
(1 sec)
(AUTO)
(MAN)
(ON)
(OFF )
(null)
(null)
YES
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
The VIEW OD parameter, when set to YES enables the
operator display to be viewed and accessed locally. In cases where it is desired to view display or operation
parameters only from a network workstation, the parameter should be set to NO.
During a cold or warm start, the A/M switch will power up in the Auto position. During a hot start, the A/M
switch will power up in the position prior to power down.
Each group can be displayed on the local faceplate using the D button. When first stepping into a loop using the
Loop button, the loop tag will be displayed (e.g. PBDisp1). Pressing the D button will scroll through the groups
displaying the group tag (e.g. MS1036) in the alphanumeric and the value of the feedback in the digital display
(e.g. 1). The feedback message associated with this feedback value can be viewed on the local faceplate using the
UNITS button. The A/M button will display the position of the group selector switch and enable switching the
group selector switch between auto and manual.
3-64
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
Group 1 Message
START
11
1
12
1
MS1036
PB1
11
PB2
12
STOP
1A
1M
1F
1
AUTO
MAN
X
A
0
PB3
X
RUN
STOP
1
0
M
0
13
Feedback Messages
Groups 2 to 7
Group 8 Message
START
81
1
82
1
8A
8M
8F
MS1036
PB1
81
PB2
82
STOP
1
0
0
AUTO
MAN
X
A
PB3
83
Feedback Messages
X
M
1
0
RUN
STOP
Note: Numbers shown on input lines indicate values of unconfigured inputs
Block Diagram
i|ware PC Faceplate Display
May 2001
3-65
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.65 ODS - Operator Display for Sequencer
ODS function blocks are one of five operator displays available on a
one per loop basis to configure the local operator display functions as
well as the network commands from an operator workstation
associated with the loop. See the i|ware PC faceplate example on the
following page.
OPERATOR DISPLAY for SEQUENCER
ODS
Step Number SN
Recipe Number RN
The following six enhancements are in firmware 1.30 and higher.
Condition Msg 01
01
1.
Condition Msg nn
nn
The VIEW OD parameter, when set to YES, the default value,
enables the operator display to be viewed and accessed locally
using the LOOP button. Set the parameter to NO to view the
display or operation parameters only with a network workstation
and not allow operation from the local display. This may be
desired with a sequence/logic loop where local operation is not
needed but a workstation needs access to force I/O or sequence
parameters for recipe changes.
2.
Messages will be available over Modbus or LIL. Refer to the
Network Communication section for mapped data points.
3.
The # of Recipe messages can now be set to 0 so that a Recipe
Message does not appear in the message list.
4.
Messages will now function as follows with the local faceplate
display:
Console/Local
CL
Emerg. Local
EL
R M
P M
S M
C M
L O OP
L I L CH
V I EW
I NP UT
I NP UT
I NP UT
I NP UT
R M SG
P MSG
PM x x
S MSGx
SM x x x
C MSG
I NP UT
#
#
#
#
S
S
S
S
G
G
G
G
#
AN
OD
S N
RN
CL
E L
x
x x
SS
x x
SS
x x
n n
OPERATOR
DISPLAY
for
SEQUENCER
LE
Loop Event
SE
Station Error
CN
CoNsole
CM
CoMputer
LO
Local Operation
Optional Inputs
for
Condition Messages
NETWORK
INTERFACE
NL
Not Local
WD
Watch Dog
# of Recipe MeSsaGes (H) ..........................0 - 9 (1)
# of Primary MeSsaGes (H) ...................... 0 - 64 (0)
# of Secondary MeSsaGes (H) ............... 0 - 128 (0)
# of Condition MeSsaGes (H) ................... 0 - 64 (0)
LOOP # (S) ........................................... 01 to 25 (null)
LIL starting CHANnel_n (S) .............. 008 to 250 (null)
VIEW Operator Display ....................... NO/YES YES
INPUT SN (H) ................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT RN (H) ................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT CL (H) ................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT EL (H) .................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Recipe MeSsGe x (S) .................. 12 char ASCII ( )
Primary MeSsGe xx (S) ................. 8 char ASCII ( )
Primary Message xx Starting Step (S) .... 0 - 255 ( )
Secondary MeSsGe xxx (S) ........ 12 char ASCII ( )
Secondary Msg xxx Starting Step (S) .... 0 - 255 ( )
Condition MeSsGe xx (S) ............ 16 char ASCII ( )
INPUT nn (H) .................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
When the local display first enters a loop, the convention loop tag
and sequence step number will be displayed. When the D button
is pressed, the Numeric display will show MSG and the alphanumeric display will show the first message it
comes to in the order shown below.
•
Conditional messages will be displayed in the order in which they occurred.
•
The latest message will be displayed first.
•
A new message will override the current message.
The ACK button can be used to scroll through active messages.
It will stay on the last message until a new message overrides it
or the ACK button is again pressed. When an active message
clears, the message display will loop back and start at the top
and display the first message it comes to. Events that require
acknowledgment will return the display to the normal mode
(i.e. <loop tag>.S) and will flash the message. When events
have been acknowledged they can be viewed using the ACK
button. The display can be returned to the MSG mode using
the D button and will then display the first message in the
Queue.
D
<loop tag>.S
Recipe Msg.
Primary Msg.
Secondary Msg.
Conditional Msg. 1
Conditional Msg. n
ACK
5.
Output LE is high (1) when a loop event is active. Output SE is
high when a station error is active.
6.
The LOOP # (in version 1.21 firmware this parameter was MB INDEX but they have the same function). It
will be used to index reads and writes to Modbus parameters. The LIL has 25 parameters: C1S, C2S, C3S,
..... C25S. When an ODS block has been selected and the LOOP # has been configured, the corresponding
C#S LIL parameter will contain the LIL starting Chan (n) location. . The LOOP# must be entered to enable
either LIL or Modbus communications.
3-66
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
An operator display must be configured in order to properly map station loop data to network data. Sequencer loop
network data is mapped onto registers or coils when the standard Modbus interface is used and to
channels/parameters when the optional LIL interface has been added. Mappings for both Modbus and LIL are
listed in tables in the ‘Network Communications’ section.
Input CL controls local arbitration of changes to loop data from the network. When input CL is not configured,
the three status outputs LO (in 1.21 firmware this output was named L),, CN, and CM will be set high (1) and
changes can be made from a network command or the local faceplate. When CL is configured, it can be toggled
locally from a pushbutton switch, such as PB1SW (output PS), and will change from local to console or from
console/computer to local each time the input is toggled. Also, when output LO goes high, output CN will also go
high and CM will go low, indicating that the control source will change to Console whenever Local is disabled,
either by toggling input CL or from a network command. The Computer CM state can be set high using a network
command. The NL output will normally be connected to the MD input of the pushbutton block PB1SW to indicate
the C/L switch position on the operator faceplate using the green LED for C and the red LED for LO.
Output WD will go high (1) when the station fails to receive a Modbus network command within the watchdog
time period. The watchdog time is set in the STATN (Station Parameters) function block.
i|ware PC Faceplate Display
May 2001
3-67
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.66 ON/OFF - On/Off Controller
ON/OFF is an on/off controller with deviation function. It
is one of five controller types that can be used on a one per
loop basis.
ON_OFF CONTROLLER
ONOFF
When P-S (Process - Setpoint) reaches the HDEV limit, the
Boolean output HO will go high (1) and when S-P
(Setpoint - Process) reaches the LDEV limit, the output LO
will go high (1). When the deviation drops to less than the
DEADBAND setting, the outputs will go low (0).
Derivative action is added to the process variable when the
TD parameter is other than 0.0.
Range
Process
P
ON_OFF
Setpoint
S
CONTROLLER
Enable
E
RG
When single ended action (gap action) is desired, set the
DEADBAND equal to the gap and the HDEV parameter
for half the gap. For example, if DEADBAND = 20.0, set
HDEV to 10. If the setpoint S is 50.0, output HO will go
high (1) when P equals 60.0 and HO will go low (0) when
P equals 40.0.
DE
I
I
I
ESN = 000
R
P TR
T D
DG
HD EV
L D EV
ADBAND
P
NPUT
NPUT
S
NPUT
E
ESN
AE
Absolute Error
HO
High Output
O1
Output 1
LO
Low Output
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .................. loop tag.block tag (null)
Time - Derivative (S) ........... 0.00 to 100.00 min (0.00)
Derivative Gain (S) ....................... 1.00 to 30.00 (10.00)
High DEViation (S) .................................... Real (5.00)
Low DEViation (S) ..................................... Real (5.00)
DEAD BAND (S) ....................................... Real (0.5)
INPUT P (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT S (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT E (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ........................... 001 to 250
Input E asserted high (1) will enable the block outputs; when low (0) all outputs will be set low (0).
The process range pointer parameter points to another function block that has range scaling, such as the analog
input that is providing the process variable. This enables the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the
range of the process input. If this parameter is not configured, the controller will use a range scaling of 0.0 100.0.
POWER UP - During a warm start, outputs and comparator functions will be initialized at the state prior to power
down and all dynamic elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan. During a cold start all
outputs and comparator states will be set to zero, to be activated by the block functions. All dynamic elements will
be initialized at the current input on the first scan.
ON_OFF Controller
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
t
t
D S
D
DG
S
+
B
High
DEViation
-
S
A
Lead
+
.
+
+ 1
Engineering
INput units
scaling
Engineering
INput units
scaling
+
DB
+
A
Setpoint
Low
DEViation
Engineering
INput units
scaling
+
-
HI Comparator
IF A>=B THEN H=100
IF A>=(B-DB) AND A<B THEN H=H 1
IF A<(B-DB) THEN H=0
B
Engineering
INput units
scaling
H
AND
HO
Dead
Band
LO Comparator
IF A<=B THEN L=100
IF A<=(B+DB) AND A>B THEN L=L1
IF A>(B+DB) THEN L=0
OR
AND
O1
L
AND
LO
.
Enable
E
RanGe PoinTeR
Absolute Value
Abolute Error
AE
3-68
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.67 OR_ - OR Logic
OR
OR_ function blocks perform a logical OR on the three
inputs. Any unused input will be set low (0).
OR_
A
B
C
O1
OR
.
.
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
O1
OR
Output 1
OR TRUTH TABLE
A
B
0
0
C
0
Output 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT
ES
A
B
C
N
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.68 ORSL - Override Selector
ORSL function blocks are used on a one per loop basis
and they enable a primary input signal, such as the output
from a controller, to be overridden by other signals. For a
selector configured as LO, the function block outputs the
lower of the primary or override inputs. For a selector
configured as HI, the function block will output the higher
of the primary or override inputs. Override signals can be
hard limits, coming from HOLD blocks, or signals
coming from other controllers. Block override inputs 1
and 2 can be used as HI or LO selector functions.
Additional override inputs can be accommodated by
connecting these inputs to signal selector (SEL) blocks.
OVERRIDE SELECTOR
ORSL
Primary Input
P
Override Input 1
1
Override Input 2
2
SE
SE
I
I
I
OR
L E
L E
NP
NP
NP
P
C
C
U
U
U
R
T
T
T
T
T
I O
ES
ESN = 000
OVERRIDE
SELECTOR
1
2
P
1
2
R
N
O1
Output 1
OS
Override Status
SELECTor 1 (S) ......................... LO/HI
SELECTor 2 (S) ......................... LO/HI
INPUT P (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 1 (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT 2 (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output
OverRide PRIORity (S) ....... 0,1,2,3,4,5
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............... 001to 250
(LO)
(HI)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(0)
When the output of the ORSL block is not the primary
input, the output OS will be high (1). In addition, the
block can cause the operator faceplate to display
‘OVERRIDE’ status when a priority level higher than 0, the default, has been selected.
If an override input is not configured the individual selector will output the other input. When no inputs are
configured, the block will output 0.0 and the OS status will be set low (0).
P
.
1
2
1
2
SELECTOR
SELECTOR
HI/LO
HI/LO
Override Input 1
Output 1
Override Status
O1
OS
.
Override Input 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-69
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.69 OST_ - One Shot Timer
OST_ function blocks provide a high (1) output for a
predetermined time, set by ON TIME, when input P goes
high (1). If input P goes low (0), the output will remain
high until the time expires. If input P goes high during
the on time, the elapsed timer will be re-triggered if
RETRIG is set to YES.
ONE SHOT TIMER
OST_
Pulse Input
With firmware1.30 and higher the ON TIME is
adjustable over the full range of the display which is
0.00000 to 999999. In earlier versions, the minimum
time setting was 0.1. If the delay time is set to less than
the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the
scan time.
ON T
PU L
RET
I NPU
ESN = 000
ONE SHOT TIMER
P
I ME
AST
R I G
T P
ESN
ET
Elapsed Time
RT
RemainingTime
O1
Output 1
ON TIME (minutes) (S) .................... Real (0.0)
Power Up LAST (S) ................... NO/YES (YES)
RETRIGger on new pulse (S) .... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT P (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
Output ET (elapsed time) will ramp from 0.0 to the value of ON TIME and remain there until P goes low (0).
Output RT (remaining time) equals ON TIME - ET.
POWER UP - During a warm start, when PU LAST is set to YES, the block will initialize at the input/output states
and elapsed time in effect at the instant power down occurred. A cold start will initialize the input/output states
and elapsed time to 0.
.
1
O1
0
ET
RT
O1
ON TIME
ET
0.0
1
P
.
P
0
RETRIG = YES
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-70
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.70 PB1SW - PB1 Switch
PB1SW is one of three general purpose switches available
in each loop. It can be utilized for switching Boolean
signals in such applications as: toggling Console/Local
operation of the ODC or ODS function blocks, Start/Stop,
controlling the position of a TSW (Transfer Switch)
function block for switching analog signals, or other
operator initiated actions.
PB1 SWITCH
PB1SW
NC Input
NC
NO Input
NO
Message Display
MD
ESN = 000
PB1 Switch
PS
PB/Switch Output
PB1SW can be configured for momentary or sustained
A C T I O N Switch ACTION (S) ................... MOM/SUS (MOM)
operation. As momentary, the switch will transfer to the
P U L A S T Power Up LAST (S) ...................... NO/YES (YES)
NO position when the button is pressed and will return
S T MD HI STatus message (S) .. 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
MD H I
M D L O S T MD LO STatus message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (RED)
when released. Momentary action is used in toggle
MD H I
A C MD HI ACtion message (S) ... 5 ASCII Char (RED)
applications such as changing the function of the ODC or
M D L O A C MD LO ACtion message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
I N P U T N C INPUT NO (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
ODS function blocks. In the sustained mode, the switch
I N P U T N O INPUT NC (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
will alternate positions each time the button is pressed.
I N P U T M D INPUT MD (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
E S N Exec. Seq. No. (H) ..................... 001 to 250
An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an
unconfigured NO input to 1. With firmware 1.30 and
higher, the button can be remotely activated through a command over Modbus or LIL.
This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input
MD. A HI (1) input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED. The default connection will be the PS
output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status. The message parameters do not
apply to the current product.
PB1 Switch
Operator Display Interface
BOD LEDS
MSG
MD HI AC
MD HI ST
G
PB1
*****
*****
MD LO ST
R
MD LO AC
*****
*****
MD
MD Input
POWER UP - When the switch is configured for
momentary action, it will always power up in the NC
position. For sustained action, with the POWER UP
parameter set to YES, the switch will power up in
the last position during a hot or warm start, and
during a cold start will power up in the NC position.
When the POWER UP parameter is set to NO, the
switch will power up in the last position during a hot
start. During a warm or cold start, it will power up
in the NC position.
PS
PB Switch
Output
NC
NO
Momentary Action
Sustained Action
X03126S0
BOD - Basic Operator Display
MD - Message Display
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-71
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.71 PB2SW - PB2 Switch
PB2SW is one of three general purpose switches
available in each loop. It can be utilized for switching
Boolean signals in such applications as: toggling the
EITS (External/Internal setpoint Transfer Switch)
function block, Start/Stop, controlling the position of a
TSW (Transfer Switch) function block for switching
analog signals, or other operator initiated actions.
The switch can be configured for momentary or
sustained operation. As momentary, the switch will
transfer to the NO position when the button is pressed
and will return when released. Momentary action is used
in toggle applications such as changing the function of
the EITS function block. In the sustained mode, the
switch will alternate positions each time the button is
pressed. An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an
unconfigured NO input to 1. With firmware 1.30 and
higher, the button can be remotely activated through a
command over Modbus or LIL.
PB2 SWITCH
PB2SW
NC Input
NC
NO Input
NO
Message Display
MD
P
MD
MD
MD
MD
I N
I N
I N
ACT I ON
U L AS T
S T
H I
L O S T
H I
AC
LO AC
PU T N C
PU T N O
PU T MD
ESN
ESN = 000
PB2 Switch
PS
PB/Switch Output
Switch ACTION
(MOM)
(S) ................... MOM/SUS
Power Up LAST (S) ...................... NO/YES (YES)
MD HI STatus message (S) .. 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
MD LO STatus message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (RED)
MD HI ACtion message (S) ... 5 ASCII Char (RED)
MD LO ACtion message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
(null)
INPUT NO (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
INPUT NC (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
INPUT MD (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ..................... 001 to 250
This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input
MD. A HI (1) input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED. The default connection will be the PS
output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status. The message parameters do not
apply to the current product.
PB2 Switch
Operator Display Interface
BOD LEDS
UOD MSG
MD HI ST
G
PB2
R
MD HI AC
*****
*****
MD LO ST
MD LO AC
*****
*****
MD
MD Input
POWER UP - When the switch is configured for
momentary action, it will always power up in the
NC position. For sustained action, with the
POWER UP parameter set to YES, the switch will
power up in the last position during a hot or warm
start, and during a cold start will power up in the
NC position. When the POWER UP parameter is
set to NO, the switch will power up in the last
position during a hot start. During a warm or cold
start, it will power up in the NC position.
PS
PB Switch
Output
NC
NO
Momentary Action
Sustained Action
X03127S0
BOD - Basic Operator Display
MD - Message Display
UOD - Universal Operator Display
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-72
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.72 PB3SW - PB3 Switch
PB3SW is one of three general purpose switches,
available in each loop. It can be utilized for switching
Boolean signals in such applications as: Start/Stop,
controlling the position of a TSW (Transfer Switch)
function block for switching analog signals, or other
operator initiated actions. PB3SW can only be operated
from the front panel when the A/M function block has
not be configured.
PB3SW can be configured for momentary or sustained
operation. As momentary, the switch will transfer to
the NO position when the button is pressed and it will
return when released. In the sustained mode, the switch
will alternate positions each time the button is pressed.
An unconfigured NC input defaults to 0 and an
unconfigured NO input to 1. With firmware 1.30 and
higher, the button can be remotely activated through a
command over Modbus or LIL.
PB3 SWITCH
PB3SW
NC Input
NC
NO Input
NO
Message Display
MD
P
MD
MD
MD
MD
I N
I N
I N
ACT I ON
U L AS T
H I
S T
LO S T
H I
AC
LO AC
PU T N C
PU T N O
PU T MD
ES N
ESN = 000
PB3 Switch
PS
PB/Switch Output
Switch ACTION (S) ................... MOM/SUS (MOM)
Power Up LAST (S) ...................... NO/YES (YES)
MD HI STatus message (S) .. 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
MD LO STatus message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (RED)
MD HI ACtion message (S) ... 5 ASCII Char (RED)
MD LO ACtion message (S) . 5 ASCII Char (GREEN)
(null)
INPUT NO (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
INPUT NC (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
(null)
INPUT MD (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ..................... 001 to 250
This block operates with an operator faceplate that includes green and red LEDs that are turned on using input
MD. A HI (1) input will turn on the Green LED and a LO the Red LED. The default connection will be the PS
output of the block but should be changed as required to display the correct status. The message parameters do not
apply to the current product.
PB3 Switch
Operator Display Interface
BOD LEDS
UOD MSG
MD HI AC
MD HI ST
G
PB3
*****
*****
MD LO ST
R
*****
MD LO AC
*****
MD
MD Input
POWER UP - When the switch is configured for
momentary action, it will always power up in the
NC position. For sustained action, with the
POWER UP parameter set to YES, the switch will
power up in the last position during a hot or warm
start, and during a cold start it will power up in the
NC position. When the POWER UP parameter is
set to NO, the switch will power up in the last
position during a hot start. During a warm or cold
start will power up in the NC position.
PS
PB Switch
Output
NC
NO
Momentary Action
Sustained Action
X03128S0
BOD - Basic Operator Display
MD - Message Display
UOD - Universal Operator Display
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-73
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.73 PCOM - Phase COMmunication
The Phase Communication PCOM function block, in
firmware 1.30 and higher, is available on a one per loop
basis to enable communication with a higher level
device, such as a PC running a batch management
software program. When the controller configuration is
structured such that logic operations are partitioned in
small phase operations, the PCOM block facilitates the
interface between the logic controlling the overall phase
operations for the batch and the logic performing the
control logic for each phase.
Phase COMunication
PCOM
Emerg. OR EO
INT_OK OK
EO
Phase
Communication
IK
Emerg. OR
InterlocKed
PF
FD
FaileD
ReaDy RD
RS
ReSet
RuN RN
EN
ENabled
HEld HE
ST
STart
DoNe DN
HO
HOld
Phase_Fail
The logic performed by the PCOM block is detailed in
Boolean form in Figure 3-1. Network communication
can be either Modbus or LIL (Local Instrument Link).
L I L
C H A N LIL CHANnel ........................ 008 to 253 (null)
Details are listed in the Network Communications
E O P R I O R Emerg. Override PRIORity ... 0,1,2,3,4,5 (4)
I K P R I O R InterlocKed PRIORity ........... 0,1,2,3,4,5 (4)
section. The LOOP # configured in the ODC or ODS
DF
P R I O R Device Fail PRIORity ............ 0,1,2,3,4,5 (4)
function block for the loop determines the location of
I N P U T E O INPUT EO ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
the status word and the status coils in the Modbus
I N P U T O K INPUT OK ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
I N P U T P F INPUT PF ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
mapping. Communication states are represented in
I N P U T R D INPUT RD ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Figure 3-1, on the next page, using the symbols shown
I N P U T R N INPUT RN ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
I N P U T H E INPUT HE ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
below. Modbus states are mapped in coils and LIL
I N P U T D N INPUT DN ............ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
states mapped into two 16-bit status word as shown
E S N Exec. Seq. No. .................... 000 to 250 (000)
below. Three global channels are used to send out the
two status words and an integer value from 1-7 that
represents the status of the PCOM block: 1=ABORTED, 2=DONE, 3=HELD, 4=RUN, 5=INTRLK, 6=READY,
7=EMER OR. The location of the first channel is configured using the LIL CHAN parameter, represented by
channel z in the LIL mapping tables.
R0
Read/Write States
START
Read States
W1
RUN
R 1/0
W0
W
W
R/W R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W R/W
1
0
3
2
1
0
EMERG
EMERG
(EO)
R/W
R
4
Not Ack'd EO
W
R
5
INTRLK (IK)
W
R
6
Not Ack'd IK
W
R
7
FAILED (FD)
R
R
8
Not Ack'd FD
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
Not Ack'd PCOM
R
R
NAME
R
R
BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ACTIVE PCOM
INIT_OK
START
RESET
0
RESTART
1
PCOMP
2
HOLD
3
ABORT
4
READY
5
RUN
6
HELD
7
R
Status Word 1
3-74
8
DONE
1
0
ABORTED
NAME
BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
DFAIL
Each communication state is read as a 1 or 0. Using Modbus, a write of a 1 (W1) or a 0 (W0) will affect the
communication state as defined by the associated logic in Figure 3-1. The W1 or W0 is equivalent to a Mask ON
or a Mask OFF using LIL commands. All unconfigured inputs will be treated as low (0) except OK, RD, RN and
HE which will be treated as high (1). Three of the output states, EO (“EMERG”), IK (“INTRLK”), and FD
-5. This will affect the flashing, etc. as previously described for
other controller status conditions. These states also have unacknowledged bits as detailed in status word 2.
Conditions that require acknowledging can be acknowledged by either using the local faceplate ACK button or by
writing to the individual not acknowledged bit or the Not Ack’d PCOM bit.
Status Word 2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
EMERG
R 1/0
EO
EO
EO
(unconfigured = 0)
EO
R 1/0
INIT_OK
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
1
OK
READY
12
DFAIL
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
2
14
54
FTG
24
56
IK
55
FAILED
AND
R 1/0
FD
18
OR
15
DONE
OR
AND
FD
AND
FD
57
25
FD
58
OR
26
R 0
W0
IK
AND
IK
EN
(unconfigured = 0)
W1
IK
OR
PF
RESET
R 1/0
17
OR
(unconfigured = 1)
R 1/0
INTRLK
AND
11
53
S
F-F
R
3
RS
AND
EO
AND
ABORTED
59
RS
27
RS
READY
AND
RS
60
42
READY
28
R 1/0
RD
AND
(unconfigured = 1)
RS
19
READY
OR
IK
RUN
22
READY
EO
R 0
START
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
4
EN
20
OR
DONE
R 0
W0
S
F-F
R
5
HO
EN
AND
EN
HO
64
63
OR
29
AND
31
ST
AND
RTG
EN
30
ST
EN
AND
ABORTED
23
EO
W1
62
61
AND
READY
EN
RESTART
READY
AND
65
ST
ST
43
66
RUN
R 1/0
RN
AND
ST
(unconfigured = 1)
HELD
RUN
RUN
R 0
HOLD
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
7
32
OR
AND
44
RUN
67
RUN
68
33
AND
34
13
AND
EN
OR
HO
AND
HO
35
AND
EN
FD
69
HO
45
HO
70
HELD
R 1/0
HE
AND
HO
(unconfigured = 1)
RUN
HELD
R 0
PCOMP
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
8
36
OR
AND
46
37
AND
EN
HELD
RUN
READY
16
DONE
DONE
OR
ABORTED
AND
47
39
EO
(unconfigured = 0)
HELD
R 0
ABORT
W1
W0
S
F-F
R
9
72
AND
38
OR
DN
HELD
71
DONE
DONE
73
74
ABORTED
AND
21
OR
IK
DONE
50
AND
49
READY
EN
AND
READY
ABORTED
AND
R 1/0
AND
R 1/0
AND
OR
52
EO
75
ABORTED
ABORTED
76
51
48
Figure 3-1
May 2001
3-75
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.74 PD - PD Controller
PD is a proportional only controller with manual reset. It
is one of five controller types that can be used on a one per
loop basis.
PD CONTROLLER
ESN = 000
PD
Manual reset allows the output of the controller to be set
for a normal operating value (i.e. the desired output when
the process equals setpoint under a given load condition).
Derivative action is provided when the parameter TD is
non-zero. The controller includes an autotune feature that
can be initiated from the operator faceplate using the
quick TUNE feature.
R
Process
P
Setpoint
S
Feedback
F
Auto
A
Initialize
I
P TR
AC T
PG
T D
DG
MR
MR T L AG
MR T RCK
M I N S CA L E
MAX S CA L E
DPP
ENGUN I TS
AUT OT UNE
% DEV
% HYS
% ST EP
AT
DYNAM
AT
RESET
PO S T
AT
I NPU T P
I NPU T S
I NPUT
F
I NPU T A
I NPUT
I
E SN
RG
D I R
When input A is high (1) the controller will operate in the
normal auto mode and when low (0) causes the controller
output to track the feedback signal to eliminate bumping
the output when switching to auto. This is accomplished
by forcing the reset component R to a value that will keep
(GE+R) equal to the feedback value. When the controller
is switched to auto the value of the reset component will
change back to the manual reset MR value at a rate
determined by the MR TLAG setting. When MRTRCK is
set to YES the manual reset MR will also track the
feedback signal when input A is low.
Input I, when changed from low (0) to high (1) or high to
low, will cause the controller to initialize (i.e. eliminate
any proportional gain action during that scan cycle). This
can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes
are made to the setpoint through a switch block.
OR
Output Range
O1
Output
AE
Absolute Error
AW
AT Warning
PD
CONTROLLER
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .................... loop tag.block tag (null)
DIRect ACTing (H) ................................ NO/YES (NO)
Proportional Gain (S) ................... 0.001 to 100.0 (1.000)
Time - Derivative (S) ............. 0.00 to 100.00 min (0.00)
Derivative Gain (S) ........................ 1.00 to 30.00 (10.00)
Manual Reset (S) ......................... 0.00 to 100.00 (0.00)
Manual Reset Time LAG (S) . 0.001 to 4000 min (0.010)
Manual Rest TRACKing (S) .................. NO/YES (NO)
MINimum SCALE (H) .................................. Real (0.0)
MAXimum SCALE (H) ................................. Real (100.0)
Decimal Point Position (preferred) (S) ........... 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.0)
ENGineering UNITS (S) .................6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
AUTOTUNE (S) ................................... NO/YES (YES)
% DEViation during Autotune (S) .... AUTO, 2.5 to 25.0 (AUTO)
% HYSteresis during Autotune (S) .. AUTO, 0.5 to 10.0 (AUTO)
% output STEP on first Autotune (S) ............ 5% to 40% (10)
AT DYNAMic settings (S) .... Fast, Medium, Slow (M)
AT RESET (S) .................................... NO/YES (YES)
POST Autotune Transfer (S) ................ NO/YES (NO)
INPUT P (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT S (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT F (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT A (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT I (H) ........................ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............................. 001 to 250
PD Controller
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
t
t
D S
D
DG
S
+
+
+1
Lead
+
ENG UNITS
+
e
-
S
Range
-
Engineering
INput units
scaling
+
A
+/ - 1
Limit
PG
scaling
-3.3 < O < 103.3%
+
Output
O1
Lag
.
R
Setpoint
RanGe PoinTeR
1
t
MR
S
+1
MR
T
inverse scaling
Feedback
F
Auto
A
Absolute Value
Initialize
AE
.
I
Absolute Error
BLOCK DIAGRAM
The process range pointer parameter should point to another function block that contains range scaling, such as an
analog input that is the source of the process variable. This enables the controller to normalize tuning parameters
3-76
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
for the process range. If this parameter is not configured, the controller will use a range scaling of 0.00-100.00.
During a warm or cold power up the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic elements will be
initialized at the current input on the first scan.
The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for
engineering ranges other than the default of 0 - 100 PRCT. This may be necessary when the controller output is
the setpoint to another controller.
The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES. It can be
initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual. The autotuner, when initiated, replaces the PD controller with an
on-off control function, places the A/M block in Auto (if in Man), and cycles the control loop through six on-off
cycles while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PD controller.
The % DEV parameter is the maximum amount in % that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the
on-off cycles. This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO. When AUTO is configured, the
autotuner will set the % DEV to 4 times the % HYS. This is the minimum value needed to provide good
autotuning results.
The % HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the
opposite direction. This value must be equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band. If the noise band
can not be determined, the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the % HYS
parameter has been configured as AUTO.
The % STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first 1.5 on-off cycles. After the first cycles
the autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the % DEV parameter. On subsequent
autotune exercises, the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET
parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled. The dynamic response recommended by the
autotuner can be configured as Fast, Medium, or Slow. The Medium setting will normally provide a response that
has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response.
When the POST AT parameter is set to YES, the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended
tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test.
More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section of this manual.
May 2001
3-77
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.75 PID - PID Controller
PID is a proportional + integral controller and one of five
controller types that can be used on a one per loop basis.
It uses external feedback to provide integral action. The
block allows interaction with other function blocks or
external devices, such as pneumatic controllers and
shutoff switches, to eliminate the windup that can occur
with other controller types. Derivative action is provided
when the parameter TD is non-zero. The controller
includes an autotune feature that can be initiated from the
operator faceplate using the QUICK access feature.
When input A is high (1) the controller operates in the
normal auto mode and when low (0) causes reset R to
track (F-GE). This will force the controller output to track
the feedback within the controller limits and allow the
controller to switch back to auto without bumping the
output.
The process range pointer parameter points to another
function block that has range scaling, such as an analog
input that is the process variable. This enables the
controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the
process range. If this parameter is not configured, the
controller will use a range scaling of 0.00-100.00.
PID CONTROLLER
PID
Range
R
Process
P
Setpoint
S
Feedback
F
Auto
A
Initialize
I
ESN = 000
PID
OR
Output Range
O1
Output
AE
Absolute Error
AW
AT Warning
CONTROLLER
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .................... loop tag.block tag (null)
DIRect ACTing (H) ................................ NO/YES (NO)
Proportional Gain (S) ................... 0.001 to 100.0 (1.000)
Time - Integral (S) ................... 0.001 to 4000 m/r (100.0)
Time - Derivative (S) ............. 0.00 to 100.00 min (0.00)
Derivative Gain (S) ........................ 1.00 to 30.00 (10.00)
MINimum SCALE (H) .................................. Real (0.0)
MAXimum SCALE (H) ................................ Real (100.0)
Decimal Point Position (preferred) (S) ........... 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.0)
ENGineering UNITS (S) .................6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
AUTOTUNE (S) ................................... NO/YES (YES)
% DEViation during Autotune (S) .... AUTO, 2.5 to 25.0 (AUTO)
% HYSteresis during Autotune (S) .. AUTO, 0.5 to 10.0 (AUTO)
% output STEP on first Autotune (S) ............ 5% to 40% (10)
AT DYNAMic settings (S) .... Fast, Medium, Slow (M)
AT RESET (S) .................................... NO/YES (YES)
POST Autotune Transfer (S) ................ NO/YES (NO)
INPUT P (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT S (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT F (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT A (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT I (H) ........................ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............................. 001 to 250
RG
D I R
P TR
AC T
PG
T I
T D
DG
M I N S CA L E
MAX S CA L E
DP P
ENGUN I TS
AUT OT UNE
% DEV
% HYS
% ST EP
AT
DYNAM
AT
RESET
PO S T
AT
I NPU T P
I NPU T S
I NPUT
F
I NPU T A
I NPUT
I
E SN
Input I, when changed from low (0) to high (1) or from
high to low, will cause the controller to initialize (i.e.
eliminate any proportional gain action during that cycle). This can be used to prevent bumping the output when
changes are made to the setpoint using a switch block.
POWER UP - During a warm or cold power up, the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic
elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan.
PID Controller
Process
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
t
t
D S
D
DG
+
ENG UNITS
+
e
-
S
+
+1
Lead
+
.
S
-
Engineering
INput units
scaling
A
+/ - 1
PG
+
Limit
-3.3 < O < 103.3%
scaling
+
Output 1
O1
Lag
.
R
Setpoint
RanGe PoinTeR
1
t
IS
+1
inverse scaling
F
Feedback
Auto
Absolute Value
Initialize
Absolute Error
AE
3-78
A
.
I
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for
engineering ranges other than the default of 0-100 PRCT. This may be necessary when the controller output is the
setpoint to another controller.
The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be
initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual. The autotuner, when initiated, replaces the PID with an on-off
control function, places the A/M block in Auto (if in Man) and cycles the control loop through six on-off cycles
while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PID controller.
The % DEV parameter is the maximum amount in % that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the
on-off cycles. This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO. When AUTO is configured, the
autotuner will set the % DEV to 4 times the % HYS. This is the minimum value needed to provide good
autotuning results.
The % HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the
opposite direction. This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band. If the noise
band can not be determined, the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the % HYS
parameter has been configured as AUTO.
The % STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on-off cycle. After the first cycle, the
autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the % DEV parameter. On subsequent
autotune exercises, the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET
parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled. The dynamic response recommended by the
autotuner can be configured as Fast, Medium, or Slow. The Medium setting will normally provide a response that
has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response.
When the POST AT parameter is set to YES, the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended
tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test.
More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section.
May 2001
3-79
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.76 PIDAG - PIDAG Controller
PIDAG is an adaptive gain proportional + integral
controller and is one of five controller types that can be
used on a one per loop basis. It uses external feedback to
provide integral action that allows interaction with other
function blocks or external devices, such as pneumatic
controllers, shutoff switches. PIDAG eliminates windup
that can occur with other controller types. Derivative
action is provided when the parameter TD is non-zero.
The controller includes an autotune feature that can be
initiated from the operator faceplate using the quick
TUNE feature.
PIDAG CONTROLLER
PIDAG
R
Process
P
PIDAG
CONTROLLER
Setpoint
S
Feedback
F
Auto
A
Initialize
I
P TR
AC T
PG
T I
T D
DG
M I N S CA L E
MAX S CA L E
DP P
ENGUN I TS
AUT OT UNE
% DEV
% HYS
% ST EP
AT
DYNAM
AT
RESET
PO S T
AT
I NPU T P
I NPU T S
I NPUT
F
I NPU T A
I NPUT
I
I NPU T AG
E SN
RG
D I R
The process range pointer parameter (input R) points to a
function block that has range scaling, such as the analog
input that is providing the process variable. This enables
the controller to normalize the tuning parameters for the
process range. If this parameter is not configured, the
controller will use a range scaling of 0.00-100.00.
OR
Output Range
O1
Output
AE
Absolute Error
AW
AT Warning
AG
Adaptive Gain
When input A is high (1) the controller will operate in the
normal auto mode and when low (0) causes reset R to
track (F-GE). This forces the controller output to track
the feedback within controller limits and allow the
controller to be switched back to auto without bumping the
output.
ESN = 000
Range
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .................. loop tag.block tag
DIRect ACTing (H) ............................... NO/YES
Proportional Gain (S) .................. 0.001 to 100.0
Time - Integral (S) ................. 0.001 to 4000 m/r
Time - Derivative (S) ............ 0.00 to 100.00 min
Derivative Gain (S) ....................... 1.00 to 30.00
MINimum SCALE (H) ................................. Real
MAXimum SCALE (H) ............................... Real
Decimal Point Position (preferred) (S) ......... 0.0.0.0.0.0
ENGineering UNITS (S) ................6 ASCII Char
AUTOTUNE (S) .................................. NO/YES
% DEViation during Autotune (S) ... AUTO, 2.5 to 25.0
% HYSteresis during Autotune (S) . AUTO, 0.5 to 10.0
% output STEP on first Autotune (S) ........... 5% to 40%
AT DYNAMic settings (S) .. Fast, Medium, Slow
AT RESET (S) ................................... NO/YES
POST Autotune Transfer (S) ................ N0/YES
INPUT P (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT S (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT F (H) ...................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT A (H) ..................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT I (H) ....................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT AG (H) .................. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............................ 001 to 250
Input I, when changed from low (0) to high (1) or from
high to low, will cause the controller to initialize (i.e.
eliminate any proportional gain action during that scan
cycle. This can be used to prevent bumping the output when changes are made to the setpoint using a switch
block.
(100.0)
(0.00)
(10.00)
(0.0)
(100.0)
(0.0)
(PRCT)
(YES)
(AUTO)
(AUTO)
(10)
(M)
(YES)
(NO)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
Engineering
INput units
scaling
P
t
t
D S
D
DG
S
+
+
ENG UNITS
+1
Lead
+
+
e
-
-
Engineering
INput units
scaling
A
PG
X
+
+/ - 1
Limit
-3.3 < O < 103.3%
scaling
+
Output 1
O1
Lag
Setpoint
RanGe PoinTeR
R
1
t
.
AG
(NO)
(1.000)
PID Adaptive Gain Controller
Process
S
(null)
I
S
+1
inverse scaling
Feedback
Adaptive Gain
F
Auto
A
Absolute Value
Initialize
AE
3-80
.
I
Absolute Error
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
POWER UP - During a warm or cold power up, the output will be initialized to MINSCALE and all dynamic
elements will be initialized at the current input on the first scan.
Input AG is multiplied by the gain error (GE). In version 1.30 of the controller firmware, an unconnected AG
input will be set to 1.0. In earlier versions, it was set to 0.0 which required that the input always be connected to a
source (e.g. Hold block) in order for the PIDAG block to function.
The controller output has MINSCALE and MAXSCALE parameters allowing the output signal to be scaled for
engineering ranges other than the default of 0 - 100 PRCT. This may be necessary when the controller output is
the setpoint to another controller.
The Autotune feature is accessible using the TUNE pushbutton when AUTOTUNE is set to YES and can be
initiated while the loop is in Auto or Manual. The autotuner, when initiated, replaces the PIDAG with an on-off
control function, places the A/M block in Auto (if in Man) and cycles the control loop through six on-off cycles
while learning the process dynamics which it uses to provide tuning recommendations for the PIDAG controller.
The % DEV parameter is the maximum amount in % that the process should deviate from the setpoint during the
on-off cycles. This parameter can be set manually or can be configured as AUTO. When AUTO is configured, the
autotuner will set the % DEV to 4 times the % HYS. This is the minimum value needed to provide good
autotuning results.
The % HYS parameter is the amount that the process must deviate from setpoint before switching the output in the
opposite direction. This value must be at least equal to or slightly greater than any process noise band. If the noise
band can not be determined, the autotuner will compute it at the start of an autotuning exercise when the % HYS
parameter has been configured as AUTO.
The % STEP parameter is the amount that the valve will change on the first on-off cycle. After the first cycle, the
autotuner will adjust the step to keep the process within the value of the % DEV parameter. On subsequent
autotune exercises, the step will use the value computed from the previous exercise unless the AT RESET
parameter is set to YES or the controller has been power cycled. The dynamic response recommended by the
autotuner can be configured as Fast, Medium, or Slow. The Medium setting will normally provide a response that
has no or little overshoot to a setpoint step response.
When the POST AT parameter is set to YES, the control loop will be returned to Auto using the recommended
tuning values unless a warning occurred during the test.
More details on autotuning can be found in the Operation section.
May 2001
3-81
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.77 PRSEQ - Program Sequencer
PRSEQ function blocks are available on a one per loop basis. They
can be used to generate a simple setpoint profile or a complex batch
sequence involving multiple discrete input and output logic
operations as well as setpoint profiles.
The number of steps is configurable using the STEPS parameter and
the number of discrete inputs/outputs using the GROUPS parameter.
Sixteen (16) discrete inputs/outputs are provided for each group. If
these parameters are increased after the function block is initially
configured, the values of all previously entered step parameters will
be retained. If however, a configuration is downloaded from the PCbased Graphical Configuration Software, the parameter values are
determined by the download which includes the entire block
configuration. The PRSEQ can store from 1 to 9 recipes. Each
recipe will have the same number of steps and groups but all of the
parameters can be configured differently.
Two new inputs have been added in firmware 1.30: RN (Recipe
Number) and LR (Load Recipe). Input RN will accept a recipe
number and input LR on a positive transition will select the recipe
number which is the RN input. The RN input will round the number
to the nearest integer value. A recipe number that is out of range
will have no effect and the current recipe will remain. The recipe
number set by the RN and LR inputs will be retained during HOT
and WARM starts. During a COLD start, the recipe will revert to the
recipe set by the configuration parameter “Recipe.”
PROGRAM SEQUENCER
PRSEQ
ESN = 000
Track Variable
TV
AO
Track Command
TC
SN
Step Number
Step Forward
SF
ST
Step Time
RT
Remaining Time
PROGRAM
SEQUENCER
Step Backward SB
Goto Step GS
Step Number SN
Hold
H
Reset
R
Analog Output
CR
Current Recipe
SP
Step Pulse
SC
Steps Completed
Recipe Number
RN
Load Recipe
LR
Input n 0
n0
Optional
Discrete Inputs/Ouputs
n0
Output n 0
Input nF
nF
16 Groups of 16
n = 0 to F
nF
Output n F
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
r
r
r
REC
S
GR
RE
PU
NPU
NPU
NPU
NPU
NPU
NPU
I NP
I NP
NPU
NPU
N
S
S
S
S
P
x
x
x
x
U
x
x
x
x
.
I PES
T EP S
OU P S
C I PE
L AS T
T T V
T TC
T S F
T SB
T GS
T SN
U T H
U T R
T RN
T L R
ESN
n n
T
x Gn I
xGnO
x T I M
xAE P
.
Number of RECIPES .................................... 1 to 9
Number of STEPS .................................... 0 to 250
Number of GROUPS .................................. 0 to 16
Current RECIPE (r) [also QUICKSET] ............... 1 to 9
Power Up LAST ....................................... NO/YES
INPUT TV ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT TC ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT SF ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT SB ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT GS ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT SN ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT H ............................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT R ............................... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT RN ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT LR ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................................... 000 to 250
INPUT nn ............................. loop tag.block tag.output
Recipe r Step xxx Grp n In Mask .... 0000 to FFFF
Recipe r Step xxx Grp n Out Mask . 0000 to FFFF
Recipe r Step xxx TIMe Period minutes ....... Real
Recipe r Step xxx Analog End Point ............ Real
(1)
(0)
(0)
(1)
(YES)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(000)
(null)
(0000)
(0000)
(0.0)
(0.0)
Input SN will accept a step number and input GS, on a positive
transition, will select the step number, which is the SN input. The SN input will round the number to the nearest
integer value. A step number that is out of range will have no effect and the sequencer will remain at the current
step.
Output AO (analog output) will track input TV when input TC is high (1). If input TC goes low (0), AO will
remain at the tracked values unless either a timed step ramps AO to the AEP (analog end point) for the step or an
event completes the step at which time AO will go to the AEP value for the completed step.
The current sequencer step can be changed by any of the following six events:
1.
the Reset input R going high (1) moving it to step 1
2.
Goto Step input GS going high (1) forcing the sequencer to the step indicated by the whole value of input SN
3.
the Step Forward input SF going high (1) moving it to the next higher step unless on the last step
4.
the Step Backward input SB going high (1) moving back to the previous step unless on the first step
5.
a step time expiring advancing to the next step
6.
all the discrete inputs nn are True (1) that match the input mask (a mask value of ‘0’ is a ‘don’t care’
condition) advancing to the next step
Input H will hold the remaining time of the current step and disable advancing of the sequencer by operations 5
and 6 but will allow operations 1, 2, 3, and 4 to move the sequencer to the starting position of a new step.
3-82
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
When the last sequencer step is completed, SC will be set high (1). The sequencer cannot be moved past the last
step unless the reset input R goes high (1) forcing it to position 1. The sequencer can be moved forward only when
in position 1. Network communications will allow the sequencer to be moved to a new step and the remaining
time of the current step to be changed to a new value.
When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as ‘timed only’, one discrete input should be used to prevent
the input mask from moving the sequencer to the next step. This can be accomplished by requiring a high (1)
input and then not connecting that input, since unconnected inputs will be treated as 0.
When discrete groups are used and a step is desired as ‘event only’, the TIMe parameter for the step should be set
to 0.0. The Analog Output will remain at the AEP value of the previous step or, if at step 1, the Analog value will
be 0.0. When the sequencer advances to the next step, the Analog Output will go to the AEP value for the
completed step.
POWER UP - During a warm start, if PU LAST is set to YES, all outputs, step number, track variable, and
remaining step time will be initialized at the last values prior to power fail. During a cold start all outputs are
initialized to 0 and the PRSEQ is in a reset condition.
RN
LR
TV
TC
SF
.
SB
GS
SN
H
R
Recipe Number
Load Recipe
Track Variable
Analog Output
Track Command
Step Number
Step Forward
Step Time
PROGRAM & SEQUENCE
Step Backward
Go to Step
RemainingTime
CONTROLLER
Step Pulse
Step Number
SN
ST
RT
SP
.
Hold
Reset
Discrete Outputs
Group 1
Group 1
Discrete Inputs
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
AO
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
FF
FF
Step 006
Step 007
Step 008
Step 009
AEP = 300.00
AEP = 325.00
AEP = 325.00
AEP = 340.00
Analog
Output
Analog Output AO
TIMe = 2.45
TIMe = 5.25
TIMe = 0.0
TIMe = 25.0
Group 1
Input Output
Mask Mask
2E5B 003E
Group 1
Input Output
Mask Mask
0034 00E8
Group 1
Input Output
Mask Mask
13D2 003E
Group 1
Input Output
Mask Mask
327A 003E
00 = 1
01 = 0
02 = 1
00 = 0
01 = 0
02 = 1
00 = 0
01 = 1
02 = 0
00 = 1
01 = 0
02 = 1
00 = 1
01 = 1
02 = 1
.
.
.
Group 2
00 = 0
01 = 0
02 = 1
.
.
.
Group 2
00 = 1
01 = 1
02 = 1
.
.
.
Group 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
00 = 1
01 = 1
02 = 1
.
.
.
Group 2
Rev. 2
3-83
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.78 QHD_ - Quickset Hold
QHD_ function blocks enable a real value to be changed
on-line using the QUICKSET feature. The block is
identified by an 8-character name that will be displayed in
the QUICKSET mode. The block is configured with a
range entered as MIN SCALE and MAX SCALE to set a
usable range, and a Decimal Point Position parameter can
set the allowed precision. The hold value cannot be
changed beyond the -10% to 110% value of these limits.
The hold value will change continuously as the pulser is
turned. The MAX value must always be set greater than
the MIN value. The block can also be forced to track input
TV by asserting input TC high (1).
QUICKSET
HOLD
QUICKSET
HOLD
QHD_
Track Variable
TV
TC
Track Variable
Track Command
HOLD
Output 1
Track Command
TC
Track Command
MAXimum SCALE
ENGineering UNITS
ESN = 000
OR
Output Range
O1O1
Output
Output11
TV
QUICKSET
HOLD
QUICKSET
HOLD
TC
OR
Output Range
(S) ...........
8 ASCII
Char
Q S NQ
A SM EN AQuickSet
NAME NAME
M E QuickSet
(S) ...........
8 ASCII
Char (null)
(null)
MA
I NL SEC AMINimum
L E MINimum
(H) ......................
Real(0.00)
(0.00)
M I NS C
(H) ......................
Real
SCALESCALE
MA
L E MAXimum
SCALE
(H) .....................
Real
(100.00)
MAX S C
A XL SEC AMAXimum
(H)
.....................
Real
(100.00)
SCALE
P P PD
ecimal Point Position (preferred) (S) ... 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.00)
D P P DDecimal
oint Position (preferred) (S) ... 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.00)
E N G U N I T S ENGineering UNITS (S) ..... 6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
E NGU N
I
T
S
(S) ..... 6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
Q S C H A NENGineering
G E Quick UNITS
Set CHANGE
... Continuous/Store (C)
Q S CH A
N PGUET Quick
... Continuous/Store
CHANGE
T V Set
INPUT
TV (H) .........
loop tag.block tag.output (C)
I N
(null)
T C Up
INPUT
TC (H)(S)
.........
......................Real
loop tag.block tag.output(0.00)
(null)
P U V AI N
L PUUET Power
VALUE
Exec. Seq.(S)
No.....................No/Yes
(H) ................. 001 to 250
E
S
N
(YES)
P U L A S T Power Up LAST
I NPU T
T V INPUT TV (H) ......... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
I N P U T T C INPUT TC (H) ......... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
E S N Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
Rev. 2
O1
.
QuickSet NAME
MINimum SCALE
TV
Track Variable
Pulser
.
ESN = 000
QHD_
Firmware 1.30 added parameter QSCHANGE. It
enables the block output to either update continuously
in the Quickset mode as the pulser knob is turned or
to only update the output with the value in the
numeric display when the STORE button is pressed.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
When configuring the DPP (Decimal Point Position) it is important to keep the resolution to the minimum
necessary for operation changes. It will take the operator longer turning the pulser if the resolution is too high.
For example, if only 0.1% changes are needed configure a 0-100 range as 0.0 – 100.0 and not 0.000 – 100.000.
During Hot or Warm start, the QHD will power-up in the last position during a Cold start at the -10% range value.
3-84
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.79 RATIO - Ratio
RATIO function blocks can be used on a one per
loop basis. They provide a means of setting a ratio in
an external setpoint application, for example,
controlling a captive flow while maintaining the ratio
between a wild flow and the captive flow at the
desired value. Inputs A and E (external ratio) and the
operator set ratio R value are multiplied and become
the function block output O1.
RATIO
ESN = 000
RATIO
Track Command input TC, asserted high (1), causes
the ratio block to track the input variable TV. The
ratio value to be recalculated is then R = TV / (A x
E). The value of R will be limited at the HI or LO
LIMIT range settings. The factory default settings of
the ratio limits are 0.00 - 30.00.
Input A
A
Input E
E
Track Command
TC
Track Variable
TV
RAT I
L I M I
L I M I
QS DP
I NPUT
I NPUT
I NPUT T
I NPUT T
QU I C KS E
ES
H I
LO
O
T
T
P
A
E
C
V
T
N
R
O1
Output 1
TO
Tracked Output
RATIO
O=RxAxE
RATIO (S) ..................................... Real (1.00)
HIgh Ratio LIMIT (S) ..................... Real (30.00)
LOw Ratio LIMIT (S) ..................... Real (0.00)
QuickSet Dec. Pt. Pos. (S) .. 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.00)
INPUT A (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT E (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT TC (H) ...... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT TV (H) ...... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
QUICK SET Ratio (S) ............. NO/YES (YES)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .............. 001 to 250
The RATIO can be adjusted using the QUICKSET
feature if parameter QUICKSET is set to YES. The
RATIO will continuously change as the knob is adjusted. Press the STORE button when the final value is reached
to insure that the new RATIO setting will be retained on a Cold power up condition. The QS DPP parameter
enables setting of the Ratio adjustment resolution when in the QUICKSET mode.
If input A or E is not configured, it’s value will be set to 1. When input TC or TV is not configured, it’s value will
be set to 0.
The TO (Tracked Output) is normally used in applications where an external device is being used to set a ratio in
place of the RATIO parameter (R is then set to 1.0). When it is desired to have the output of the RATIO block
track the TV variable, the external device is forced to track TO. Input E will then equal TV/[Ax(1.0)] and,
therefore, the RATIO block output O1 will equal TV.
A
X
RxAxE
AxE
X
O1
Output 1
E
X
TV
AxE
TC
÷
R
TV
AxR
÷
Tracked
Output
TO
.
.
.
Track Command
.
TV
Track Variable
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-85
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.80 RCT_ - Repeat Cycle Timer
RCT_ function blocks provide repeat time cycles that can
be used in logic timing operations or with PID blocks to
provide adaptive on times controlled by the PID block.
Output ET will provide the time in minutes that has
elapsed during the current cycle (ON + OFF). Output RT
is the remaining time in the current cycle and will equal
the total cycle time (ON + OFF) when the timer has not
been started.
With firmware 1.30 and higher, the ON and OFF TIME is
adjustable over the full range of the display which is
0.00000 to 999999. In earlier firmware, the minimum
time setting was 0.1. If the delay time is set to less than
the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the
scan time.
REPEAT CYCLE TIMER
RCT_
Start
Adapt Time
S
ESN = 000
REPEAT CYCLE TIMER
AT
OF F T I M E
ON T I ME
PU L AST
I NPUT S
I NPUT AT
ESN
ET
Elapsed Time
RT
Remaining Time
O1
Output 1
OFF TIME minutes (S) ..................... Real
ON TIME minutes (S) ....................... Real
Power Up LAST (S) ................... NO/YES
INPUT S (H) ............ loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT AT (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .................. 001 to 250
(0.0)
(0.0)
(YES)
(null)
(null)
Input S, asserted high (1), will cause the RCT block to start the timing cycle. Output O1 will first go high (1) for a
time set by ON TIME and then it will go low (0) for a time set by OFF TIME. It will continue to repeat this cycle
until input S is asserted low (0) which forces O1 low (0) and ends the timing cycle.
ADAPTIVE ON TIME - this feature is active only when input AT is configured. It has a valid range of 0.0 to 1.0
and there are two separate modes of adaptive on time depending on the configuration of the OFF TIME parameter.
•
OFF TIME = 0.0 - The time cycle will remain fixed and equal to the value of ON TIME. The output will be
high for a period equal to ON TIME x AT.
•
OFF TIME > 0.0 - The output will be low (0) for a period equal to OFF TIME and will be high for a period
equal to ON TIME x AT. The time cycle equals [(ON TIME x AT) + OFF TIME].
POWER UP - With the PU LAST parameter set to YES, during a hot or warm power up the block will initialize
the input/output states and elapsed time at the last values. During a cold start, they will be set to 0. With PU LAST
set to NO, during a hot start the block will initialize the input/output states and elapsed time at the last values.
During a warm or cold start, they will be set to 0.
O N T I M E > 0.0
CYCLE
ON + OFF
O F F T I M E > 0.0
ON
OFF
ON
O utput 1
OFF
IN p u t A T = (null)
TIMER
O N T I M E > 0.0
CYCLE
ON
O F F T I M E = 0.0
nON
ON - nON
nON
O utput 1
ON - nON
IN p u t A T = n
AT
ON
A dapt
T im e
.
TIME
O F F T I M E > 0.0
OFF
TIME
O N T I M E > 0.0
CYCLE
nON + OFF
nON
OFF
nON
O utput 1
ET
RT
OFF
IN p u t A T = n
S
START
S tart
O utput 1
O1
.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-86
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.81 RLM_ - Rate Limiter
RLM_ function blocks limit the rate of change of analog
input A. Separate up and down rates are entered in
configuration, in engineering units per minute. Output RL
will be high (1) if the block is limiting a rising input signal
and output FL will be high when the block is limiting a
falling input signal.
O1
O utput 1
A
Analog Input
UPRATE
DOWNRATE
.
E
Switch shown in the enabled position with Input E not connected
E nable
RL
Rising Limit
RATE LIMITER
RLM_
Analog Input
A
Enable
E
UP
D OWN
I NP
I NP
ESN = 000
RATE LIMITER
RAT E
RAT E
UT A
UT E
ES N
O1
Output 1
RL
Rising Limit
FL
Falling Limit
UP RATE (units/minute) (S) ....... Real
DOWN RATE (units/minute) (S) . Real
INPUT A (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT E (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ............ 001 to 250
(100.0)
(100.0)
(null)
(null)
Input E asserted high (1) will enable the limit action of
the block. When input E is low (0), the output will track
the analog input. If input E is not configured, the limit
action of the block will be enabled
FL
Falling Limit
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.82 ROT_ - Retentive On Timer
ROT_ function blocks perform an on-delay timing
function with output states determined by inputs ON and
EN.
RETENTIVE ON TIMER
ROT_
When input EN is low (0) outputs D and ND are low and
when input EN is high (1), the outputs will be determined
by the ON input and the elapsed time.
ON Input
ON
ENable Input
EN
ESN = 000
RETENTIVE
ON TIMER
ET
Elapsed Time
RT
Remaining Time
OD
Output D
ND
Output Not D
When ON goes high the elapsed time will start. Output D
will go high after ET (elapsed time) equals or exceeds the
DLY TIME. Output RT (remaining time) equals DLY
D L Y T I M E DeLaY TIME minutes (S) ................ Real (0.0)
P U L A S T Power Up LAST (S) .................. NO/YES (YES)
TIME - ET. If ON goes low, the elapsed time will stop at
I N P U T O N INPUT ON (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
the current value and will continue when ON returns to a
I N P U T E N INPUT EN (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output (null)
E S N Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
high state. The elapsed time returns to 0.0 when input
EN goes low. Output ND will be high (1) if input EN is
high and output D is not high. With firmware 1.30 and
higher,
the DLY TIME is adjustable over the full range of the
ET
RT
display which is 0.00000 to 999999. In earlier versions, the
minimum time setting was 0.1. If the delay time is set to less
D
than the scan time of the station the delay time will equal the
scan time.
ND
Output D
DeLaY
TIME
Output ND
.
ON Input
ON
ENable Input
.
EN
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
POWER UP - During a warm start, when PU LAST is set to
YES, the block will initialize at the input/output states and
elapsed time at the instant power down occurred. A cold start
will initialize the input/output states and elapsed time to 0.
3-87
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.83 ROUT_ - Relay Outputs
ROUT_ function blocks provide SPDT contacts activated
by function block input C. The relay will turn on when the
block input is high (1) and will turn off when low (0).
Two relay outputs are available on the Expander Board.
RELAY OUTPUT #_
ROUT_
ROUT_no
Coil
C
ROUT_c
RELAY OUTPUT
SPDT Relay
C
I NPU T C
A CT I ON
no
D/A
INPUT C
ACTION
ROUT_nc
(H)
(H)
....... loop tag.block tag.output
.......................... DIR/REV
(null)
DIR
c
Terminal Connections are listed in Section 8.4.
nc
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.84 RSF_ - RS Flip-Flop
RSF_ function blocks perform a reset dominant flip-flop
function as detailed in the truth table. An unused S input
will be set high (1) and an unused R input will be set low
(0).
R
Reset
S
LO
O1
1
X
X
0
0
1
X
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
.
S
Set
R - RESET Input
S - SET Input
LO - Last Output
O1 - Output
X (don't care)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-88
Output 1
RSF_
Reset
R
Set
S
O1
ESN = 000
RS FLIP-FLOP
PU L AST
I NPU T R
I NPU T S
ESN
RS FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
R
RS FLIP-FLOP
O1
Output 1
Power Up LAST (S) ................... NO/YES (YES)
INPUT R (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
INPUT S (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .................. 001 to 250
.
POWER UP - During a warm start, when PU LAST is set to
YES, the block will initialize at the input/output states at
the instant power down occurred. A cold start will initialize
the input/output states to 0.
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.85 RTG_ - Rising Edge Trigger
RISING EDGE TRIGGER
RTG_ function blocks provide a high (1) output for one scan
cycle each time input P transitions from a low (0) to a high
(1).
RTG_
Pulse Input
ESN = 000
RISING EDGE
P
TRIGGER
O1
Output 1
Output 1
O1
.
I NPUT P
ESN
Pulse Input
P
.
INPUT P (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .............. 001 to 250
(null)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.86 RTT_ - Real Time clock Trip (V2.0)
RTT_ function blocks provide high (1) outputs when time
from the CLOCK block coincides with the TIME, DATE,
& DAYS of the Week TRIP settings. The block outputs
will remain high while the CLOCK coincides with the
settings
REAL TIME TRIP
RTT_
TiMe Trip
TIME 1 7 : 3 6 : 1 6
DaTe Trip
MNTH
TM
TiMe Trip
DT
DaTe Trip
DY
DaYs Trip
1 2
DAY
30
YEAR
1 999
DaYs Trip
DAYS
01 11 11 0
S
T I
DA
MN
D
YE
ME
YS
T H
AY
AR
T
T
T
T
T
RP
R P
RP
RP
RP
M T
W T
F
S
TIME TRiP (S) ...... 00:00:00 - 23:59:59
DAYS TRiP (S)..................... SMTWTFS
MNTH TRiP (S)........................... 01 - 12
DAY TRiP (S).............................. 01 - 31
YEAR TRiP (S).................... 1970 -3099
(0)
(1111111)
(01)
(01)
(1999)
Rev. 2
May 2001
3-89
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.87 SCL_ - Scaler
SCL_ function blocks provide a means to scale an analog
signal. It will re-range a signal by using the range pointer
to reference the function block with the original range.
When the range pointer (input R) is not configured, the
function block will not re-scale the input signal but will
pass it directly to the output. The purpose, under this
situation, would be to provide minimum and maximum
scale, preferred decimal point position, and units for
another block (e.g. operator display) to reference.
+
A
Output MAX SCALE - Output MIN SCALE
+
-
ESN = 000
SCL_
Range
R
Analog Input
A
SCALER
RG PT R
M I NSCALE
MA X S C A L E
DPP
E NGU N I T S
I NPUT A
ESN
OR
Output Range
O1
Output 1
RanGe PoinTeR (S) .......... loop tag.block tag (null)
Output MINimum SCALE (H) ............ Real (0.00)
Output MAXimum SCALE (H) ........... Real (100.00)
Decimal Pt. Position (preferred) (S) ... 0.0.0.0.0.0 (0.00)
ENGineering UNITS (S) ...... 6 ASCII Char (PRCT)
INPUT A (H) ............. loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................... 001 to 250
O1
Input MAX SCALE - Input MIN SCALE
.
SCALER
+
.
Input MIN SCALE
Output MIN SCALE
ENGingeering UNITS
Input RanGe PoinTeR
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.88 SEL_ - Signal Selector
SEL_ function blocks can provide a high or low signal
selection on the three input signals. Unused inputs will be
set equivalent to the lowest real value when configured as a
HI selector and to the highest real value when configured as
a LO selector.
A
B
.
C
Input A
Input B
Output
HI/LO
SEL_
SE
I
I
I
SIGNAL
SELECTOR
SIGNAL SELECTOR
O1
.
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
L T YPE
NPU T A
NPUT B
NPUT C
ESN
ESN = 000
SIGNAL
O1
Output 1
SELECTOR
SELector TYPE (S) .................... LO/HI
INPUT A (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .............. 001 to 250
(LO)
(null)
(null)
(null)
Input C
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-90
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.89 SETPT - Setpoint
SETPT function blocks can be used on a one per loop basis to
permit operator adjustment of the controller setpoint within the
loop. The on-line setpoint is adjustable, using the pulser knob,
while <loop tag>.S is the displayed variable; unless the track
command TC is high (1), at which time the setpoint will track the
TV input.
A setpoint ramping feature allows the setpoint to ramp to a
TARGET value. The start of a ramp can be initiated using a
communication command asserting input SR high (the ramp starts
on a positive transition of the SR input), or using the RAMP
ON/OFF function in the QUICKSET mode. Both ramp RATE and
ramp TIME can be set in configuration. Firmware 1.30 and higher
sets the USE RATE default to NO; earlier versions are set at YES.
Setting configuration parameter USE RATE to YES will cause the
setpoint to change at the rate setting and ignore a configured ramp
time. The RTIME or RRATE, TARGET, and PU SETPT values
can be set using the QUICKSET feature if the QUICKSET
parameter is set to YES.
SETPOINT
SETPT
Range
R
Track Variable
TV
Track Command
TC
Start Ramp
SR
Limit Pulser Up
LU
Limit Pulser Down
LD
RG P T R
RRATE
RT I ME
T ARGE T
S
E
U
RAT E
QU I CKSE T
PU SET P T
PU LAS T
I NPUT T V
I NPUT
TC
I NPUT
SR
I NPUT
L U
L D
I NPU T
ES N
ESN = 000
SETPOINT
O1
Output 1
RanGe PoinTeR (S) ......... loop tag.block tag
Ramp RATE (units/min) (S) .............. Real
Ramp TIME (min) (S) ................ 0 to 3840
TARGET setpoint (S) ........................ Real
USE ramp RATE (S) .................. NO/YES
QUICK SET setpoint values (S) . NO/YES
Power Up SETPoinT (S) ................... Real
Power Up LAST (S) .................... NO/YES
INPUT TV (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT TC (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT SR (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT LU (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT LD (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) .................. 001 to 250
(null)
(10.0)
(0)
(0.0)
(NO)
(YES)
(0.0)
(YES)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
(null)
The RG PTR, range pointer, parameter determines the normal operating range of the function block. If the pointer
is not configured the block will use 0.00 to 100.00. The range of the setpoint block will be limited to -10% to
110% of the range parameter. If a range change is made the current setpoint, ramp rate, target setpoint, and power
up setpoint will be moved to be the same % values within the new range.
The setpoint block also has two inputs LU and LD that can be used to limit pulser changes in one direction. This
can be used if another function block is limiting the setpoint and it is desired not to allow the operator to adjust the
setpoint block to a value beyond the external limit.
POWER UP - The function block can be configured to power up in various conditions during a warm start. If the
PU LAST parameter is set to YES, the block will power up with the last setpoint. When SETPT does not power up
in last position or on a cold start, it will power up using the PU SETPT parameter.
Pulser
LU
LD
TV
Pulser Limit
Track Variable
SETPOINT
Output 1
O1
.
.
TC
Track Command
PU SETPT
Ramp Generator
RAMP
ON/OFF
SR
TARGET Setpoint
Ramp RATE
USE
Ramp RATE Ramp TIME
Start Ramp
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-91
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.90 SIN_ - SINE
SIN__ function blocks, included in firmware 1.30 and higher,
accept a radian input and output the sine of that angle.
SINE
SIN
Input X
.
X
SIN (X)
Input X
Output 1
X
ESN = 000
O1 = SIN (X)
O1
Output 1
O1
.
I NPU T X
ES N
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-92
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.91 SPLIM - Setpoint Limit
SPLIM function blocks can be used on a one per loop
basis to limit the setpoint of the loop controller. Input A
will pass through the function block to output O1 unless it
exceeds one of the limit settings at which time the block
will output the limit value.
SETPOINT LIMIT
SPLIM
If the HI LIMIT is set lower than the LO LIMIT, the
block will always output the high limit value.
Output status HS or LS will be high (1) if the block is in a
limit condition. The status event ‘S HI LIM’ or ‘S LO
LIM’ will be displayed in the alphanumeric if the SL
PRIOR is greater than 0. A priority of 0 disables the
reporting of the limit function and sets the bits in the
status word to 0. See below for additional details
regarding priorities.
Range
R
Input A
A
ESN = 000
SETPOINT LIMIT
RG PT R
H I
L I M I T
LO L I M I T
I NPUT A
S L PR I OR
ES N
O1
Output 1
HS
High Status
LS
Low Status
RanGe PoinTeR (H) .. loop tag.block tag (null)
HIgh LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (100.00)
LOw LIMIT (S) ........................... Real (0.00)
INPUT A (H) ..... loop tag.block tag.output (null)
Setpt Limit PRIORity (S) .. 0,1,2,3,4,5
(0)
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ........... 001 to 250
The SPLIM function block has an RG PTR parameter (input R) that defines the normal operating range of the
block. Limit settings can be made within -10% to 110% of the range pointer values. If the range pointer is not
configured, a range of 0.0 to 100.0 will be used. If a range change is made the current limit value will be moved to
be the same % value within the new range.
PRIORITIES - The priority assigned to SL PRIOR will affect the operation as follows (the outputs HS and LS will
go high with all priority assignments, including 0, when event is active):
1. Bargraphs, event LEDs, and condition will flash. ACK button must be used to stop flashing.
2. Bargraphs, event LEDs, and condition will flash. Flashing will stop if ACK or if event clears.
3. Event LEDs and condition will flash. ACK button must be used to stop flashing.
4. Event LEDs and condition will flash. Flashing will stop if ACK or event clears.
5. Event LEDs and condition will turn on when event is active and off when the event clears.
0. No display action occurs when event is active. The HL and LL status bits are always set to 0.
A
HI SELECTOR
LO SELECTOR
Output 1
O1
.
High limit Status
Low limit Status
LO LIMIT
HS
LS
.
.
HI LIMIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-93
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.92 SRF_ - SR Flip-Flop
SR FLIP-FLOP
SRF_ function blocks perform a set dominant flip-flop
function as detailed in the truth table. An unused R input
will be set high (1) and an unused S input will be set low
(0).
SRF_
Set
S
Reset
R
ESN = 000
SR FLIP-FLOP
PU L AST
I NPUT S
I NPUT R
ESN
SR FLIP-FLOP TRUTH TABLE
S
.
Set
R
Reset
S
R
LO
O1
1
X
X
1
0
1
X
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
S - SET Input
R - RESET Input
Output 1
O1
Output 1
Power Up LAST (S) .................. NO/YES
INPUT S (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT R (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
(YES)
(null)
(null)
O1
.
POWER UP - During a warm start, when PU LAST is set
to YES, the block will initialize at the input/output states
at the instant power down occurred. A cold start will
initialize the input/output states to 0.
LO - Last Output
O1 - Output
X (don't care)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.93 SRT_ - Square Root
SRT_ function blocks compute the square root of input
signal A. The input has a built-in low limit that will limit
the signal to the square root computation to 0.0.
SQUARE ROOT
SRT_
Analog Input
LO Limit
0.0
A
A
I NPU T A
ESN
O1
ESN = 000
SQUARE ROOT
O1
Output 1
INPUT A (H) ........... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
.
.
Analog Input
Output 1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-94
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.94 SUB_ - Subtraction
SUB_ function blocks perform arithmetic subtraction on
the two input signals. Any unused input will be set to 0.0.
SUBTRACTION
SUB_
All inputs should have the same engineering units. If
units are not consistent, a SCL function block can be used
or an alternative is to use a MTH function block that has
built-in scaling functions.
Input A
A
Input B
B
I NPUT A
I NPUT B
ESN
A
Input A
SUBTRACTION
O1
Output 1
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
+
.
Output 1
B
ESN = 000
O1
.
Input B
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.95 TAN_ - TANGENT
TAN__ function blocks, in firmware 1.30 and higher, accept a
radian input and output the tangent of that angle.
TANGENT
TAN
Input X
.
X
TAN (X)
Input X
Output 1
X
ESN = 000
O1 = TAN (X)
O1
Output 1
O1
.
I NPUT X
ESN
INPUT X .............. loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. ..................... 000 to 250
(null)
(000)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
May 2001
3-95
Function Blocks
UM354N-1
3.2.96 TH_ - Track & Hold
TH_ function blocks can hold an initial value that will
transfer to the block output O1 on power up and it can be
used to track the TV input when input TC is high (1).
In 1.30 firmware or greater, the HOLD value can be
changed on line, using the pulser, when the TH_.O1 block
output is directly connected to X or Y inputs in an ODC
block. The range and resolution used by the pulser
making on line changes will be determined by the X
Range or Y Range inputs.
TRACK & HOLD
TH_
Track Variable
TV
Track Command
TC
I N I T VAL
I N PUT TV
I NPUT TC
ESN
ESN = 000
TRACK & HOLD
O1
Output 1
INITial VALue (S) ........................... Real
INPUT TV (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT TC (H) ....... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(0.0)
(null)
(null)
INITial VALue
TV
TC
Track Variable
HOLD value
Track Command
Output 1
O1
X03134S0
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.97 TOT_ - Totalizer (V2.3)
TOT_ function blocks accept a Boolean input and they
will retain a running total of the input transitions as the
block output as a real value for interconnection to other
blocks in the controller. The running total can be reset
when input R goes high (1). Input R is executed prior
to reading input S on each scan cycle.
Unconfigured inputs will be set to 0. When the
EDGETRIG parameter is set to 1, the total will
increment on each 0 to 1 transition on input S. When
the EDGETRIG parameter is set to 0, the total will
increment on each 1 to 0 transition.
TOT
TOT_
Input S
S
Input R
R
I NPU T
I NPU T
EDGE T R I
ES
ESN = 000
TOT
S
R
G
N
O1
Output 1
INPUT S (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT R (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
EDGE TRIGGER (H) ......... 0-NO/1-YES
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................ 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
1
The total will be retained during a WARM & HOT start
and will be initialized to 0.0 on a COLD start.
S
R
Input Signal
Totalizer
Reset
Total
O1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3-96
May 2001
UM354N-1
Function Blocks
3.2.98 TSW_ - Transfer Switch
TSW_ function blocks select one of two analog input
signals as the output signal. Input A becomes the output
when input SC is low (0) and input B will be the output
when input SC goes high (1).
Unconfigured inputs will default to SC=low(0), A=0.0,
B=100.0.
A
B
SC
Input A
Output 1
Input B
Switch Command
O1
TRANSFER SWITCH
TSW_
Input A
A
Input B
B
Switch Command
SC
I NPUT
I NPU T
I NPU T S
ES
A
B
C
N
ESN = 000
TRANSFER SWITCH
O1
Output 1
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT SC (H) ........ loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
X03135S0
BLOCK DIAGRAM
3.2.99 XOR_ - Exclusive OR Logic
XOR_ function blocks perform a logical exclusive OR
function on all three inputs. An unused input will cause the
block to function as a two input XOR. The XOR output
will be low (0) when all configured inputs are low (0) or
when all configured inputs are high (1).
A
B
C
XOR_
Input A
A
Input B
B
Input C
C
ESN = 000
XOR
O1
Output 1
O1
XOR
X03136S0
XOR TRUTH TABLE
A
B
C
Output 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
May 2001
XOR
I NPU T
I NPU T
I NPU T
ES
A
B
C
N
INPUT A (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT B (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
INPUT C (H) .......... loop tag.block tag.output
Exec. Seq. No. (H) ................. 001 to 250
(null)
(null)
(null)
3-97
Function Blocks
3-98
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
4.0 FACTORY CONFIGURED OPTIONS
Factory Configured Options provide an easy way to configure a Model 352Plus, Model 353, or Model 354. In most
cases a Factory Configured Option (FCO) will provide a complete, functional loop controller, once the proper I/O
connections are made. Changes can be made to an FCO to meet individual requirements. The FCO listings on the
following pages document the parameters that are different than the default values listed in section 3. Some things
to keep in mind when making changes are:
a)
All analog signals have been configured for an engineering range of 0.00 to 100.00. In most cases converting
to other engineering units will only require changing the range at the source (e.g. Analog Input function
block). All other blocks (i.e. Controller, Operator Display, Alarm, and Setpoint) that require knowledge of the
range have range pointers that point to the signal source (e.g. Analog Input block) for this information.
b) A number of function blocks have parameters that may be affected by range pointers. The range pointer limits
the setting of parameter values to within -10% to 110% of the range. If a range is changed, the current
parameter values will be changed to the same % within the new range. For example, if the range is 0.0-100.0
and the Alarm 1 Limit setting is 90.0 and the range is changed to 400.0-500.0 the alarm setting will be
changed to 490.0.
c)
All controller (ID, PID, PD, PIDAG) outputs have an engineering range of 0.0-100.0 which will be
satisfactory in most cases since outputs normally convert to a 4-20 mA signal to drive a valve 0-100% Open or
Closed. However, when a controller is used in a cascade configuration, the primary controller output must be
configured for the same engineering range as the secondary controller process.
d) FCOs do not change Station parameters or calibration.
e)
FCO 0 deletes all loops and set all parameters in the STATN & SECUR function blocks to default values.
Calibration is not affected. As new loops and function blocks are added, parameters will appear at default
values.
May 2001
4-1
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
4.1 FCO101 - Single Loop Controller w/ Tracking Setpoint
Factory Configured Option FCO101 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01. A block diagram of
the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured
blocks. This configuration provides setpoint tracking which will cause the setpoint to track the process when the
loop is not in Auto (NA). If the loop tag ‘Loop01’ is changed, all configured references within the station will
automatically be changed to the new tag.
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
S
SR
LU
LD
Process
Valve
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
F
.
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
S
AOUT1
MS
.
ES
SS
A1
P
D
A2
ALARM
V
A3
A4
LOOP01
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV -------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC -------------- Loop01.A/M.NA
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D ---------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 10
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ----------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
INPUT F - Input F ----------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ---------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.-------------- 15
4-2
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ------------------- Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------------- 20
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ------ Loop01.SETPT.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) -------- Loop01.A/M.O1
LOOP #- Loop # ------- 01
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
4.2 FCO102 - Single Loop Controller w/ Fixed Setpoint
Factory Configured Option FCO102 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01. A block diagram of
the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured
blocks. If the loop tag ‘Loop01’ is changed, all configured references within the station will automatically be
changed to the new tag.
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
S
SR
LU
LD
Process
Valve
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
F
.
P
A
I
O1
PID
A
O1
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
S
AOUT1
MS
.
ES
SS
A1
P
D
A2
ALARM
V
A3
A4
LOOP01
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D ---------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 10
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ----------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
INPUT F - Input F ----------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ---------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.-------------- 15
May 2001
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ------------------ Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------------- 20
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ------ Loop01.SETPT.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) -------- Loop01.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ------- 01
4-3
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
4.3 FCO103 - External Set Controller with Tracking Local Setpoint
Factory Configured Option FCO103 provides a single loop controller with external setpoint configured in Loop01.
A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values
of the configured blocks. This configuration provides setpoint tracking. If a fixed setpoint is desired, the TC input
to the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG. If the loop tag ‘LOOP01’ is changed, all configured
references will automatically be changed to the new tag.
S
External Setpoint
0.00-100.00 PRCT
DOUT1
X
D
O1
AIN2
A1
P
A2
ALARM
A3
QS
S
A4
DOUT2
A
NC
NO
B
PB2SW
PS
MD
ST
TC
SETPT
O1
I
SR
O1
S
SE
E
TV
OR01
C
O1
E/I
SI
IS
IO
ES
LU
LD
Process
0.00-100.00 PRCT
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
O1
PID
A
O1
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
S
AOUT1
MS
ES
Valve
SS
V
LOOP01
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV --------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC --------- Loop01.OR01.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.----------- 10
PB2SW - PB2 Switch Function Block
INPUT MD - Input MD ------- Loop01.E/I.SE
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P -------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------- Loop01.E/I.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 20
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------------ Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ Loop01.E/I.O1
INPUT F - Input F ------------------ Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 25
4-4
E/I - Ext/Int Transfer Switch Function Block
INPUT ST - Input ST -------------- Loop01.PB2SW.PS
INPUT E - Input E ------------------ Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 30
OR01 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.E/I.ES
INPUT B - Input B ----------------- Loop01.A/M.MS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 35
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------ Loop01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ----- Loop01.PID.OR
X RG PTR - X Range Pointer ----- Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------ Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ----- Loop01.E/I.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT X - Input X (X-Variable) - Loop01.AIN2.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ----- 01
DOUT1 - Digital Output 1 Function Block
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.ALARM.A1
DOUT2 - Digital Output 2 Function Block
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.ALARM.A2
May 2001
4-5
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
4.4 FCO104 - External Set Controller with Non-Tracking Local Setpoint
Factory Configured Option FCO104 provides a single loop controller with external setpoint configured in Loop01.
A block diagram of the loop configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values
of the configured blocks. If the loop tag ‘LOOP01’ is changed, all configured references will automatically be
changed to the new tag.
S
External Setpoint
0.00-100.00 PRCT
DOUT1
X
D
O1
AIN2
A1
P
A2
ALARM
A3
QS
S
A4
DOUT2
NC
NO
PB2SW
PS
MD
TC
O1
ST
SETPT
O1
I
SR
S
SE
E
TV
E/I
SI
IS
IO
ES
LU
LD
Process
0.00-100.00 PRCT
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
AOUT1
MS
ES
Valve
SS
V
IRev. 2)
PB2SW - PB2 Switch Function Block
INPUT MD - Input MD ------- Loop01.E/I.SE
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P -------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------- Loop01.E/I.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 20
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------------ Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ Loop01.E/I.O1
INPUT F - Input F ------------------ Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 25
4-6
LOOP01
E/I - Ext/Int Transfer Switch Function Block
INPUT ST - Input ST -------------- Loop01.PB2SW.PS
INPUT E - Input E ------------------ Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 30
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 10
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------ Loop01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ----- Loop01.PID.OR
X RG PTR - X Range Pointer ----- Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------ Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ----- Loop01.E/I.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT X - Input X (X-Variable) - Loop01.AIN2.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ----- 01
DOUT1 - Digital Output 1 Function Block
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.ALARM.A1
DOUT2 - Digital Output 2 Function Block
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.ALARM.A2
May 2001
4-7
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
4.5 FCO105 - Ratio Set Control w/ Operator Setpoint Limits
Factory Configured Option FCO105 provides a ratio set controller in Loop01. The setpoint to the Captive Flow
controller can be maintained as a ratio of the Captive Flow to Wild Flow. The controller has complete setpoint
tracking as well as ratio tracking. The local setpoint will track the Captive Flow signal when the loop is not in
auto (NA) OR is in External (Ratio) Set (ES). The value of the RATIO will be computed as Captive Flow setpoint /
Wild Flow while in the tracking mode which occurs whenever the loop is not in auto (NA) OR is in Internal Set
(IS). The tracking features can be removed by setting the TC inputs to UNCONFIG. The Wild Flow signal will be
displayed on Variable X and the actual Ratio CF/WF will be displayed on Variable Y.
Wild Flow
0.00-100.00 PRCT
X
O1
AIN1
A
E
QS
TC
RATIO
D
O1
TO
DIV01
N
O1
A
Y
O1
SCL01
TV
0.50 - 1.50 CF/WF
A
NC
NO
B
PB2SW
MD
O1
O1
ST
SETPT
O1
I
SR
SPLIM
A
E/I
IO
LU
OR02
O1
HS
IS
A
ES
B
C
Captive Flow
0.00-100.00 PRCT
S
O1
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
AOUT1
MS
ES
Valve
SS
A1
P
D
ALARM
A2
V
A3
A4
(Rev. 2)
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV --------- Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC --------- Loop01.OR02.O1
INPUT LU - Input LU --------- Loop01.SPLIM.HS
INPUT LD - Input LD --------- Loop01.SPLIM.LS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.----------- 5
PB2SW - PB2 Switch Function Block
INPUT MD - Input MD ------- Loop01.E/I.SE
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 10
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P -------------- Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------- Loop01.SPLIM.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ---------- 15
4-8
O1
SI
LD
AIN2
OR01
C
LS
SE
E
TV
TC
PS
LOOP01
RATIO - Ratio Function Block
HI LIMIT - HI Range LIMIT ----- 1.50
LO LIMIT - LO Range LIMIT ---- 0.50
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC -------------- Loop01.OR01.O1
INPUT TV - Input TV -------------- Loop01.SPLIM.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 20
E/I - Ext/Int Transfer Switch Function Block
INPUT ST - Input ST -------------- Loop01.PB2SW.PS
INPUT E - Input E ------------------ Loop01.RATIO.O1
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 25
SPLIM - Setpoint Limit Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.E/I.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 30
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------------ Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ Loop01.SPLIM.O1
INPUT F - Input F ------------------ Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
INPUT I - Input I ------------------- Loop01.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 35
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input A ----------------- Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 40
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------ Loop01.AIN2.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ----- Loop01.PID.OR
X RG PTR - X Range Pointer ----- Loop01.AIN1.OR
Y RG PTR - Y Range Pointer ----- Loop01.SCL01.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------ Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ----- Loop01.SPLIM.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT X - Input X (X-Variable) - Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT Y - Input Y (Y-Variable)-- Loop01.DIV01.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ----- 01
DIV01 - Division Function Block
INPUT N - Input N ----------------- Loop01.AIN2.O1
INPUT D - Input D ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 45
SCL01 - Scaler Function Block
MINSCALE - Output MIN ----------- 0.50
MAXSCALE - Output MAX --------- 1.50
ENGUNITS - ENGineering UNITS ---CF/WF
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------------- 50
OR01 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B ----------------- Loop01.E/I.IS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 55
OR02 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- Loop01.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B ----------------- Loop01.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. -------------- 60
May 2001
4-9
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
4.6 FCO106 - Single Loop Controller w/ Operator Setpoint Limits
Factory Configured Option FCO106 provides a single loop controller configured in Loop01. This is similar to
FCO101 but with a SPLIM block added to the output of the SETPT block. A block diagram of the loop
configuration is shown below along with any changes to the default parameter values of the configured blocks.
This configuration provides setpoint tracking. If a fixed setpoint is desired, the TC input to the SETPT function
block can be set to UNCONFIG. If the loop tag ‘LOOP01’ is changed, all configured references will automatically
be changed to the new tag.
O1
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
A
SPLIM
SR
S
HS
LS
LU
LD
Process
Valve
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
F
P
.
A
I
O1
PID
A
AE
TV
AW
TC
EM
O1
A/M
S
AS
D
NA
QS
AOUT1
MS
.
ES
SS
A1
P
D
A2
ALARM
V
A3
A4
LOOP01
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV -------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC -------------- Loop01.A/M.NA
INPUT LU - Input LU -------------- Loop01.SPLIM.HS
INPUT LD - Input LD -------------- Loop01.SPLIM.LS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.--------------- 5
SPLIM - Setpoint Limit Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT A - Input A ---------------- Loop01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 10
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D ---------------- Loop01.SPLIM.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ------------------- Loop01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------------- 25
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ------ Loop01.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ------ Loop01.SPLIM.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) -------- Loop01.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ------- 01
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -_-------- Loop01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ----------------- Loop01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ----------------- Loop01.SPLIM.O1
INPUT F - Input F ----------------- Loop01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A ---------------- Loop01.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.-------------- 20
4-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
4.7 FCO107 - Dual Loop Controller
Factory Configured Option FCO107 provides two independent loops with tracking setpoints. The block diagram of
the configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of
the configured blocks. This configuration provides setpoint tracking. If a fixed setpoint is desired, the TC input to
the SETPT function block can be set to UNCONFIG. The process range of the first loop can be changed in Analog
Input 1 and the range of the Second loop in Analog Input 2.
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
S
SR
LU
LD
Process
Valve
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
PID
F
P
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
A
A/M
EM
AOUT1
MS
I
ES
SS
A1
P
D
V
A2
ALARM
A3
A4
LOOP01
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
S
SR
LU
LD
Process
Valve
O1
AIN2
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
AOUT1
MS
ES
SS
A1
P
D
A2
ALARM
V
A3
A4
LOOP02
Loop 01
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer --------- LOOP01.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ------------ LOOP01.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ------------ LOOP01.A/M.NA
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- LOOP01.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- LOOP01.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D -------------- LOOP01.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 10
May 2001
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer --------- LOOP01..AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ---------------- LOOP01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ---------------- LOOP01.SETPT.O1
INPUT F - Input F ---------------- LOOP01.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A --------------- LOOP01..A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- LOOP01.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A -------------- LOOP01.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------ 20
4-11
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
Loop 01 (cont)
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ----- LOOP01.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ---- LOOP01.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ----- LOOP01.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ---- LOOP01.SETPT.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------ LOOP01.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop# ----- 01
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- LOOP01.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ LOOP01.A/M.O1
Loop 02
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------- LOOP02.AIN2.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ---------- LOOP02.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ---------- LOOP02.A/M.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.----------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ LOOP02.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------- LOOP02.AIN2.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------ LOOP02.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 10
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- LOOP02.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- LOOP02.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S ---------------- LOOP02.SETPT.O1
INPUT F - Input F ---------------- LOOP02.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A --------------- LOOP02.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- LOOP02.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- LOOP02.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 20
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ----- LOOP02.AIN2.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ---- LOOP02.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ----- LOOP02.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ---- LOOP02.SETPT.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------ LOOP02.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ----- 02
AOUT2 - Analog Output 2 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- LOOP02.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ LOOP02.A/M.O1
4-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
4.8 FCO121 - Cascade Control
Factory Configured Option FCO121 provides two loops configured for Cascade control. The block diagram of the
configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the
configured blocks. The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the
Secondary loop in Analog Input 2. Also, the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match
any new range in the secondary loop. If the loop tag ‘PRIM’ or ‘SEC’ is changed, all configured references will
automatically be changed to the new tag.
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
S
SR
LU
LD
Primary Process
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
PID
F
P
O1
A
AE
TV
AW
TC
A
O1
AS
A/M
EM
NA
MS
I
ES
SS
A1
P
D
V
A2
ALARM
A3
A4
PRIM (Primary)
O1
NC
NO
PB2SW
PS
A
SPLIM
HS
A
LS
MD
B
OR01
O1
OR02
O1
C
O1
ST
TV
TC
SETPT
O1
I
SR
S
SE
E
E/I
IO
LU
SI
IS
A
ES
B
C
LD
Secondary Process
O1
AIN2
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
ES
Valve
SS
A1
P
D
AOUT1
MS
ALARM
A2
V
A3
A4
(Rev. 2)
SEC (Secondary)
Primary Loop
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer --------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ------------ PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ------------ PRIM.A/M.NA
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 5
May 2001
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D -------------- PRIM.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 10
4-13
Factory Configured Options
Primary Loop (cont)
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer --------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P ---------------- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S ---------------- PRIM.SETPT.O1
INPUT F - Input F ---------------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT A - Input A --------------- PRIM.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------ 15
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A --------------- PRIM.PID.O1
INPUT TV - Input TV ----------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ----------- SEC.OR01.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 20
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ----- PRIM.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ---- PRIM.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ----- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ---- PRIM.SETPT.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------ PRIM.A/M.O1
LOOP# - Loop # ----- 01
Secondary Loop
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------- SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ---------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ---------- SEC.OR02.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.----------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------ SEC.E/I.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 10
UM354N-1
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S ---------------- SEC.E/I.O1
INPUT F - Input F ---------------- SEC.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A --------------- SEC.A/M.AS
INPUT I - Input I ----------------- SEC.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 30
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input A ----------------- SEC.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 35
OR01 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A --------------- SEC.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B --------------- SEC.E/I.IS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------ 40
OR02 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A -------------- SEC.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B -------------- SEC.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 45
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ SEC.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ----- SEC.AIN2.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ---- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ----- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ---- SEC.E/I.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------ SEC.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ----- 02
PB2SW - PB2 Switch Function Block
INPUT MD - Input MD ------- SEC.E/I.SE
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 15
SPLIM - Setpoint Limit Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT A - Input A ------------ PRIM.A/M.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 20
E/I - Ext/Int Transfer Switch Function Block
INPUT ST - Input ST --------- SEC.PB2SW.PS
INPUT E - Input E ------------ SEC.SPLIM.O1
INPUT I - Input I -------------- SEC.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 25
4-14
May 2001
UM354N-1
Factory Configured Options
4.9 FCO122 - Cascade Control w/ Operator Setpoint Limits
Factory Configured Option FCO122 provides two loops configured for Cascade control. The block diagram of the
configuration of the two loops is shown below along with the changes made to the default parameter values of the
configured blocks. The process range of the Primary loop can be changed in Analog Input 1 and the range of the
Secondary loop in Analog Input 2. Also, the output range of the primary PID controller must be changed to match
any new range in the secondary loop. If the loop tag ‘PRIM’ or ‘SEC’ is changed, all configured references will
automatically be changed to the new tag.
TV
TC
O1
SETPT
O1
A
SPLIM
SR
S
HS
LS
LU
LD
Primary Process
O1
AIN1
P
S
QS
PID
F
P
O1
A
AE
TV
AW
TC
A
O1
AS
A/M
NA
EM
MS
I
ES
SS
A1
P
D
ALARM
A2
V
A3
A4
PRIM (Primary)
A
NC
NO
B
PB2SW
PS
MD
O1
ST
SETPT
O1
I
SR
SPLIM
A
E/I
IO
LU
O1
OR02
O1
SI
IS
A
ES
B
C
LD
S
Secondary Process
O1
AIN2
OR01
C
HS
LS
SE
E
TV
TC
O1
P
S
QS
F
P
A
I
PID
O1
A
O1
S
AE
TV
AS
D
AW
TC
NA
QS
EM
A/M
MS
ES
Valve
SS
A1
P
D
AOUT1
A2
ALARM
V
A3
A4
(Rev. 2)
SEC (Secondary)
Primary Loop
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ----------- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ----------- PRIM.A/M.NA
INPUT LU - Input LU ----------- PRIM.SPLIM.HS
INPUT LD - Input LD ----------- PRIM.SPLIM.LS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 5
May 2001
SPLIM- Setpoint Limit Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer --------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT A - Input A --------------- PRIM.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------- 10
4-15
Factory Configured Options
UM354N-1
Primary Loop (cont)
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT D - Input D -------------- PRIM.SPLIM.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 20
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.AIN1.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S --------------- PRIM.SPLIM.O1
INPUT F - Input F --------------- SEC.AIN02.O1
INPUT A - Input A -------------- PRIM.A/M.AS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------ 30
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- PRIM.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A --------------- PRIM.PID.O1
INPUT TV - Input TV ----------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ----------- SEC.OR01.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 60
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ------ PRIM.AIN1.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer ----- PRIM.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ------ PRIM.AIN1.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ----- PRIM.SPLIM.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------- PRIM.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop # ------ 01
Secondary Loop
SETPT - Setpoint Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT TV - Input TV ---------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT TC - Input TC ---------- SEC.OR02.O1
INPUT LU - Input LU --------- SEC.SPLIM.HS
INPUT LD - Input LD --------- SEC.SPLIM.LS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.----------- 5
ALARM - Alarm Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P ------------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT D - Input D ------------ SEC.SPLIM.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 10
PB2SW - PB2 Switch Function Block
INPUT MD - Input MD ------- SEC.E/I.SE
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 15
4-16
E/I - Ext/Int Transfer Switch Function Block
INPUT ST - Input ST --------- SEC.PB2SW.PS
INPUT E - Input E ------------ PRIM.A/M.O1
INPUT I - Input I -------------- SEC.SETPT.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 20
SPLIM - Setpoint Limit Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ------ SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT A - Input A ------------ SEC.E/I.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. --------- 25
PID - PID Controller Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer -------- SEC.AIN2.OR
INPUT P - Input P --------------- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S --------------- SEC.SPLIM.O1
INPUT F - Input F --------------- SEC.A/M.O1
INPUT A - Input A -------------- SEC.A/M.AS
INPUT I - Input I ---------------- SEC.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No.------------ 30
A/M - Auto/Manual Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ---------- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT A - Input A ----------------- SEC.PID.O1
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ------------- 35
OR01 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A -------------- SEC.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B -------------- SEC.E/I.IS
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 40
OR02 - OR Function Block
INPUT A - Input A -------------- SEC.A/M.NA
INPUT B - Input B -------------- SEC.E/I.ES
ESN - Exec. Seq. No. ----------- 45
AOUT1 - Analog Output 1 Function Block
RG PTR - Range Pointer ----------- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT S - Input S ------------------ SEC.A/M.O1
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers
P RG PTR - P Range Pointer ---- SEC.AIN2.OR
V RG PTR - V Range Pointer -- SEC.PID.OR
INPUT P - Input P (Process) ----- SEC.AIN2.O1
INPUT S - Input S (Setpoint) ---- SEC.SPLIM.O1
INPUT V - Input V (Valve) ------ SEC.A/M.O1
LOOP # - Loop# ----- 02
n
May 2001
UM354N-1
LonWorks Communications
5.0 LONWORKS COMMUNICATIONS
The LonWorks option board A-1 is added to a controller to expand the I/O capacity. The board uses the LonWorks
communication protocol to communicate with remote LonWorks devices over a single twisted pair network. The
diagram shows the option board added to an MPU Controller board and remote mounted LonWorks nodes.
A LonWorks Remote I/O board uses a Free Topology transceiver communicating at 78.1 Kbps.
Up to fifteen (15) physical nodes can be connected to a controller.
.
Option Board A-1
LONWorks Communications
node y
Twisted Wire Network
.
MPU Controller Board
Lonhw2
Model 352P, 353 or 354 Controller
node 1
node 15
.
Install a LonWorks network by first wiring all the nodes to the network. Next, temporarily connect a PC-based
Network Manager to the network using a SLTA (Serial Link Talk Adapter) manufactured by Echelon Corp. The
Network Manager (MetaVision 3.0) and the SLTA are included in the LonWorks Startup Kit.
Each individual node is then installed by the Network Manager and saved in a Project file. The Project file is a
permanent record of the network installation and must be retained for any future network maintenance. When a
node is first installed, the Network Manager reads the Program ID and the Neuron ID (every LonWorks device has
a Neuron chip that contains a worldwide unique ID). If a node with the same Program ID had not been previously
installed, it will read all of the self-documentation from the node. The Network Manager will now have a list of all
the available parameters and I/O variables within that node. Some parameters may need to be configured, but for
most applications, the default settings are acceptable. The Network Manager is then used to BIND network
variables (i.e. connect I/O variables from one node to another).
Network variable connections from remote nodes to the controller are used within the controller by selecting
LonWorks I/O function blocks within individual loop configurations6. These function blocks, which are detailed in
the Function Blocks section of this manual, enable connections to network variables to be made to other block
inputs within the controller. There are a number of different block types available. Block selection depends on the
types of variables to be connected. Siemens supports LonWorks Standard Network Variable Types:
•
SNVT_lev_percent for analog inputs and outputs
•
SNVT_lev_disc for discrete inputs and outputs
•
SNVT_state for use with the Moore 16-channel discrete input or output modules available with firmware 1.30
or higher
There is a 15 node per network limit. When large I/O counts are needed for a controller application, use physical
nodes with higher I/O counts to minimize the number of physical nodes required. For example, 16-channel
discrete input and output modules are available. Up to six of each can be used within a controller configuration. A
4-channel analog input module and a 2-channel analog output module are also available.
6
Model 352P only: the Option 3 I/O Jumper must also be used to select LonWorks.
May 2001
5-1
LonWorks Communications
UM354N-1
SERVICING CONSIDERATIONS
The functioning of a LonWorks network can be affected by:
•
Upgrading the MPU Controller board firmware
•
Replacing a controller’s MPU Controller board with a board having a different firmware version
•
Moving a LonWorks board to a controller with a different MPU Controller board firmware version
Background
A LonWorks option board contains a Program ID for the controller node. A Controller MPU board will store a
Program ID in the EEPROM on the LonWorks board when the combination is first powered up. When the
Network Manager software installs a controller node as part of a network, it reads the Program ID when a
controller is installed for the first time. The Program ID of the controller, as with all other installed nodes, is then
retained by the Network Manager.
The version 1.30 Program ID was changed since new function blocks DIS and DOS contained a new network
variable type: SNVT_state. When controller firmware is upgraded to 1.30 or higher, the controller will store a new
Program ID in the EEPROM on the LonWorks board so that a Network Manager will recognize it as a different
type of node.
Considerations
1.
When a controller in an installed network is upgraded to 1.30 or higher, the Network Manager will not
recognize the network variables added by the new version. The Network Manager will be able to bind
variables present in the earlier version.
2.
A LonWorks board that has been used in a controller with 1.30 or higher firmware should not be used in a
controller with firmware 1.21 or lower. The LonWorks board EEPROM will contain the Program ID stored in
it by the 1.30 firmware.
5-2
•
If the LonWorks board is mounted in a controller with 1.21 firmware and the controller is installed by a
Network Manager that had not previously installed a controller with 1.30 firmware, a problem will
occur. The Network Manager will read out the list of network variables available but the variables will be
only those that were available in 1.21. In subsequent installations of controllers with 1.30 firmware, the
Network Manger will not read, and therefore will not have access to, the new 1.30 variables.
•
If the LonWorks board is mounted in a controller with 1.21 firmware and the controller is installed by a
Network Manger that had previously installed a controller with 1.30 firmware, the Network Manager
variable list will include the new 1.30 variables. The controller, however, will reject an attempt to bind
them.
May 2001
UM354N-1
LonWorks Communications
Suggested Actions
1.
When upgrading MPU Controller firmware:
1) Generate a report of all network bindings.
2) Uninstall the controller node from a network.
3) Upgrade the controller firmware
4) Install the controller node.
5) Refer to the above report and bind all network variables.
Note
If the controller has already been upgraded, it can still be uninstalled with the current
version of the MetaVision 3.0x Network Manager but uninstalling prior to upgrading is
recommended. Other Network Managers may not allow this.
2.
Once a LonWorks option board is used in a 1.30 or higher controller and is uninstalled and removed from
service, mark the board as “1.30 firmware only”.
n
May 2001
5-3
LonWorks Communications
5-4
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
6.0 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
This section provides an overview of the data that can be obtained from the station using Modbus, LIL, or
Ethernet, which provides Modbus over Ethernet protocol. In the Modbus over Ethernet protocol all listed Modbus
items are available but are embedded in the Modbus/Ethernet protocol frame. Refer to Section 7 for detailed list of
the actual data.
NOTE
Ethernet is available on Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 controllers. It is not available on
Moore 352P and 354/354N controllers.
6.1 MODBUS DATA MAPPING
Modbus is a master/slave protocol where a master device (e.g. PC-based operator workstation) sends commands to
one slave (e.g. a controller) and waits for a response. Each station has a unique network address (1-32), configured
as part of the station parameters, that identifies a specific controller.
Data is assigned to either a register (16-bit word) or a coil (1-bit). An IEEE floating point number (Real) is
assigned to 2 consecutive registers with the first containing the most significant and the second the least significant
portion of the floating point number.
The station supports Modbus function codes 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, and 16. Section 7 provides a listing of
available data and specific locations within the Modbus map. The following is the overview for the Modbus data
mapping.
Station Coils..................................................................................x0001 - x0071
Loop Coils.....................................................................................x0296 - x1495
Extended Loop Coils (ODD Pushbuttons) V2.1 .............................x8701 - x9100
Sequencer Loop I/O Coils (ref. MSLCP pointer) ...........................x1496 - x2263
LonWorks Remote I/O Coils (Moore 352P, 353, & 354/354N) ......x2401 - x3976
Ubus Discrete I/O States & Forcing V2.1 (Procidia) ......................x4001 - x5500
(spares)..........................................................................................x5501 - x9100
Loop PCOM Block Coils ...............................................................x9101 - x9999
Station Data (16-bit integer) ..........................................................x0001 - x0100
Station String Data (ASCII) ..........................................................x0101 - x0200
Loop Dynamic Data (16-bit integer) ..............................................x0201 - x0450
Loop Variable Data (16-bit integer)...............................................x0451 - x1200
Loop Static Data (16-bit integer) ...................................................x1201 - x1950
Loop Dynamic Data (32-bit floating point) ....................................x1951 - x2450
Loop Variable Data (32-bit floating point).....................................x2451 - x3950
Loop Static Data (32-bit floating point) .........................................x3951 - x5450
Loop String Data (ASCII)..............................................................x5451 - x7950
Ubus Module Types (Procidia).......................................................x7951 - x8000
Loop Trend Data (ref. MLTP pointer)............................................x8001 - x9000
(spares)..........................................................................................x9001 - x9999
May 2001
6-1
Network Communications
UM354N-1
EXTENDED MODBUS REGISTERS: The traditional addressing of Modbus Holding Registers has been limited
to 9999. However, since the actual address is contained in a 16-bit word, addresses above 9999 are available.
Many Modbus Masters support this extended addressing. Configuration data for a Sequencer & Timers contained
in a single sequencer loop can be accessed in this space. The actual loop that can be accessed is contained in the
Modbus parameter MSLCP Modbus Sequencer & Timers Configuration Pointer located in register 40041. This
register contains the Modbus Index for the loop that can be configured with these extended parameters. A small
number of these parameters have also been mapped in the areas listed within the actual loop area for those Masters
that cannot access the extended area.
In addition, there are a number of registers reserved for the mappings of Modbus registers used in the peer-to-peer
functionality of the Ethernet function blocks.
Sequencer Mask Configurations ..............................................x10001 – x18000
Real Time Trip Block Configurations......................................x19001 – x19021
Sequencer Time & Analog Configurations ..............................x20001 – x20999
Timer Function Block Configurations .....................................x21001 – x21009
Reserved -- Modbus Ethernet Block Register ...........................x29001 – x29019
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Analog Inputs Static Data ..........x30001 – x30352
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Analog Outputs Static Data........x30353 – x30608
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Digital Inputs Static Data...........x30609 – x30704
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Coil Inputs Static Data ...............x30705 – x30832
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Analog Inputs Dynamic Data .....x30833 – x30896
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Digital Inputs Dynamic Data......x30897 – x30928
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Coil Inputs Dynamic Data..........x30929 – x30960
Reserved – Modbus Ethernet Analog Outputs Dynamic Data.x30961 – x31024*
* Refer to the AIE function block in the Function Blocks section for details.
6-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
6.2 LIL DATA MAPPING
LIL data is assigned to one of two data types. The first is global data which occupies parameter 1 of each channel
and is transmitted by the LIL interface every 0.5 seconds. The remaining data is non-global which occupies
parameters 2 through 256 and is transmitted in response to a LIL READ command or can be changed by a LIL
WRITE command.
Each parameter is a 16-bit word. An IEEE floating point number (Real) is assigned to 2 consecutive parameters
with the first containing the most significant and the second the least significant portion of the floating point
number. String data can occupy one or more consecutive parameters. The following tables provide an overview
listing of available data with descriptions located in Section 7. The acronym in the table identifies the data in
Section 7. Data can be accessed using the Model 320 Independent Computer Interface. Refer to AD320-10 Model
320 ICI User Manual and AD320-20 Guidelines for Writing Application Software Using the Model 320 ICI.
Guidelines:
All individual parameters (words) can be read using the random parameter data request (CMD 7). Parameters that
span multiple words, such as floating point, ASCII tags, etc., can also be read using the multiple-byte parameter
data request (CMD 23) but only one variable can be requested at a time. Writes are made using the parameter data
send (CMD 9). In some cases such as loop and alarm status words, the MASK ON/OFF type codes are used to
identify individual bits. Not all bit mapped words support this option. See Section 7 for specific information.
6.2.1 Station Data
Station data is fixed and occupies the first seven channels.
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
GDS
ST
SSW
SE
NCL
NSL
LSLCP
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
RAM
3
CBT
CWT
SA
4
5
CBSR
EBT
STAG
CT
RTS
6
EBSR
7
RBT
8
RBSR
DRN
STD
9
NBT
STM
12
OASR
C6S
S6S
CFN
C7S
S7S
C8S
S8S
C9S
S9S
C10S
S10S
C11S
S11S
C1S
S1S
C2S
S2S
C3S
S3S
C4S
S4S
STY
AASEL
C5S
S5S
13
OBT
SCR
14
OBSR
NCR
15
OFT
16
KSR
17
CBDR
18
EBDR
19
RBDR
20
NBDR
21
OADR
22
OBDR
23
KDR
24
C12S
S12S
L1Z
C13S
S13S
L2Z
C14S
S14S
L3Z
C15S
S15S
L4Z
C16S
S16S
L5Z
C17S
S17S
L6Z
C18S
S18S
L7Z
C19S
S19S
L8Z
C20S
S20S
L9Z
C21S
S21S
L10Z
C22S
S22S
L11Z
C23S
S23S
L12Z
SN
STH
10`
11
NBSR
OAT
CFNR
STMN
STSC
Ubus Address xx - Discrete I/O States & Forcing (N=Normal, M=Mode, F=Forced (see Section 7 for details)
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
UA01N
UA01M
UA01F
UA01MT
32
UA02N
UA02M
UA02F
UA02MT
33
UA03N
UA03M
UA03F
UA03MT
34
UA04N
UA04M
UA04F
UA04MT
35
UA05N
UA05M
UA05F
UA05MT
36
UA06N
UA06M
UA06F
UA06MT
C24S
S24S
L13Z
C25S
S25S
L14Z
L15Z
L16Z
L17Z
L18Z
L19Z
L20Z
L21Z
L22Z
L23Z
L25Z
L24Z
May 2001
6-3
Network Communications
UM354N-1
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
UA07N UA08N UA09N UA10N UA11N UA12N UA13N UA14N UA15N UA16N UA17N UA18N
UA07M UA08M UA09M UA10M UA11M UA12M UA13M UA14M UA15M UA16M UA17M UA18M
UA07F UA08F UA09F UA10F UA11F UA12F UA13F UA14F UA15F UA16F UA17F UA18F
UA07MT UA08MT UA09MT UA10MT UA11MT UA12MT UA13MT UA14MT UA15MT UA16MT UA17MT UA18MT
NAL
A1S
A2S
A3S
A4S
A5S
A6S
A7S
A8S
A9S
A10S
A11S
NDL
D1S
D2S
D3S
D4S
D5S
D6S
D7S
D8S
D9S
D10S
D11S
NPL
P1S
P2S
P3S
P4S
P5S
P6S
P7S
P8S
P9S
P10S
P11S
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
UA19N UA20N UA21N UA22N UA23N UA24N UA25N UA26N UA27N UA28N UA29N UA30N
UA19M UA20M UA21M UA22M UA23M UA24M UA25M UA26M UA27M UA28M UA29M UA30M
UA19F UA20F UA21F UA22F UA23F UA24F UA25F UA26F UA27F UA28F UA29F UA30F
UA19MT UA20MT UA21MT UA22MT UA23MT UA24MT UA25MT UA26MT UA27MT UA28MT UA29MT UA30MT
A12S
A13S
A14S
A15S
A16S
A17S
A18S
A19S
A20S
A21S
A22S
A23S
D12S
D13S
D14S
D15S
D16S
D17S
D18S
D19S
D20S
D21S
D22S
D23S
P12S
P13S
P14S
P15S
P16S
P17S
P18S
P19S
P20S
P21S
P22S
P23S
C\P
1
2
3
4
61
UA31N
UA31M
UA31F
UA31M
T
A24S
D24S
P24S
5
6
7
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
A25S
D25S
P25S
70
71
72
....
....
....
LonWorks Remote Function Blocks I/O States N=Normal, M=Mode, F=Forced (see Section 7 for details)
C\P
1
2
3
100
RTT1Y
RTT2Y
RTT3Y
101
RTT1M
RTT2M
RTT3M
102
103
104
105
106
RTT1D RTT1HR RTT1MN RTT1SC RTT1DA
RTT2D RTT2HR RTT2MN RTT2SC RTT2DA
RTT3D RTT3HR RTT3MN RTT3SC RTT3DA
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
202
DID1N
DID2N
DID3N
DID4N
DID5N
DID6N
203
DID1M
DID2M
DID3M
DID4M
DID5M
DID6M
204
DID1F
DID2F
DID3F
DID4F
DID5F
DID6F
6-4
205
DOD1N
DOD2N
DOD3N
DOD4N
DOD5N
DOD6N
206
DOD1M
DOD2M
DOD3M
DOD4M
DOD5M
DOD6M
207
DOD1F
DOD2F
DOD3F
DOD4F
DOD5F
DOD6F
208
DIS1N
DIS2N
DIS3N
DIS4N
DIS5N
DIS6N
107
108
109
110
111
209
DIS1M
DIS2M
DIS3M
DIS4M
DIS5M
DIS6M
210
DIS1F
DIS2F
DIS3F
DIS4F
DIS5F
DIS6F
211
DOS1N
DOS2N
DOS3N
DOS4N
DOS5N
DOS6N
212
DOS1M
DOS2M
DOS3M
DOS4M
DOS5M
DOS6M
213
DOS1F
DOS2F
DOS3F
DOS4F
DOS5F
DOS6F
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
6.2.2 Control Loop Data
Control loop data occupies five LIL channels. The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODC
operator display function block for each loop, as LIL CHAN (n). The first channel for each loop can be viewed in
station data starting at channel 5/parameter 2 for control loops and channel 6/parameter 2 for a sequencer loops.
The station configuration entry (both local and graphical PC-based) will indicate the next available open space of
five contiguous channels. Another starting channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total
number of channels.
Channel locations n through n+4, in the table below, identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each
control loop. All parameter 1 data (e.g. P-process) is global and is transmitted every 0.5 second. All other data is
sent out on command.
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
1
PI
SI
VI
CLS
ASW
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
13
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
25
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
37
2
PGI
TSPI
TLmI
3
TII
RTI
TLlI
4
TDI
HLI
T1mI
5
DGI
LLI
T1lI
6
MRI
RRI
T2mI
7
RI
CAI
T2lI
A1LI
A2LI
A3LI
A4LI
A1TW
A2TW
16
17
18
19
TAG
14
PGF
TSPF
LHM
TLF
A1LF
15
TIF
RTF
May 2001
20
TDF
HLF
DGF
LLF
T2F
A3LF
A4LF
26
27
11
12
HDF
LDF
DBF
RHI
ECLS
RLI
22
23
21
MRF
RRF
DPPI
24
RF
PMXF
32
PU
XF
YF
VMNF
XMNF
YMNF
VMXF
XMXF
YMXF
VU
XU
YU
38
28
TLU
PMNF
39
40
29
30
41
AHF
A3TI
42
ASF
Q1F
Q2F
Q1N
Q2N
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
10`
PF
SF
VF
PUR
A3TW
A4TW
BF
Q1U
A2TI
9
RHM
T1F
A2LF
ADF
A1TI
8
BI
A4TI
Q2U
A1PI
A2PI
31
43
44
APGF
Q1MNF
Q2MNF
A3PI
XI
YI
33
34
PDPPI
35
BHLF
BLLF
BPLF
BGF
VDPPI
XDPPI
YDPPI
45
46
ATIF
Q1MXF
Q2MXF
36
47
48
ATDF
A4PI
256
102
103
104
5
7
6-5
Network Communications
UM354N-1
6.2.3 Sequence Loop Data
Sequence Loop data occupies six LIL channels. The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODS
operator display function block for each loop, as LIL CHAN (n). The configuration entry (both local and graphical
PC-based) will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels. Another starting channel can be
entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels.
Channel locations n through n+5, in the table below, identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each
sequencer loop. All parameter 1 data (e.g. SSN Program Sequencer Step No.) is global and is transmitted every
0.5 seconds. All other data is sent out on command.
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
1
SSNI
SAOmF
SAOlF
CRNI
SLS
ASW
2
4
5
SNSI
SNGI
SAEPF
6
SSNF
SAOF
3
7
SRTF
SSTF
TACM
8
SNSF
9
10`
11
SNRI
12
SNGF
SNRF
CRNF
Sequencer & Remote I/O State, Mode & Forcing
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
13
SG0KI
SG1KI
SG2KI
SG3KI
14
SG0SI
SG1SI
SG2SI
SG3SI
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
25
26
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
37
38
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
49
50
6-6
15
SG0SO
SG1SO
SG2SO
SG3SO
17
SG4SI
SG5SI
SG6SI
SG7SI
18
SG4SO
SG5SO
SG6SO
SG7SO
19
SG8KI
SG9KI
SGAKI
SGBKI
20
SG8SI
SG9SI
SGASI
SGBSI
21
SG8SO
SG9SO
SGASO
SGBSO
22
SGCKI
SGDKI
SGEKI
SGFKI
23
SGCSI
SGDSI
SGESI
SGFSI
24
SGCSO
SGDSO
SGESO
SGFSO
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
40
41
L#RMSG
L#PMSG
L#SMSG
L#CMSGa
L#CMSGb
L#CMSGc
42
43
TACM
44
45
46
47
48
58
59
60
27
51
16
SG4KI
SG5KI
SG6KI
SG7KI
28
52
53
L#CMSGd
L#CMSGe
L#CMSGf
L#CMSGg
L#CMSGh
L#CMSGi
54
55
56
57
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
Timers - Elapsed & Remaining Times
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
61
62
DYT01ET
OST01ET
RCT01ET
ROT01ET
63
64
DYT01RT
OST01RT
RCT01RT
ROT01RT
65
66
DYT02ET
OST02ET
RCT02ET
ROT02ET
67
68
DYT02RT
OST02RT
RCTO2RT
ROTO2RT
69
70
DYT03ET
OST03ET
RCT03ET
ROT03ET
71
72
DYT03RT
OST03RT
RCTO3RT
ROTO3RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
73
74
DYT04ET
OST04ET
RCT04ET
ROT04ET
75
76
DYT04RT
OST04RT
RCT04RT
ROT04RT
77
78
DYT05ET
OST05ET
RCT05ET
ROT05ET
79
80
DYT05RT
OST05RT
RCT05RT
ROT05RT
81
82
DYT06ET
OST06ET
RCT06ET
ROT06ET
83
84
DYT06RT
OST06RT
RCTO6RT
ROTO6RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
85
86
DYT07ET
OST07ET
RCT07ET
ROT07ET
87
88
DYT07RT
OST07RT
RCT07RT
ROT07RT
89
90
DYT08ET
OST08ET
RCT08ET
ROT08ET
91
92
DYT08RT
OST08RT
RCT08RT
ROT08RT
92
94
DYT09ET
OST09ET
RCT09ET
ROT09ET
95
96
DYT09RT
OST06RT
RCT09RT
ROT09RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
97
98
DYT10ET
OST10ET
RCT10ET
ROT10ET
99
100
DYT10RT
OST10RT
RCT10RT
ROT10RT
101
102
DYT11ET
OST11ET
RCT11ET
ROT11ET
103
104
DYT11RT
OST11RT
RCT11RT
ROT11RT
104
106
DYT12ET
OST12ET
RCT12ET
ROT12ET
107
108
DYT12RT
OST12RT
RCT12RT
ROT12RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
109
110
DYT13ET
OST13ET
RCT13ET
ROT13ET
111
112
DYT13RT
OST13RT
RCT13RT
ROT13RT
113
114
DYT14ET
OST14ET
RCT14ET
ROT14ET
115
116
DYT14RT
OST14RT
RCT14RT
ROT14RT
117
118
DYT15ET
OST15ET
RCT15ET
ROT15ET
119
120
DYT15RT
OST15RT
RCT15RT
ROT15RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
121
122
DYT16ET
OST16ET
RCT16ET
ROT16ET
123
124
DYT16RT
OST16RT
RCT16RT
ROT16RT
125
126
DYT17ET
OST17ET
RCT17ET
ROT17ET
127
128
DYT17RT
OST17RT
RCT17RT
ROT17RT
129
130
DYT18ET
OST18ET
RCT18ET
ROT18ET
131
132
DYT18RT
OST18RT
RCT18RT
ROT18RT
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
133
134
DYT19ET
OST19ET
RCT19ET
ROT19ET
135
136
DYT19RT
OST19RT
RCT19RT
ROT19RT
137
138
DYT20ET
OST20ET
RCT20ET
ROT20ET
139
140
DYT20RT
OST20RT
RCT20RT
ROT20RT
141
142
DYT21ET
OST21ET
RCT21ET
ROT21ET
143
144
DYT21RT
OST21RT
RCT21RT
ROT21RT
C\P
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
16
0
16
1
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
May 2001
6-7
Network Communications
UM354N-1
Sequencer and Timer Configuration Parameters:
SxxxTIM - Step x Time Period ..................................- Real
SxxxAEP - Step x Analog End Point..........................- Real
SxxxGnIM - Step x Group n Input Mask.....................- 16 bit mask word
SxxxGnOM - Step x Group n Output Mask.................- 16 bit mask word
DYTxxT - Delay Timer x Time...................................- Real
OSTxxT - One Shot Timer x Time .............................- Real
RCTxxNT - Repeat Cycle Timer x-ON Time...............- Real
RCTxxFT - Repeat Cycle Timer x-OFF Time..............- Real
ROTxxT - Retentive On Timer Time ..........................- Real
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
150
151
S001TIM
S002TIM
S003TIM
S004TIM
S005TIM
S005TIM
S007TIM
152
153
S001AEP
S002AEP
S003AEP
S004AEP
S005AEP
S006AEP
S007AEP
154
S001G0IM
S002G0IM
S003G0IM
S004G0IM
S005G0IM
S006G0IM
S007G0IM
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
169
S001GFIM
S002GFIM
S003GFIM
S004GFIM
S005GFIM
S006GFIM
S007GFIM
170
S001G0OM
S002G0OM
S003G0OM
S004G0OM
S005G0OM
S006G0OM
S007G0OM
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
185
S001GFOM
S002GFOM
S003GFOM
S004GFOM
S005GFOM
S006GFOM
S007GFOM
186
187
.................................................................................................................................................................................
C\P
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
C\P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
...
6-8
150
151
S244TIM
S245TIM
S246TIM
S247TIM
S248TIM
S249TIM
S250TIM
190
191
DYT01T
DYT02T
DYT03T
DYT04T
DYT05T
DYT06T
DYT07T
DYT08T
DYT09T
DYT10T
DYT11T
DYT12T
152
153
S244AEP
S245AEP
S246AEP
S247AEP
S248AEP
S249AEP
S250AEP
192
193
OST01T
OST02T
OST03T
OST04T
OST05T
OST06T
OST07T
OST08T
OST09T
OST10T
OST11T
OST12T
154
S244G0IM
S245G0IM
S246G0IM
S247G0IM
S248G0IM
S249G0IM
S250G0IM
.....
.....
......
......
......
.....
.....
......
194
195
RCT01NT
RCT02NT
RCT03NT
RCT04NT
RCT05NT
RCT06NT
RCT07NT
RCT08NT
RCT09NT
RCT10NT
RCT11NT
RCT12NT
169
S244GFIM
S245GFIM
S246GFIM
S247GFIM
S248GFIM
S249GFIM
S250GFIM
170
S244G0OM
S245G0OM
S246G0OM
S247G0OM
S248G0OM
S249G0OM
S250G0OM
196
197
RCT01FT
RCT02FT
RCT03FT
RCT04FT
RCT05FT
RCT06FT
RCT07FT
RCT08FT
RCT09FT
RCT10FT
RCT11FT
RCT12FT
......
.....
......
......
......
......
......
......
185
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
S244GFOM
198
199
ROT01T
ROT02T
ROT03T
ROT04T
ROT05T
ROT06T
ROT07T
ROT08T
ROT09T
ROT10T
ROT11T
ROT12T
186
200
187
201
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
6.2.4 Analog Indicator Loop Data
Analog Indicator loop data occupies six LIL channels. The starting channel is entered during configuration of the
ODA operator display function block for each loop, as LIL CHAN (n). The first channel for each loop can be
viewed in station data starting at channel 5/parameter 38. The station configuration entry (both local and
graphical PC-based) will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels. Another starting
channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels.
Channel locations n through n+5, in the table below, identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each
analog indicator loop. All parameter 1 data (e.g. P-process) is global and is transmitted every 0.5 second. All
other data is sent out on command.
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
1
L#P1I
L#P2I
L#P3I
L#P4I
L#SW1
L#SW2
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
13
14
15
16
L#P1ALF
L#P1BLF
L#P1ALI L#P1BLI L#P2ALI L#P2BLI
L#P1ATI L#P1BTI L#P2ATI L#2BTI
L#P1API L#P1BPI L#P2API L#P2BPI
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
May 2001
2
3
4
L#P1F
L#P2F
L#P3F
L#P4F
5
L#PIT
L#P2T
L#P3T
L#P4T
6
7
8
L#P1U
L#P2U
L#P3U
L#P4U
9
10`
11
12
L#TAG
25
26
L#P4ALF
27
28
L#P4BLF
L#Q1N
L#Q2N
L#Q3N
L#Q4N
17
18
L#P2ALF
L#P3ALI L#P3BLI
L#PATI
L#P3BT
L#P3API L#P3BPI
29
30
L#Q1F
L#Q2F
L#Q3F
L#Q4F
19
20
L#P2BLF
L#P4ALI
L#P4BLI
L#P4ATI
L#P4BTI
L#P4API
L#P4BPI
31
32
L#Q1MNF
L#Q2MNF
L#Q3MNF
L#Q4MNF
33
21
22
L#P3ALF
34
23
24
L#P3BLF
L#Q1U
L#Q2U
L#Q3U
L#Q4U
35
36
L#Q1MXF
L#Q2MXF
L#Q3MXF
L#Q4MXF
6-9
Network Communications
UM354N-1
6.2.5 Discrete Indicator Loop Data
Discrete Indicator loop data occupies four LIL channels. The starting channel is entered during configuration of
the ODD operator display function block for each loop, as LIL CHAN (n). The first channel for each loop can be
viewed in station data starting at channel 6/parameter 38. The station configuration entry (both local and
graphical PC-based) will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels. Another starting
channel can be entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels.
Channel locations n through n+3, in the table below, identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each
analog indicator loop. All parameter 1 data (e.g. discrete input states) is global and is transmitted every 0.5
second. All other data is sent out on command.
C\P
1
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
L#DISW
L#DSSW
L#DOSW
L#SW
C\P
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
6-10
13
2
3
4
5
L#I0TAG
L#I1TAG
L#I2TAG
6
7
8
L#I3TAG
L#I4TAG
L#I5TAG
9
10
L#I6TAG
L#I7TAG
L#I8TAG
11
12
L#I9TAG
L#IATAG
L#IBTAG
L#TAG
14
15
L#ICTAG
L#IDTAG
L#IETAG
L#IFTAG
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
May 2001
UM354N-1
Network Communications
6.2.6 Pushbutton Loop Data
Pushbutton loop data occupies two LIL channels. The starting channel is entered during configuration of the ODP
operator display function block for each loop, as LIL CHAN (n). The first channel for each loop can be viewed in
station data starting at channel 7/parameter 38. The station configuration entry (both local and graphical PCbased) will indicate the next available open space of six contiguous channels. Another starting channel can be
entered but it is important to utilize the lowest total number of channels.
Channel locations n through n+1, in the table below, identify variables that will be available on the LIL for each
analog indicator loop. All parameter 1 data (e.g. discrete input states) is global and is transmitted every 0.5
second. All other data is sent out on command.
C\P
1
n
L#SW1
n+1
L#SW2
C\P
13
n
n+1
C\P
25
37
49
n
n+1
C\P
73
n
n+1
16
85
26
27
28
7
8
9
17
18
19
20
21
10
38
50
62
74
86
98
L#G8TAG
L#G8F1T
29
39
40
41
30
31
11
12
52
53
42
43
64
65
54
55
76
77
66
67
88
89
78
79
100
101
L#G8P1T
L#G8FOT
45
46
56
68
80
90
91
92
57
58
103
104
L#G8P2T
36
47
48
59
60
L#G4SAT
L#G4SMT
69
70
71
72
L#G5SAT
L#G5SMT
81
82
83
84
L#G6SAT
L#G6SMT
93
94
L#G7P2T
102
35
L#G3SAT
L#G3SMT
L#G6P2T
L#G7P1T
L#G7FOT
99
44
24
L#G2SAT
L#G2SMT
L#G5P2T
L#G6P1T
L#G6FOT
87
34
L#G4P2T
L#G5P1T
L#G5FOT
75
33
L#G3P2T
L#G4P1T
L#G4FOT
63
32
23
L#G1SAT
L#G1SMT
L#G2P2T
L#G3P1T
L#G3FOT
51
22
L#G1P2T
L#G2P1T
L#G2FOT
L#G7TAG
L#G7F1T
97
6
L#G1P1T
L#G1FOT
L#G6TAG
L#G6F1T
n
n+1
C\P
15
L#G5TAG
L#G5F1T
n
n+1
C\P
14
L#G4TAG
L#G4F1T
61
5
L#TAG
L#G3TAG
L#G3F1T
n
n+1
C\P
4
L#G2TAG
L#G2F1T
n
n+1
C\P
3
L#G1TAG
L#G1F1T
n
n+1
C\P
2
95
96
L#G7SAT
L#G7SMT
105
106
107
108
L#G8SAT
L#G8SMT
n
May 2001
6-11
Network Communications
6-12
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.0 DATA MAPPING
This section provides loop and station data mapping for Modbus, Local Instrument Link, and Ethernet. Modbus is
standard. LIL and Ethernet option boards are available and the correct board must be installed to enable either
communication protocol. With the Ethernet option, data is accessed using Modbus commands embedded within
the TCP protocol. This is becoming known within the industry as the Open Modbus/TCP Protocol.
The controller has an RS232 port that always communicates via Modbus. It is located on the underside of the
operator faceplate.
Each controller also has a multi-drop network connection that is either Modbus, LIL (when the optional LIL board
is installed), or Ethernet (when the optional Ethernet board is installed). The Ethernet connection is made using
the standard RJ45 connector. The network can interconnect:
•
Procidia i|pac, Moore 352Plus, Moore 353 and Moore 354N Controllers and a computer running i|ware PC,
ProcessSuite™, MYCROADVANTAGE™ or other operator interface software that includes the
communication driver (e.g. Modbus, LIL (320), or OPC Ethernet) in the controller.
•
Procidia i|pac, Moore 352Plus, Moore 353 and Moore 354N Controllers and an APACS® Model 39ACM
Advanced Control Module via Modbus or LIL
The network permits data to be uploaded from the station to the computer or workstation. This data is typically
used for process and alarm monitoring, additional processing of the data for inventory management and
accounting, and process and equipment troubleshooting. Data can be downloaded to the station to change setpoint
or valve value, change control mode, and acknowledge alarms.
Proprietary data transfers associated with configuration upload/download or on-line monitoring associated with the
i|config Graphical Configuration Utility are not described. MPU Controller firmware versions are identified as
explained in earlier sections.
7.1 CONNECTING TO APACS 39ACM, MYCROADVANTAGE, ProcessSuite, i|ware PC
7.1.1 APACS
A Model 39ACM (Advanced Control Module) supports both Modbus and LIL connections. Use the standard
Modbus Master Function Block Library to communicate with a station. When requesting Modbus data, do not
exceed 48 coils or 60 registers per request. A LIL function block library (P/N 15939-625V4.00 ACM Serial
Communication FB Library LIL) that provides a method for connecting the ACM to standard LIL stations is
available. The library includes a Moore 352P/353/354 Loop block. The current release of the library maps the
352P/353/354 as having 3-loops located at channels 8, 13, and 18. Therefore, it is necessary to configure ODC
function blocks for these channels. It is expected that later releases of the library will allow multiple loops, up to
maximum allowed. Also, data from additional loops can be obtained by using a combination of other library
functions such as LIL_GBL, LIL_NGBL, and LIL_CMD.
7.1.2 MYCROADVANTAGE
Model 320 Driver
MYCROADVANTAGE provides a LIL(320) driver that will communicate with stations on a Local Instrument
Link (LIL). Standard, predefined parameter tables for many LIL products (e.g. Models 351 and 352) are within
MYCROADVANTAGE to simplify configuration. MYCROADVANTAGE release 3.32 does not include a Model
352P/353/354 predefined parameter table. However, when up to three control loops are to be configured in a
Model 352P, 353 or 354, use the Model 351 predefined parameter table and configure the ODC blocks in the loops
to channels 8, 13, and 18. This method will work since the loop data in the controller is the same as a 351and is
located at the same relative offsets as in a 351. Loops can also be configured individually. Details on the
configuration can be found the MYCROADVANTAGE user manual.
May 2001
7-1
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Modbus Driver
MYCROADVANTAGE provides a Modbus driver for communicating with up to 32 stations through a single
COM port. There are a few considerations when communicating with a Model 352P, 353 or 354 using the Modbus
driver.
•
Loop data is available as integer or floating point. When integer is used, more data is obtained with a single
command, thus improving the communication throughput. When integer data is used, ranges can be scaled
using 3:Linear function MX+B scaling.
•
The MODBUS.DAT file must be modified. Under the section [Address Chunk Range], set “UseDefault=0”,
under section [Address Size], set “itChunkSize=48” and “WordChunkSize=60”.
7.1.3 ProcessSuite
RealTime LIL I/O Server
An optional LIL RealTime I/O Server is available to communicate with the Model 320 ICI (Independent Computer
Interface). The 320 communicates over the Local Instrument Link (LIL) with other stations that have the LIL
option boards installed. Refer to the literature provided with the LIL RealTime I/O Server for proper operation.
Optimize LIL performance by using Global Data, especially for data that is updated on each scan such as the
process, setpoint, valve, loop status, and alarm I. Use individual parameter requests only to obtain data not
required frequently (e.g. tuning parameters, range scaling).
Modbus I/O Server
A Modbus I/O Server comes with Process Suite and it can be used to communicate with the controller. Refer to the
Modbus I/O Server instructions for operating details. Certain parameter settings are critical. In the Topic
Definition, use the 584/984 slave type. Set the maximum coil reads to 48 and maximum register reads to 60.
Maximum coil writes can be set to the minimum allowed value of 8 and register writes to 2.
7.1.4 i|ware PC
Modbus OPC Server
The i|ware PC Operator Interface software includes a Modbus OPC server that when connected to the controller
can auto populate its database with the number and type of loops configured in the station. All tag names used in
the OPC database will be the same as listed in this manual.
LIL OPC Server
The i|ware PC Operator Interface software includes an LIL OPC server that when connected to the controller can
auto populate its database with the number and type of loops configured in the station. All tag names used in the
LIL OPC database will be the same as listed in this manual.
Ethernet OPC Server
The i|ware PC Operator Interface software is an OPC Client and can be connected to an OPC server. An Ethernet
OPC server using the Open Modbus/TCP Protocol is available to obtain data from single or multiple controllers
and server the data to OPC clients.
Modbus Application Note: Refer to application document AD353-108 for information on using Modbus
communications with controller products.
7-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.2 STATION DATA
A station contains some data that pertains to the entire station and some to individual loops. Station data, available
over the network, is part of the station function block (STATN) configuration and is mapped to fixed locations in
Modbus registers or coils and fixed channel/parameters when the optional LIL board is installed. Loop data
(detailed in the next section) can be associated with a Controller “Control Loop” or a Sequencer “Sequencer Loop”
as defined by the selection of the operator display: ODC “Operator Display for Controller” or ODS “Operator
Much of the analog data is available is two formats. The first is 16-bit values, scaled consistent with previous LIL
products, enabling integration into existing LIL systems. This data type also provides Modbus masters, unable to
handle 32-bit floating point, a method for obtaining data from the station.
The second is the standard 32-bit IEEE floating point format consistent with the actual data in the station. This
data type is contained in two consecutive registers or parameters.
•
When using Modbus, the LSW is first and the MSW second.
•
When using LIL, the first parameter contains the MSW and the second parameter the LSW.
•
Boolean values are packed into 16-bit words for LIL use and are available in coils when using Modbus.
•
String data, formatted as 2 ASCII characters per word with the left-most character in the most significant byte,
containing tag, units, and message information is available with Modbus and LIL.
Most Station data is ‘Read Only’ except for:
•
SE (Station Error) parameter that allows a write of $0000 to reset the current error as an acknowledgment
•
SSW (Station Status Word) parameter which allows writes to certain bits (coils)
•
MLTP (Modbus Loop Trend Pointer, included in version 1.30 firmware) parameter
•
AASEL (Active Acknowledged Station Error Log, included in version 1.30 firmware) parameter
•
other items as noted below
7.2.1 Integer Data (16-bit Integer)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
GDS
ST
SSW
SE
NCL
NSL
RAM
CBT
CBSR
EBT
EBSR
RBT
RBSR
NBT
NBSR
OAT
OASR
OBT
OBSR
OFT
DRN
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Global Data Size (LIL)
Station Type
Station Status Word
Station Error
No. of Control Loops (# of ODC)
No. of Seq. Loops (# of ODS)
RAM Size (size in K bytes)
Controller Board Type
Controller Board Software Rev. #
Expander I/O Board Type
Exp. I/O Board Software Rev. #
Remote I/O Board Type (A-1)
Remote I/O (A-1) Software Rev. #
Network Board Type (B-1)
Network (B-1) Software Rev. #
Option Board A Type (A-2)
Option A (A-2) Software Rev. #
Option Board B Type (B-2)
Option B (B-2) Rev #
Operator Faceplate Type
Model 353 Database Rev. No.
7-256 ($0007-$0100)
6 ($0006)
(see Station Status Word)
0-32767($00000-$7FFF)
0-255($0000-$00FF)
0-255($0000-$00FF)
0-65535($0000-$FFFF)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
(see below)
0-32767($0000-$7FFF)
n/a
40001
(see coils)
40002
40003
40004
40005
40006
40007
40008
40009
40010
40011
40012
40013
40014
40015
40016
40017
40018
40019
May 2001
1/1
2/1
3/1
4/1
5/1
6/1
1/2
1/3
1/4
1/5
1/6
1/7
1/8
1/9
1/10
1/11
1/12
1/13
1/14
1/15
2/8
7-3
Data Mapping
CWT
KSR
CT
LxT
R
R
R
R
MSLCP
LSLCP
SA
RTS
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MLTP
NLTB
AASEL
STY
STM
STD
STH
STMN
STSC
NAL
NDL
NDP
IPA1
IPA2
IPG1
IPG2
IPM1
IPM2
EBS
EBD
PPR
Spares
R/W
R
R/W
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
C_S
S_S
A_S
D_S
P_S
SCR
NCR
LxZ
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
UM354N-1
Computer Watchdog Timer (sec)
0-1000 ($0000-$03F8)
40020
3/2
Kernel Software Rev. #
(see below)
40021
1/16
Cycle Time (msec)
0-32767($00000-$7FFF)
40022
3/4
Loop - Type
($0000-$0005)
40023-40047
n/a
(0-none, 1-controller, 2-sequencer, 3-analog ind. V2.2, 4-discrete ind. V2.2, 5-pushbuttons V2.2)
Modbus Seq. Loop Config. Pt
0-25 ($0000-$0019)
40048
n/a
LIL Seq. Loop Config. Pointer
0-25 ($0000-$0019)
n/a
7/1
Station Address
0-250 ($0000-$00FA)
40049
3/3
Front Port (Display Assembly) RTS 1-3 ($0001-$0003)
40050
3/5
reserved
40051-40057
1/17-23
Modbus Loop Trend Pointer (V1.3)
0-25 ($0000-$0019)
40058
n/a
Number of Loop Trend Blocks (V1.3) 0-5 ($0000-$0005)
40059
n/a
Active Ack’d Station Error Log (V1.3) 0-33767($0000-$7FFF)
40060
4/6
Standard Time in Years
199740061
3/6 (V2.0)
Standard Time in Months
1-12
40062
3/7 (V2.0)
Standard Time in Days
1-31
40063
3/8 (V2.0)
Standard Time in Hours
0-23
40064
3/9 (V2.0)
Standard Time in Minutes
0-59
40065
3/10 (V2.0)
Standard Time in Seconds
0-59
40066
3/11 (V2.0)
No of Analog Ind. Loops (ODA)
0-255($0000-$00FF)
40067
5/37 (V2.2)
No of Discrete Ind. Loops (ODD)
0-255($0000-$00FF)
40068
6/37 (V2.2)
No of Pushbutton Loops (ODP)
0-255($0000-$00FF)
40069
7/37 (V2.2)
IP Address (2)
1: 0-255, 2: 0-255
40070
n/a (V2.4)
IP Address (2)
3: 0-255, 4: 0-255
40071
n/a (V2.4)
IP Gateway Address (4)
1: 0-255, 2 0-255
40072
n/a (V2.4)
IP Gateway Address (4)
3: 0-255, 4: 0-255
40073
n/a (V2.4)
IP Mask (3)
1: 0-255, 2: 0-255
40074
n/a (V2.4)
IP Mask (3)
3: 0-255, 4: 0-255
40075
n/a (V2.4)
Ethernet Board Speed 0-auto, 1-10M, 2-100M
40076
n/a (V2.4)
Ethernet Board Duplex 0-auto, 1-half duplex, 2-full duplex
40077
n/a (V2.4)
Ethernet Board Peer-to-Peer Rate
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 sec
40078
n/a (V2.4)
40079-40100
Control Loop Starting Chan. LIL
8-250 ($0008-$00FA)
Seq. Loop Starting Chan. LIL
8-250 ($0008-$00FA)
Analog Indicator - Starting Chan. LIL 8-250 ($0008-$00FA)
Discrete Indication - Starting Chan LIL 8-250 ($0008-$00FA)
PB Indication - Starting Chan LIL
8-250 ($0008-$00FA)
Starting Configuration Record
0- ($0000-)
Number of Configuration Records
0- ($0000-)
Loop x Param. Z Staring Channel
8-250 ($0008-00FA)
Software Revisions:
Development Release
Major Rev.
Minor Rev.
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
5/2-5/26
6/2-6/26
5/38-5/62 (V2.2)
6/38-6/62 (V2.2)
7/38-7/62 (V2.2)
2/13
2/14
7/16-7/36. 6/36
MSB 128 to 255 ($80-$FF)
MSB 1 to 127 ($00-$7F) (5)
LSB 0 to 255 ($00-$FF)
Hardware Type and Revisions:
Type
MSB 1 to 15 ($01-$0F) (5)
Rev.
LSB 1 to 15 ($01-$0F)
(1) The controller time should be changed one parameter at a time and then verified before writing the next
parameter (i.e. for Modbus use command 06 and not command 16 and LIL use a single parameter send).
The change to each parameter will take approximately 1 to 2 seconds each.
(2) IP Address format (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) 1,2,3,4 (default 192.168.0.2)
(3) IP Mask format (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) 1,2,3,4 (default 255.255.255.0)
(4) IP Gateway format (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) 1,2,3,4 (default is 197.168.0.1)
(5) A major software Rev. of 0 = no software included and a hardware type of 0 = not installed.
7-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.2.2 Station String Data (8-bit ASCII Char - 2/Word)
Code
STAG
CFNR
CFN
SN
R/W
R
R
R
R
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
Station Tag
Configuration File Name Reduced
Configuration File Name
Station Serial No.
12 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
20 ASCII Char
8 ASCII (099999999
0($0000)
40101-40106
n/a
40107-40116
40117-40120
2/2-7
2/9-12
7/2-7/12
4/2-4/5
Spares
40121-40199
7.2.3 Station Coil Data (1-bit)
ASE
SEN
FSB
SDV
CCL
CCH
SCH
SRB
OOS
Code
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
CC1
CC2
CC3
SEB
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Description
Range
Coil (MB)
C/P (LIL)
1-Active Station Event
1-Station Event Not Ackl’d
1- Flashing Station Bargraph
1- Station Database Valid
Config Change Counter LSB (bit)
Config Change Counter MSB (bit)
1-Station Configuration Hold
1-Station Run Bit
1-Station Alarms Out of Service
(spares)
Config Change Bit #1
Config Change Bit #2
Config Change Bit #3
1-Station Error Bit
(spare)
spares
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00001
00002
00003
00004
n/a
n/a
00007
00008
00009
00010-00014
n/a
n/a
n/a
00015
00016
00017-00071
3/1(0)
3/1(1)
3/1(2)
3/1(3)
3/1(4)
3/1(5)
3/1(6)
3/1(7)
3/1(8) V2.0
3/1(9-10)
3/1(11)
3/1(12)
3/1(13)
3/1(14)
3/1(15)
0
0($0000)
7.2.4 Station Status Word (SSW)
[channel 3/parameter 1]
BIT
Description
0
Active Station Event (ASE)
1
Station Event Not Ack’d (SEN)
2
Flashing Bargraph (FSB)
3
Database Valid (SDV)
4
Config Change Counter LSB
5
Config Change Counter MSB
6
Configuration Hold (SCH)
7
Station Run Bit (SRB)
8
Stations Alarms Out of Service
9
(not used)
10
(not used)
11
Configuration Change #1
12
Configuration Change #2
13
Configuration Change #3
14
Station Error Bit (SEB)
15
(not used)
May 2001
Value
1-Active Event
1-Not Acknowledged
1-Flashing Bargraph
1-Valid
1/0
1/0
1-Hold
1-Run
1-OOS
0
0
1-Config. Changed
1-Config. Changed
1-Config. Changed
1-Error
0
Block
Read/Write
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
Output
7-5
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3 LOOP DATA
Loop data is grouped into several categories. The groupings are not as significant when using the LIL option as all
LIL data has been mapped consistent with previous LIL products using Global and Non-Global data. However,
when using Modbus, the groupings enable single data requests (up to 60 Words/Registers or 48 Coils) to obtain
similar data with a single command. The loop will have different data if assigned as a controller type (i.e. using
the ODC block), a sequencer type (i.e. using the ODS block), an Analog Indicator Display (i.e. using the ODA
block), or a Discrete Indicator Display (i.e. using the ODD block), or Pushbutton/Switch Operation (i.e. using the
ODP block).
a) Dynamic data may change value on each controller scan and/or is not identified as being changed by the data
base change bit (coil). This category of data usually needs to be updated by a workstation every few seconds.
b) Variable data changes periodically. It is usually associated with on-line operation at a workstation but may only
need to be updated on a lower periodic basis or when a data base change is indicated.
c) Static data is similar to variable data but has a lower update requirement. The data may only need updating
when a change is indicated or to verify a previous change made to a parameter.
d) String data contains tag names, units, and messages.
7-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.1 Dynamic Loop Integer Data
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#PI
L#SI
L#VI
L#XI
L#YI
L#RI
L#BI
L#TlmI
L#TllI
CLS
ASW
L#PCSW
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
Process
(%)
Setpoint
(%)
Valve (%)
X Variable (%)
Y Variable (%)
Ratio
Bias
Totalizer - 3 ms (whole) digits
Totalizer - 3 ls (whole) digits
Control Loop Status
Alarm Status Word
PCOM Block Status Word (V1.3)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
0.00 to 38.40($80-$0F80)
100-0-100 ($80-$0F80)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
(see CLS)
(see ASW)
1-7 ($0001-$0007)
40201+10(#-1)
40202+10(#-1)
40203+10(#-1)
40204+10(#-1)
40205+10(#-1)
40206+10(#-1)
40207+10(#-1)
40208+10(#-1)
40209+10(#-1)
(see coils)
(see coils)
40210+10(#-1)
n/1
n+1/1
n+2/1
n+3/24
n+4/24
n/7
n/8
n+2/2
n+2/3
n+3/1
n+4/1
z+2/1
Sequencer [ODS]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#SSNI
L#SNSI
L#SNGI
L#SLS
L#SNRI
L#CRNI
L#PCSW
L#TACM
R
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
Sequencer Step No.
Sequencer Number of Steps
Sequencer Number of Groups
Sequencer Loop Status
Sequencer Number of Recipes
Current Recipe Number
PCOM Block Status Word (V1.3)
Total Active Conditional Msgs
(V1.3)
(spare)
0-250 ($0000-$00FA)
0-250 ($0000-$00FA)
0-16 ($0000-$0010)
(see SLS)
0-9 ($0000-$0009)
0-9 ($0000-$0009)
1-7 ($0001-$0007)
0-64 $0000-$0040)
40201+10(#-1)
40202+10(#-1)
40203+10(#-1)
(see coils)
40204+10(#-1)
40205+10(#-1)
40206+10(#-1)
40207+10(#-1)
n/1
n/4
n/5
n+5/1
n/11
n+3/1
z+2/1
n/43
0 ($0000)
40208+10(#-1)
…..
…..
…..
…..
…..
(spare)
0 ($0000)
40210+10(#-1)
…..
Analog Indicator [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#P1I
L#P2I
L#P3I
L#P4I
L#SW1
L#SW2
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
Process 1 (%)
Process 2 (%)
Process 3 (%)
Process 4 (%)
Status Word 1
Status Word 2
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
(see SW1)
(see SW1)
40201+10(#-1)
40202+10(#-1)
40203+10(#-1)
40204+10(#-1)
(see coils)
(see coils)
n/1
n+1/1
n+2/1
n+3/1
n+4/1
n+5/1
Discrete Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#DISW
L#DSSW
L#DOSW
L#SW
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Discrete Input Status Word
Discrete State Status Word
Discrete Output Status Word
Status Word
(see L#DISW)
(see L#DSSW)
(see L#DOSW)
(see L#SW)
(see coils)
(see coils)
(see coils)
(see coils)
n/1
n+1/1
n+2/1
n+3/1
Discrete Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#SW1
L#SW2
R/W
R/W
Status Word 1
Status Word 2
(see L#SW1)
(see L#SW2)
(see coils)
(see coils)
n/1
n+1/1
May 2001
7-7
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.2 Variable Loop Integer Data
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#TSPI
L#HLI
L#LLI
L#RTI
L#RRI
L#A1LI
L#A2LI
L#A3LI
L#A4LI
L#T1mI
L#T1lI
L#T2mI
L#T2lI
L#A1TW
L#A2TW
L#A3TW
L#A4TW
L#A1TI
L#A2TI
L#A3TI
L#A4TI
L#A1PI
L#A2PI
L#A3PI
L#A4PI
L#CAI
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
…..
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
0-3840($0080-$0F80)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
0-999 ($0000-$03E7)
(bit mapped - see ATW)
(bit mapped - see ATW)
(bit mapped - see ATW)
(bit mapped - see ATW)
0-6 ($0000-$0006)
0-6 ($0000-$0006)
0-6 ($0000-$0006)
0-6 ($0000-$0006)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-DIR, 0-REV
0 ($0000)
…..
0 ($0000)
40451+30(#-1)
40452+30(#-1)
40453+30(#-1)
40454+30(#-1)
40455+30(#-1)
40456+30(#-1)
40457+30(#-1)
40458+30(#-1)
40459+30(#-1)
40460+30(#-1)
40461+30(#-1)
404621+30(#-1)
40463+30(#-1)
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
40464+30(#-1)
40465+30(#-1)
40466+30(#-1)
40467+30(#-1)
40468+30(#-1)
40469+30(#-1)
40470+30(#-1)
40471+30(#-1)
40472+30(#-1)
40473+30(#-1)
…..
40480+30(#-1)
n+1/2
n+1/4
n+1/5
n+1/3
n+1/6
n+4/2
n+4/3
n+4/4
n+4/5
n+2/4
n+2/5
n+2/6
n+2/7
n+4/6
n+4/7
n+4/8
n+4/9
n+4/37
n+4/38
n+4/39
n+4/40
n+4/41
n+4/42
n+4/43
n+4/44
n+1/7
…..
Target Setpoint (%)
Setpoint
High Limit (%)
Setpoint Low Limit (%)
Setpoint Ramp Time (min)
Setpoint Ramp Rate (%/min)
Alarm 1 Limit (%)
Alarm 2 Limit (%)
Alarm 3 Limit (%)
Alarm 4 Limit (%)
Tot. Preset 1 - 3 ms whole digits
Tot. Preset 1 - 3 ls whole digits
Tot. Preset 2 - 3 ms whole digits
Tot. Preset 2 - 3 ls whole digits
Alarm 1 Type Word
Alarm 2 Type Word
Alarm 3 Type Word
Alarm 4 Type Word
Alarm 1 Type
Alarm 2 Type
Alarm 3 Type
Alarm 4 Type
Alarm 1 Priority
Alarm 2 Priority
Alarm 3 Priority
Alarm 4 Priority
Controller Action
(spare)
…..
(spare)
Register (MB)
40451+30(#-1)
40452+30(#-1)
40453+30(#-1)
40454+30(#-1)
40455+30(#-1)
40456+30(#-1)
40457+30(#-1)
40458+30(#-1)
…..
40476+30(#-1)
40477+30(#-1)
40478+30(#-1)
40479+30(#-1)
40480+30(#-1)
C/P (LIL)
1/154
1/170
1/155
1/171
1/156
1/172
2/154
2/170
…..
5/170
5/155
5/171
5/156
5/172
…..
Sequencer [ODS] - (MASK Configurations)
Code
L#S001G0I
L#S001G0O
L#S001G1I
L#S001G1O
L#S001G2I
L#S001G2O
L#S002G0I
L#S002G0O
…..
L#S005G0O
L#S005G1I
L#S005G1O
L#S005G2I
L#S005G2O
7-8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
…..
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask
Step 1 Group 0 Output Mask
Step 1 Group 1 Input Mask
Step 1 Group 1 Output Mask
Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask
Step 1 Group 2 Output Mask
Step 2 Group 0 Input Mask
Step 2 Group 0 Output Mask
…..
Step 5 Group 0 Output Mask
Step 5 Group 1 Input Mask
Step 5 Group 1 Output Mask
Step 5 Group 2 Input Mask
Step 5 Group 2 Output Mask
Range
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
…..
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Analog Indicator [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#P1ALI
L#P1BLI
L#P2ALI
L#P2BLI
L#P3ALI
L#P3BLI
L#P4ALI
L#P4BLI
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Process 1 Alarm A Limit (%)
Process 1 Alarm B Limit (%)
Process 2 Alarm A Limit (%)
Process 2 Alarm B Limit (%)
Process 3 Alarm A Limit (%)
Process 3 Alarm B Limit (%)
Process 4 Alarm A Limit (%)
Process 4 Alarm B Limit (%)
L#P1ATI
L#P1BTI
L#P2ATI
L#P2BTI
L#P3ATI
L#P3BTI
L#P4ATI
L#P4BTI
L#P1API
L#P1BPI
L#P2API
L#P2BPI
L#P3API
L#P3BPI
L#P4API
L#P4BPI
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Process 1 Alarm A Type
Process 1 Alarm B Type
Process 2 Alarm A Type
Process 2 Alarm B Type
Process 3 Alarm A Type
Process 3 Alarm B Type
Process 4 Alarm A Type
Process 4 Alarm B Type
Process 1 Alarm A Priority
Process 1 Alarm B Priority
Process 2 Alarm A Priority
Process 2 Alarm B Priority
Process 3 Alarm A Priority
Process 3 Alarm B Priority
Process 4 Alarm A Priority
Process 4 Alarm B Priority
…..
…..
…..
(spare)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
-3.3 to 103.3 ($0-$0FFF)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
0-3 ($0000-$0003)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
1-5 ($0001-$0005)
…..
0 ($0000)
40451+30(#-1)
40452+30(#-1)
40453+30(#-1)
40454+30(#-1)
40455+30(#-1)
40456+30(#-1)
40457+30(#-1)
40458+30(#-1)
40459+30(#-1)
40460+30(#-1)
40461+30(#-1)
40462+30(#-1)
40463+30(#-1)
40464+30(#-1)
40465+30(#-1)
40466+30(#-1)
40467+30(#-1)
40468+30(#-1)
40469+30(#-1)
40470+30(#-1)
40471+30(#-1)
40472+30(#-1)
40473+30(#-1)
40474+30(#-1)
…..
40480+30(#-1)
n+1/13
n+1/14
n+1/15
n+1/16
n+1/17
n+1/18
n+1/19
n+1/20
n+2/13
n+2/14
n+2/15
n+2/16
n+2/17
n+2/18
n+2/19
n+2/20
n+3/13
n+3/14
n+3/15
n+3/16
n+3/17
n+3/18
n+3/19
n+3/20
…..
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
Range
Register (MB)
****
C/P (LIL)
Discrete Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
R/W
Description
Discrete Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
R/W
Description
**** NOTE: Registers (40451-40480) are reserved for ASCII Tags when the ODP display has been selected in
configuration.
May 2001
7-9
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.3 Static Loop Integer Data
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#PGI
R/W
Proportional Gain
41201+30(#-1)
n/2
L#TII
R/W
Integral Time (min)
41202+30(#-1)
n/3
L#TDI
R/W
Derivative Time (min)
41203+30(#-1)
n/4
L#DGI
L#MRI
L#RHI
R/W
R/W
R
Derivative Gain
Manual Reset (%)
Range High
41204+30(#-1)
41205+30(#-1)
41206+30(#-1)
n/5
n/6
n+3/10
L#RLI
R
Range Low
41207+30(#-1)
n+3/11
L#DPPI
L#PDPPI
L#VDPPI
L#XDPPI
L#YDPPI
R
R
R
R
R
…..
41208+30(#-1)
41209+30(#-1)
41210+30(#-1)
41211+30(#-1)
41212+30(#-1)
41213+30(#-1)
…..
41230+30(#-1)
n+3/12
n/34
n+2/34
n+3/34
n+4/34
…..
Decimal Point Position
Process DPP
Valve DPP
Variable X DPP
Variable Y DPP
(spare)
…..
(spare)
-9.99 to -0.01 ($1419-$17FF)
0.01 to 9.99 ($1801$1BE7)
-100.0 to -10.0 ($2418-$279C)
10.0 to 100.0 ($2864-$2BE8)
0.01 to 9.99 ($2081-$2467)
10.0 to 99.9 ($10E4-$1467)
100 to 3967 ($30E4-$3FFF)
0.00 to 9.99 ($2080-$2467)
10.0 to 100.0 ($10E4-$1468)
1.00 to 39.67 ($20E4--$2FFF)
0.0 to 100.0 ($0080-$0F80)
-1 to -32768 ($FFFF-$8000)
0 to 32767 ($0000-$7FFF)
-1 to -32768 ($FFFF-$8000)
0 to 32767 ($0000-$7FFF)
0 to 5 ($0000-$0005)
0 to 5 ($0000-$0005)
0 to 5 ($0000-$0005)
0 to 5 ($0000-$0005)
0 to 5 ($0000-$0005)
0 ($0000)
…..
0 ($0000)
…..
Sequencer [ODS] - (MASK Configurations)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#S006G0I
L#S006G0O
L#S006G1I
L#S006G1O
L#S006G2I
L#S006G2O
L#S007G0I
L#S007G0O
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Step 6 Group 0 Input Mask
Step 6 Group 0 Output Mask
Step 6 Group 1 Input Mask
Step 6 Group 1 Output Mask
Step 6 Group 2 Input Mask
Step 6 Group 2 Output Mask
Step 7 Group 0 Input Mask
Step 7 Group 0 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
41201+30(#-1)
41202+30(#-1)
41203+30(#-1)
41204+30(#-1)
41205+30(#-1)
41206+30(#-1)
41207+30(#-1)
41208+30(#-1)
6/154
6/170
6/155
6/171
6/156
6/172
7/154
7/170
…..
…..
…..
…..
…..
…..
L#S009G2I
L#S009G2O
L#S010G0I
L#S010G0O
L#S010G1I
L#S010G1O
L#S010G2I
L#S010G2O
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Step 9 Group 2 Input Mask
Step 9 Group 2 Output Mask
Step 10 Group 0 Input Mask
Step 10 Group 0 Output Mask
Step 10 Group 1 Input Mask
Step 10 Group 1 Output Mask
Step 10 Group 2 Input Mask
Step 10 Group 2 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
$0000-$FFFF
41223+30(#-1)
41224+30(#-1)
41225+30(#-1)
41226+30(#-1)
41227+30(#-1)
41228+30(#-1)
41229+30(#-1)
41230+30(#-1)
9/156
9/172
10/154
10/170
10/155
10/171
10/156
10/172
Analog, Discrete, & Pushbutton Indicators [ODA] ODD] [ODP]- (V2.1)
Code
n/a
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
****
C/P (LIL)
**** NOTE: Registers (40451-40480) are reserved for ASCII Tags when the ODP display has been selected in
configuration
7-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.4 Dynamic Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE)
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
L#PF
L#SF
L#VF
L#XF
L#YF
L#RF
L#BF
L#TLF
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
Sequencer [ODS]
Code
R/W
L#SSNF
L#SAOF
L#SAOmF
L#SAOlF
L#SAEPF
L#SRTF
L#SSTF
L#SNSF
L#SNGF
L#SNRF
L#CRNF
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
Process
Setpoint
Valve
X Variable
Y Variable
Ratio
Bias
Totalizer
(spare)
(spare)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
($00000000)
($00000000)
41951+20(#-1)
41953+20(#-1)
41955+20(#-1)
41957+20(#-1)
41959+20(#-1)
41961+20(#-1)
41963+20(#-1)
41965+20(#-1)
41967+20(#-1)
41969+20(#-1)
n/9-10
n+1/9-10
n+2/9-10
n+3/25-26
n+4/25-26
n/23-24
n/25-26
n+3/13-14
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
Sequencer Step No.*
Sequencer Analog Output
Step Analog Out (most sig. word)#
Step Analog Out (least sig. word)#
Step Analog End Point
Step Remaining Time*
Sequencer Step Time
Sequencer Number of Steps
Sequencer Number of Groups
Sequencer Number of Recipes
Current Recipe Number @
(spare)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
0($00000000)
41951+20(#-1)
41953+20(#-1)
n/a
n/a
41955+20(#-1)
41957+20(#-1)
41959+20(#-1)
41961+20(#-1)
41963+20(#-1)
41965+20(#-1)
41967+20(#-1)
41969+20(#-1)
n/2-3
n+1/2-3
n+1/1
n+2/1
n+1/4-5
n+3/2-3
n+3/4-5
n/6-7
n/8-9
n+1/7-8
n+1/9-10
Analog Indicator [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
L#P1F
L#P2F
L#P3F
L#P4F
R
R
R
R
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Process 4
(spare)
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
Real
Real
Real
Real
0($00000000)
41951+20(#-1)
41953+20(#-1)
41955+20(#-1)
41957+20(#-1)
41959/69+20(#-1)
n/2-3
n+1/2-3
n+2/2-3
n+3/2-3
Discrete Indicator [ODD] & [ODP]- (V2.2)
Code
R/W Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
n/a
* A Write command will force the Step or Remaining Time to the write value.
@ The current recipe can be changed if the Sequencer is in the HOLD mode.
May 2001
7-11
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.5 Variable Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE)
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#TSPF
L#HLF
L#LLF
L#RTF
L#RRF
L#A1LF
L#A2LF
L#A3LF
L#A4LF
L#T1F
L#T2F
L#Q1F
L#Q2F
L#BHLF
L#BLLF
L#BPLF
L#BGF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Target Setpoint
Setpoint High Limit
Setpoint Low Limit
Setpoint Ramp Time (min)
Setpoint Ramp Rate (units/min)
Alarm 1 Limit
Alarm 2 Limit
Alarm 3 Limit
Alarm 4 Limit
Totalizer Preset 1
Totalizer Preset 2
Quickset Hold 1
Quickset Hold 2
Batch Switch High Limit
Batch Switch Low Limit
Batch Switch Pre-Load
Batch Switch Gain
(spares)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
($00000000)
42451+60(#-1)
42453+60(#-1)
42455+60(#-1)
42457+60(#-1)
42459+60(#-1)
42461+60(#-1)
42463+60(#-1)
42465+60(#-1)
42467+60(#-1)
42469+60(#-1)
42471+60(#-1)
42473+60(#-1)
42475+60(#-1)
42477+60(#-1)
42479+60(#-1)
42481+60(#-1)
42483+60(#-1)
42485-42509+60(#-1)
n+1/13-14
n+1/17-18
n+1/19-20
n+1/15-16
n+1/21-22
n+4/13-14
n+4/15-16
n+4/17-18
n+4/19-20
n+3/15-16
n+3/17-18
n+1/41-42
n+2/41-42
n+1/35-36
n+2/35-36
n+3/35-36
n+4/35-36
Sequencer (Timers - Running Values) [ODS]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)*
L#DYT01ET
L#DYT01RT
L#OST01ET
L#OST01RT
L#RCT01ET
L#RCT01RT
L#ROT01ET
L#ROT01RT
L#DYT02ET
L#DYT02RT
L#OST02ET
L#OST02RT
L#RCT02ET
L#RCT02RT
L#ROT02ET
L#ROT02RT
L#DYT03ET
L#DYT03RT
L#OST03ET
L#OST03RT
L#RCT03ET
L#RCT03RT
L#ROT03ET
L#ROT03RT
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
DYT01 Elapsed Time
DYT01 Remaining Time
OST01 Elapsed Time
OST01 Remaining Time
RCT01 Elapsed Time
RCT01 Remaining Time
ROT01 Elapsed Time
ROT01 Remaining Time
DYT02 Elapsed Time
DYT02 Remaining Time
OST02 Elapsed Time
OST02 Remaining Time
RCT02 Elapsed Time
RCT02 Remaining Time
ROT02 Elapsed Time
ROT02 Remaining Time
DYT03 Elapsed Time
DYT03 Remaining Time
OST03 Elapsed Time
OST03 Remaining Time
RCT03 Elapsed Time
RCT03 Remaining Time
ROT03 Elapsed Time
ROT03 Remaining Time
(spares)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
42451+60(#-1)
42453+60(#-1)
42455+60(#-1)
42457+60(#-1)
42459+60(#-1)
42461+60(#-1)
42463+60(#-1)
42465+60(#-1)
42467+60(#-1)
42469+60(#-1)
42471+60(#-1)
42473+60(#-1)
42475+60(#-1)
42477+60(#-1)
42479+60(#-1)
42481+60(#-1)
42483+60(#-1)
42485+60(#-1)
42487+60(#-1)
42489+60(#-1)
42491+60(#-1)
42493+60(#-1)
42495+60(#-1)
42497+60(#-1)
42499-42509+60(#-1)
n/61-62
n/63-64
n+1/61-62
n+1/63-64
n+2/61-62
n+2/63-64
n+3/61-62
n+3/63-64
n/65-66
n/67-68
n+1/65-66
n+1/67-68
n+2/65-66
n+2/67-68
n+3/65-66
n+3/67-68
n/69-70
n/71-72
n+1/69-70
n+1/71-72
n+2/69-70
n+2/71-72
n+3/69-70
n+3/71-72
* In addition to the timers listed here the LIL will map 1 through 21 (see LIL overview for exact locations).
7-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Analog Indicator [ODA]- (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#P1ALF
L#P1BLF
L#P2ALF
L#P2BLF
L#P3ALF
L#P3BLF
L#P4ALF
L#P4BLF
L#Q1F
L#Q2F
L#Q3F
L#Q4F
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Process 1 Alarm A Limit
Process 1 Alarm B Limit
Process 2 Alarm A Limit
Process 2 Alarm B Limit
Process 3 Alarm A Limit
Process 3 Alarm B Limit
Process 4 Alarm A Limit
Process 4 Alarm B Limit
Quickset Hold 1
Quickset Hold 2
Quickset Hold 3
Quickset Hold 4
(spares)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
($00000000)
42451+60(#-1)
42453+60(#-1)
42455+60(#-1)
42457+60(#-1)
42459+60(#-1)
42461+60(#-1)
42463+60(#-1)
42465+60(#-1)
42467+60(#-1)
42469+60(#-1)
42471+60(#-1)
42473+60(#-1)
42475-42509+60(#-1)
n/13-14
n/15-16
n/17-18
n/19-20
n/21-22
n/23-24
n/25-26
n/27-28
n+1/29-30
n+2/29-30
n+3/29-30
n+4/29-30
Discrete Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
R/W Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
Range
****
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
Pushbutton/Switch Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
R/W Description
**** NOTE: Registers (40451-40480) are reserved for ASCII Tags when the ODP display has been
selected in configuration
May 2001
7-13
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.6 Static Loop Floating Point Data (32-bit IEEE)
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
L#PGF
L# TIF
L#TDF
L#MRF
L#ADF
L#AHF
L#ASF
L#APGF
L#ATIF
L#ATDF
L#HDF
L#LDF
L#DBF
L#PMNF
L#PMXF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Proportional Gain
Integral Time
Derivative Time
Manual Reset
Autotune Deviation
Autotune Hysteresis
Autotune Step (initial)
Autotune Proportional Gain
Autotune Integral Time
Autotune Derivative Time
On-Off Controller HI Deviation
On-Off Controller LO Deviation
On-Off Controller DEADBAND
Process MIN SCALE
Process MAX SCALE
Valve MIN SCALE
ValveMAX SCALE
X Variable MIN SCALE
X Variable MAX SCALE
Y Variable MIN SCALE
Y Variable MAX SCALE
Quickset 1 MIN SCALE
Quickset 1 MAX SCALE
Quickset 2 MIN SCALE
Quickset 2 MAX SCALE
Derivative Gain
(spares)
0.001 - 100.0
0.001 - 4000.0 min
0.00 - 100.00 min
0.00 - 100.00
auto(0), 2.5-25%
auto(0), 0.5 - 10.0%
5 - 40%
0.001 - 1000.0
0.001 - 4000.0 min
0.00 - 100.00 min
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
1.00 - 30.00
($00000000)
43951+60(#-1)
n/13-14
43953+60(#-1)
n/15-16
43955+60(#-1)
n/17-18
43957+60(#-1)
n/21-22
43959+60(#-1)
n/37-38
43961+60(#-1)
n/39-40
43963+60(#-1)
n/41-42
43965+60(#-1)
n/43-44
43967+60(#-1)
n/45-46
3969+60(#-1)
n/47-48
43971+60(#-1)
n/11-12
43973+60(#-1)
n+1/11-12
43975+60(#-1)
n+2/11-12
43977+60(#-1)
n/27-28
43979+60(#-1)
n/29-30
43981+60(#-1)
n+2/27-28
43983+60(#-1)
n+2/29-30
43985+60(#-1)
n+3/27-28
43987+60(#-1)
n+3/29-30
43989+60(#-1)
n+4/27-28
43991+60(#-1)
n+4/29-30
43993+60(#-1)
n+1/43-44
43995+60(#-1)
n+1/45-46
43997+60(#-1)
n+2/43-44
44009+60(#-1)
n+2/45-46
44001+60(#-1)
n/19-20
44003-44009+60(#-1)
L#VMNF
L#VMXF
L#XMNF
L#XMXF
L#YMNF
L#YMXF
L#Q1MNF
L#Q1MXF
L#Q2MNF
L#Q2MXF
L#DGF
Sequencer [ODS]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
L#S001TIM
L#S001AEP
L#S002TIM
L#S002AEP
L#S003TIM
L#S003AEP
L#S004TIM
L#S004AEP
L#S005TIM
L#S005AEP
L#S006TIM
L#S006AEP
L#S007TIM
L#S007AEP
L#S008TIM
L#S008AEP
L#S009TIM
L#S009AEP
L#S010TIM
L#S010AEP
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Step 1 Time Period (min)
Step 1 Analog End Point
Step 2 Time Period (min)
Step 2 Analog End Point
Step 3 Time Period (min)
Step 3 Analog End Point
Step 4 Time Period (min)
Step 4 Analog End Point
Step 5 Time Period (min)
Step 5 Analog End Point
Step 6 Time Period (min)
Step 6 Analog End Point
Step 7 Time Period (min)
Step 7 Analog End Point
Step 8 Time Period (min)
Step 8 Analog End Point
Step 9 Time Period (min)
Step 9 Analog End Point
Step 10 Time Period (min)
Step 10 Analog End Point
(spares)
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
43951+60(#-1)
1/150-151
43953+60(#-1)
1/152-153
43955+60(#-1)
2/150-151
43957+60(#-1)
2/152-153
43959+60(#-1)
3/150-151
43961+60(#-1)
3/152-153
43963+60(#-1)
4/150-151
43965+60(#-1)
4/152-153
43967+60(#-1)
5/150-151
43969+60(#-1)
5/152-153
43971+60(#-1)
6/150-151
43973+60(#-1)
6/152-153
43975+60(#-1)
7/150-151
43977+60(#-1)
7/152-153
43979+60(#-1)
8/150-151
43981+60(#-1)
8/152-153
43983+60(#-1)
9/150-151
43985+60(#-1)
9/152-153
43987+60(#-1)
10/150-151
43989+60(#-1)
10/152-153
44991-44009+60(#-1)
7-14
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Controller [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#Q1MNF
L#Q1MXF
L#Q2MNF
L#Q2MXF
L#Q3MNF
L#Q3MXF
L#Q4MNF
L#Q4MXF
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Quickset 1 MIN SCALE
Quickset 1 MAX SCALE
Quickset 2 MIN SCALE
Quickset 2 MAX SCALE
Quickset 3 MIN SCALE
Quickset 3 MAX SCALE
Quickset 4 MIN SCALE
Quickset 4 MAX SCALE
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
43951+60(#-1)
43953+60(#-1)
43955+60(#-1)
43957+60(#-1)
43959+60(#-1)
43961+60(#-1)
43963+60(#-1)
43965+60(#-1)
n+1/31-32
n+1/33-34
n+2/31-32
n+2/33-34
n+3/31-32
n+3/33-34
n+4/31-32
n+4/33-34
L#P1MNF
L#P1MXF
L#P2MNF
L#P2MXF
L#P3MNF
L#P3MXF
L#P4MNF
L#P4MXF
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Process 1 MIN SCALE
Process 1 MAX SCALE
Process 2 MIN SCALE
Process 2 MAX SCALE
Process 3 MIN SCALE
Process 3 MAX SCALE
Process 4 MIN SCALE
Process 4 MAX SCALE
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
43967+60(#-1)
43969+60(#-1)
43971+60(#-1)
43973+60(#-1)
43975+60(#-1)
43977+60(#-1)
43979+60(#-1)
43981+60(#-1)
n+4/13-14
n+5/13-14
n+4/15-16
n+5/15-16
n+4/17-18
n+5/17-18
n+4/19-20
n+5/19-20
($00000000)
43983-44009+60(#-1)
(spares)
Discrete Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
R/W Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
Pushbutton/Switch Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
n/a
May 2001
R/W Description
7-15
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.7 String Loop Data (8-bit ASCII Char - 2/Word)
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
L#TAG
L#PUR
L#PU
L#VU
L#XU
L#YU
L#TLU
L#Q1N
L#Q1U
L#Q2N
L#Q2U
L#LHM
L#RHM
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Loop Tag
Process Units - Reduced
Process Units
Valve Units
X Variable Units
Y Variable Units
Totalizer Units
Quickset Hold 1 Name
Quickset Hold 1 Units
Quickset Hold 2 Name
Quickset Hold 2 Units
Left Horizontal Bar Message
Right Horizontal Bar Message
(spares)
12 ASCII Char
4 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
5 ASCII Char
5 ASCII Char
($0000)
45451+100(#-1) n+3/2-7
45457+100(#-1) n+3/8-9
45459+100(#-1) n/31-33
45462+100(#-1) n+2/31-33
45465+100(#-1) n+3/31-33
45468+100(#-1) n+4/31-33
45471+100(#-1) n+3/19-21
45474+100(#-1) n+1/37-40
45478+100(#-1) n+3/37-39
45481+100(#-1) n+2/37-40
45485+100(#-1) n+3/40-42
45488+100(#-1) n+2/13-15
45491+100(#-1) n+2/16-18
45492-45550+100(#-1)
Description
Loop Tag (V2.2)
Primary Message (V1.3)
Secondary Message (V1.3)
Conditional Message a *(V1.3)
Conditional Message b * (V1.3)
Conditional Message c * (V1.3)
Conditional Message d * (V1.3)
Conditional Message e * (V1.3)
Conditional Message f * (V1.3)
Conditional Message g * (V1.3)
Conditional Message h * (V1.3)
Conditional Message i * (V1.3)
Recipe Message (V2.2)**
Range
12 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
12 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
16 ASCII Char
12 ASCII Char
Register (MB)
45451+100(#-1)
45457+100(#-1)
45461+100(#-1)
45467+100(#-1)
45475+100(#-1)
45483+100(#-1)
45491+100(#-1)
45499+100(#-1)
45507+100(#-1)
45515+100(#-1)
45523+100(#-1)
45531+100(#-1)
45539+100(#-1)
(spares)
($0000)
45545-45550+100(#-1)
Sequencer [ODS]
Code
L#TAG
L#PMSG
L#SMSG
L#CMSGa
L#CMSGb
L#CMSGc
L#CMSGd
L#CMSGe
L#CMSGf
L#CMSGg
L#CMSGh
L#CMSGi
L#RMSG
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
C/P (LIL)
n/37-42
n+1/37-41
n+2/37-42
n+3/37-44
n+4/37-44
n+5/37-44
n/49-56
n+1/49-56
n+2/49-56
n+3/49-56
n+4/49-56
n+5/49-56
n/25-30
* Conditional messages are stacked in the order of occurrence. The 9 most recent active conditional messages can
be viewed over LIL or Modbus.
** Version 1.3 included the Recipe Message at 45451. Version 2.2 moved the Recipe Message to a new location
and placed the Loop Tag in place of the Recipe Message.
7-16
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Analog Indicator [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#TAG
L#P1T
L#P1U
L#P2T
L#P2U
L#P3T
L#P3U
L#P4T
L#P4U
L#Q1N
L#Q1U
L#Q2N
L#Q2U
L#Q3N
L#Q3U
L#Q4N
L#Q4U
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Loop Tag
Process 1 Tag
Process 1 Units
Process 2 Tag
Process 2 Units
Process 3 Tag
Process 3 Units
Process 4 Tag
Process 4 Units
Quickset Hold 1 Name
Quickset Hold 1 Units
Quickset Hold 2 Name
Quickset Hold 2 Units
Quickset Hold 3 Name
Quickset Hold 3 Units
Quickset Hold 4 Name
Quickset Hold 4 Units
(spares)
12 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
8 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
($0000)
45451+100(#-1)
45457+100(#-1)
45460+100(#-1)
45463+100(#-1)
45466+100(#-1)
45469+100(#-1)
45472+100(#-1)
45475+100(#-1)
45478+100(#-1)
45481+100(#-1)
45485+100(#-1)
45488+100(#-1)
45492+100(#-1)
45495+100(#-1)
45499+100(#-1)
45502+100(#-1)
45506+100(#-1)
45509-45550+100(#-1)
n+4/2-7
n/4-6
n/7-9
n+1/4-6
n+1/7-9
n+2/4-6
n+2/7-9
n+3/4-6
n+3/7-9
n+1/25-28
n+1/22-24
n+2/25-28
n+2/22-24
n+3/25-28
n+3/22-24
n+4/25-28
n+4/22-24
Discrete Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#TAG
L#I0T
L#I1T
L#I2T
L#I3T
L#I4T
L#I5T
L#I6T
L#I7T
L#I8T
L#I9T
L#IAT
L#IBT
L#ICT
L#IDT
L#IET
L#IFT
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Loop Tag
Input 0 Tag
Input 1 Tag
Input 2 Tag
Input 3 Tag
Input 4Tag
Input 5 Tag
Input 6 Tag
Input 7 Tag
Input 8 Tag
Input 9 Tag
Input A Tag
Input B Tag
Input C Tag
Input D Tag
Input E Tag
Input F Tag
(spares)
12 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
($0000)
45451+100(#-1)
45457+100(#-1)
45460+100(#-1)
45463+100(#-1)
45466+100(#-1)
45469+100(#-1)
45472+100(#-1)
45475+100(#-1)
45478+100(#-1)
45481+100(#-1)
45484+100(#-1)
45487+100(#-1)
45490+100(#-1)
45493+100(#-1)
45496+100(#-1)
45499+100(#-1)
45502+100(#-1)
45505-45550+100(#-1)
n+3/2-7
n/2-4
n+1/2-4
n+2/2-4
n/5-7
n+1/5-7
n+2/5-7
n/8-10
n+1/8-10
n+2/8-10
n/11-13
n+1/11-13
n+2/11-13
n/14-16
n+1/14-16
n+2/14-16
n+3/14-16
Discrete Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#TAG
L#G1Tag
L#G1P1T
L#G1P2T
L#G1SAT
L#G1SMT
L#G1F1T
L#G1F0T
L#G2Tag
L#G2P1T
L#G2P2T
L#G2SAT
L#G2SMT
L#G2F1T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Loop Tag
Group 1 Tag
Group 1 PB1 Tag
Group 1 PB2 Tag
Group 1 Switch Position A Tag
Group 1 Switch Position M Tag
Group 1 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 1 Feedback 0 Tag
Group 2 Tag
Group 2 PB1 Tag
Group 2 PB2 Tag
Group 2 Switch Position A Tag
Group 2 Switch Position M Tag
Group 2 Feedback 1 Tag
12 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
45451+100(#-1)
45457+100(#-1)
45460+100(#-1)
45463+100(#-1)
45466+100(#-1)
45469+100(#-1)
45472+100(#-1)
45475+100(#-1)
45478+100(#-1)
45481+100(#-1)
45484+100(#-1)
45487+100(#-1)
45490+100(#-1)
45493+100(#-1)
n/2-7
n/13-15
n/16-18
n/19-21
n/22-24
n+1/22-24
n+1/13-15
n+1/16-18
n/25-27
n/28-30
n/31-33
n/34-36
n+1/34-36
n+1/25-27
May 2001
7-17
Data Mapping
L#G2F0T
L#G3Tag
L#G3P1T
L#G3P2T
L#G3SAT
L#G3SMT
L#G3F1T
L#G3F0T
L#G4Tag
L#G4P1T
L#G4P2T
L#G4SAT
L#G4SMT
L#G4F1T
L#G4F0T
L#G5Tag
L#G5P1T
L#G5P2T
L#G5SAT
L#G5SMT
L#G5F1T
L#G5F0T
UM354N-1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Group 2 Feedback 0 Tag
Group 3 Tag
Group 3 PB1 Tag
Group 3 PB2 Tag
Group 3 Switch Position A Tag
Group 3 Switch Position M Tag
Group 3 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 3 Feedback 0 Tag
Group 4 Tag
Group 4 PB1 Tag
Group 4 PB2 Tag
Group 4 Switch Position A Tag
Group 4 Switch Position M Tag
Group 4 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 4 Feedback 0 Tag
Group 5 Tag
Group 5 PB1 Tag
Group 5 PB2 Tag
Group 5 Switch Position A Tag
Group 5 Switch Position M Tag
Group 5 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 5 Feedback 0 Tag
Spares
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
45496+100(#-1)
45499+100(#-1)
45502+100(#-1)
45505+100(#-1)
45508+100(#-1)
45511+100(#-1)
45514+100(#-1)
45517+100(#-1)
45520+100(#-1)
45523+100(#-1)
45526+100(#-1)
45529+100(#-1)
45532+100(#-1)
45535+100(#-1)
45538+100(#-1)
40451+30(#-1)
40454+30(#-1)
40457+30(#-1)
40460+30(#-1)
40463+30(#-1)
40466+30(#-1)
40469+30(#-1)
40472-40480
n+1/28-30
n/37-39
n/40-42
n/43-45
n/46-48
n+1/46-48
n+1/37-39
n+1/40-42
n/49-51
n/52-54
n/55-57
n/58-60
n+1/58-60
n+1/49-51
n+1/52-54
n/61-63
n/64-66
n/67-69
n/70-72
n+1/70-72
n+1/61-63
n+1/64-66
Note: These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP
L#G6Tag
L#G6P1T
L#G6P2T
L#G6SAT
L#G6SMT
L#G6F1T
L#G6F0T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Group 6 Tag
Group 6 PB1 Tag
Group 6 PB2 Tag
Group 6 Switch Position A Tag
Group 6 Switch Position M Tag
Group 6 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 6 Feedback 0 Tag
spares
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
41201+30(#-1)
41204+30(#-1)
41207+30(#-1)
41210+30(#-1)
41213+30(#-1)
41216+30(#-1)
41219+30(#-1)
41222-41230
n/73-75
n/76-78
n/79-81
n/82-84
n+1/82-84
n+1/73-75
n+1/76-78
Note: These Modbus groupings normally used for Static Loop Integer Data with displays other than ODP
L#G7Tag
L#G7P1T
L#G7P2T
L#G7SAT
L#G7SMT
L#G7F1T
L#G7F0T
L#G8Tag
L#G8P1T
L#G8P2T
L#G8SAT
L#G8SMT
L#G8F1T
L#G8F0T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Group 7 Tag
Group 7 PB1 Tag
Group 7 PB2 Tag
Group 7 Switch Position A Tag
Group 7 Switch Position M Tag
Group 7 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 7 Feedback 0 Tag
Group 8 Tag
Group 8 PB1 Tag
Group 8 PB2 Tag
Group 8 Switch Position A Tag
Group 8 Switch Position M Tag
Group 8 Feedback 1 Tag
Group 8 Feedback 0 Tag
spares
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
6 ASCII Char
42451+60(#-1)
42454+60(#-1)
42457+60(#-1)
42460+60(#-1)
42463+60(#-1)
42466+60(#-1)
42469+60(#-1)
42472+60(#-1)
42475+60(#-1)
42478+60(#-1)
42481+60(#-1)
42484+60(#-1)
42487+60(#-1)
42490+60(#-1)
42493-42509
n/85-87
n/88-90
n/91-93
n/94-96
n+1/94-96
n+1/85-87
n+1/88-90
n/97-99
n/100-102
n/103-105
n/106-108
n+1/106-108
n+1/97-99
n+1/100-102
Note: These Modbus groupings normally used for Variable Loop Floating Point Data with displays other than ODP
7-18
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.8 Coil Loop Data (1-bit)
Controller [ODC]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Coil(MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#A
L#L
L#SS
L#E
L#CN
L#CM
L#RS
L#OR
L#EM
L#CH
L#HL
L#LL
L#OS
L#U1S
L#U2S
L#AT
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
1-Auto 0-Manual
1-Local
1-AM block in STANDBY
1-External Set
1-Console
1-Computer
1-Ramping Setpoint
1-Override
1-Emergency Manual
1-Configuration Hold
1-HI Setpoint Limit
1-LO Setpoint Limit
1-Alarms - Out of Service
1-U1 Status Active
1-U2 Status Active
1-Autotune
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1.0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00296+48(#-1)
00297+48(#-1)
00298+48(#-1)
00299+48(#-1)
00300+48(#-1)
00301+48(#-1)
00302+48(#-1)
00303+48(#-1)
00304+48(#-1)
00305+48(#-1)
00306+48(#-1)
00307+48(#-1)
00308+48(#-1)
00309+48(#-1)
00310+48(#-1)
00311+48(#-1)
n+3/1(0)
n+3/1(1)
n+3/1(2)
n+3/1(3)
n+3/1(4)
n+3/1(5)
n+3/1(6)
n+3/1(7)
n+3/1(8)
n+3/1(9)
n+3/1(10)
n+3/1(11)
n+3/1(12)
n+3/1(13)
n+3/1(14)
n+3/1(15)
L#A1
L#N1
L#E1
L#A2
L#N2
L#E2
L#A3
L#N3
L#E3
L#A4
L#N4
L#E4
L#OS2
L#CC
L#NA
L#AE
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
1-Alarm 1 is Active
1-Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 1 is Enabled
1-Alarm 2 is Active
1-Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 2 is Enabled
1-Alarm 3 is Active
1-Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 3 is Enabled
1-Alarm 4 is Active
1-Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 4 is Enabled
1-Alarms - Out of Service
1-Configuration has Changed
1-Unacknowledged Loop Event
1-Active Loop Event
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00312+48(#-1)
00313+48(#-1)
00314+48(#-1)
00315+48(#-1)
00316+48(#-1)
00317+48(#-1)
0318+48(#-1)
00319+48(#-1)
00320+48(#-1)
00321+48(#-1)
00322+48(#-1)
00323+48(#-1)
00324+48(#-1)
00325+48(#-1)
00326+48(#-1)
00327+48(#-1)
n+4/1(0)
n+4/1(1)
n+4/1(2)
n+4/1(3)
n+4/1(4)
n+4/1(5)
n+4/1(6)
n+4/1(7)
n+4/1(8)
n+4/1(9)
n+4/1(10)
n+4/1(11)
n+4/1(12)
n+4/1(13)
n+4/1(14)
n+4/1(15)
1-Not Ack’d STANDBY (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d Override (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d Emergency Man (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d HI Setpoint Limit (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d LO Setpoint Limit (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d U1 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d U2 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d W1 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d W2 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d W3 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d E1 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d E2 Status (V1.3)
1-Not Ack’d E3 Status (V1.3)
1-Transfer Autotune Parameters (V1.3)
PB1SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
PB2SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00328+48(#-1)
00329+48(#-1)
00330+48(#-1)
00331+48(#-1)
00332+48(#-1)
00333+48(#-1)
00334+48(#-1)
00335+48(#-1)
00336+48(#-1)
00337+48(#-1)
00338+48(#-1)
00339+48(#-1)
00340+48(#-1)
00341+48(#-1)
00342+48(#-1)
00343+48(#-1)
n+4/10(0)
n+4/10(1)
n+4/10(2)
n+4/10(3)
n+4/10(4)
n+4/10(5)
n+4/10(6)
n+4/10(7)
n+4/10(8)
n+4/10(9)
n+4/10(10)
n+4/10(11)
n+4/10(12)
n+4/10(13)
n+4/10(14)
n+4/10(15)
L#NSS R/W
L#NOR R/W
L#NEM R/W
L#NHL R/W
L#NLL R/W
L#NU1 R/W
L#NU2 R/W
L#NW1 R/W
L#NW2 R/W
L#NW3 R/W
L#NE1 R/W
L#NE2 R/W
L#NE3 R/W
L#XAT W
L#PB1C R/W
L#PB2C R/W
* These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD. A write of a “1” will have the same effect as pressing and releasing
the button on the faceplate. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If the action is
momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle.
May 2001
7-19
Data Mapping
Control Loop Status Word (L#CLS) - channel n+3/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
Auto/Manual (A)
1-Auto 0-Manual
1
Local Loop (L)
1-Local
2
Standby Sync (SS)
1-Standby
3
External/Internal (E)
1-External 0-Internal
4
Console (CN)
1-Console
5
Computer (CM)
1-Computer
6
Ramping Setpoint (RS)
1-Ramping Setpoint
7
Override (OR)
1-Override
8
Emergency Manual (EM)
1-Emergency Manual
9
Configuration Hold (CH)
1-Configuration Hold
10
HI Setpoint Limit (HL)
1-HI Setpoint Limit
11
LO Setpoint Limit (LL)
1-LO Setpoint Limit
12
Alarms are Out of Service (OS)
1-Out of Service
13
U1 Status Active (U1S)
1- U1 Active
14
U2 Status Active (U2S)
1- U2 Active
15
Autotune is active (AT)
1-Autotune
Control Loop Alarm Status Word (L#ASW) - channel n+4/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
Alarm 1 is Active (A1)
1-Active
1
Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged (N1) 1-Not Acknowledged
2
Alarm 1 is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
3
Alarm 2 is Active (A2)
1-Active
4
Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged (N2) 1-Not Acknowledged
5
Alarm 2 is Enabled (E2)
1-Enabled
6
Alarm 3 is Active (A3)
1-Active
7
Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged (N3) 1-Not Acknowledged
8
Alarm 3 is Enabled (E3)
1-Enabled
9
Alarm 4 is Active (A4)
1-Active
10
Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged (N4) 1-Not Acknowledged
11
Alarm 4 is Enabled (E4)
1-Enabled
12
Alarms are Out of Service (OS)
1-Out of Service
13
Configuration has Changed (CC)
1-Loop Configured
14
Unacknowledged Loop Event (NA) 1-Unacknowledged Event
15
Active Loop Event (AE)
1- Active Loop Event
7-20
UM354N-1
Block
A/M
ODC
A/M
E/I
ODC
ODC
SETPT
ORSL
A/M
SPLIM
SPLIM
ALARM
ODC
ODC
Block
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
Output
L
ES
CN
CM
RS
OS
HS
LS
Output
May 2001
UM354N-1
Extended Control Loop Status Word (L#ECLS) - channel n+4/parameter 10
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
Not Ack’d STANDBY
1-Not Acknowledged
A/M
1
Not Ack’d Override
1-Not Acknowledged
A/M
2
Not Ack’d Emergency Manual
1-Not Acknowledged
A/M
3
Not Ack’d HI Setpoint Limit
1-Not Acknowledged
SPLIM
4
Not Ack’d LO Setpoint Limit
1-Not Acknowledged
SPLIM
5
Not Ack’d User 1 Status
1-Not Acknowledged
ODC
6
Not Ack’d User 2 Status
1-Not Acknowledged
ODC
7
Not Ack’d Autotune W1 Warning 1-Not Acknowledged
PID
8
Not Ack’d Autotune W2 Warning 1-Not Acknowledged
PID
9
Not Ack’d Autotune W3 Warning 1-Not Acknowledged
PID
10
Not Ack’d Autotune E1 Warning
1-Not Acknowledged
PID
11
Not Ack’d Autotune E2 Warning
1-Not Acknowledged
PID
12
Not Ack’d Autotune E3 Warning
1-Not Acknowledged
PID
13
Transfer Autotune Parameters
1-Transfer
PID
14
PB1SW Input MD (*)
1-High, 0-Low
PB1SW
15
PB2SW Input MD (*)
1-High, 0-Low
PB2SW
Data Mapping
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
Output
* These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD. A write of a “1” will have the same effect as pressing and
releasing the button on the faceplate. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If
the action is momentary, the switch will close for one scan cycle.
May 2001
7-21
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Sequencer Loop [ODS]
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Coil (MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#HS
L#L
L#RSQ
L#TC
L#CN
L#CM
L#SSF
L#SSB
R
R/W
W
R
R/W
R/W
W
W
L#CH
L#SSC
R
R
L#PB1
L#PB2
L#PB3
R
R
R
1-Hold Sequencer
1-Loop Local
1-Reset Sequencer
1-Track
1-Console
1-Computer
1-Step Forward (normal 0)
1-Step Backward (normal 0)
(spare)
1-Configuration Hold
1-Steps Completed
(spare)
(spare)
PB1SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
PB2SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
PB3SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
0
0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00296+48(#-1)
00297+48(#-1)
00298+48(#-1)
00299+48(#-1)
00300+48(#-1)
00301+48(#-1)
00302+48(#-1)
00303+48(#-1)
00304+48(#-1)
00305+48(#-1)
00306+48(#-1)
00307+48(#-1)
00308+48(#-1)
00309+48(#-1)
00310+48(#-1)
00311+48(#-1)
n+4/1(0)
n+4/1(1)
n+4/1(2)
n+4/1(3)
n+4/1(4)
n+4/1(5)
n+4/1(6)
n+4/1(7)
n+4/1(8)
n+4/1(9)
n+4/1(10)
n+4/1(11)
n+4/1(12)
n+4/1(13)
n+4/1(14)
n+4/1(15)
L#A1
L#N1
L#E1
L#A2
L#N2
L#E2
L#A3
L#N3
L#E3
L#A4
L#N4
L#E4
L#OS2
L#CC
L#NA
L#AE
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
1-Alarm 1 is Active
1-Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 1 is Enabled
1-Alarm 2 is Active
1-Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 2 is Enabled
1-Alarm 3 is Active
1-Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 3 is Enabled
1-Alarm 4 is Active
1-Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged
1-Alarm 4 is Enabled
1-Alarms - Out of Service
1-Configuration has Changed
1-Unacknowledged Loop Event
1-Active Loop Event
(spare)
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
0
00312+48(#-1)
00313+48(#-1)
00314+48(#-1)
00315+48(#-1)
00316+48(#-1)
00317+48(#-1)
00318+48(#-1)
00319+48(#-1)
00320+48(#-1)
00321+48(#-1)
00322+48(#-1)
00323+48(#-1)
00324+48(#-1)
00325+48(#-1)
00326+48(#-1)
00327+48(#-1)
00328+48(#-1)
n+5/1(0)
n+5/1(1)
n+5/1(2)
n+5/1(3)
n+5/1(4)
n+5/1(5)
n+5/1(6)
n+5/1(7)
n+5/1(8)
n+5/1(9)
n+5/1(10)
n+5/1(11)
n+5/1(12)
n+5/1(13)
n+5/1(14)
n+5/1(15)
* These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD. A write of a “1” will have the same effect as pressing and
releasing the button on the faceplate. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If
the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle.
7-22
May 2001
UM354N-1
Sequencer Loop Status Word (L#SLS) - channel n+4/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
Hold Sequencer (HS)
1-Hold
1
Local (L)
1-Local
2
Reset Sequencer (RSQ)
1-Reset
3
Track Command (TC)
1-Track
4
Console (CN)
1-Console
5
Computer CM)
1-Computer
6
Step Forward (SSF)
1-Step
7
Step Backward (SSB)
1-Step
8
9
Configuration Hold (CH)
1-Configuration Hold
10
Steps Completed (SSC)
1- Steps Complete
11
12
13
PB1SW Input MD (PB1)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
14
PB2SW Input MD (PB2)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
15
PB3SW Input MD (PB3)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
Data Mapping
Block
PRSEQ
ODS
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
ODS
ODS
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
Read/Write
R
R/W
W
R
R/W
R/W
W
W
PRSEQ
R
R
PB1SW
PB2SW
PB2SW
R/W
R/W
R/W
Sequencer Loop Alarm Status Word (L#ASW) - channel n+5/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
Alarm 1 is Active (A1)
1-Active
1
Alarm 1 is Not Acknowledged (N1) 1-Not Acknowledged
2
Alarm 1 is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
3
Alarm 2 is Active (A2)
1-Active
4
Alarm 2 is Not Acknowledged (N2) 1-Not Acknowledged
5
Alarm 2 is Enabled (E2)
1-Enabled
6
Alarm 3 is Active (A3)
1-Active
7
Alarm 3 is Not Acknowledged (N3) 1-Not Acknowledged
8
Alarm 3 is Enabled (E3)
1-Enabled
9
Alarm 4 is Active (A4)
1-Active
10
Alarm 4 is Not Acknowledged (N4) 1-Not Acknowledged
11
Alarm 4 is Enabled (E4)
1-Enabled
12
Alarms are Out of Service (OS)
1-Out of Service
13
Configuration has Changed (CC)
1-Loop Configured
14
Unacknowledged Loop Event (NA) 1-Unacknowledged Event
15
Active Loop Event (AE)
1- Active Loop Event
May 2001
Block
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
Output
L
CN
CM
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
Output
7-23
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Analog Indicator [ODA] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Coil(MB)
C/P (LIL)
L#P1AA
L#P1AN
L#P1AE
L#P1BA
L#P1BN
L#P1BE
L#P2AA
L#P2AN
L#P2AE
L#P2BA
L#P2BN
L#P2BE
L#OS1
L#PB1
L#PB2
L#PB3
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1-Process 1 Alarm A is Active
1-Process 1 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 1 Alarm A is Enabled
1-Process 1 Alarm B is Active
1-Process 1 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 1 Alarm B is Enabled
1-Process 2 Alarm A is Active
1-Process 2 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 2 Alarm A is Enabled
1-Process 2 Alarm B is Active
1-Process 2 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 2 Alarm B is Enabled
1-Alarms - Out of Service
PB1SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
PB2SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
PB3SW Input MD (*) (V1.3)
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00296+48(#-1)
00297+48(#-1)
00298+48(#-1)
00299+48(#-1)
00300+48(#-1)
00301+48(#-1)
00302+48(#-1)
00303+48(#-1)
00304+48(#-1)
00305+48(#-1)
00306+48(#-1)
00307+48(#-1)
00308+48(#-1)
00309+48(#-1)
00310+48(#-1)
00311+48(#-1)
n+4/1(0)
n+4/1(1)
n+41(2)
n+4/1(3)
n+4/1(4)
n+4/1(5)
n+4/1(6)
n+4/1(7)
n+4/1(8)
n+4/1(9)
n+4/1(10)
n+4/1(11)
n+4/1(12)
n+4/1(13)
n+4/(14)
n+4/1(15)
L#P3AA
L#P3AN
L#P3AE
L#P3BA
L#P3BN
L#P3BE
L#P4AA
L#P4AN
L#P4AE
L#P4BA
L#P4BN
L#P4BE
L#OS
L#CC
L#NA
L#AE
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
1-Process 3 Alarm A is Active
1-Process 3 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 3 Alarm A is Enabled
1-Process 3 Alarm B is Active
1-Process 3 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 3 Alarm B is Enabled
1-Process 4 Alarm A is Active
1-Process 4 Alarm A is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 4 Alarm A is Enabled
1-Process 4 Alarm B is Active
1-Process 4 Alarm B is Not Acknowledged
1-Process 4 Alarm B is Enabled
1-Alarms - Out of Service
1-Configuration has Changed
1-Unacknowledged Loop Event
1-Active Loop Event
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00312+48(#-1)
00313+48(#-1)
00314+48(#-1)
00315+48(#-1)
00316+48(#-1)
00317+48(#-1)
00318+48(#-1)
00319+48(#-1)
00320+48(#-1)
00321+48(#-1)
00322+48(#-1)
00323+48(#-1)
00324+48(#-1)
00325+48(#-1)
00326+48(#-1)
00327+48(#-1)
n+5/1(0)
n+5/1(1)
n+5/1(2)
n+5/1(3)
n+5/1(4)
n+5/1(5)
n+1/1(6)
n+5/1(7)
n+5/1(8)
n+5/1(9)
n+5/1(10)
n+5/1(11)
n+5/1(12)
n+5/1(13)
n+5/1(14)
n+5/1(15)
* These bits indicate the status of the switch input MD. A write of a “1” will have the same effect as pressing and
releasing the button on the faceplate. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If
the action is momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle.
7-24
May 2001
UM354N-1
Analog Indicator Loop Status Word (L#W1) - channel n+4/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
P1 Alarm A is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
1
P1 Alarm A is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
2
P1 Alarm A is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
3
P1 Alarm B is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
4
P1 Alarm B is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
5
P1 Alarm B is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
6
P2 Alarm A is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
7
P2 Alarm A is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
8
P2 Alarm A is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
9
P2 Alarm B is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
10
P2 Alarm B is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
11
P2 Alarm B is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
12
Alarms are Out of Service (OS) 1-Out of Service
ALARM
13
PB1SW Input MD (PB1)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) PB1SW
14
PB2SW Input MD (PB2)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) PB2SW
15
PB3SW Input MD (PB3)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) PB2SW
Analog Indicator Loop Alarm Status Word (L#SW2) - channel n+5/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
P3 Alarm A is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
1
P3 Alarm A is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
2
P3 Alarm A is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
3
P3 Alarm B is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
4
P3 Alarm B is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
5
P3 Alarm B is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
6
P4 Alarm A is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
7
P4 Alarm A is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
8
P4 Alarm A is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
9
P4 Alarm B is Active (A1)
1-Active
ALARM
10
P4 Alarm B is Not Ack'd (N1)
1-Not Acknowledged
ALARM
11
P4 Alarm B is Enabled (E1)
1-Enabled
ALARM
12
Alarms are Out of Service (OS)
1-Out of Service
ALARM
13
Configuration has Changed (CC)
1-Loop Configured
14
Unacknowledged Loop Event (NA) 1-Unacknowledged Event
15
Active Loop Event (AE)
1- Active Loop Event
May 2001
Data Mapping
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Read/Write
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
Output
Output
7-25
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Digital Indicator [ODD] - (V2.2)
Code
L#D0I
L#D1I
L#D2I
L#D3I
L#D4I
L#D5I
L#D6I
L#D7I
L#D8I
L#D9I
L#DAI
L#DBI
L#DCI
L#DDI
L#DEI
L#DFI
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Description
Discrete 0 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 1 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 2 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 3 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 4 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 5 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 6 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 7 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 8 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 9 Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete A Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete B Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete C Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete D Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete E Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete F Input 1-ON 0-OFF
Range
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
Coil(MB)
00296+48(#-1)
00297+48(#-1)
00298+48(#-1)
00299+48(#-1)
00300+48(#-1)
00301+48(#-1)
00302+48(#-1)
00303+48(#-1)
00304+48(#-1)
00305+48(#-1)
00306+48(#-1)
00307+48(#-1)
00308+48(#-1)
00309+48(#-1)
00310+48(#-1)
00311+48(#-1)
C/P (LIL)
n/1(0)
n/1(1)
n/1(2)
n/1(3)
n/1(4)
n/1(5)
n/1(6)
n/1(7)
n/1(8)
n/1(9)
n/1(10)
n/1(11)
n/1(12)
n/1(13)
n/1(14)
n/1(15)
L#D0S
L#D1S
L#D2S
L#D3S
L#D4S
L#D5S
L#D6S
L#D7S
L#D8S
L#D9S
L#DAS
L#DBS
L#DCS
L#DDS
L#DES
L#DFS
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Discrete 0 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 1 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 2 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 3 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 4 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 5 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 6 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 7 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 8 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete 9 Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete A Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete B Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete C Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete D Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete E Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
Discrete F Status 1-Auto 0-Manual (*)
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00312+48(#-1)
00313+48(#-1)
00314+48(#-1)
00315+48(#-1)
00316+48(#-1)
00317+48(#-1)
00318+48(#-1)
00319+48(#-1)
00320+48(#-1)
00321+48(#-1)
00322+48(#-1)
00323+48(#-1)
00324+48(#-1)
00325+48(#-1)
00326+48(#-1)
00327+48(#-1)
n+1/1(0)
n+1/1(1)
n+1/1(2)
n+1/1(3)
n+1/1(4)
n+1/1(5)
n+1/1(6)
n+1/1(7)
n+1/1(8)
n+1/1(9)
n+1/1(10)
n+1/1(11)
n+1/1(12)
n+1/1(13)
n+1/1(14)
n+1/1(15)
L#D0O
L#D1O
L#D2O
L#D3O
L#D4O
L#D5O
L#D6O
L#D7O
L#D8O
L#D9O
L#DAO
L#DBO
L#DCO
L#DDO
L#DEO
L#DFO
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Discrete 0 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 1 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 2 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 3 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 4 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 5 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 6 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 7 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 8 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete 9 Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete A Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete B Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete C Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete D Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete E Output 1-ON 0-OFF
Discrete F Output 1-ON 0-OFF
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
00328+48(#-1)
00329+48(#-1)
00330+48(#-1)
00331+48(#-1)
00332+48(#-1)
00333+48(#-1)
00334+48(#-1)
00335+48(#-1)
00336+48(#-1)
00337+48(#-1)
00338+48(#-1)
00339+48(#-1)
00340+48(#-1)
00341+48(#-1)
00342+48(#-1)
00343+48(#-1)
n+2/1(0)
n+2/1(1)
n+2/1(2)
n+2/1(3)
n+2/1(4)
n+2/1(5)
n+2/1(6)
n+2/1(7)
n+2/1(8)
n+2/1(9)
n+2/1(10)
n+2/1(11)
n+2/1(12)
n+2/1(13)
n+2/1(14)
n+2/1(15)
L#PB1
L#PB2
R/W
R/W
PB1SW Input MD (**)
PB2SW Input MD (**)
(spares)
1/0
1/0
08701+16(#-1)
n+3/1(0)
08702+16(#-1)
n+3/1(1)
08703-08716+16(#-1)
(*) L#DnS - writing a "1" toggles the switch, Reading "1" indicates Auto Status; reading "0" indicate Man status.
(**) L#PB1 & L#PB2 - writing a "1" to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button on the
faceplate of the controller. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If the action is
momentary, the switch will close for one scan cycle. Reading the bits indicates the status of the switch MD input.
7-26
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#DISW) - channel n/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
Discrete 0 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
1
Discrete 1 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
2
Discrete 2 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
3
Discrete 3 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
4
Discrete 4 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
5
Discrete 5 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
6
Discrete 6 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
7
Discrete 7 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
8
Discrete 8 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
9
Discrete 9 Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
10
Discrete A Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
11
Discrete B Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
12
Discrete C Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
13
Discrete D Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
14
Discrete E Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
15
Discrete F Input Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Output
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#DSSW) - channel n+1/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
Discrete 0 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
1
Discrete 1 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
2
Discrete 2 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
3
Discrete 3 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
4
Discrete 4 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
5
Discrete 5 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
6
Discrete 6 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
7
Discrete 7 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
8
Discrete 8 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
9
Discrete 9 Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
10
Discrete A Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
11
Discrete B Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
12
Discrete C Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
13
Discrete D Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
14
Discrete E Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
15
Discrete F Status (*)
1 - AUTO 0 - MANUAL
ODD
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output
•
A mask on command will toggle the position of the Auto/Man switch
May 2001
7-27
Data Mapping
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#DOSW) - channel n+2/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
Discrete 0 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
1
Discrete 1 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
2
Discrete 2 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
3
Discrete 3 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
4
Discrete 4 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
5
Discrete 5 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
6
Discrete 6 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
7
Discrete 7 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
8
Discrete 8 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
9
Discrete 9 Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
10
Discrete A Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
11
Discrete B Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
12
Discrete C Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
13
Discrete D Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
14
Discrete E Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
15
Discrete F Output Value
1 - ON 0 - OFF
ODD
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#SW) - channel n+3/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
PB1SW Input MD (PB1)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) PB1SW
1
PB2SW Input MD (PB2)
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) PB2SW
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7-28
UM354N-1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
Output
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Pushbutton/Switch Indicator [ODP] - (V2.2)
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Coil(MB) C/P (LIL)
L#G1P1
L#G1P2
L#G1S3
L#G1FS
L#G2P1
L#G2P2
L#G2S3
L#G2FS
L#G3P1
L#G3P2
L#G3S3
L#G3FS
L#G4P1
L#G4P2
L#G4S3
L#G4FS
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
Group 1 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 1 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 1 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 1 Feedback Status
Group 2 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 2 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 2 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 2 - Feedback Status
Group 3 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 3 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 3 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 3 - Feedback Status
Group 4 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 4 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 4 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 4 - Feedback Status
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
00296+48(#-1)
00297+48(#-1)
00298+48(#-1)
00299+48(#-1)
00300+48(#-1)
00301+48(#-1)
00302+48(#-1)
00303+48(#-1)
00304+48(#-1)
00305+48(#-1)
00306+48(#-1)
00307+48(#-1)
00308+48(#-1)
00309+48(#-1)
00310+48(#-1)
00311+48(#-1)
n/1(0)
n/1(1)
n/1(2)
n/1(3)
n/1(4)
n/1(5)
n/1(6)
n/1(7)
n/1(8)
n/1(9)
n/1(10)
n/1(11)
n/1(12)
n/1(13)
n/1(14)
n/1(15)
L#G5P1
L#G5P2
L#G5S3
L#G5FS
L#G6P1
L#G6P2
L#G6S3
L#G6FS
L#G7P1
L#G7P2
L#G7S3
L#G7FS
L#G8P1
L#G8P2
L#G8S3
L#G8FS
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
Group 5 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 5 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 5 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 5 - Feedback Status
Group 6 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 6 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 6 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 6 - Feedback Status
Group 7 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 7 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 7 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 7 - Feedback Status
Group 8 - Press PB1 (**)
Group 8 - Press PB2 (**)
Group 8 - Auto/Man Switch (*)
Group 8 - Feedback Status
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
1
1
1/0
1/0
00312+48(#-1)
00313+48(#-1)
00314+48(#-1)
00315+48(#-1)
00316+48(#-1)
00317+48(#-1)
00318+48(#-1)
00319+48(#-1)
00320+48(#-1)
00321+48(#-1)
00322+48(#-1)
00323+48(#-1)
00324+48(#-1)
00325+48(#-1)
00326+48(#-1)
00327+48(#-1)
n+1/1(0)
n+1/1(1)
n+1/1(2)
n+1/1(3)
n+1/1(4)
n+1/1(5)
n+1/1(6)
n+1/1(7)
n+1/1(8)
n+1/1(9)
n+1/1(10)
n+11(11)
n+1/1(12)
n+1/1(13)
n+1/1(14)
n+1/1(15)
* L#GnS3 - reading a "1" indicates a switch position of Auto and reading a "0" indicates Man. Writing a "1" to
the controller will toggle the state of the Auto/Man switch.
** L#GnP1 & L#GnP2 - writing a "1" to the controller will have the same affect as pushing the button on the
faceplate of the controller. If the action of the switch is sustained the switch will change position. If the action is
momentary the switch will close for one scan cycle.
May 2001
7-29
Data Mapping
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#SW1) - channel n/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
Group 1 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
1
Group 1 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
2
Group 1 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
3
Group 1 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
4
Group 2 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
5
Group 2 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
6
Group 2 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
7
Group 2 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
8
Group 3 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
9
Group 3 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
10
Group 3 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
11
Group 3 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
12
Group 4 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
13
Group 4 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB)
14
Group 4 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
15
Group 4 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
UM354N-1
Block
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
ODP
Read/Write
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
Output
Digital Indicator Loop Status Word (L#SW2) - channel n+1/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
Group 5 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
1
Group 5 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
2
Group 5 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
ODP
3
Group 5 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
ODP
4
Group 6 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
5
Group 6 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
6
Group 6 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
ODP
7
Group 6 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
ODP
8
Group 7 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
9
Group 7 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
10
Group 7 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
ODP
11
Group 7 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
ODP
12
Group 8 - Press PB1
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
13
Group 8 - Press PB2
1/0 (write of 1 presses PB) ODP
14
Group 8 - Auto/Man Switch
1 - Auto 0- Manual (*)
ODP
15
Group 8 - Feedback Status
1 - True 0- False
ODP
Read/Write
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
W
W
R/W
R
Output
* A mask on command will toggle the position of the Auto/Man switch
7-30
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.9 PCOM Block Status
Included in MPU Controller board firmware version 1.30 and higher.
Controller/Sequencer
Code
L#INIT_OK
L#DFAIL
L#RESET
L#START
L#RESTART
L#HOLD
L#PCOMP
L#ABORT
L#READY
L#RUN
L#HELD
L#DONE
L#ABORTED
spare
spare
spare
Code
L#EMERG (EO)
L#NotAck’dEO
L#INTRLK (IK)
L#NotAck’d IK
L#FAILED (FD)
L#NotAck’dFD
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
L#NotAck’dPCOM
L#ACTIVEPCOM
R/W
R/W
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Description
1-INIT_OK
1-DFAIL
1-RESET
1-START
1-RESTART
1-HOLD
1-PCOMP
1-ABORT
1-READY
1-RUN
1-HELD
1-DONE
1-ABORTED
Range
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
Coil(MB)
09101+32(#-1)
09102+32(#-1)
09103+32(#-1)
09104+32(#-1)
09105+32(#-1)
09106+32(#-1)
09107+32(#-1)
09108+32(#-1)
09109+32(#-1)
09110+32(#-1)
09111+32(#-1)
09112+32(#-1)
09113+32(#-1)
09114+32(#-1)
09115+32(#-1)
09116+32(#-1)
C/P (LIL)
z/1(0)
z/1(1)
z/1(2)
z/1(3)
z/1(4)
z/1(5)
z/1(6)
z/1(7)
z/1(8)
z/1(9)
z/1(10)
z/1(11)
z/1(12)
z/1(13)
z/1(14)
z/1(15)
R/W
Description
Range
R
1-Emerg. Override
1/0
R/W
1-EO Not Ack’d
1/0
R
1-INTRLK
1/0
R/W
1- IK Not Ack’d
1/0
R
1-FAILED
1/0
R/W
1- FD Not Ack’d
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R
1/0
R/W
1-PCOM Event Not Ack’d
z+1/1(14)
R
1-PCOM Event is Active 1/0
Coil(MB)
09117+32(#-1)
09118+32(#-1)
09119+32(#-1)
09120+32(#-1)
09121+32(#-1)
09122+32(#-1)
09123+32(#-1)
09124+32(#-1)
09125+32(#-1)
09126+32(#-1)
09127+32(#-1)
09128+32(#-1)
09129+32(#-1)
09130+32(#-1)
1/0
C/P (LIL)
z+1/1(0)
z+1/1(1)
z+1/1(2)
z+1/1(3)
z+1/1(4)
z+1/1(5)
z+1/1(6)
z+1/1(7)
z+1/1(8)
z+1/1(9)
z+1/1(10)
z+1/1(11)
z+1/1(12)
z+1/1(13)
09131+32(#-1)
09132+32(#-1)
z+1/1(15)
z - LIL CHAN configured in the PCOM function block configuration.
May 2001
7-31
Data Mapping
PCOM Function Block Status Word (L#PSW1) - channel z/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
0
INIT_OK
1-INIT_OK
1
DFAIL
1-DFAIL
2
RESET
1-RESET
3
START
1-START
4
RESTART
1-RESTART
5
HOLD
1-HOLD
6
PCOMP
1-PCOMP
7
ABORT
1-ABORT
8
READY
1-READY
9
RUN
1-RUN
10
HELD
1-HELD
11
DONE
1-DONE
12
ABORTED
1-ABORTED
13
spare
14
spare
15
spare
UM354N-1
Block
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM
PCOM Function Block Status Word (L#PSW2) - channel z+1/parameter 1
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
EMERG (EO)
1-EO is Active
PCOM
1
EO Not Acknowledged
1-EO is not acknowledged PCOM
2
INTRLK (IK)
1-IK is Active
PCOM
3
IK Not Acknowledged
1-IK is not acknowledged
PCOM
4
FAILED (FD)
1-FD is Active
PCOM
5
FD Not Acknowledged
1-FD is not acknowledged
PCOM
6
spare
PCOM
7
spare
PCOM
8
spare
PCOM
9
spare
PCOM
10
spare
PCOM
11
spare
PCOM
12
spare
PCOM
13
spare
PCOM
14
PCOM Not Acknowledged
1-PCOM is not ack’d
PCOM
15
ACTIVE PCOM Event
1- PCOM event is active
PCOM
(EO,IK,FD)
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
R
R
R
R
Output
Read/Write
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
Output
z - LIL CHAN configured in the PCOM function block configuration.
7-32
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.10 Sequencer Loop I/O Coil Data (1-bit)
Sequencer:
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Coil (MB)
C/P (LIL)
SG0KI0
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) masK for Input 0
1/0
01496
n/13(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SG0KIF
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) masK for Input F
1/0
01511
n/13(15)
SG0SI0
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) State of Input 0
1/0
01512
n/14(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SG0SIF
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) State of Input F
1/0
01527
n/14(15)
SG0SO0
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) State of Output 0
1/0
01528
n/15(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SG0SOF
R
Seq. Group 0 (cur. step) State of Output F
1/0
01543
n/15(15)
................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................
SGFKI0
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) masK for Input 0
1/0
02216
n+3/22(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SGFKIF
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) masK for Input F
1/0
02231
n+3/22(15)
SGFSI0
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) State of Input 0
1/0
02232
n+3/23(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SGFSIF
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) State of Input F
1/0
02247
n+3/23(15)
SGFSO0
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) State of Output 0
1/0
02248
n+3/24(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
SGFSOF
R
Seq. Group F (cur. step) State of Output F
1/0
02263
n+3/24(15)
Sequencer Group n (current step) Mask Word for Inputs (SGnKI)
BIT
Description
Value
0
Group n, Input 0, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
1
Group n, Input 1, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
2
Group n, Input 2, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
3
Group n, Input 3, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
4
Group n, Input 4, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
5
Group n, Input 5, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
6
Group n, Input 6, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
7
Group n, Input 7, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
8
Group n, Input 8, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
9
Group n, Input 9, Mask Config.
1-high 0-don’t care
10
Group n, Input A, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
11
Group n, Input B, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
12
Group n, Input C, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
13
Group n, Input D, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
14
Group n, Input E, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
15
Group n, Input F, Mask Config. 1-high 0-don’t care
May 2001
Block
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Input
n0
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
n6
n7
n8
n9
nA
nB
nC
nD
nE
nF
7-33
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Sequencer Group n (current step) State Word of Inputs (SGnSI)
BIT
Description
Value
0
Group n, Input 0, State
1-high 0-low
1
Group n, Input 1, State
1-high 0-low
2
Group n, Input 2, State
1-high 0-low
3
Group n, Input 3, State
1-high 0-low
4
Group n, Input 4, State
1-high 0-low
5
Group n, Input 5, State
1-high 0-low
6
Group n, Input 6, State
1-high 0-low
7
Group n, Input 7, State
1-high 0-low
8
Group n, Input 8, State
1-high 0-low
9
Group n, Input 9, State
1-high 0-low
10
Group n, Input A, State
1-high 0-low
11
Group n, Input B, State
1-high 0-low
12
Group n, Input C, State
1-high 0-low
13
Group n, Input D, State
1-high 0-low
14
Group n, Input E, State
1-high 0-low
15
Group n, Input F, State
1-high 0-low
Block
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
Read/Write
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
Input
n0
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
n6
n7
n8
n9
nA
nB
nC
nD
nE
nF
Sequencer Group n (current step) StateWord of Outputs (SGnSO)
BIT
Description
Value
0
Group n, Output 0, State
1-high 0-low
1
Group n, Output 1, State
1-high 0-low
2
Group n, Output 2, State
1-high 0-low
3
Group n, Output 3, State
1-high 0-low
4
Group n, Output 4, State
1-high 0-low
5
Group n, Output 5, State
1-high 0-low
6
Group n, Output 6, State
1-high 0-low
7
Group n, Output 7, State
1-high 0-low
8
Group n, Output 8, State
1-high 0-low
9
Group n, Output 9, State
1-high 0-low
10
Group n, Output A, State
1-high 0-low
11
Group n, Output B, State
1-high 0-low
12
Group n, Output C, State
1-high 0-low
13
Group n, Output D, State
1-high 0-low
14
Group n, Output E, State
1-high 0-low
15
Group n, Output F, State
1-high 0-low
Block
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
PRSEQ
Read/Write
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
Output
n0
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
n6
n7
n8
n9
nA
nB
nC
nD
nE
nF
(1) Writes are made using a parameter data send command (CMD 9) to the entire word
7-34
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.11 LonWorks Remote I/O (Models 352P, 353, 354N)
DID1N-0
R
DID01 - Normal state of LON Input 0
1/0
02401
1/202(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID1N-F
R
DID01 - Normal state of LON Input F
1/0
02416
1/202(15)
DID1M-0
R/W
DID01 - Mode of FB Output 0
1/0
02417
1/203(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID1M-F
R/W
DID01 - Mode of FB Output F
1/0
02432
1/203(15)
DID1F-0
R/W
DID01 - Forced state 0
1/0
02433
1/204(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID01F-F
R/W
DID01 - Forced state F
1/0
02448
1/204(15)
DOD01N0
R
DOD01 - Normal state of FB Input 0
1/0
02449
1/205(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD1NF
R
DOD01 - Normal state of FB Input F
1/0
02464
1/205(15)
DOD1M0
R/W
DOD01 - Mode of LON Output 0
1/0
02465
1/206(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD1MF
R/W
DOD01 - Mode of LON Output F
1/0
02480
1/206(15)
DOD1F0
R/W
DOD01 - Forced state 0
1/0
02481
1/207(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD1FF
R/W
DOD01 - Forced state F
1/0
02496
1/207(15)
..............................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID6N0
R
DID06 - Normal state of LON Input 0
1/0
02881
6/202 (0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID6NF
R
DID06 - Normal state of LON Input F
1/0
02896
6/202(15)
DID6M0
R/W
DID06 - Mode of FB Output 0
1/0
02897
6/203 (0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID6MF
R/W
DID06 - Mode of FB Output F
1/0
02912
6/203(15)
DID6FO0
R/W
DID06 - Forced state 0
1/0
02913
6/204(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DID6FF
R/W
DID06 - Forced state F
1/0
02928
6/204(15)
DOD6N0
R
DOD06 - Normal state of FB Input 0
1/0
02929
6/205(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD6NF
R
DOD06 - Normal state of FB Input F
1/0
02944
65/205(15)
DOD6M0
R/W
DOD06 - Mode of LON Output 0
1/0
02945
6/206(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD6MF
R/W
DOD06 - Mode of LON Output F
1/0
02960
6/206(15)
DOD6F0
R/W
DOD06 - Forced state 0
1/0
02961
6/207(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOD6FF
R/W
DOD06 - Forced state F
1/0
02976
6/207(15)
May 2001
7-35
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
The following DIS and DOS function blocks are included in MPU Controller board firmware versions 1.30 and
higher.
DIS1N0
R
DIS01 - Normal state of LON Input 0
1/0
03401
1/208(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS1NF
R
DIS01 - Normal state of LON Input F
1/0
03416
1/208(15)
DIS1M0
R/W
DIS01 - Mode of FB Output 0
1/0
03417
1/209(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS1MF
R/W
DIS01 - Mode of FB Output F
1/0
03432
1/209(15)
DIS1F0
R/W
DIS01 - Forced state 0
1/0
03433
1/210(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS1FF
R/W
DIS01 - Forced state F
1/0
03448
1/210(15)
DOS1N0
R
DOS01 - Normal state of FB Input 0
1/0
03449
1/211(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS1NF
R
DOS01 - Normal state of FB Input F
1/0
03464
1/211(15)
DOS1M0
R/W
DOS01 - Mode of LON Output 0
1/0
03465
1/212(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS1MF
R/W
DOS01 - Mode of LON Output F
1/0
03480
1/212(15)
DOS1F0
R/W
DOS01 - Forced state 0
1/0
03481
1/213(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS1FF
R/W
DOS01 - Forced state F
1/0
03496
1/213(15)
..............................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS6N0
R
DIS06 - Normal state of LON Input 0
1/0
03881
6/208 (0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS6NF
R
DIS06 - Normal state of LON Input F
1/0
03896
6/208 (15)
DIS6M0
R/W
DIS06 - Mode of FB Output 0
1/0
03897
6/209 (0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS6MF
R/W
DIS06 - Mode of FB Output F
1/0
03912
6/209(15)
DIS6F0
R/W
DIS06 - Forced state 0
1/0
03913
6/210(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DIS6FF
R/W
DIS06 - Forced state F
1/0
03928
6/210(15)
DOS6N0
R
DOS06 - Normal state of FB Input 0
1/0
03929
6/211(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS6NF
R
DOS06 - Normal state of FB Input F
1/0
03944
6/211(15)
DOS6M0
R/W
DOS06 - Mode of LON Output 0
1/0
03945
6/212(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS6MF
R/W
DOS06 - Mode of LON Output F
1/0
03960
6/212(15)
DOS6F0
R/W
DOS06 - Forced state 0
1/0
03961
6/213(0)
...............................................................................................................................................................................
DOS6FF
R/W
DOS06 - Forced state F
1/0
03976
6/213(15)
7-36
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Discrete Input Remote xx, Normal State Word of Function Block Outputs (DIDxxN)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DIDxx, Output O0 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
1
DIDxx, Output O1 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
2
DIDxx, Output O2 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
3
DIDxx, Output O3 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
4
DIDxx, Output O4 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
5
DIDxx, Output O5 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
6
DIDxx, Output O6 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
7
DIDxx, Output O7 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
8
DIDxx, Output O8 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
9
DIDxx, Output O9 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
10
DIDxx, Output OA Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
11
DIDxx, Output OB Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
12
DIDxx, Output OC Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
13
DIDxx, Output OD Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
14
DIDxx, Output OE Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
15
DIDxx, Output OF Normal State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Discrete Input Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block outputs (DIDxxM)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
DIDxx, Mode of Output O0
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
1
DIDxx, Mode of Output O1
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
2
DIDxx, Mode of Output O2
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
3
DIDxx, Mode of Output O3
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
4
DIDxx, Mode of Output O4
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
5
DIDxx, Mode of Output O5
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
6
DIDxx, Mode of Output O6
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
7
DIDxx, Mode of Output O7
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
8
DIDxx, Mode of Output O8
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
9
DIDxx, Mode of Output O9
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
10
DIDxx, Mode of Output OA
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
11
DIDxx, Mode of Output OB
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
12
DIDxx, Mode of Output OC
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
13
DIDxx, Mode of Output OD
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
14
DIDxx, Mode of Output OE
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
15
DIDxx, Mode of Output OF
1-forced 0-normal
DIDxx
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Read/Write
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
(1) Writes are made using a parameter data send command (CMD 9) to the entire word.
May 2001
7-37
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Discrete Input Remote xx, Forced State Word of Function Block Outputs (DIDxxF)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DIDxx, Output O0 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
1
DIDxx, Output O1 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
2
DIDxx, Output O2 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
3
DIDxx, Output O3 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
4
DIDxx, Output O4 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
5
DIDxx, Output O5 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
6
DIDxx, Output O6 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
7
DIDxx, Output O7 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
8
DIDxx, Output O8 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
9
DIDxx, Output O9 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
10
DIDxx, Output OA Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
11
DIDxx, Output OB Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
12
DIDxx, Output OC Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
13
DIDxx, Output OD Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
14
DIDxx, Output OE Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
15
DIDxx, Output OF Forced State
1-high 0-low
DIDxx
R
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Discrete Output Remote xx, Normal StateWord of Function Block Inputs (DODxxN)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DODxx- Input 0 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
1
DODxx- Input 1 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
2
DODxx- Input 2 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
3
DODxx- Input 3 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
4
DODxx- Input 4 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
5
DODxx- Input 5 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
6
DODxx- Input 6 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
7
DODxx- Input 7 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
8
DODxx- Input 8 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
9
DODxx- Input 9 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
10
DODxx- Input A Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
11
DODxx- Input B Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
12
DODxx- Input C Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
13
DODxx- Input D Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
14
DODxx- Input E Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
15
DODxx- Input F Normal State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
7-38
May 2001
UM354N-1
Discrete Output Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block Inputs DODxxM)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
DODxx, Mode of Input 0
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
1
DODxx, Mode of Input 1
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
2
DODxx, Mode of Input 2
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
3
DODxx, Mode of Input 3
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
4
DODxx, Mode of Input 4
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
5
DODxx, Mode of Input 5
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
6
DODxx, Mode of Input 6
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
7
DODxx, Mode of Input 7
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
8
DODxx, Mode of Input 8
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
9
DODxx, Mode of Input 9
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
10
DODxx, Mode of Input A
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
11
DODxx, Mode of Input B
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
12
DODxx, Mode of Input C
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
13
DODxx, Mode of Input D
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
14
DODxx, Mode of Input E
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
15
DODxx, Mode of Input F
1-forced 0-normal
DODxx
Data Mapping
Read/Write
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Discrete Output Remote xx, Forced State Word of Function Block Inputs (DODxxF)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DODxx- Input 0 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
1
DODxx- Input 1 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
2
DODxx- Input 2 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
3
DODxx- Input 3 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
4
DODxx- Input 4 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
5
DODxx- Input 5 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
6
DODxx- Input 6 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
7
DODxx- Input 7 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
8
DODxx- Input 8 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
9
DODxx- Input 9 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
10
DODxx- Input A Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
11
DODxx- Input B Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
12
DODxx- Input C Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
13
DODxx- Input D Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
14
DODxx- Input E Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
15
DODxx- Input F Forced State
1-high 0-low
DODxx
R/W (1)
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(1) Writes are made using a parameter data send command (CMD 9) to the entire word
May 2001
7-39
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Discrete Input Remote xx, Normal State Word of Function Block Outputs (DISxxN)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DISxx, Output O0 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
1
DISxx, Output O1 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
2
DISxx, Output O2 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
3
DISxx, Output O3 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
4
DISxx, Output O4 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
5
DISxx, Output O5 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
6
DISxx, Output O6 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
7
DISxx, Output O7 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
8
DISxx, Output O8 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
9
DISxx, Output O9 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
10
DISxx, Output OA Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
11
DISxx, Output OB Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
12
DISxx, Output OC Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
13
DISxx, Output OD Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
14
DISxx, Output OE Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
15
DISxx, Output OF Normal State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Discrete Input Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block outputs (DISxxM)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
DISxx, Mode of Output O0
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
1
DISxx, Mode of Output O1
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
2
DISxx, Mode of Output O2
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
3
DISxx, Mode of Output O3
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
4
DISxx, Mode of Output O4
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
5
DISxx, Mode of Output O5
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
6
DISxx, Mode of Output O6
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
7
DISxx, Mode of Output O7
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
8
DISxx, Mode of Output O8
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
9
DISxx, Mode of Output O9
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
10
DISxx, Mode of Output OA
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
11
DISxx, Mode of Output OB
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
12
DISxx, Mode of Output OC
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
13
DISxx, Mode of Output OD
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
14
DISxx, Mode of Output OE
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
15
DISxx, Mode of Output OF
1-forced 0-normal
DISxx
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Read/Write
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
(1) Writes are made using a parameter data send command (CMD 9) to the entire word
7-40
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Discrete Input Remote xx, Forced State Word of Function Block Outputs (DISxxF)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DISxx, Output O0 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
1
DISxx, Output O1 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
2
DISxx, Output O2 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
3
DISxx, Output O3 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
4
DISxx, Output O4 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
5
DISxx, Output O5 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
6
DISxx, Output O6 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
7
DISxx, Output O7 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
8
DISxx, Output O8 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
9
DISxx, Output O9 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
10
DISxx, Output OA Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
11
DISxx, Output OB Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
12
DISxx, Output OC Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
13
DISxx, Output OD Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
14
DISxx, Output OE Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
15
DISxx, Output OF Forced State
1-high 0-low
DISxx
R
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
Discrete Output Remote xx, Normal State Word of Function Block Inputs (DOSxxN)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DOSxx- Input 0 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
1
DOSxx- Input 1 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
2
DOSxx- Input 2 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
3
DOSxx- Input 3 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
4
DOSxx- Input 4 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
5
DOSxx- Input 5 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
6
DOSxx- Input 6 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
7
DOSxx- Input 7 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
8
DOSxx- Input 8 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
9
DOSxx- Input 9 Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
10
DOSxx- Input A Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
11
DOSxx- Input B Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
12
DOSxx- Input C Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
13
DOSxx- Input D Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
14
DOSxx- Input E Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
15
DOSxx- Input F Normal State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
May 2001
7-41
Data Mapping
Discrete Output Remote xx Mode Word of Function Block Inputs DOSxxM)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
0
DOSxx, Mode of Input 0
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
1
DOSxx, Mode of Input 1
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
2
DOSxx, Mode of Input 2
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
3
DOSxx, Mode of Input 3
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
4
DOSxx, Mode of Input 4
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
5
DOSxx, Mode of Input 5
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
6
DOSxx, Mode of Input 6
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
7
DOSxx, Mode of Input 7
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
8
DOSxx, Mode of Input 8
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
9
DOSxx, Mode of Input 9
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
10
DOSxx, Mode of Input A
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
11
DOSxx, Mode of Input B
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
12
DOSxx, Mode of Input C
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
13
DOSxx, Mode of Input D
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
14
DOSxx, Mode of Input E
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
15
DOSxx, Mode of Input F
1-forced 0-normal
DOSxx
UM354N-1
Read/Write
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
R/W (1)
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Discrete Output Remote xx, Forced State Word of Function Block Inputs (DOSxxF)
BIT
Description
Value
Block
Read/Write
0
DOSxx- Input 0 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
1
DOSxx- Input 1 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
2
DOSxx- Input 2 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
3
DOSxx- Input 3 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
4
DOSxx- Input 4 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
5
DOSxx- Input 5 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
6
DOSxx- Input 6 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
7
DOSxx- Input 7 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
8
DOSxx- Input 8 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
9
DOSxx- Input 9 Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
10
DOSxx- Input A Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
11
DOSxx- Input B Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
12
DOSxx- Input C Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
13
DOSxx- Input D Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
14
DOSxx- Input E Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
15
DOSxx- Input F Forced State
1-high 0-low
DOSxx
R/W (1)
Input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(1) Writes are made using a parameter data send command (CMD 9) to the entire word
7-42
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
7.3.12 Trend Data (Loop Defined by MLTP)
Included in MPU Controller board firmware version 1.30 and higher.
Code
R/W Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
A1RMN
R
ATD01 MIN SCALE
Real
48001
n/a
A1RMX
R
ATD01 MAX SCALE
Real
48003
n/a
A1DPP
R
ATD01 Decimal Point Position
0-5
48005
n/a
A1EU
R
ATD01 Engineering Units
6 ASCII Char
48006
n/a
A1YR
R
ATD01 Year V2.0 (5)
199748009
n/a
A1MT
R
ATD01 Month V2.0 (5)
1-12
48010
n/a
A1DY
R
ATD01 Day V2.0 (5)
1-31
48011
n/a
A1HR
R
ATD01 Hour V2.0 (5)
0-23
48012
n/a
A1MN
R
ATD01 Minute V2.0 (5)
0-59
48013
n/a
A1SC
R
ATD01 Second V2.0 (5)
0-59
48014
n/a
A1ST
R/W* ATD01 Sample Time x0.01=min 1-48000
48015
n/a
A1STC
R
ATD01 % Sample Time Complete 0-1000 (x.1=%)
48016
n/a
A1D1
R
ATD01 Data 1 (latest) 0-100%
128-3968
48017
n/a
A1D2
R
ATD01 Data 2 0-100%
128-3968
48018
n/a
A1D3
R
ATD01 Data 3 0-100%
128-3968
48019
n/a
....................................................................................................................................................................
A1D168
R
ATD01 Data 168 0-100%
128-3968
48184
n/a
A1D169
R
ATD01 Data 169 0-100%
128-3968
48185
n/a
A1D170
R
ATD01 Data 170 0-100%
128-3968
48186
n/a
* Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A1D1 through A1D170 to $0.
A2RMN
R
ATD02 MIN SCALE
Real
48201
n/a
A2RMX
R
ATD02 MAX SCALE
Real
48203
n/a
A2DPP
R
ATD02 Decimal Point Position
0-5
48205
n/a
A2EU
R
ATD02 Engineering Units
6 ASCII Char
48206
n/a
A2YR
R
ATD02 Year V2.0 (5)
1997
48209
n/a
A2MT
R
ATD02 Month V2.0 (5)
1-12
48210
n/a
A2DY
R
ATD02 Day V2.0 (5)
1-31
48211
n/a
A2HR
R
ATD02 Hour V2.0 (5)
0-23
48212
n/a
A2MN
R
ATD02 Minute V2.0 (5)
0-59
48213
n/a
A2SC
R
ATD02 Second V2.0 (5)
0-59
48214
n/a
A2ST
R/W* ATD02 Sample Time x0.01=min
1-48000
48215
n/a
A2STC
R
ATD02 % Sample Time Complete
0-1000 (x.1=%)
48216
n/a
A2D1
R
ATD02 Data 1 (latest) 0-100%
128-3968
48217
n/a
A2D2
R
ATD02 Data 2 0-100%
128-3968
48218
n/a
A2D3
R
ATD02 Data 3 0-100%
128-3968
48219
n/a
....................................................................................................................................................................
A2D168
R
ATD02 Data 168 0-100%
128-3968
48384
n/a
A2D169
R
ATD02 Data 169 0-100%
128-3968
48385
n/a
A2D170
R
ATD02 Data 170 0-100%
128-3968
48386
n/a
* Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A2D1 through A2D170 to $0.
May 2001
7-43
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
A3RMN
R
ATD03 MIN SCALE
Real
48401
n/a
A3RMX
R
ATD03 MAX SCALE
Real
48403
n/a
A3DPP
R
ATD03 Decimal Point Position
0-5
48405
n/a
A3EU
R
ATD03 Engineering Units
6 ASCII Char
48406
n/a
A3YR
R
ATD03 Year V2.0 (5)
199748409
n/a
A3MT
R
ATD03 Month V2.0 (5)
1-12
48410
n/a
A3DY
R
ATD03 Day V2.0 (5)
1-31
48411
n/a
A3HR
R
ATD03 Hour V2.0 (5)
0-23
48412
n/a
A3MN
R
ATD03 Minute V2.0 (5)
0-59
48413
n/a
A3SC
R
ATD03 Second V2.0 (5)
0-59
48414
n/a
A3ST
R/W*
ATD03 Sample Time x0.01=min
1-48000
48415
n/a
A3STC
R
ATD03 % Sample Time Complete
0-1000 (x.1=%)
48416
n/a
A3D1
R
ATD03 Data 1 (latest) 0-100%
128-3968
48417
n/a
A3D2
R
ATD03 Data 2 0-100%
128-3968
48418
n/a
A3D3
R
ATD03 Data 3 0-100%
128-3968
48419
n/a
....................................................................................................................................................................
A3D168
R
ATD03 Data 168 0-100%
128-3968
48584
n/a
A3D169
R
ATD03 Data 169 0-100%
128-3968
48585
n/a
A3D170
R
ATD03 Data 170 0-100%
128-3968
48586
n/a
* Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A3D1 through A3D170 to $0.
A4RMN
R
ATD04 MIN SCALE
Real
48601
n/a
A4RMX
R
ATD04 MAX SCALE
Real
48603
n/a
A4DPP
R
ATD04 Decimal Point Position
0-5
48605
n/a
A4EU
R
ATD04 Engineering Units
6 ASCII Char
48606
n/a
A4YR
R
ATD04 Year V2.0 (5)
199748609
n/a
A4MT
R
ATD04 Month V2.0 (5)
1-12
48610
n/a
A4DY
R
ATD04 Day V2.0 (5)
1-31
48611
n/a
A4HR
R
ATD04 Hour V2.0 (5)
0-23
48612
n/a
A4MN
R
ATD04 Minute V2.0 (5)
0-59
48613
n/a
A4SC
R
ATD04 Second V2.0 (5)
0-59
48614
n/a
A4ST
R/W*
ATD04 Sample Time x0.01=min
1-48000
48615
n/a
A4STC
R
ATD04 % Sample Time Complete
0-1000 (x.1=%)
48616
n/a
A4D1
R
ATD04 Data 1 (latest) 0-100%
128-3968
48617
n/a
A4D2
R
ATD04 Data 2 0-100%
128-3968
48618
n/a
A4D3
R
ATD04 Data 3 0-100%
128-3968
48619
n/a
....................................................................................................................................................................
A4D168
R
ATD04 Data 168 0-100%
128-3968
48784
n/a
A4D169
R
ATD04 Data 169 0-100%
128-3968
48785
n/a
A4D170
R
ATD04 Data 170 0-100%
128-3968
48786
n/a
* Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A4D1 through A4D170 to $0.
7-44
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
A5RMN
R
ATD05 MIN SCALE
Real
48801
n/a
A5RMX
R
ATD05 MAX SCALE
Real
48803
n/a
A5DPP
R
ATD05 Decimal Point Position
0-5
48805
n/a
A5EU
R
ATD05 Engineering Units
6 ASCII Char
48806
n/a
A5YR
R
ATD05 Year V2.0 (5)
199748809
n/a
A5MT
R
ATD05 Month V2.0 (5)
1-12
48810
n/a
A5DY
R
ATD05 Day V2.0 (5)
1-31
48811
n/a
A5HR
R
ATD05 Hour V2.0 (5)
0-23
48812
n/a
A5MN
R
ATD05 Minute V2.0 (5)
0-59
48813
n/a
A5SC
R
ATD05 Second V2.0 (5)
0-59
48814
n/a
A5ST
R/W*
ATD05 Sample Time x0.01=min
1-48000
48815
n/a
A5STC
R
ATD05 % Sample Time Complete
0-1000 (x.1=%)
48816
n/a
A5D1
R
ATD05 Data 1 (latest) 0-100%
128-3968
48817
n/a
A5D2
R
ATD05 Data 2 0-100%
128-3968
48818
n/a
A5D3
R
ATD05 Data 3 0-100%
128-3968
48819
n/a
....................................................................................................................................................................
A5D168
R
ATD05 Data 168 0-100%
128-3968
48984
n/a
A5D169
R
ATD05 Data 169 0-100%
128-3968
48985
n/a
A5D170
R
ATD05 Data 170 0-100%
128-3968
48986
n/a
* Writing to the sample time will reset all data points A5D1 through A5D170 to $0.
Notes:
1.
A read of any Time Stamp Data (i.e. Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second, or Sample Time) will update
all Loop data registers. Additional data reads of Trend data within the same block should only request data so
as to obtain a complete set of time synchronized data.
2.
The Trend data is obtained from the loop referenced by the MLTP parameter (register 40058). This parameter
can also be written to change the loop.
3.
Parameter NTTB will indicate the number of ATD Analog Trend Display blocks that are available in the loop
specified by the MLTP.
4.
Undefined data (e.g. unconfigured inputs, period station was in HOLD or powered down) is represented by a
value of $0.
5.
Real time clock data requires the optional RTC/CB (Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup) board, shipped
after July 1999 and Version 2.0 or higher MPU Controller firmware
May 2001
7-45
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.13 Configuration Data Sequencer Loop
The Modbus registers or LIL parameters on this page refer to configuration parameters of function blocks within a
specific loop previously defined by Modbus parameter MSLCP (40048) or LIL parameter LSLCP (7/1). For
example, to read or write the Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask for the PRSEQ block that is in a loop with a Modbus
Index of 3, write a 3 to 40048, then read or write to register 410001.
Sequencer (MASK Configurations)
Code
`R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
S001G0I
R/W
Step 1 Group 0 Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410001
1/154
S001G0O
R/W
Step 1 Group 0 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410002
1/170
S001G1I
R/W
Step 1 Group 1 Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410003
1/155
S001G1O
R/W
Step 1 Group 1 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410004
1/171
S001G2I
R/W
Step 1 Group 2 Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410005
1/156
S001G2O
R/W
Step 1 Group 2 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410006
1/172
S001G3I
R/W
Step 1 Group 3 Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410007
1/157
S001G3O
R/W
Step 1 Group 3 Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
410008
1/173
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
S250GEI
R/W
Step 250 Group E Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
417997
250/168
S250GEO
R/W
Step 250 Group E Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
417998
250/184
S250GFI
R/W
Step 250 Group F Input Mask
$0000-$FFFF
417999
250/169
S250GFO
R/W
Step 250 Group F Output Mask
$0000-$FFFF
418000
250/185
Real TimeTrip Block Configurations
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB)
C/P (LIL)
RTT01Y
RTT01M
RTT01D
RTT01HR
RTT01MN
RTT01SC
RTT01DA
RTT02Y
RTT02M
RTT02D
RTT02HR
RTT02MN
RTT02SC
RTT02DA
RTT03Y
RTT03M
RTT03D
RTT03HR
RTT03MN
RTT03SC
RTT03DA
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
19991-12
1-31
0-23
0-59
0-59
0000 0000 0SMT WTFS
19991-12
1-31
0-23
0-59
0-59
0000 0000 0SMT WTFS
19991-12
1-31
0-23
0-59
0-59
0000 0000 0SMT WTFS
419001
419002
419003
419004
419005
419006
419007
419008
419009
419010
419011
419012
419013
419014
419015
419016
419017
419018
419019
419020
419021
1/100 V 2.0
1/101 V 2.0
1/102 V 2.0
1/103 V 2.0
1/104 V 2.0
1/105 V 2.0
1/106 V 2.0
2/100 V 2.0
2/101 V 2.0
2/102 V 2.0
2/103 V 2.0
2/104 V 2.0
2/105 V 2.0
2/106 V 2.0
3/100 V 2.0
3/101 V 2.0
3/102 V 2.0
3/103 V 2.0
3/104 V 2.0
3/105 V 2.0
3/106 V 2.0
7-46
May 2001
UM354N-1
Data Mapping
Sequencer Time & Analog Configurations
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
S001TIM
R/W
Step 1 Time Period (min)
Real
420001
1/150-151
S001AEP
R/W
Step 1 Analog End Point
Real
420003
1/152-153
S002TIM
R/W
Step 2 Time Period (min)
Real
420005
2/150-151
S002AEP
R/W
Step 2 Analog End Point
Real
420007
2/152-153
S003TIM
R/W
Step 3 Time Period (min)
Real
420009
3/150-151
S003AEP
R/W
Step 3 Analog End Point
Real
420011
3/152-153
S004TIM
R/W
Step 4 Time Period (min)
Real
420013
4/150-151
S004AEP
R/W
Step 4 Analog End Point
Real
420015
4/152-153
..........................................................................................................................................................................................
S246TIM
R/W
Step 246 Time Period (min)
Real
420981
246/150-151
S246AEP
R/W
Step 246 Analog End Point
Real
420983
246/152-153
S247TIM
R/W
Step 247 Time Period (min)
Real
420985
247/150-151
S247AEP
R/W
Step 247 Analog End Point
Real
420987
247/152-153
S248TIM
R/W
Step 248 Time Period (min)
Real
420989
248/150-151
S2488AEP
R/W
Step24 8 Analog End Point
Real
420991
248/152-153
S249TIM
R/W
Step 249 Time Period (min)
Real
420993
249/150-151
S249AEP
R/W
Step 249 Analog End Point
Real
420995
249/152-153
S250TIM
R/W
Step 250 Time Period (min)
Real
420997
250/150-151
S250AEP
R/W
Step 250 Analog End Point
Real
420999
250/152-153
Timer Function Block Configurations
Code
R/W
Description
Range
Register (MB) C/P (LIL)
DYT01T
R/W
Delay Timer 01 Time (min)
Real
421001
1/190-1/191
OST01T
R/W
One Shot Timer 01Time (min)
Real
421003
1/192-1/193
RCT01NT
R/W
Rept Cy Timer 01 ON Time (min)
Real
421005
1/194-1/195
RCT01FT
R/W
Rept Cy Timer 01 OFFTime (min)
Real
421007
1/196-1/197
ROT01T
R/W
Retentive On Timer 01 Time (min)
Real
421009
1/198-1/199
.................................................................................................................................................................................
DYT21T
R/W
Delay Timer 21 Time (min)
Real
421201
1/190-1/191
OST21T
R/W
One Shot Timer 21Time (min)
Real
421203
1/192-1/193
RCT21NT
R/W
Rept Cy Timer 21 ON Time (min)
Real
421205
1/194-1/195
RCT21FT
R/W
Rept Cy Timer 21 OFFTime (min)
Real
421207
1/196-1/197
ROT21T
R/W
Retentive On Timer 21 Time (min)
Real
421209
1/198-1/199
May 2001
7-47
Data Mapping
UM354N-1
7.3.14 LIL Alarm Type Word (ATW)
BITS:
BITS:
BITS:
BITS:
BIT:
BITS:
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
01010101-
4
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
1
-
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
5
01010101-
0.0 seconds - delay time IN
0.4 seconds - delay time IN
1.0 seconds - delay time IN
2.0 seconds - delay time IN
5.0 seconds - delay time IN
15.0 seconds - delay time IN
30.0 seconds - delay time IN
60.0 seconds - delay time IN
10
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
9
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
8
01010101-
0.0 seconds - delay time OUT
0.4 seconds - delay time OUT
1.0 seconds - delay time OUT
2.0 seconds - delay time OUT
5.0 seconds - delay time OUT
15.0 seconds - delay time OUT
30.0 seconds - delay time OUT
60.0 seconds - delay time OUT
11
0
1
no alarm action is required
HIGH Alarm
LOW Alarm
HIGH DEVIATION Alarm
LOW DEVIATION Alarm
ABSOLUTE DEVIATION Alarm
OUT OF RANGE Alarm
no alarm action is required
0.1 % alarm deadband
0.5 % alarm deadband
1.0 % alarm deadband
5.0 % alarm deadband
- (ringback option is not required)
- RINGBACK
12 through 15 - changes to these bits will be ignored.
n
7-48
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.0 INSTALLATION
This section describes installation of a Moore 354N Universal Loop Controller. Topics include: installation
considerations and mechanical and electrical installation.
IMPORTANT
The installation must conform to the National Electrical Code and all other
applicable construction and electrical codes.
Model 354N major assemblies and mounting variations are shown in Figure 8-1. Each controller will usually be
connected to a PC running HMI operator interface software, such as i|ware PC. An optional Faceplate Display can
be directly mounted on the controller or remote mounted on a panelboard. A remote mounting kit is available.
Model 354N_D...
Controller with
Direct Mounted Faceplate Display
Model 354N_R...
Controller with
Remote Mounted Faceplate Display
Controller Mounting Tray
Controller Mounting Tray
Mounting Panel
Controller
Display Cable, 45 in. (1143 mm),
Ribbon Cable from
Remote Display Kit
Faceplate Display,
Direct Mount
AG00199a
Controller
Faceplate Display,
Remote Mount
FIGURE 8-1 Major Assemblies and Mounting Variations
The major assemblies and options that comprise a given Model 354N are indicated by the model number printed
on a controller nameplate. A model number breakdown is provided in Table 14.1. Compare the model number on a
nameplate to the model number table before beginning an installation to be sure the correct assemblies, options,
and electrical approvals are included. Assemblies and options added in the field will not be included in the model
number on a factory installed nameplate.
Sections 8.1 through 8.4 provide installation procedures for the various Model 354N physical arrangements.
Section 1.4.4 has a list of the items in a typical shipment, including installation kits. Section 8.5 shows the
connections to a PC for controller configuration development and to an HMI operator interface for application
development and on-line operation. Lastly, Section 8.6 lists the factory calibration values.
Agency approvals and related statements are located in Section 14. Use of the equipment in a manner not specified
by the manufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
May 2001
8-1
Installation
UM354N-1
8.1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
Mount a Moore 354N on a vibration free instrument panel or rack in an indoor or sheltered location.
The controller can be mounted in a user-supplied NEMA 4X enclosure located out-of-doors or in a location whose
environmental parameters exceed controller operating specifications. A thin bead of silicon sealant is often applied
between a remote mounted Faceplate Display and the mounting panel to prevent air or liquid leakage at this joint.
Do not mount the controller where direct sunlight can strike the faceplate or case. Direct sunlight can make the
displays difficult to read and will interfere with heat dissipation.
Route electrical power to the controller through a clearly labeled circuit breaker, fuse, or on-off switch that is
located near the controller and is accessible by the operator. The breaker or switch should be located in a nonexplosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere.
Thermocouple inputs are accommodated with an I/O Expander board and a Reference Junction temperature sensor.
At the factory, two Reference Junctions are included in a Range Resistor and Reference Installation Kit.
I/O options can be expanded by adding a variety of LonWorks modules. Module installation instructions are
provided with the modules.
Jumpers on the MPU Controller board are discussed in Sections 11.3 Troubleshooting and 11.6 Assembly
Replacement. Refer to this material when installing or storing a controller or an MPU Controller board.
8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
Operate a controller within its environmental specifications to
help ensure reliable, trouble-free operation with minimum
down-time. Refer to Section 14 Model Designation and
Specifications for controller operating temperatures limits,
operating humidity, and maximum moisture content.
Controller
TEMPERATURE
Faceplate
Display
Fan with
Finger
Guard
Air Outlet
Keep the air surrounding an operating controller below 50°C
(122°F). Check air temperature periodically to ensure that this
specification is not being exceeded.
CAUTION
Exceeding the specified operating
temperature limits can adversely affect
performance and may cause damage to the
controller.
Forced air ventilation is recommended when controllers are
mounted in a partially or completely enclosed panel or cabinet
(e.g. NEMA 1); as shown at right. When clean air is present,
exhaust fans are often mounted across the top of a panel and
louvers formed in the panel bottom. Air is then drawn upward
between the station cases. When air contains particulate matter,
fans and filters are generally located at the panel bottom and
louvers at the top. Filtered air is now forced upward between
the station cases. Filters must be serviced periodically.
Use high quality, quiet running fans that do not generate
8-2
X03102S0
Enclosed
Panel
Air Inlet
No. of Fans: One for each 16 stations or 3 ft. of panel width.
Air Inlet: 30 in² for each fan. If filters are used, they must
be changed periodically (increase inlet to 50 in²).
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
electrical noise that could interfere with electronic instruments.
A sealed cabinet (e.g. NEMA 12 or 4X) containing equipment that does not generate significant heat should
contain a recirculating fan for forcing air flow around equipment and throughout the cabinet preventing hot spots
from developing. Forced air conditioning may be required in high heat, high-density panels or consoles.
Periodically change or clean air filters.
CONTAMINANTS
The controller case is slotted to permit circulation of clean cooling air. Liquids and corrosive gases must not be
allowed to enter the case. Whether the controller is in a control room or field mounted it must be protected from
rain, air conditioning condensate, and plant and process related contaminants. Extended exposure to contaminants
can result in malfunctions.
Industrial environments often contain airborne particulate contaminants. Particulate matter, usually dust and dirt,
is abrasive and can cause intermittent connections. A layer of dust on circuit boards can interfere with component
heat dissipation and can absorb other airborne contaminants. Extended exposure to these contaminants may result
in malfunctions.
Although controller circuit boards have a protective coating, the following steps can reduce contaminant related
equipment malfunctions:
1.
Identify contaminants and implement methods to reduce their presence.
2.
Install protective housing for field mounted controllers.
3.
When cleaning equipment and surrounding area, especially the floor, either vacuum away all dust and dirt or
use a dampened rag or mop. Sweeping or dry dusting recirculates dust and dirt.
4.
Clean or replace all air conditioning filters, room air filters, and equipment filters regularly.
5.
Inform all personnel with access to the equipment of the need for cleanliness.
8.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The following subsections provide guidelines and procedures for mounting controllers on a panel or rack. See
Figure 8-1 for mounting variations. The installation should be structurally rigid and mounting surfaces should be
reinforced as necessary to prevent bowing. Each major assembly is discussed and illustrated, with dimension and
panel cutout drawings, in a separate subsection.
8.3.1 Controller Mounting, Model 354N...
This model provides for separate mounting of the Controller. Controller Mounting Tray hardware is not supplied
since it is installation site dependent. See Figure 8-2 for Controller and Controller Mounting Tray dimensions.
1.
Select a flat, easily accessible mounting location. The terminals must be easily reached for wiring, and the
DB9 connector for display (HMI) and configuration connections must be accessible. If remote mounting the
Faceplate Display, refer to the instruction supplied with the kit and note the maximum display cable length. Be
sure it will interconnect display and controller.
2.
Note the mounting surface characteristics and the hole pattern and hole size in Figure 8-2. Determine the
needed mounting hardware.
3.
Secure the Controller Mounting Tray to the surface.
4.
Insert the Controller case mounting tabs into slots in the Tray. Hold the Controller in place and secure it to the
Tray with the 4 screws and lockwashers supplied in the installation kit.
May 2001
8-3
Installation
UM354N-1
Mounting Hole for Display Cable for Remote
Mount Faceplate Display, 2 pl
0.33
(8.4)
2 pl 0.323
(8.2)
3
Mounting Hole for Direct Mount
Faceplate Display, 2 pl
0.97
(24.6)
9
Nameplate
3
0.50
(12.7)
dia
7.70
(195.6)
8.75
(222.3)
0
0
0
9.40
(238.8)
9.00
(228.6)
1.85
(47.0)
6.00
(152.4)
0.201 (5.1)
dia., 2 pl
0.203 X 0.406
(5.1 X 10.3) slot, 4 pl
G
0.35
(8.9)
M
9.70
(246.4)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)
9-Pin Male 'D' Connector
for Display and
Configuration Cables
5.1
(128.8)
Direct Mount
Faceplate Display
Controller
Controller Mounting Tray
4.2
(107.2)
3.33
(84.6)
Controller to Tray
Mounting Screw, 4 pl
FIGURE 8-2 Controller and Controller Mounting Tray Dimensions
8-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.3.2 Faceplate Display Remote Mounting, Model 354N_R
The following procedure may be amended by the instructions supplied with a Remote Display Kit. See Figures 8-3
and 8-4 for assembly and panel cutout dimensions.
1.
Locate the supplied Remote Display Kit. It contains a Remote Display (Ribbon) Cable, a Remote Display
Flange, two mounting clips and two 8-32 x 1" fillister head screws. Thread the mounting screws into the
mounting clips. See Figure 8-5.
2.
Carefully prepare the panel cutout.
3.
From the panel front, insert the Remote Display Flange into the panel cutout.
4.
From the panel back, slightly rotate the top mounting clip to fit it into the Flange cutout. Then straighten the
clip and partially tighten the mounting screw. Insert, straighten and partially tighten the bottom clip.
5.
Square the Flange with the panel and alternately tighten top and bottom mounting clip screws until the Flange
is secured to the panel. Do not over tighten and distort the Flange.
6.
Pass the display cable from behind the panel to the front of the panel.
7.
Check that the O-ring gasket is in place on the back of the Faceplate Display. Mate the display cable with the
connector on the Faceplate Display and close the ejector levers. The connectors are keyed.
8.
Place the Faceplate Display against the Flange and tighten the two faceplate screws to 6 in-lbs (0.7 N-m). Do
not over tighten and distort or damage the Display.
1.187
(30.15)
2.84
(72)
2.67
(67.8)
1.18
(30)
Flange
Mounting Clip
Remote Display
Flange Assembly
Case/Safety Ground Screw
5.42
6.3
(137.7) (160)
Dimensions in inches
(millimeters)
SIDE VIEW
MG000671
5.67
(144)
TOP VIEW
Display
Assembly
0.32
Maximum Panel Thickness
(0.8)
FIGURE 8-3 Faceplate Display Dimensions
May 2001
8-5
Installation
UM354N-1
5.44 +0.06/-0
[138.2 +1.5/-0]
Dimensions: Inches [Millimeters]
W
Panel Cutout Dimensions: Tolerances +0.06/-0 [+1.5/-0]
Height= 5.44 [138.2]
Width= (2.84 X A) + (5.67 X B) - 0.16 inches
[(72.0 X A) + (144 X B) - 4.1] mm
MG001061
Alternate (DIN Standard) Cutout
For Individually Mounted 363 Recorders Only
5.44 [138.2] High X 5.44 [138.2] Wide
Where: A= Number of Faceplate Displays and
353 Stations
B= Number of 363 Recorders
Note: Alternate cutout does not allow for possible future
substitution of 2 Faceplate Displays or Model 353
stations due to width limitations.
FIGURE 8-4 Faceplate Display Cutout Dimensions
Side View
Insert clip as shown
and straighten
Bottom View
X03103S0
FIGURE 8-5 Flange Mounting Clip, Local Faceplate Display
8-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.3.3 Faceplate Display Direct Mounting, Model 354N_ _ D
Use the following steps to field install a Faceplate Display on a Controller cover. Refer to Figure 8-2 as needed.
1.
Remove the small cover plate from the Controller cover.
2.
Gently extract the connector and ribbon cable from inside the cover. If the connector cannot be extracted, go to
Section 11.6 to disassemble the Controller; then return to this section, step 3.
3.
At the back of the Faceplate Display, open the two ejector levers. Check that the O-ring gasket is in the groove
at the back of the Display.
4.
Open the Display’s flip-down door.
5.
Press the cable-mounted connector into the Display mounted connector. The connectors are keyed. Close the
ejector levers when the connectors are fully mated.
6.
Hold the Display against the Controller cover and align the two captive screws with the holes in the cover. Be
sure the ribbon cable is not pinched.
7.
Tighten the screws to 6 in-lbs (0.7 N-m). Do not over tighten and distort or damage the faceplate.
May 2001
8-7
Installation
UM354N-1
8.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
This section describes electrical installation of the Model 354N Universal Loop Controller. Electrical installation
consists of power, I/O, and communications wiring to be installed by the user. These connections are made to the
four terminal blocks on the case. Installation of supplied cables between major assemblies, particularly when
remote mounted assemblies are specified, is discussed in Sections 8.4.14 and 8.5.
Section 8.4.1 Wiring Guidelines contains specific information about terminal block removal, wire size, wire
stripping and other details that will be needed while wiring. Read this entire section before beginning to wire a
controller. Sections 8.4.2 through 8.4.11 contain wiring diagrams and, where needed, step-by-step installation
procedures to describe I/O and network wiring. Section 8.4.12 provides power input wiring information. Single
controller and daisy chained power wiring are illustrated.
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard
Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury.
Remove power from all wires and terminals before working
on this equipment.
Do not insert an electrically conductive object into a case
ventilation slot while the controller is powered.
8.4.1 Wiring Guidelines
Electrical Connections - Power, I/O, and LIL or
Modbus network connections to a basic controller
are completed through removable connectors with
terminals H, N, and 3-26. When the controller
includes an I/O Expander board, connectors with
terminals 27-52 are also used. Connector
locations are shown in Figure 8-6. Individual
terminals functions are stated in Table 8.1.
PC Board-Mounted
Receptacle
Terminals 27 - 32
Terminals H, N, and G
or Ground Symbol
Terminal Blocks - Power terminals are identified
by a letter: Hot, Neutral, Ground (case/safety).
Signal I/O and communication terminals are
identified by a number: 3 through 52. A terminal
will accept the following wire(s).
• one 14-22 AWG (2.1-0.38 mm2)
• two 16 AWG (1.3 mm2)
• three 18 AWG (0.96 mm2)
Wire Size Recommendations:
• signal wiring - 18 AWG (0.96 mm2)
• power wiring - 18 AWG (0.96 mm2)
Wire Stripping Recommendations:
• terminal block wiring - 1/2" (13 mm) to 5/8"
(16 mm)
Be careful not to nick the conductor or cut away strands.
8-8
Terminals 33 - 52
Terminals 3 - 26
MG001040
Note:
Loosen 2 captive screws
and pull terminal block
straight out.
FIGURE 8-6 Terminal Blocks
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
Wire Selection - Stranded wire is recommended for most connections, however, solid wire is typically used for
thermocouple extension wire. Carefully select wire size, conductor material, and insulation. Some selection
considerations are:
• current and voltage to be carried
• total length of each wire run
• whether wire will be bundled or run singly
• indoor or outdoor installation
• temperature extremes
• exposure to sunlight
• vibration
• types of contaminates
Station Common, Terminal 6 - Within the controller, station common is connected to:
• the two-wire power supply common (COM, terminal 6)
• digital output common (DOUTC, terminal 9)
• all analog input and analog output commons (e.g., AIN1C, terminal 21)
Station common is isolated from case/safety ground (terminal G). Connect it to user’s instrument bus common
at only one point. Digital input commons are isolated from the station common and case/safety ground.
Terminal Block Removal and Insertion
Removal:
1. As necessary, disconnect, unclamp, or unbundle the wire harness connected to the terminal block to be
removed. Be sure there is sufficient slack in the wiring for terminal block removal.
2. The removable portion of each terminal block is secured with two small captive screws, one at each end of the
block. Loosen the captive screws, then grasp the terminal block and pull straight out from the case. See Figure
8-6. Be careful not to over stress or damage connected wires or components.
Insertion:
1. Complete all wiring connections to the terminal block.
2. Using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1/8" blade width, turn each unused terminal screw clockwise until it
is just tight - do not over tighten.
3. Read the letters/numbers on the terminal block to be inserted, then refer to Figure 8-6 for the block’s proper
location. Terminal blocks are keyed.
4. Visually check that all pins in the Controller mounted receptacle are straight. If a pin is only slightly bent,
very gentle straightening can be tried. Excessive straightening may cause the pin to break requiring
replacement of the attached circuit board.
5. Align the terminal block with the Controller mounted socket and push the block straight in. See Figure 8-6.
Tighten the screw at each end of the block.
Terminal Torque Specifications:
• terminals - 4.5 in. lbs (0.5 N m)
Signal Input Wire
Crimp-On
Connector
Range Resistor
MG000631
Crimp-On (solderless) Connectors - A pin-style crimp-on connector can be used
when two or more wires or a combination of wires and component leads are to
be inserted into a rear terminal. Wires and leads are crimped in the connector
and the connector pin inserted in the selected terminal. The connector can
provide a more secure connection when multiple leads are involved. An example
of its use is shown at right. Several crimp-on connectors are provided in
installation kits, and they are available from electrical supply sources.
Wire Routing and Conduit - DC wiring should be separated from AC wiring and away from AC powered
pushbuttons, alarms, annunciators, motors, solenoids, and similar devices. Conduit and raceways are commonly
used for routing panel wiring. Wiring not installed in conduit or raceway should be clamped or supported
approximately every 12 inches (300 mm).
May 2001
8-9
7
Installation
UM354N-1
9
Controller Cover
H
27
(ROUT1nc) Relay Output 1 Normally Closed
N
28
(ROUT1c) Relay Output 1 Common
Case/Safety Ground (GND)
G
29
(ROUT1no) Relay Output 1 Normally Open
30
(ROUT2nc) Relay Output 2 Normally Closed
31
(ROUT2c) Relay Output 2 Common
32
(ROUT2no) Relay Output 2 Normally Open
0
Power- AC Hot (ACH)
Power- AC Neutral (ACN)
3
Network Communication B (NCB)
4
Transmitter Power 26 Vdc+ (XMTR+)
5
Transmitter/Station Common (COM)
6
33
(AOUT3+) Analog Output 3+
Transmitter Power 26 Vdc+ (XMTR+)
7
34
(AOUTC) Analog Output 3 Common
8
35
(DINU1+) Digital Input Universal 1+
9
36
(DINU1-) Digital Input Universal 1-
Digital Output 2+ (DOUT2+)
10
37
(DINU2+) Digital Input Universal 2+
Digital Input 1+ (DIN1+)
11
38
(DINU2-) Digital Input Universal 2-
Digital Input 1- (DIN1-)
12
39
(XMTR+) Transmitter Power 26Vdc+
Digital Input 2+ (DIN2+)
13
40
(COM) Transmitter/Station Common
Digital Input 2- (DIN2-)
14
41
(AIN4+) Analog Input 4+
Digital Input 3+ (DIN3+)
15
42
(AINC) Analog Input Common
Digital Input 3- (DIN3-)
16
43
(DIN4+) Digital Input 4+
Analog Output 1+ (AOUT1+)
17
44
(DIN4-) Digital Input 4-
18
NC
No Connection
Analog Output 2+ (AOUT2+)
19
45
(AINU1a) Analog Input Universal 1a
Analog Input 1+ (AIN1+)
Digital Outputs 1/2 Common (DOUTC)
Analog Output 1/2 Common (AOUTC)
0
Digital Output 1+ (DOUT1+)
0
Network Communication A (NCA)
46
(AINU1b) Analog Input Universal 1b
21
47
(AINU1c) Analog Input Universal 1c
Analog Input 2+ (AIN2+)
22
48
(AINU1d) Analog Input Universal 1d
Analog Input 3+ (AIN3+)
23
49
(AINU2a) Analog Input Universal 2a
24
50
(AINU2b) Analog Input Universal 2b
I/O Bus A (IOA)
25
51
(AINU2c) Analog Input Universal 2c
I/O Bus B (IOB)
26
52
(AINU2c) Analog Input Universal 2d
M
Analog Input 3 Common (AINC)
G
20
Analog Input 1/2 Common (AINC)
Notes:
1. Each terminal is identified by a letter or number printed on the terminal block. Case/safety ground indicated by
G or a ground symbol. Either 2 or 4 terminal blocks are installed depending upon I/O Expander board option:
Model 354N_ _N, 2 blocks; Model 354N_ _1, 4 blocks.
2. Terminal G or ground symbol, Case/Safety Ground - Connect to earth ground.
3. NCA and NCB - Connect Modbus or LIL Twinaxial Cable or twisted pair wiring. Refer to Section 8.4.9 or 8.4.11
for additional information.
4. IOA and IOB - LonWorks bus connections. Twisted pair wiring is typical.
5. Ground Bus - An external, user-supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds, particularly
when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded.
6. NC terminal - Do not connect to this terminal.
FIGURE 8-7 Controller Terminal Layout and Terminal Assignments
8-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
TABLE 8.1 Controller Terminal Assignments
MPU CONTROLLER BOARD
I/O EXPANDER BOARD
Description
ID
#
#
ID
Description
Power - AC Hot
Power - AC Neutral
Case/Safety Ground
Network Communication A
Network Communication B
Transmitter Power 26Vdc +
Transmitter/Station Common
Transmitter Power 26Vdc +
Digital Output 1 +
Digital Outputs 1/2 Common
Digital Output 2 +
Digital Input 1 +
Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 +
Digital Input 2 Digital Input 3 +
Digital Input 3 Analog Output 1 +
Analog Output 1/2 Common
Analog Output 2 +
Analog Input 1 +
Analog Input 1/2 Common
Analog Input 2 +
Analog Input 3 +
Analog Input 3 Common
I/O Bus A
I/O Bus B
ACH/DC+
ACN/DCGND
NCA
NCB
XMTR+
COM
XMTR+
DOUT1+
DOUTC
DOUT2+
DIN1+
DIN1DIN2+
DIN2DIN3+
DIN3AOUT1+
AOUTC
AOUT2+
AIN1+
AINC
AIN2+
AIN3+
AINC
IOA
IOB
H
N
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
NC
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
ROUT1nc
ROUT1c
ROUT1no
ROUT2nc
ROUT2c
ROUT2no
AOUT3+
AOUTC
DINU1+
DINU1DINU2+
DINU2XMTR+
COM
AIN4+
AINC
DIN4+
DIN4----AINU1a
AINU1b
AINU1c
AINU1d
AINU2a
AINU2b
AINU2c
AINU2d
Relay Output 1 Normally Closed
Relay Output 1 Common
Relay Output 1 Normally Open
Relay Output 2 Normally Closed
Relay Output 2 Common
Relay Output 2 Normally Open
Analog Output 3 +
Analog Output 3 Common
Digital Input Universal 1 +
Digital Input Universal 1 Digital Input Universal 2 +
Digital Input Universal 2 Transmitter Power 26Vdc +
Transmitter/Station Common
Analog Input 4 +
Analog Input Common
Digital Input 4 +
Digital Input 4 No Connection (Note 5)
Analog Input Universal 1 a
Analog Input Universal 1 b
Analog Input Universal 1 c
Analog Input Universal 1 d
Analog Input Universal 2 a
Analog Input Universal 2 b
Analog Input Universal 2 c
Analog Input Universal 2 d
G
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Notes:
1. # - Each terminal is identified by a letter or number printed on the terminal block. Case/Safety Ground
terminal identified by G or a ground symbol. Either 2 or 4 terminal blocks are installed depending upon I/O
Expander board option: Model 354N_ _N, 2 blocks; Model 354N_ _1, 4 blocks.
2.
Terminal G or ground symbol, Case/Safety Ground - Connect to earth ground.
3.
NCA and NCB - Connect Modbus or LIL Twinaxial Cable or twisted pair wiring. Refer to Section 8.4.9 or
8.4.11 for additional information.
IOA and IOB - LonWorks bus connections. Twisted pair wiring is typical.
Ground Bus - An external, user-supplied ground bus can ease connection of multiple grounds, particularly
when twinaxial cable shields are to be grounded.
NC terminal - Do not connect to this terminal.
4.
5.
6.
May 2001
8-11
Installation
UM354N-1
8.4.2 Analog Signal Input Wiring (4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc, and mV)
Analog signal input terminals are connected to software function blocks AIN and AINU within the controller.
Table 8.1 correlates function blocks and input terminals. These terminals will accept several input signal types
with the appropriate wiring and components. A current input signal to an AIN or AINU function block must be
converted to 1-5 Vdc by a range resistor.
INPUT TYPE
4-20 mA
1-5 Vdc
Millivolt
FUNCTION BLOCKS(1)
AIN1-4
AINU1 and 2
AIN1-4
AINU1 and 2
RANGE RESISTOR(2)
250Ω
3.75Ω
Not Required
Not Required
FIGURE
8-8 and 8-9
8-10A
8-8 and 8-9
8-10B
Notes:
(1) Function blocks AIN4, AINU1, and AINU2 are available only when an I/O Expander Board
is installed.
(2) Range resistors listed are supplied in Installation Kits. For other current values, select a
range resistor that will provide a 1-5 Vdc input. For example, for 10-50 mA, install a 100Ω
range resistor.
Crimp-on connectors are provided for use when a range resistor and a signal input wire are to be inserted in the
same connector terminal. A connector should also be used when two wires of significantly different gauges would
otherwise be inserted in a single connector terminal.
Perform the following steps for each analog input.
1.
Select an analog input terminal pair for connection of the input signal wiring. Refer to Table 8.1 and the
following illustrations as necessary.
For a 4-20 mA input, go to step 2. For a 1-5 Vdc or millivolt input, go to step 4.
26 Vdc
+
5
+
_
6
_
1-5 Vdc
20
21
250
X03107S4
Controller Circuitry
Analog Signal,
e.g. Model 340,
SITRANS P DSIII,
2-Wire Transmitter,
4-20 mA Output
External Power Supply
_
26 Vdc Typical
+
Controller Terminals
External Device
Analog Signal,
e.g. Model 340,
SITRANS P DSIII,
2-Wire Transmitter,
4-20 mA Output
5
+
6
_
1-5 Vdc
Earth
Ground
20
21
Common Ground Bus
Note: See Table 8.1 for AIN2,
3, and 4 terminal numbers.
Station Common
Controller Circuitry
Controller Terminals
External Device
250
MG000653
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
A. Controller Powered
Note: See Table 8.1 for AIN2,
3, and 4 terminal numbers.
B. External Power Supply
FIGURE 8-8 Analog Input AIN1, 2-Wire Transmitter
8-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
X03107S3
Controller Terminals
External Devices
1-5 Vdc
+
Analog Signal,
4-Wire Transmitter,
_
4-20 mA Output
AIN1
20
21
+
Analog Signal,
4-Wire Transmitter,
_
4-20 mA Output
AIN2
1-5 Vdc 22
6
1-5 Vdc
+
Analog Signal,
4-Wire Transmitter,
_
4-20 mA Output
Controller Circuitry
External
Power
Source
AIN3
23
24
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
Note: Range resistors are 250 Ohms.
FIGURE 8-9 Analog Inputs AIN1, 2, and 3; 4-Wire Transmitters
Isolated
Power
45
+
4-20 mA
Source _
46
3.75
Ground
47
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
48
Note: See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminals.
Isolated
Ground
Controller Circuitry
45
Isolated
Power
+
Millivolt
Source _
46
Ground
48
47
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
Isolated
Ground
Note: See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminal numbers.
Controller Circuitry
Controller Terminals
Controller Terminals
X03117S1
MG000612
A. 4-20 mA Input
B. Millivolt Input
FIGURE 8-10 Universal Analog Input AINU1
2.
4-20 mA Input Only - Select a 250Ω (for AIN#) or 3.75Ω (for AINU#)
resistor from the installation kit and insulate the bent resistor lead with a
piece of sleeving. At the lead end, approximately 1/4" (6 mm) to 5/16" (8
mm) of bare resistor lead should be exposed.
0.8"
(20.3mm)
If a crimp-on connector is to be used, go to step 3. Otherwise, go to step 4.
0.5"
(12.7mm)
May 2001
Place sleeving
on this lead.
8-13
UM354N-1
3.
Crimp-On Connector - Insert the resistor lead and any signal wiring into the
Signal Input Wire
connector until the wire ends are visible at the pin end of the connector.
Use a standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection. Be
certain that all resistor leads and signal input wires are inserted in the
Range Resistor
connector before crimping.
Crimp-On
Connector
4.
Loosen the two terminal screws using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1/8" (3 mm) blade width. Insert
wires, resistor leads, or a crimp-on connector pin into the two openings in the side of the connector adjacent to
the selected terminal numbers.
5.
Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted and carefully tighten the screws to 5
in. lbs. Do not over tighten.
6.
Repeat steps 1-5 for each 4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc and millivolt input.
7.
Carefully dress resistors and wiring so that excessive stress is not placed on a component, wire, or connection.
MG000631
Installation
8.4.3 Analog Output Wiring (4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc)
Analog output functions blocks are AOUT1, AOUT2, and AOUT3. Figure 8-11 shows connections for an external
device that accepts 4-20 mA. For an external device that needs 1-5 Vdc, see Figure 8-12. Refer to Section 8.4.2
for wiring guidelines.
Controller Terminals
Controller Circuitry
Station Common
6
4-20 mA
+ 17
_
18
Model 760
Valve Positioner,
Model 773
_ I/P Transducer,
or Other 4-20 MA
Device
+
MG000662
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
Note: See Table 8.1 for AOUT2 terminals.
FIGURE 8-11 Analog Output AOUT 1, Current Output
Controller Terminals
Controller Circuitry
Station Common
6
+ 17
_
18
1-5 Vdc
250
+ Model 363 Recorder
or Other 1-5 Vdc
_
Device
MG000662
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
Note: See Table 8.1 for AOUT2 terminals.
FIGURE 8-12 Analog Output AOUT1, Voltage Output
8-14
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.4.4 Digital Input and Output Wiring
Connections to Digital Input and Digital Input Universal function blocks are shown in Figure 8-13. Wiring for
internal and external power sources is shown. Semiconductor devices can replace the mechanical switches shown.
Wiring guidelines are found in Section 8.4.2.
Digital input commons, e.g. DIN1 (-), are isolated from station common and from case/safety ground.
Controller Terminals
Controller Terminals
24V
External
Supply
Common
(+)
DIN1
12
(+)
DIN2
14
(-)
Note: See Table 8.1 for
DIN3 terminals.
+
_
Common
Current
35 (+)
Limiter*
DINU1
24V
External
Supply
36
37
(-)
(+)
DINU2
38
Current
Limiter*
(-)
Common Ground Bus
_
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
39
40
+
+
13
(-)
26 Vdc
Controller Circuitry
11
_
MG000713
9
+
Controller Circuitry
5
X03110S3
26 Vdc
Transmitter
Power
_
Transmitter
Power
Earth
Ground
A. DIN1 and 2
* Limits current to 6 mA maximum.
B. DINU1 and 2
FIGURE 8-13 Digital Inputs DIN and DINU
Digital output wiring is shown in Figure 8-14. Three diagrams are provided showing current and voltage outputs.
Note the use of transient suppression diodes in Figure 8-14C. Always install a transient suppression component
across a reactive component, such as a relay coil, to protect the semiconductor devices in the controller.
Digital output common, DOUTC, is connected to station common.
May 2001
8-15
UM354N-1
Resistive Load
Controller Terminals
_
Controller Circuitry
5
8
9
X03112S3
Installation
26 Vdc
(+)
Digital Output
(-)
Common
Controller Terminals
_
Controller Circuitry
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
A. Current Output, Isolated
Controller Terminals
_
Controller Circuitry
5
Inductive Load with
Suppression Diode,
See Note
26 Vdc
5
26 Vdc
Resistive Load
10K Typical
8
9
Digital Output
Common
(+)
(-)
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
B. Voltage Output, Non-Isolated
8
9
Digital Output
+
24 Vdc
_
Common
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
Notes:
1. Inductive load must be shunted with a transient
suppression diode (1N4005 or equiv.) to prevent
damage to station output circuit.
2. See Table 8.1 for DOUT2 terminal numbers.
C. Current Output, Isolated
Figure 8-14 Digital Output DOUT1, Resistive and Inductive Loads
8-16
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.4.5 Thermocouple Input Wiring
Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 can be configured for thermocouple or RTD input.
Thermocouple input wiring is shown in Figures 8-15 and 8-16. Shown is a typical grounded tip thermocouple. If
an ungrounded thermocouple is used, the thermocouple wire shield can be grounded at the controller.
Thermocouple wire often has a solid conductor. Make connections as outlined in Section 8.4.2. Be sure that the
solid conductor is satisfactorily clamped by the terminal screw and pressure plate. Two reference junctions (RJ)
are supplied in the I/O Expander board installation kit. Install as outlined below.
+
Thermocouple Wire
T/C
+
_
RJ
_
Isolated
Power
45
46
47
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
48
Isolated
Ground
Controller Circuitry
Controller Terminals
Notes:
X03114S2
1. RJ - Cold Junction Reference
2. See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminals.
3. Grounded junction shown. For ungrounded junction, connect
cable shield to AINUc_ (Analog Input Universal Common).
FIGURE 8-15 Universal Analog Input AINU1, Thermocouple Input
1.
Slip a length of insulating sleeving over the portion of each
reference junction lead that will remain exposed after
installation. Carefully form the leads as shown.
2.
Loosen the two terminal screws using a straight blade
screwdriver with a 1/8″ (3 mm) blade width. Insert the
reference junction leads into the two openings in the
connector adjacent to the selected terminal numbers. See
Figure 6-16.
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19)
0.5
(12.7)
0.1
(0.25)
Notes:
1. Insulate leads with
sleeving.
2. Dimensions are in
inches (millimeters)
and are approximate.
3.
Check that all involved components and station wiring are fully inserted. Carefully tighten the terminal
screws to 5 in. lbs (0.6 N-m).
4.
Press the reference junction against the connector.
5.
Repeat the above steps if the second thermocouple input is needed.
May 2001
MG000601
Thermocouple reference junction (RJ) installation:
8-17
Installation
UM354N-1
MG00096B
Notes:
1. As shown, Terminal Cover removed.
2. Place Reference Junction against outer wall
of terminal block, as shown.
3. Sleeve Reference Junction leads.
Terminals 33 - 52
Terminal 45, Analog Input Universal 1a
Terminal 48, Analog Input Universal 1d
Reference Junction for AINU1
See Notes 2 and 3
Reference Junction for AINU2
See Notes 2 and 3
Terminal 49, Analog Input Universal 2a
Terminal 52, Analog Input Universal 2d
FIGURE 8-16 Reference Junction Locations and Connections
8.4.6 RTD Input Wiring
Wiring for 2-, 3-, and 4-wire RTDs is shown in Figure 8-17. Make connections as outlined in Section 8.4.2. Note
the wire jumper between terminals 47 and 48 when a 2-wire RTD is installed.
Controller Terminals
46
Jumper
2-Wire
RTD
3-Wire
RTD
45
46
4-Wire
RTD
46
47
47
47
48
48
48
Note: See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminals.
Isolated
Power
45
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
Isolated
Ground
NC = No Connection
Controller Circuitry
NC
45
X03115S1
FIGURE 8-17 Universal Analog Input AINU1; 2, 3, and 4-Wire RTD Inputs
8-18
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.4.7 Ohms and Slidewire Input Wiring
Function blocks AINU1 and AINU2 can be configured for ohm or slidewire inputs. Figures 8-18 and 8-19 show
the needed connections.
46
47
48
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
Isolated
Ground
Position
Slidewire
X03119S1
Note: See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminals.
46
Jumper
Ohms
Source
Isolated
Power
45
Controller Circuitry
Isolated
Power
45
47
48
Universal
Converter,
Isolated
Inputs
Isolated
Ground
Note: See Table 8.1 for AINU2 terminals.
FIGURE 8-18 Universal Analog Input AINU1,
Ohms Input
Controller Circuitry
Controller Terminals
Controller Terminals
X03113S1
FIGURE 8-19 Universal Analog Input AINU1,
Slidewire Input
8.4.8 Relay Output Wiring
Function blocks ROUT1 and ROUT2 are located on the I/O Expander board. They provide two single-pole,
double-throw relay outputs, as shown in Figure 8-20. Relay contact ratings are stated in Section 14.6.
The load connected to a closed contact should draw a current between the minimum and maximum contact ratings.
A resistive load is recommended. An inductive or capacitive load can cause high peak currents or contact arcing
which can pit or otherwise damage contacts. The arcing associated with an inductive load can be limited by
connecting a voltage transient suppressor, such as a 1N4005 diode, across the load.
Controller Terminals
Controller Circuitry
NC
ROUT1
NO
NC
ROUT2
NO
27
Load
28
+
29
30
_
External
Power
Supply
_
31
+
32
Load
X03120S1
FIGURE 8-20 Universal Relay Outputs ROUT1 and 2, Resistive Load
8.4.9 Local Instrument Link Wiring
The Local Instrument Link (LIL) is a high performance digital data link that carries commands and responses
between user-selected stations. Each station must be identified by a unique link address. This address permits
commands and responses to be sent from one station to another specific station. Lower link addresses are 1
through 32. A Model 321 Expansion Satellite is used to add an upper link with addresses 33 through 64. In the
controller, the Station address is entered as the ADDRESS parameter in the STATN function block. Specific
instructions for setting a link address in other models are available in the Installation And Service Instructions for
that particular model. Refer to SD15492 for complete installation, wiring, and service instructions for the Local
Instrument Link.
May 2001
8-19
Installation
UM354N-1
Figure 8-21 shows typical wiring for stations connected to the LIL. Link cabling and wiring involves twinaxial
cable and twisted pair wiring. Twinaxial cable is a twisted pair, shielded cable that is used for runs of 2 feet
(0.6m) or more. Unshielded twisted pair wiring is used mainly for interconnecting row mounted stations. Twisted
pair wiring can also be used for runs up to 2 feet in length, for example, between rows of stations.
Two types of twinaxial cables are recommended: Belden 9182 for links up to 1500 feet (457 meters) and Belden
9860 for links up to 4000 feet (1220 meters). Either type of cable may be used on a single link. To prevent noise
interference, electrically distribute stations as follows:
• no more than 8 stations may be connected within any 10 foot (3m) section of lower or upper link
• no more than 16 stations may be connected within any 100 foot (30m) section of lower or upper link
• insert 100 feet of coiled twinaxial cable between clusters of up to 8 stations
Tap boxes can be installed to serve as a connector interface between Link twinaxial cables and twisted pair wiring
connected to screw terminals. Tap boxes provide over-voltage/lightening protection by including eight transient
voltage suppressors and one 130V surge arrestor. Link termination is also provided by two 150V resistors.
10 ft. (3m) Maximum Twisted Pair Length
See Notes 3, 4, and 5
Model 352P
Model 353
iPAC Control
or 352
or 354
Carrier Field Terminals
Tap
Box
Blue
LK+
White
LK-
SG
See Note 1
P
31
32
NCA
NCB
Carrier
Ground
Bus
Earth
Ground
P
B1
P
B2
AG
Earth
Ground
3
4
NCA
NCB
G
Earth
Ground
Tap
Box
P
LK+
LK-
SG
See Note 2
See Note 3
AG00270a
Notes:
1. Drain wire of shield connects to terminal SG. A short jumper of 16 AWG insulated wire grounds shield to
station earth ground.
2. Drain wire of shield is cut back and insulated.
3. Twisted pair wiring is used to interconnect stations separated by up to 2 ft (0.6 meters). Twinaxial cable
is used for distances greater than 2 ft (0.6 meters). The maximum twisted pair length is 10 ft (3 meters).
4. When there is no tap box at the end of a link, connect a 150 ohm ,±5%, resistor across the link conductors
at the last station.
5. See Local Instrument Link Installation And Service Instruction SD15492 for details.
FIGURE 8-21 LIL Network Wiring
8-20
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.4.10 LonWorks Wiring
Figure 8-22 shows typical LonWorks network wiring to the controller. The network termination resistor is
supplied in the installation kit. Connections to remote devices are described in each device User’s Manual,
supplied with the devices. See Section 8.4.2 for wiring guidelines.
LonWorks
Board
25
26
IOA
Remote Devices
P
node 1
IOB
G
P
Controller Circuitry
Controller Terminals
P
node n
= 22 Gauge (AWG) Twisted Pair Wire
52.3 Ω Network
Termination Resistor
X03143S2
FIGURE 8-22 LonWorks Network Wiring
8.4.11 Modbus Wiring
This section describes the wiring needed to connect a host device to a controller’s Modbus network interface.
When connected, the host can read data from and write data to a controller in a command/response format.
Most host devices communicate using RS232 while the Modbus network interface is RS485. As shown in Figure
8-23, a 2-wire RS485 to RS232 converter is installed to perform the protocol conversion and adapt the connection
hardware. A shielded RS232 cable with either DB9 or DB25 connectors is installed between the host device and
the converter. An RS485 shielded, twisted-pair cable connects the converter to a Moore 354N. Up to 32 Procidia
i|pac and Moore 352P, 353, and 354N controllers can be connected since RS485 is a multi-drop network.
Shown below are the jumper locations and identifiers for the Entrelec® Isolated Converter shown in Figure 8-23.
Rt (INT1)
R (INT2)
E (INT3)
120Ω
RS485 link on
one pair
AG00336a
For access to jumpers
carefully remove the side
of the module that has the
jumper label.
Entrelec ILPH 084.233.11 Isolated Converter
May 2001
8-21
Installation
UM354N-1
To APACS ACM
Serial Port
Note 5
Cable Label
RS485 to RS232
Isolated Converter,
Entrelec ILPH 084.233.11
(RD)
3, RxD
RS232
Cable,
Note 1
4
8, RTS
(RTS)
(SG)
5, SG
A
TxD+
B
RxD+
M
RxD
K
TxD
(TD)
2, TxD
L
CTRL
G
COM
P+
P0V
5V
V+
V-
8.5-26 Vdc
RS485
Cable,
Note 2
D
TxDE
RxDC
J
Model 353
or 354
3
NCA
Model 353
or 354
3
120
Note 4
4
NCB
4
6
6
G
G
F
Jumper Settings
Rt
Note 7
Case/
Safety
Ground
R
E
Case/
Safety
Ground
Common Ground Bus
MG001172
Single Point
Earth Ground
A. Modbus Communications, APACS ACM to Model 353 or Model 354
To Personal Computer
Serial Port,
Note 6
Cable Label
RS485 to RS232
Isolated Converter,
Entrelec ILPH 084.233.11
2, RxD
(RD)
3, TxD
(TD)
4, DTR
8, CTS
RS232
Cable,
Note 1
(SG)
5, SG
RTS lead is not used.
Cut back and insulate.
8.5-26 Vdc
M
RxD
K
TxD
A
TxD+
B
RxD+
L
CTRL
G
COM
D
TxDE
RxDC
J
P+
P0V
5V
V+
V-
Model 353
or 354
RS485
Cable,
Note 2
3
NCA
Model 353
or 354
3
120
Note 4
4
NCB
6
4
6
F
Jumper Settings
Note 7
Rt
G
G
Case/
Safety
Ground
R
E
Case/
Safety
Ground
Common Ground Bus
Single Point
Earth Ground
B. Modbus Communications, Personal Computer to Model 353 or Model 354
Notes:
1. RS232 cable must be shielded and less than 50 feet (15 meters) in length. Recommended cable is
Belden 9927, 24 AWG, or equivalent. For an assembled cable, order Siemens PN 16137-191.
2. RS485 recommended cable is Belden 9842, 24 AWG, 120 ohm or equivalent.
3. Up to 32 Moore 352Ps, Moore 353s, Moore 354s, and i|pac's can be connected.
4. A user-supplied 120 ohm network termination resistor should be installed on the last device on the network.
5. In ACM's SERIAL Function Block, set Flow Control to 1.
6. Assembled cable above has DB9 (plug) connector. Connection to computer serial port may require a
DB9 (socket/receptacle) gender adapter.
7. Connection between F and J provided by Entrelec converter.
FIGURE 8-23 Modbus Communications, Moore 353 and 354/354N to
APACS ACM and Personal Computer
8-22
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
8.4.12 Wiring to a Model 363 VIEWPAC Recorder
Figure 8-24 shows the wiring needed to connect a Model 363 analog input to a controller analog input. As shown,
a 1-5 Vdc transmitter input to the controller is also routed to the recorder’s Analog Input 1.
Model 353A or 354/354N
Controller Terminals
External
Power
120/240 Vac
25W
47-63 Hz
Hot
Model 363 VIEWPAC
Recorder Terminals
H
H
Recorder
Power Input
and Ground,
See note 3
Neutral
N
N
Earth Ground
G
G
5
A5 Recorder
Analog Input 1,
A6 See note 2
26 Vdc
Analog Input,
+
e.g. Model 340 or
SITRANS P DSIII,
_
2-Wire Transmitter,
4-20 mA Output
1-5 Vdc
250
20
18
AIN1
Station
Common
_ Analog Input,
e.g. Model 340 or
SITRANS P DSIII,
+ 2-Wire Transmitter,
4-20 mA Output
A7
Recorder
Analog Input 2,
See note 2
A8
X03109S3
_
+
Power Supply
Common Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
Notes:
1. See UM353-1, UM354-1, or UM354N-1, Table 8.1 for AIN2, 3, and 4 terminals.
2. Recorder inputs are isolated 1-5 Vdc, Refer to UM363-1 for other Recorder analog inputs.
3. Refer to UM363-1 for power requirements and detailed wiring and grounding information.
FIGURE 8-24 Moore 354/354N To Model 363 VIEWPAC Analog Input Wiring
8.4.13 Power Wiring
Basic connections for AC and DC power input are shown in Figure 8-25. Wiring guidelines are given in Section
8.4.2.
External Circuit Breaker, Fuse or
On-Off Switch
H
Neutral, White
N
Case/Safety Ground, Green
G
AC To DC
Power Supply
on
MPU Board
MG001081
Hot, Black
Controller Circuitry
External
Power
120/240 Vac
Controller Terminals
Earth Ground
FIGURE 8-25 Controller Power Wiring
Power input to the controller should be routed through a clearly labeled circuit breaker, fuse or on-off switch that is
located near the controller and is accessible by the operator. The protective device should be located in a nonexplosive atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere. It will permit removal of controller power
without affecting the on-line status of adjacent controllers.
Where separate wiring is not required, power input wiring can daisy chain together a series of controllers. Here,
each controller, except for the last controller on the daisy chain, will have two wires (18 AWG recommended)
inserted in terminal H and in terminal N. If a larger gauge is to be used, the two wires can be inserted in a crimpMay 2001
8-23
Installation
UM354N-1
on connector and the connector inserted in the terminal, for a more secure installation. Daisy chained wiring is
shown in Figure 8-26. Perform the following steps at H, N, and G terminals at each involved controller.
Model 354 Controllers
1
2
3
4
Circuit Breaker, Fuse,
or On/Off Switch
Model 354
Last In Row
H
H
H
H
H
Neutral, White
N
N
N
N
N
Case/Safety Ground, Green
G
G
G
G
G
MG001081
Hot, Black
External Power
120/240 Vac
Earth Ground
Controller Terminals
FIGURE 8-26 Daisy Chained Power Wiring
To fabricate the power cable:
1.
Terminal Block Connections: Remove 1/2" (13 mm) to 5/8" (16 mm) from each Hot, Neutral, and Ground
wire to be inserted in a terminal.
Crimp-On Connector Connections: Remove 1/4" (6 mm) to 5/16" (8 mm) from each Hot, Neutral, and Ground
wire to be inserted in a crimp-on connector.
2.
Crimp-On Connector only - Insert the wires into the crimp-on connector until the wires are visible at the pin
end of the connector. Use a standard electrical connector crimp tool to crimp the connection. Be certain that
both power input wires are fully inserted in the connector before crimping.
3.
Loosen the terminal screw using a straight blade screwdriver with a 1/8" (3 mm) blade width.
4.
Insert the striped wire or crimp-on connector pin into the terminal and tighten the screw to 4.5 in. lbs (0.5 Nm).
8.4.14 Display Cable Connections
Figure 8-27 shows the display cabling needed to connect the Controller to an PC-based HMI and to a Faceplate
Display. Refer to the Figure for maximum cable length and connections. All connectors are keyed.
Local HMI Operator Interface, Model 354N
A local operator interface should be connected to the controller with a serial communication cable. The connection
on the 354N side is a DB9/M and requires a null modem cable (P/N 15720-353, length is 10-feet (3 meters). The
communication is RS232 and the maximum length is 50 feet (per RS232). A shorter length cable is recommended
in electrically noisy environments. See Figure 8-27A.
Direct Mount Faceplate Display, Model 354N_D
The Display will be factory installed on the Controller and the display cable connected when the direct mount
option is specified on the order. See Figure 8-27B. If the Display is being installed in the field, refer to Section 8.3
Mechanical Installation.
Remote Mount Faceplate Display, Model 354N_R
The ribbon cable and needed hardware are contained in a Remote Display Kit. To install the kit, refer to the
Instruction supplied with the kit and the following.
1.
Remove the small cover plate from the Controller cover.
2.
Gently extract the connector and ribbon cable from inside the cover. If the connector cannot be extracted, go to
Section 11.6 to disassemble the Controller; then return to this section, step 3.
3.
Locate the chassis mount connector on the remote cable assembly and fasten it to the Controller cover using
the supplied hardware. Orient the cable assembly as shown in Figure 8-27C.
4.
Open the two ejector levers and press the cable-mounted connector exiting the Controller cover into the covermounted connector. Close the ejector levers when the connectors are fully mated.
8-24
May 2001
UM354N-1
Installation
5.
Mount the Faceplate Display as described in the Instruction supplied with the kit or as indicated in Section 8.3
Mechanical Installation.
6.
Route the ribbon cable to the Faceplate Display.
7.
At the back of the Display, open the two ejector levers and press the cable-mounted connector into the Display
mounted connector. Close the ejector levers when the connectors are fully mated. The connectors are keyed.
A. Cabling, Controller To
Local HMI Operator Interface
COM2
Local LCD
Operator Interface
B. Cabling, Controller to
Direct Mounted Faceplate Display
Controller
Modbus Display Cable,
DB9/F to DB9/F,
10 ft (3 m)
Controller,
Bottom View
Display Cable,
Faceplate Display,
4 in. (100 mm),
Rear View
Ribbon Cable from
MPU Controller Board
Inside Controller Cover
C. Cabling, Controller to
Remote Mounted Faceplate Display
Controller
Display Cable,
45 in. (1143 mm),
Ribbon Cable from
Remote Display Kit
Faceplate Display,
Rear View
AG00200b
Display Cable,
Ribbon Cable from
MPU Controller Board
FIGURE 8-27 Controller to Workstation and Faceplate Display Cabling
May 2001
8-25
Installation
UM354N-1
8.5 CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT CABLE CONNECTIONS
Figure 8-28 shows the cabling needed to connect a personal computer running the Graphical Configuration Utility
to a Controller’s Modbus display serial port for controller configuration. Note that the MMJ11 port on the
underside of a Faceplate Display bezel is disabled.
AG00201a
Communications Cable,
MJ11 to MJ11 with
Adapters
Controller,
Bottom View
Personal Computer running
Configuration Utility Software
Connect to COM1 or COM2 using
MJ11 to 9-pin or 25-pin adapter.
For Controller configuration, connect to Controller 9-pin/M.
Use MJ11 to 9-pin/F adapter.
Note:
1. See Accessories in Section 14 for communications cable and adapter part numbers.
FIGURE 8-28 Cabling for Configuration and Application Development
8.6 FACTORY CALIBRATION
Unless a special calibration is ordered, the factory calibration is as follows:
TABLE 8.2 Factory Calibration
ANALOG INPUT OR OUTPUT
Analog input function blocks
Analog output function blocks
Thermocouple
RTD
Slidewire
Ohms
Millivolt
FACTORY CALIBRATION,
UP TO V1.21
1 to 5 Vdc
4 to 20 mA
Type J, Upscale Break
CAL ZERO - 0°C
CAL FULL - 500°C
CAL VIEW - -3.3 to 103.3%
CAL ZERO - 0%
CAL FULL - 100%
CAL VIEW - Contact factory
CAL ZERO - 0 ohms
CAL FULL - 5000 ohms
CAL VIEW - Contact factory
CAL ZERO - 0.0 mV
CAL FULL - 10 mV
CAL VIEW - 0% TO 100%
FACTORY CALIBRATION,
V1.30 AND ABOVE
1 to 5 Vdc
4 to 20 mA
Type J, Upscale Break
CAL ZERO - 0°C
CAL FULL - 500°C
CAL VIEW - -3.3 to 103.3%
CAL ZERO - 0%
CAL FULL - 100%
CAL VIEW - Contact factory
CAL ZERO - 0 ohms
CAL FULL - 5000 ohms
CAL VIEW - Contact factory
CAL ZERO - -19.0 mV
CAL FULL - +19.0 mV
CAL VIEW - 0% TO 100%
Section 12.0 provides calibration procedures that may be used to check or change factory calibration.
n
8-26
May 2001
UM354N-1
Operation
9.0 LOCAL FACEPLATE OPERATION
Controller operation is described in this section. Each faceplate display, pushbutton, and knob will be discussed
first in normal operation mode and then in configuration mode. This section contains many references to function
blocks. As necessary, refer to Section 3 for details about a function block.
Most operator controls are shown on the faceplate below. Several additional pushbuttons are located behind the
flip-down door at the bottom of the faceplate. These will be discussed in the configuration mode portion of this
section.
9.1 NORMAL OPERATION MODE
•
•
•
6-Digit Numeric Display - displays the numeric value of the variable
identified by the 8-character alphanumeric display. Numbers can be
displayed from 0.00000 to 999999 or -0.0000 to -99999. Any input
exceeding these limits will be shown as the maximum or minimum
displayable value and cause the display to flash.
8-Character Alphanumeric Display - normally displays the loop tag with
the dot suffix of the variable currently showing in the 6-digit numeric
display (e.g. TC2053.P is the Process variable for loop TC2053). A loop
tag that is displayed is called the Active Loop and all operator controls
(e.g. PB1, PB2, A/M, ACK, D, UNITS, ALARM, TUNE, TAG, QUICK)
will affect the function blocks within the Active Loop.
PB1 Pushbutton - controls the operation of the PB1SW (PB 1 transfer
SWitch) function block when the block has been configured for use
within the Active Loop. See the function block details in Section 3 for
more information on PB1SW.
s
2 4 2 3. 4 5
T C2 0 5 3 . P
S
PB1
100
P
L
S
80
ACK
60
D
PB2
40
A
M
20
UNITS
0
LOOP
0
CLOSE
|
|
||
100
OPEN
•
PB2 Pushbutton - controls the operation of the PB2SW (PB 2 transfer
SWitch) function block when the block has been configured for use
within the Active Loop. See the function block details for more
information on PB2SW.
•
A/M Pushbutton - controls the operation of an A/M (Auto/Manual)
function block when the block has been configured for use within the
X03141S2
Active Loop. See the function block details for more information on
A/M. When the A/M is switched to Auto the numeric display will show the Setpoint value, as indicated by .S
in the alphanumeric display, and when switched to Manual, the Valve value and .V will be shown.
•
LOOP Pushbutton - One or more loops can be configured. When more than one loop has been configured, the
LOOP button will advance the operator display to the next Active Loop. All operator controls now affect the
Active Loop that is currently shown in the alphanumeric display (e.g. FC2367). When a loop is first
displayed, the loop tag will appear in the alphanumeric and the displayed variable will be the same as when
the loop was last viewed.
•
ACK Pushbutton - this button is used together with the L and S status LEDs to manage events (e.g. alarm,
status, and error conditions) within the controller. Events have user assigned priorities 1-5 (with 1 the
highest) and will be organized within the controller, first by priority and then by order of occurrence.
•
S Status LED - Indicates that event is active in the Station. A flashing LED indicates that the event needs
to be acknowledged.
•
L Status LED - Indicates that event is active in the displayed Loop. A flashing LED indicates that the
event needs to be acknowledged.
May 2001
9-1
Operation
UM354N-1
Priority:
•
Priority 1 causes the station bargraphs and event LEDs to flash and requires acknowledgment to stop
flashing. This is the highest priority.
•
Priority 2 also flashes the bargraphs but stops flashing when the event clears (i.e. Self Clearing).
•
Priority 3 causes the event LEDs L & S to flash and stops only when the event is acknowledged.
•
Priority 4 also causes the event LEDs to flash but stops when the event clears.
•
Priority 5 displays the event but does not require that it be acknowledged. This is the lowest priority.
If the event is in the active loop, the alphanumeric display will alternate between the loop tag and the
unacknowledged condition (e.g. ‘TC2053.P’ <---> ‘A3 HI’). Press the ACK button to acknowledge this condition
and stop the flashing.
The ACK button, after all events have been acknowledged, can then be used to scroll through any active alarm or
status conditions within the Active Loop. Pressing the ACK button will scroll through the list of active events and
wrap around to the start of the list when more than one event is active. This function will time out if the ACK
button is not pressed for 3 seconds and return to the normal display mode.
If an unacknowledged event is not within the active loop, press the LOOP button to page through the loops.
•
D Pushbutton - changes the variable currently displayed. Pressing this pushbutton steps the display one
position in the sequence P, S, V, X and Y from any starting point within the display select group.
•
UNITS Pushbutton - displays the units of the variable shown in the alphanumeric display. When the button is
pressed the units that apply to the displayed variable will appear in the alphanumeric (e.g. ‘TC2053.P’ ‘deg F’,
nds, the alphanumeric display will return to the variable tag.
•
S Bargraph - this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller setpoint in the Active Loop.
Bargraph height shows the setpoint as the % of range value. The setpoint in engineering units can be viewed
by pressing the D button to display the dot S parameter (e.g. TC2053.S).
•
P Bargraph - this vertical bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller process in the Active Loop.
Bargraph height shows the process as the % of range value. The process in engineering units can be viewed
by pressing the D button to display the dot P parameter (e.g. TC2053.P).
•
Pulser Knob - rotate the Pulser to change the value in the numeric display (e.g. Setpoint, Valve, or other
variable configured for normal operator display changes such as Ratio, Bias). The Pulser knob is also used in
configuration to change values in the alphanumeric display.
An accelerator is included. Turning the knob faster multiplies the rate of change of the displayed parameter.
Large value changes then require fewer knob rotations.
•
9-2
V Bargraph - this horizontal bargraph displays the scaled range of the controller output in the Active Loop.
The output/valve signal is shown as the % of range value. The value in engineering units can be viewed by
pressing the D button to display the dot V parameter (e.g. TC2053.V).
May 2001
UM354N-1
Operation
9.2 CONFIGURATION MODE
Configuration pushbuttons are located behind the flip-down door on the lower quarter of the faceplate. Note that
many of these buttons are used in both the normal operation mode and configuration mode, as described below.
•
ENTER/EXIT CONF - press to enter configuration when the station is
in the normal operation mode or to exit configuration when in the
configuration mode.
•
ALARM/STEP DOWN - has a dual purpose. When in the normal
operation mode, pressing the button will scroll through the alarm
configuration parameters if the ALARM function block has been
configured in the Active Loop. The alarm setting is displayed in
engineering units and the % of range value will also be displayed on the
setpoint bargraph by flashing a single segment equal to the % of range
value. If security clearance is satisfied, the parameters can also be
changed. See the ALARM function block description for details on the
parameters. Press the ENTER/EXIT CONFIG button to return to the online displays.
s
S T A T I ON
S
PB1
100
P
L
S
80
ACK
60
D
PB2
40
A
M
20
UNITS
0
LOOP
When in the configuration mode, this button will step down to the next
configuration level. See the Configuration Overview section of this
manual for details on typical levels of the configuration mode.
•
TUNE/STEP UP - has a dual purpose. When in the normal operation
mode, pressing the button will scroll through the controller tuning
parameters and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm, if
configured for the loop controller. If security clearance is satisfied, the
parameters can also be changed. Press the ENTER/EXIT CONFIG
button to return to the on-line displays.
0
|
|
||
CLOSE
ENTER
EXIT
CONF
100
OPEN
TUNE
STEP
UP
ALARM
STEP
DOWN
TAG
QUICK
STORE
X03141S2
When in the configuration mode, this button will step up to the next configuration level.
•
TAG/<--- - has a dual purpose. When in the normal operation mode, pressing the button will scroll the
complete tag name of the Active Loop in the alphanumeric display. The tag will scroll one character at a time
starting on the right (e.g. -------T, -----TI, ----TIC).
When in the configuration mode, this button will provide a shift left function for configurable items (e.g. will
shift the decimal point left).
•
QUICK/---> - has a dual purpose. When in the normal mode this button will step through and access either
previously selected configuration parameters in the quick hold blocks configured within the Active Loop (e.g.
the HOLD value in QHOLD03 which was labeled to display TEMP_LIM having a range of 300.0 to 600.0)
or parameters defined as QUICKSET7 in certain function blocks (e.g. RATIO). Press the ENTER/EXIT
CONFIG button to return to the on-line displays.
When in the configuration mode, this button will provide a shift right function for configurable items (e.g. will
shift the decimal point right).
•
7
STORE - will store the configuration parameter to memory. All configuration changes, except for QUICK,
‘BIAS’, ‘RATIO’, and (quickset hold), require a store before the change is applied to the configuration.
However, the QUICK functions will also require a store for the value to be placed in permanent memory,
otherwise, it will only remain in battery RAM. Values in battery will be used on a hot or warm start. A cold
start will use the value in permanent memory.
ALARM, TUNE, and QUICK are QUICKSET functions.
May 2001
9-3
Operation
UM354N-1
9.3 AUTOTUNE PROCEDURE
If the AUTOTUNE parameter in the controller function block is set to YES, the autotune procedure can be
initiated using the TUNE pushbutton located behind the flip-down door. The Autotuner will substitute an
ON_OFF controller for the PD or PID function. By making +/- step changes to the valve position, the controller
will control the process at the current setpoint while it learns about the process dynamics. The controller then uses
this knowledge to derive recommended P, I, and D settings.
Press the TUNE button to step through the following parameters and, if desired, initiate autotune:
PG ....................
TI .....................
MR ...................
TD ....................
% DEV .............
% HYS .............
AUTOTUNE ....
AT PG ..............
AT TI ...............
AT TD ..............
STORE AT ......
Proportional Gain setting - (view or change)
Integral Time setting - PID/PIDAG controllers only (view or change)
Manual Reset setting - PD controller only (view or change)
Derivative Time setting - (view or change)
The peak/peak % process deviation that the autotuner will maintain during test
The % process change needed before the valve output will switch
Set to YES and STORE to start autotune. Press EXIT CONF to return to normal
operator faceplate operation.
Proportional Gain setting recommended by the autotuner
Integral Time setting recommended by the autotuner
Derivative Time setting recommended by the autotuner
Pressing STORE transfers autotuner recommended settings to controller
While autotuning, the controller will continue normal operation. Pressing the A/M button to switch the controller
to Manual will terminate autotune. While in autotune, the alphanumeric display will alternate between
‘AUTOTUNE’ and the loop tag name and will stop alternating when the autotune program has been completed.
Once completed, the controller will return to the mode prior to autotune initiation. When the POST AT (in the
controller block) is set to auto transfer, the recommended tuning parameters will automatically be transferred to the
controller and it will return to automatic control. To review the AT parameters before initiating autotune, press
TUNE and then press STORE at the STORE AT prompt to transfer the recommended settings.
Chart 1 (0-100% range) illustrates a typical autotune exercise. Variable 1 is the Valve and 2 the Process. In this
example, the process has noise with a standard deviation of less than 0.5%. The % HYS (% hysteresis band) is set
to 0.75% and the % DEV (% deviation from setpoint which should be set to at least 4 times the % HYS value) is
set to 3%.
The autotuner will use the initial valve step size (set as % STEP in the controller function block) during the first 11/2 cycles to learn the approximate gain of the process. It will then adjust the valve step size during the remainder
of the autotuning exercise to maintain the % DEV setting. When this test concludes, the recommended settings are
transferred to the controller and a 20% setpoint change is made to illustrate the controller tuning.
When the autotuner is started for the next autotune exercise, it will use the process gain learned during the
previous exercise to determine the valve step size unless: the parameter AT RESET in the controller block has been
stored as YES, warnings occurred during the first test, or the station has been power cycled.
9-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Operation
Autotuning Considerations:
Chart 1
Process Noise - could have an effect where the autotuner will not produce periodic valve cycles. The autotuner
will complete an exercise but results may not be satisfactory. This is illustrated in the first autotuning exercise in
chart 2 which is the same process as chart 1 but the % HYS was set at 0.5%. If these results occur when the
controller % HYS has been set to A (auto set hysteresis) the controller may be having difficulty deriving a good
noise figure and manual entry of the % HYS parameter should be considered. The % HYS value should be
increased to at least twice the standard deviation value of the noise. In cases where the noise amplitude is
extremely large, the filter on the analog input should be increased to minimize the amplitude of the noise seen by
the controller. The value of the % DEV parameter should be set to at least four time the % HYS value for best
results.
Steady State Conditions - must be established for the process and controller prior to starting an autotune exercise.
The autotuner can be initiated while in manual or auto. Steady state is reached when the present valve signal has
brought the process to its present value, and the setpoint is equal to the process. When not at steady state, valve
cycles will not be symmetrical as illustrated in the second tuning exercise in chart 2 or, as a worse case situation,
the valve may not cycle at all. If the valve is does cycle, although not symmetrically, adequate tuning results will
still be obtained.
May 2001
9-5
Operation
UM354N-1
Chart 2
Autotuner Errors - terminate the autotune exercise and returns the control loop to the point prior to the start of
autotune. An Error message can be cleared by pressing the ACK button.
TABLE 9.1 Autotune Errors
ERROR
E1
E2
E3
DESCRIPTION
A zero crossing did not occur within 120 minutes. Most likely caused by the control loop not being
in a steady state condition when the autotuner was started.
Process went out of range twice (<0%, >100%). The first time an out of range occurs, the
autotuner will cut the valve step size in half and restart the exercise.
When the autotune algorithm has been set to HYS = A and it calculates a required hysteresis value
greater than 10%. Process filtering should be added to reduce the noise seen by the autotuner.
Autotuner Warnings - do not terminate the autotune exercise and are normally eliminated by increasing the %
HYS and/or the % DEV settings. In some cases, they may have been caused by load changes that occurred during
the autotune exercise. The autotuner will still derive recommended tuning values but they will not automatically
be transferred to the controller, if that feature was requested. The warnings can be cleared by pressing the ACK
button.
TABLE 9.2 Autotune Warnings
WARNING
W1
W2
W3
9-6
DESCRIPTION
Indicates that the % DEV setting is not greater than 4 times the % HYS setting.
Indicates that the process deviations during the first one and a half cycles, where the autotuner first
learns about the process gain, were inconsistent.
Indicates that the average % DEV values during the final phase of the autotuning exercise were not
greater than 4 times the % HYS setting. If this warning occurs while the % DEV selection was set
to A (auto selection of deviation setting), the use of manual entry should be considered.
May 2001
UM354N-1
Operation
9.4 REMOVABLE CONFIGURATION BOARD
The Removable Configuration Board (RCB) can be installed in this controller 8. It retains a complete copy of the
configuration being used by the controller in which the RCB is installed. Should that controller fail, the RCB can
be removed and installed in the replacement controller. The stored configuration can then be selected as the active
configuration in the controller.
On power up, the controller will test the RCB and compare the configuration stored in the RCB to the controller’s
configuration. If the RCB passes all tests and the configurations are identical, the controller will power up
normally and use the configuration from the MPU board. If a problem is detected or the configurations are
different, an ON-LINE STATUS or OFF-LINE ERROR message will be displayed. See the Maintenance section
for messages.
9.5 REAL TIME CLOCK/CONFIGURATION BACKUP BOARD
The controller is available with an optional real time clock and configuration backup board9. The configuration
backup performs the same functions as the RCB described above. In addition, the board includes a real time clock.
The time can be set using the built-in CLOCK function block in the STATN parameters. It can also be set over the
Modbus, LIL, or Ethernet network.
n
8
9
RCB requires MPU Controller board firmware version 1.31 or higher.
RTC/CB requires MPU Controller board firmware version 2.0 or higher.
May 2001
9-7
Operation
9-8
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Controller and System Test
10.0 CONTROLLER AND SYSTEM TEST
This section presents a series of steps to verify controller operation and to help a user become familiar with the
functionality of the controller. A new controller is shipped factory configured with either Factory Configured
Option FCO101 Single Loop Controller or a user-specified custom configuration. The following procedure is for
FCO101 with factory set parameter values. If a custom configuration was installed, or if you have configured the
controller, it may be necessary to modify the procedure to test all function blocks in that configuration.
To determine the current configuration of a controller, either:
• refer to your configuration documentation for that controller
• upload the configuration to a PC running the Graphical Configuration software where the configuration can be
viewed
• enter the configuration mode and step through the configuration recording the configured function blocks and
entered parameter values
In the following steps, ‘press’ indicates a faceplate button (key).
10.1 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION AND TEST
The purpose of this section is to configure and test the controller and to familiarize the user with the controller’s
faceplate pushbuttons, pulser, and displays. This section also introduces several configuration topics.
10.1.1 Connections and Power
1.
Connect power to the controller. Refer to Controller nameplate for model number and then to Section 14 of
this manual for power requirements. Refer to Section 8 Installation for connections.
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard
Explosion hazard
Can cause death or injury
2.
•
Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment.
•
In potentially hazardous atmosphere, remove power from equipment before
connecting or disconnecting power, signal, or other circuit.
•
Observe all pertinent regulation regarding installation in hazardous area.
Depending upon the configuration, connect test equipment to the I/O terminals.
FCO101 - This FCO has one 1-5 Volt analog input (AIN1), and one 4-20 mA analog output (AOUT1)
configured. To verify both of these outputs, and to simulate an analog input for subsequent steps, jumper the
terminals shown below. Connect a 250 ohm range resistor across the terminals shown below to convert the 420 mA output to a 1-5 volt input. This will tie the valve output (horizontal bargraph) back in the loop as the
process input (P bargraph). Refer to Section 8 as necessary.
CONTROLLER
Model 352Plus
Models 353 and 354/354N
JUMPER TERMINAL
A4 to A7
17 to 20
INSTALL 250Ω
Ω AT TERMINALS
From A4 to A5
From 20 to 21
Custom Configuration - Refer to Section 8 as necessary for any additional connections.
May 2001
10-1
Controller and System Test
3.
UM354N-1
Apply power to the controller. Upon power up a two step test is automatically performed on the alphanumeric
display to light all segments. ‘WAIT’ will then appear on the alphanumeric display while the controller
performs power-up diagnostics.
If a power-up diagnostic test fails, an error code will be displayed on the alphanumeric display. Refer to
Sections 11.3 and 11.4 for troubleshooting error codes.
If WAIT remains displayed for more than 1 minute, the controller is not powering up correctly and power
connections should be checked for loose wiring.
10.1.2 Configuration
1.
Determine the current configuration; refer to Section 10.0 above. Then perform one of the following steps.
To load FCO101, go to step 2.
IMPORTANT
Loading FCO101 will overwrite the current configuration and any entries made
since shipment. Skip step 2 if the installed configuration is to be retained.
To proceed with the installed configuration, go to Section 10.1.3.
2.
To load FCO101 locally or to download it from a PC running the Graphical Configuration Utility, refer to
Section 2.7 for a procedure and to Section 4 for the block diagram and parameter values.
3.
Edit the configuration as desired. Refer to Section 10.1.5 Modifying an FCO.
10.1.3 Input/Output
Press the D button on the faceplate to scroll through Loop01.S (Setpoint), Loop01.V (Valve Output), and Loop01.P
(Process Input). Note from the FCO101 block diagram, that INPUT P is configured as the output from function
block AIN1, INPUT S is configured as the output of function block SETPT, and INPUT V is configured as the
output of function block A/M.
10.1.4 Auto/Manual
In FCO101, the A/M block is configured to switch Valve control from the PID controller in AUTO, to the Pulser
Knob in Manual. Press the A/M button to toggle the display between the (Loop01.S) setpoint parameter and the
(Loop01.V) valve parameter. Turn the pulser knob while displaying the valve parameter in manual to change the
value on the numeric display as well as the horizontal bargraph; turn the pulser knob while displaying the setpoint
parameter in Auto to change the numeric value and the vertical S bargraph.
10.1.5 Modifying an FCO
In addition to FCO101, Single Loop Control, there are several other factory configured options available, such as
Ratio Set Control (FCO105) and Cascade Control (FCO121). To download another FCO follow the steps in
Section 2.7.
Changes to an FCO may be made either by adding and deleting function blocks or by changing the default
parameter values. A Configuration Road Map is shown in Section 2. Note that an X represents pressing the STEP
DOWN or STEP UP button and a <> represents turning the pulser knob. For example, to add a function block you
would do the following steps:
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF.
2.
Press STEP DOWN until VIEW is displayed.
3.
Turn the pulser knob until ADD FB is displayed.
4.
Press STEP DOWN for the function block menu.
10-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Controller and System Test
5.
Turn the pulser knob to scroll through the available function blocks and press STORE to add the function
block to the configuration.
6.
To make changes to a function block parameter turn the Pulser Knob to EDIT FB.
7.
Press STEP DOWN for the function Block menu.
8.
Turn the pulser knob to the desired Function Block and Press STEP DOWN.
9.
The first function block parameter will be displayed. For example, RG PTR for the A/M Transfer Block or
MINSCALE for the Analog Input Block. Press STEP DOWN to display current parameter value or use the
pulser knob to select a different parameter. Press STORE to save any changes.
10. Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode.
Notice that the SETPT, ALARM, PID, and ODC function blocks in FCO101 all refer to AIN1 as the RG PTR
(range pointer) to determine the operating range of the function block. Be aware that making changes to a
configuration may require changing referenced RG PTRs. For example, in FCO105 (Ratio Set Control), the PID
controller output range is determined by the range of AIN2.
Try changing the default 0-100% range of analog input #1 (AIN1) to 100.0-500.0°F using the Configuration Road
Map in Section 2 or the following steps:
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to display LOOP.
2.
Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW.
3.
Turn pulser knob or use arrow button to display EDIT FB.
4.
Press STEP DOWN to display Function Block menu.
5.
Turn the pulser knob or use right arrow button to display AIN1.
6.
Press STEP DOWN to display MINSCALE.
7.
Press STEP DOWN to display current 0% of range.
8.
Turn the pulser knob to display 1 in the last digit. Display should read “0.00001”.
9.
Now press the left arrow (TAG) button. Notice that the decimal place will move one place every time the
button is pressed. Press the arrow button until the display reads “100.000” and press the STORE button.
10. Press STEP UP.
11. Turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display MAXSCALE.
12. Press STEP DOWN to display “100.000”.
13. Press the right arrow button until display reads “0.00001”.
14. Turn the pulser knob to change the last digit to 5. Display should read “0.00005”
15. Press left arrow button until display reads “500.000” and press store.
16. Press STEP UP.
17. Turn the pulser knob or the use arrow button to display DPP.
18. Press STEP DOWN. Notice “0.00” or 2 decimal places is the default. Turn the pulser knob to set the number
of decimal places to 0.0 or to show 1 decimal place on the display and press STORE button.
19. Press STEP UP and turn the pulser knob or use the arrow button to display ENGUNITS.
20. Press STEP DOWN. Notice that the default units are PRCT.
21. Use the arrow buttons to move the flashing cursor to the space before the P. Now turn the pulser knob to
display “D”. Use the arrow button to move to the next position and turn the pulser knob to select “E”. Repeat
until display reads DEG F and press the STORE button.
May 2001
10-3
Controller and System Test
UM354N-1
22. Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to return to normal operation.
Try displaying the process and setpoint. Notice that these are now displayed in engineering units scaled 100 to 500
DEG F, or 300 at 50%. Press the UNITS button to display the engineering units configured above.
10.1.6 Alarms
Upon power up, FCO101 has 4 alarms enabled:
•
Hi alarm at 110% on AIN1
•
Lo alarm at -10% on AIN1
•
Deviation alarm of 110% between AIN1 and SETPT
•
No alarm
1.
Press the ALARM/STEP DOWN button to step through the Alarm limits and Enable/Disable Status. Notice
all the alarms are enabled and the alarm limits are displayed in engineering units on the numeric display and
as a percentage of range by a flashing LED on the S bargraph. If security clearance is satisfied, the alarm
limits can be changed by rotating the pulser knob. Try changing the alarm limit A1 to 50% (300 DEG F) and
press STORE to save the new value.
2.
Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode.
3.
Enter manual mode to display Loop01.V.
4.
Turn the pulser knob until both the valve output and process input are greater than 50%. Note that the
alphanumeric display will flash “A1 HI” and the L and S LEDs will flash. Press the ACK button to
acknowledge the alarm.
Alarms have a default priority of 3 (see Alarm block in Section 3.2), meaning that the alarms must be
acknowledged to clear the flashing. Alarms may also be configured as self clearing. Try changing the alarm
priority to 4 using the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or the following steps:
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF. LOOP should be displayed.
2.
Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on the display.
3.
Press the right arrow button 3 times or turn the pulser knob until EDIT FB appears on the display.
4.
Press STEP DOWN. A/M will be displayed.
5.
Press the right arrow button 3 times or the turn pulser knob until ALARM appears on the display.
6.
Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR
7.
Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob until A1 PRIOR appears on the display.
8.
Press STEP DOWN to display 3 on the numeric display.
9.
To change the priority of alarm 1 from 3 to 4, rotate the pulser knob until 4 appears on the numeric display.
10. Press STORE to save the configuration change.
11. Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to return to normal operation.
Try adjusting the process above and below 50% (300 DEG F). Notice that the alarm will clear without pressing the
ACK button if the process drops below the alarm limit - deadband. Use the ALARM QUICK button to return the
Alarm Limit A1 to the default 110% (540 DEG F) and press STORE to save. Other alarm parameters referenced
in the ALARM function block description may be changed in a similar manner.
10-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Controller and System Test
10.1.7 TAG
Press the TAG button. Note that Loop01.* (*= P, S, V, X or Y) will scroll across the screen. To change the tag,
refer to the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or the following instructions:
Note that although 12 characters are available for the tag, it is suggested that loop names be limited to 6 characters
so that the complete tag name will be displayed during normal operation. The additional 6 characters can be
displayed by scrolling the tag. The last two digits of the alphanumeric displayed during normal operation will be
used to identify the variable currently being displayed, P, S, V, X or Y.
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF. LOOP will be displayed.
2.
Press STEP DOWN twice until VIEW appears on display.
3.
Press the right arrow button or the turn pulser knob until EDIT TAG appears on the display.
4.
Press STEP DOWN. LOOP01 will appear on the display with the 1 digit flashing. Use the pulser knob to
change the value of the flashing character and press store to save the change. Use the arrow buttons to move
to another character. Try changing the TAG to TC101.
5.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to return to normal operation mode.
6.
Press TAG to view tag names longer than 6 characters.
10.1.8 QUICK
When in normal operation mode the QUICK button can be used to step through the QUICK SET parameters of any
function block which has this feature enabled. In FCO101, the SETPT function block has the QUICK SET feature
enabled as a default. Press the QUICK button and note that you can scroll through the following Setpoint features:
RAMP ON/OFF, Ramp RATE, TARGET setpoint, and POWER UP SETPOINT. The ramp feature can either use
a ramp TIME or a ramp RATE. USE RATE is set to YES as the default (see SETPT function block details in
Section 3.2).
To see how the Ramp rate works, make sure the controller is in AUTO mode and do the following steps.
1.
Press QUICK to display RRATE.
2.
Rotate the pulser knob to set the ramp RATE to 300 and press STORE. Since the SETPT range pointer is
configured for AIN1 scaled 100 to 500 DEG F, 300 will represent a ramp rate of 300 DEG F/min.
3.
Press QUICK to display TARGET. Set the target to 250% and press STORE.
4.
Press QUICK to display R ON OFF. Turn the pulser knob to change the setting to ON and press STORE.
5.
Press ENTER/EXIT to display the setpoint on the numeric display. The setpoint should ramp to 25% in 30
seconds.
To change from a Ramp RATE to a Ramp TIME do the following steps.
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to display LOOP.
2.
Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW.
3.
Press the right arrow button or turn the pulser knob to display EDIT FB.
4.
Press STEP DOWN to display A/M.
5.
Turn the pulser knob to display SETPT.
6.
Press STEP DOWN to display RG PTR.
7.
Turn the pulser knob to display USE RATE.
8.
Press STEP DOWN to display YES.
9.
Turn the pulser knob to change to NO, and press STORE. Press STEP UP.
May 2001
10-5
Controller and System Test
UM354N-1
10. Turn pulser knob counterclockwise or use left arrow button to display RTIME.
11. Press STEP DOWN to display ramp TIME.
12. Turn the pulser knob to set the desired Ramp TIME, and press STORE.
13. Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode.
Now press the QUICK button. Note that the RTIME parameter will now be displayed instead of the RRATE
parameter. Setting R ON OFF parameter to “ON” will now ramp the setpoint to the TARGET setpoint in the
specified time rather that at a particular rate. See the SETPT description in Section 3.2 for more details on
setpoint functions.
Quickset parameters for other function blocks such as RATIO and BIAS may be changed in a similar fashion. See
specific function block descriptions in Section 3 for more details.
10.1.9 TUNE
When in normal operation mode, pressing the TUNE button will scroll through the controller tuning parameters
and allow activating the AUTOTUNE algorithm. FCO101 is configured for PID control with the AUTOTUNE
feature enabled. Press the TUNE button and note that the default values for Proportional Gain (PG), Time-Integral
(TI), Time-Derivative (TD), and the Derivative Gain (DG) will be displayed. In addition, the AUTOTUNE
parameters % Deviation, % Hysteresis, and Autotune YES/NO will be displayed.
It is difficult to simulate the autotune feature without simulating a process signal but increasing the digital filter
parameter on the AIN1 will help make the process seem more realistic. To change the digital filter to a value
around 10 follow the Configuration Road Map in Section 2 or do the following steps.
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF.
2.
Press STEP DOWN twice to display VIEW.
3.
Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display EDIT FB.
4.
Press STEP DOWN for Function Block menu.
5.
Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display AIN1.
6.
Press STEP DOWN for parameter menu.
7.
Use the right arrow button or the pulser knob to display DIG FILT and Press STEP DOWN.
8.
Rotate the pulser knob to set the digital filter to 10 and press STORE.
9.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to return to normal operation.
Before initiating AUTOTUNE bring the process to steady state. This can be done by placing the instrument in
manual mode and bringing the valve to approximately mid-scale using the pulser knob. Display the process and
wait a minute or two for the process to stabilize.
To activate the AUTOTUNE feature:
1.
Press the TUNE Quick Button to display AUTOTUNE.
2.
Set this parameter to YES, press STORE, then press EXIT. The controller is now set to AUTO and
“AUTOTUNE” will flash until the AUTOTUNE is finished. Tuning warnings may occur; refer to Section 9.3.
Since this is only a simulation, press ACK to clear any warnings.
3.
Press the TUNE button to display the default controller parameters and the resulting AUTOTUNE (ATUNE)
parameters. After viewing the parameters, STORE AT will be displayed. Press the STORE button to change
the controller parameters to the new values or press the ENTER/EXIT CONF button to keep the defaults.
To cancel the AUTOTUNE before the tuning operation is complete, press the A/M button to enter MANUAL
mode. Refer to Section 9.3 for more details on the AUTOTUNE feature.
10-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Controller and System Test
10.1.10 View mode
When troubleshooting a configuration, it is often helpful to be able to view the intermediate outputs of function
blocks that are not configured as display variables during normal operation. This can be accomplished via the
VIEW mode. To enter VIEW mode:
1.
Press ENTER/EXIT CONF to display LOOP.
2.
Press STEP DOWN to display VIEW.
3.
Press STEP DOWN to display the first output of the first configured function block.
4.
Use the pulser knob or arrow buttons to scroll through the function block outputs. Note that analog outputs are
in engineering units and discrete/status outputs (represented by the black shaded arrows in the Function Block
diagrams) are either low (0) or high (1).
5.
Press EXIT to return to normal operation mode.
10.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT
1.
Check that the correct circuit boards are installed and fully seated in the case as follows. The controller model
number on the P&I drawing should match the model number on the controller’s case. Compare the model
number to the Model Designation table in Section 14 to be sure the proper boards are installed.
NOTE
When power is applied to the controller, an installed hardware list can be viewed in the
STATN function block. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for board description and ID.
2.
Check all wiring between the controller and external equipment (e.g. transmitters, recorders, power supplies).
Check for correct and secure connections, correct wire gauge and insulation, adequate support (ties, raceways,
conduit), and protection from damage (sharp edges, moving equipment, chemicals, abrasion).
3.
Test all equipment connected to the controller for proper operation. Refer to the equipment manufacturer’s
literature as necessary.
4.
Apply power to the controller and note the faceplate displays during power up. See Section 10.1.1 for a
description of the faceplate displays during power up.
5.
Based on the controller hardware present, the current configuration in the controller, and the external
equipment, exercise the system in a systematic manner to ensure proper operation.
n
May 2001
10-7
Controller and System Test
10-8
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
11.0 MAINTENANCE
Controller maintenance requirements are minimal. Activities such as cleaning and visual inspections should be
performed at regular intervals. The severity of the controller’s operating environment will determine the frequency
of maintenance. Additional topics including troubleshooting, assembly replacement, and software compatibility
are also covered. Figure 11-1 shows an exploded view of the controller.
Before servicing or calibration the equipment, note the following statements.
•
Maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel. Failure to properly maintain the equipment can
result in death, serious injury, or product failure. This manual should be carefully reviewed, understood, and
followed.
•
The steps in the Preventive Maintenance section should be performed regularly.
•
The procedures in this section do not represent an exhaustive survey of maintenance steps necessary to ensure
safe operation of the equipment. Particular applications may require further procedures. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the
purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office.
•
The use of unauthorized parts in the repair of the equipment or tampering by unqualified personnel will result
in dangerous conditions that can cause death, serious injury, or equipment damage. Follow all safety
instructions contained herein.
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard
Explosion hazard
Can cause death or injury
•
Remove power from all wires and terminals before working on equipment.
•
In potentially hazardous atmosphere, remove power from equipment before
connecting or disconnecting power, signal, or other circuit.
•
Observe all pertinent regulation regarding installation in hazardous area.
11.1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
The following tools and equipment are necessary for servicing:
A.
B.
C.
Common hand tools for servicing electronic equipment
Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Voltmeter Section:
Accuracy +/-0 .01% of reading
Resolution 1.0 millivolt Input
Impedance 10 Megohms
Ammeter section:
Accuracy +/- 0.1% of reading
Resolution 100 microamperes
Maintenance Kit, P/N 15545-110, containing wrist strap and conductive mat. This kit or an equivalent is
required when a circuit board assembly is handled for any reason.
May 2001
11-1
Maintenance
UM354N-1
11.2 UPGRADING A CONTROLLER
A controller can be upgraded in the field to add I/O or a communication option, for example. Always confirm with
the factory hardware and software compatibility before upgrading a controller. To install an upgrade, you may need
to:
•
Refer to the Function Blocks section and develop a configuration. Refer to the HMI documentation and
develop an application.
•
Refer to the Kit Installation Instruction or other publications supplied with the assembly being installed.
•
Refer to the Assembly Replacement subsection in the Maintenance section of this User’s Manual for
information about disassembling the controller, installing the assembly, and then reassembling.
•
Refer to the Installation section of this manual for wiring details.
•
Refer to the Controller and System Test section to ensure proper operation of the controller.
11.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The objective for establishing a preventive maintenance program is to provide maximum operating efficiency.
Every preventive maintenance operation should assist in realizing this objective. Unless a preventive measure
reduces a Station’s down time, it is unnecessary.
11.3.1 Environmental Considerations
The controller has been designed to operate within specified environmental parameters (temperature and
humidity). These parameters are listed in the Model Designation and Specifications section of this User’s Manual.
Additional information concerning environmental contaminants is covered in the Installation section.
11.3.2 Visual Inspection
As part of a periodic maintenance program, the controller should be visually inspected. When viewing the station,
scan for abnormalities such as loose, broken or stressed ribbon cables. Look for damaged circuitry and heat
stressed parts. Check for excessive dirt or dust build-up that may impede the flow of air and inhibit proper heat
dissipation.
11.3.3 Cleaning
Circuit boards have a conformal coating for protection against contaminants. They should not be cleaned unless
accumulated foreign material is causing a problem.
Protect the station’s electronic components from electrostatic discharge . Fasten a conductive wrist
strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the station’s case, the panel, or a static dissipative
workmat. See the next section for circuit board handling guidelines.
If cleaning is needed, go to Section 11.6 for a disassembly procedure. Remove any debris from the enclosure and
circuit boards with either a soft brush or low velocity deionized air. Be careful not to dislodge the jumpers on the
MPU Controller board.
Clean the Faceplate Display with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth - do not use a paper towel - dampened with a mild
nonabrasive liquid cleaner. Avoid harsh solvents.
11-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
Controller Power
Input Fuse
LIL Network Board
H
N
GND
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup or
Removable Configuration Board
LonWorks Board
Future Use
Controller Mounting Screw
F1
Controller Mounting Tray
3
I/O Expander Board
MPU Board, Component Side,
Upper Left Corner
MPU Controller Board
Display Cable to
Faceplate Display
AG00204b
Controller Cover
Model 354N_R,
Display Cable to
Remote Mounted
Faceplate Display
Model 354N_D,
Faceplate
Display
Nameplate Label
and Other Product
Labels
Modbus Display Cable
to HMI Operator Interface
FIGURE 11-1 Model 354N, Exploded View
11.3.4 Circuit Board Handling
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE, ALL ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES
Semiconductor devices must be protected from electrostatic discharge. A properly grounded conductive wrist strap
must be worn whenever a circuit board assembly is handled or touched. A PN 15545-110 service kit with a wrist
strap and static dissipative workmat is available from the Process Industries Division of Siemens Energy &
Automation. Equivalent kits are available from both mail order and local electronic supply companies.
LITHIUM BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
Each MPU Controller board and Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup board has a lithium battery that is not
field replaceable. Note the following when handling or disposing of either board.
•
Properly dispose of an un-repairable circuit board with a lithium battery
•
Do not burn the battery
•
Do not place the circuit board on a metal surface or otherwise short circuit battery terminals
•
Do not attempt to charge the battery
•
If electrolyte is exposed, wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when handling the battery
•
For details contact the battery manufacturer
May 2001
11-3
Maintenance
UM354N-1
11.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error codes provide primary troubleshooting information. These codes appear on the faceplate’s alphanumeric
display in response to a failed power-up diagnostic test or to an on-line controller error. Section 11.5 provides a
quick reference to the identification of these codes and discusses each code with respect to the type of test,
controller response, problem confirmation, and corrective action.
In the event a malfunction within the controller is suspected, troubleshooting by assembly substitution is
recommended to get the controller back on-line in the shortest possible time.
If a problem appears upon initial installation of the controller, check the installation wiring and the controller’s
configuration parameters. Also, check the wiring of associated external process devices (e.g. process transmitter,
LonWorks modules). Field servicing experience indicates that most initial service incidents are of this nature.
Additional troubleshooting avenues are also possible. For example, a series of test configurations may be created
and implemented to ‘exercise’ different function blocks within the controller. Section 3 describes each function
block. This type of troubleshooting analysis is implemented in an off-line test bench situation.
On-line checks of the controller input and output signals (both analog and digital) can be performed without
affecting station operation. This type of signal tracing is usually carried out behind an instrument panel. Refer to
the Installation section, Table 8.1, for rear terminal assignments and for wiring diagrams.
MPU CONTROLLER BOARD JUMPERS
There are two Controller board versions. Figure 11-3 shows an MPU Controller board with jumpers W2, W4 and
W8. Figure 11-4 shows an MPU Controller board with jumpers W2, W4, and W7. These jumpers are factory set
but may need to be changed in the field. W7 and W8 settings are described in the figures and in Section 11.6.3
MPU Controller Board. Two additional jumpers, W2 and W4, are discussed in Section 11.6.5 Accessory Boards.
11.5 ERROR CODES
This section describes off-line error codes, on-line error codes, and on-line status codes. Typically, a code will
point to a failed internal assembly or a failed peripheral device. Note that a configuration error can also cause an
error code or multiple error codes to be produced.
OFF-LINE ERROR CODES
Off-line error messages are displayed while the controller is powered but not running function block code and
therefore not actively controlling a process. Depending on the message, user intervention will most likely be
required.
Corrective action can be initiated via the LIL or Modbus ports if appropriate. LIL parameter “SE” located at
channel 4, parameter 1 (Modbus register 40002) will contain the hexadecimal form of the error number currently
displayed (e.g., ERR: 213 would be sent as $00D5). An Error message can be acknowledged over the network by
writing a 0 to the Modbus register or LIL parameter. Messages will be displayed one at a time in the order they
occur and they cannot be cleared until the error condition is corrected.
11-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Display Format:
Maintenance
ERR: x x x
Test Type
Board Type
Error Type
Error Indication
Error Type:
1
Fatal
The station cannot operate until the source of the error has been corrected.
2
Non-Fatal
Correct error from faceplate or communication port.
Board Type:
0
MPU Controller
1
I/O Expander
2
LIL Network
3
LonWorks Remote I/O
8
RCB or RTC/CB
9
Ethernet Network
Test Type:
0
RAM Test
- MPU Controller board - Fatal error, replace board. Press ENTER to repeat test.
- Option Board - Station operation suspended. Pressing ENTER will cause all
references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed from the configuration
and removal of the board from the availability list.
1
Flash CRC Test
- MPU Controller board - Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded.
Press ENTER to repeat test.
- Option Board - Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded. Pressing
ENTER will cause all references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed
from the configuration and removal of the board from the availability list.
2
Constant Data
Station operation suspended until new constant data is downloaded. Press ENTER to
CRC Test
load board specific default constant data.
3
Calibration Data Station operation suspended until ENTER is pressed to load default calibration data.
CRC Test
4
Software
Station operation suspended until new code is downloaded. Pressing ENTER will cause
Compatibility
all references to blocks relating to the option board to be removed from the
Test
configuration and removal of the board from the availability list.
5
Database
Station operation suspended until new constant data is downloaded. Press ENTER to, if
Compatibility
possible, convert the database or load board specific default constant data.
Test
6
Board Not
Station operation suspended. Install the missing board or press ENTER to remove from
Present Error
the configuration all references to the missing board.
7
Hardware
Fatal error. Repair or replace as necessary. Press ENTER to repeat test.
Communication
(QSPI) Test
8
Board
Remove the board causing the error and install a compatible board.
Compatibility
Test
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup board and Removable Configuration Board (RCB) off-line error codes are
listed in Table 11.1. RTC/CB and RCB on-line status codes are located in Table 11.2 and listed as “RCB” errors.
May 2001
11-5
Maintenance
UM354N-1
TABLE 11.1 RTC/CB and RCB Boards, Off-Line Error Codes
ERROR
CODE
ERR280
DESCRIPTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Board failed NVRAM test
ERR282
Configuration on Board failed checksum
test and is corrupted.
ERR284
Configuration on Board is not compatible
with MPU Controller board firmware
level. This will occur only when the
Board comes from a controller with a
different MPU Controller board firmware
level than the current controller and some
functions in the configuration database
cannot be supported by the current
firmware.
Configuration on Board is not compatible
with MPU Controller board database.
This will occur only when the Board
comes from a controller with a higher
MPU Controller firmware level than the
current controller. Controller firmware
can convert a database created with a
lower firmware revision level but not a
higher level.
The controller powered down with a
Board installed but could not identify it on
power up. The board may have been
removed or the board ID may be
corrupted.
The LonWorks circuit board currently
installed is not compatible with the
LonWorks configuration contained on the
Board.
1) Power down and replace Board.
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online using configuration in MPU memory.
1) Power down and install a Board containing a valid
configuration.
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online using configuration in MPU memory that will
also be loaded into the Board.
1) Install MPU firmware compatible with the Board
configuration
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online using configuration in MPU memory. The
configuration will remain intact until a parameter
is STOREd, at which time the MPU configuration
will be transferred to the Board.
ERR285
ERR286
ERR288
1) Install MPU firmware compatible with the Board
configuration
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online using configuration in MPU memory. The
configuration will remain intact until a parameter
is STOREd , at which time the MPU configuration
will be transferred to the Board.
1) Install a Board or new Board.
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online using configuration in MPU memory.
1) Power down and install the LonWorks board from
the same controller that the Board came from.
2) Press ENTER to ACK error. Controller will go online. Any existing LonWorks network data will be
used if it is valid, otherwise, it will be set to default
values. In either case, the LonWorks network
manager will be required to re-establish the
network bindings.
ON-LINE ERROR CODES AND STATUS CODES
These codes can be produced while the controller is running function block and may be actively controlling a
process. Depending on the message and its priority level, user intervention may be required or the message may
simply be informational in nature. LIL parameter “SE” located at channel 4, parameter 1 (Modbus register
$40002) will reflect unacknowledged error or status messages present in the controller. Messages are displayed
according to priority until all active messages have been acknowledged. If no link code has been assigned to the
active message, the “SE” code will remain at its last value.
Table 11.2 lists on-line error and status codes. For most error codes, replace the involved circuit board to repair
the controller. For most status codes, acknowledge or otherwise respond to the situation.
11-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
TABLE 11.2 On-Line Error and Status Codes
DISPLAYED
CODE
MPU A/D
EXP A/D
AOUT1 OC
AOUT2 OC
AOUT3 OC
AINU1 AD
AINU1 TC
AINU1 RJ
AINU2 AD
AINU2 TC
AINU2 RJ
DINU1 E1
DINU2 E1
LIL ERR
LIL NUI
MOD ERR
LON ERR
LON NUI
Watchdog
LOW BAT
RCBàMEM
CYCLTIME
BURNFAIL
RCB FAIL
NO EXPBD
PEB FAIL
IP OVRUN
MB OVRUN
A1 HI
A1 LO
A1 HI D
A1 LO D
A1 DEV
A1 OR
A2 HI
A2 LO
A2 HI D
A2 LO D
A2 DEV
A2 OR
A3 HI
A3 LO
A3 HI D
A3 LO D
A3 DEV
A3 OR
A4 HI
A4 LO
A4 HI D
May 2001
LINK/MODBUS
CODE (Hex/Dec)
$0001
1
$0002
2
$0003
3
$0004
4
$0005
5
$0006
6
$0007
7
$0008
8
$0009
9
$000A
10
$000B
11
$000C
12
$000D
13
$000E
14
$000F
15
$0010
16
$0011
17
$0012
18
$0013
19
$0014
20
$0015
21
$0016
22
$0017
23
$0018
24
$0019
25
$001A
26
$001B
27
$001C
28
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
DESCRIPTION
MPU Controller board A/D Error
I/O Expander Board A/D Error
MPU Controller board D/A #1 Open Circuit
MPU Controller board D/A #2 Open Circuit
MPU Controller board D/A #3 Open Circuit
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #1 A/D Error
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #1 T/C Burnout
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #1 Reference Junction Error
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #2 A/D Error
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #2 T/C Burnout
I/O Expander Board Universal Analog Input #1 Reference Junction Error
I/O Expander Board Universal Digital Input #1 Underflow Error
I/O Expander Board Universal Digital Input #2 Underflow Error
LIL Port Error
LIL Non Updating Input Error
Modbus Port Error
LON Port Error
LON Non Updating Error
Watchdog Timeout
Low NVRAM Battery Voltage
Press STORE to load RCB configuration into MPU memory
Cycle Time Overrun – see STATN block – add Cycle Time bias
Flash Memory burn failed
Press ENTER to ACK error and replace RCB
Expander board is not installed
Ethernet Board failure
Ethernet board TCP communication error
Modbus communication error
Alarm A1 High
Alarm A1 Low
Alarm A1 High Deviation
Alarm A1 Low Deviation
Alarm A1 Deviation
Alarm A1 Overrange
Alarm A2 High
Alarm A2 Low
Alarm A2 High Deviation
Alarm A2 Low Deviation
Alarm A2 Deviation
Alarm A2 Overrange
Alarm A3 High
Alarm A3 Low
Alarm A3 High Deviation
Alarm A3 Low Deviation
Alarm A3 Deviation
Alarm A3 Overrange
Alarm A4 High
Alarm A4 Low
Alarm A4 High Deviation
11-7
Maintenance
DISPLAYED
CODE
A4 LO D
A4 DEV
A4 OR
B1 HI
B1 LO
B1 OR
B2 HI
B2 LO
B2 OR
B3 HI
B3 LO
B3 OR
B4 HI
B4 LO
B4 OR
Emeg Man
Em Local
Standby
Override
EMERG OR
INTRLK
DFAIL
MAX LOOP
S HI Lim
S LO Lim
U1 Status
U2 Status
ATUNE W1
ATUNE W2
ATUNE W3
ATUNE E1
ATUNE E2
ATUNE E3
E In RAM
E In Con
E Db CRC
E P Qual
iO0n NC
AIEnn NU
CIEnn NU
DIEnn NU
11-8
UM354N-1
LINK/MODBUS
CODE (Hex/Dec)
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
DESCRIPTION
Alarm A4 Low Deviation
Alarm A4 Deviation
Alarm A4 Overrange
Alarm B1 High
Alarm B1 Low
Alarm B1 Out of Range
Alarm B2 High
Alarm B2 Low
Alarm B2 Out of Range
Alarm B3 High
Alarm B3 Low
Alarm B3 Out of Range
Alarm B4 High
Alarm B4 Low
Alarm B4 Out of Range
Emergency Manual
Emergency Local
Standby Sync
Override
Emergency Override - PCOM block
Interlocked – PCOM block
Device Failed – PCOM block
Maximum Loop Size
Setpoint HI Limit
Setpoint LO Limit
User Status #1
User Status #2
Autotuner Warning: hys/desamp >0.2; see Section 9.3 for ‘W#’ details
Autotuner Warning: Deviation Ratio is HI; see Autotune procedure
Autotuner Warning: Avg. Deviation is LO; see Autotune procedure
Autotuner Error: limit cycle timeout
Autotuner Error: process out of range
Autotuner Error: Only applies when % HYS set to A. Process too noisy.
Insufficient Volatile Memory Available
Insufficient Constant Memory Available
Database CRC/Checksum Error
Poor I/O quality
Ubus Module #n Not Communicating
AIEnn Function Block Not Updating
CIEnn Function Block Not Updating
DIEnn Function Block Not Updating
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
11.6 ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
The following describes removing and replacing controller assemblies. Common hand tools for electronic
equipment servicing are needed and a torque screwdriver, calibrated in inch-pounds or Newton-meters, is
recommended. Before handling an assembly, refer to Section 11.3.4 for electrostatic discharge prevention
procedures. See Figure 11-1 for an exploded view of the controller that shows field replaceable assemblies and
individual parts.
Disassembly Sequence
Optional Faceplate Display, Direct or Remote Mount - Section 11.6.6
Controller Assembly - Section 11.6.1
I/O Expander Board - Section 11.6.2
MPU Controller Board - Section 11.6.4
Accessory Boards - Section 11.6.5
Perform only the steps needed to access the target assembly in the controller model at hand. Go to Section 11.6.1 to
remove the controller from its mounting tray.
Real Time Clock Jumper
To set the Real Time Clock jumper (W7 or W8) when installing or storing a controller, remove the controller from
its mounting tray and disassemble to gain access to the MPU Controller board.
11.6.1 Removing the Controller Assembly
1.
Following plant procedures, take the Controller off-line and remove electrical power from it.
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard
Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury.
Remove power from all wires and terminals before working
on this equipment.
Assembly Notes
A replacement Controller (or MPU Controller Board) must have a
configuration entered from a Faceplate Display or downloaded from a personal
computer running the Graphical Configuration Utility.
2.
Disconnect terminal blocks. At each Controller terminal block, free the wiring harness to allow the terminal
block to be disconnected. Then, loosen a captive screw at each end of the block and gently pull the block from
the circuit board mounted receptacle. See Figure 8-6. Be careful not to damage or stress components and
wires. Alternatively, label and disconnect all components and wires.
3.
Disconnect the Modbus display cable (9-pin ‘D’ connector) at the underside of the Controller. Loosen two
captive screws, grasp the cable connector, and pull it from the circuit board mounted receptacle.
4.
Model 354N_R - Disconnect the remote display cable to the remote mount Faceplate Display.
1) On the Controller cover, open the two ribbon cable ejector levers.
May 2001
11-9
Maintenance
UM354N-1
2) Grasp the cable-mounted connector and pull the connector from the case mounted connector. Do not pull
on the ribbon cable.
3) Remove two screws that secure the ribbon cable receptacle to the Controller cover.
5.
Support the Controller and remove the four screws securing the Controller to the Mounting Tray. Remove the
Controller from its mounting tray.
6.
To Repair a Controller or Set W7 or W8 - Go to Section 11.6.2 Removing the I/O Expander Board to continue
disassembly.
To Replace a Controller - Install a replacement or repaired Controller by performing the above steps in reverse
order.
11.6.2 Removing the I/O Expander Board
1.
Remove four screws securing the I/O Expander board to the MPU Controller board. See Figure 11-1 and 11-2.
2.
Slightly lift the lower edge of the I/O Expander board (edge closest to the DB9 Modbus display cable
connector). On the MPU Controller board, open the connector ejector levers on the ribbon cable connector.
Grasp the cable-mounted connector and pull it from the board-mounted connector.
Assembly Note
If field installing an I/O Expander Board Kit, remove four screws securing the
MPU Controller Board to the cover. Thread four hex standoffs from the kit into
these locations.
3.
Lift the board from the Controller cover and place it in an anti-static bag.
IMPORTANT
After replacing an I/O Expander board in a controller whose configuration includes an
AINU function block: assemble the controller, apply power, ENTER configuration and
STORE the SEN TYPE parameter. This must be done even if the SEN TYPE displays
the desired type. This will ensure that the function block loads the calibration from the
new Expander board. If desired, a FIELD CAL can then be performed.
11-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
K2
ASSY NO.
K1
SERIAL NO.
6-Pin Connector,
Terminals 27 - 32
U36
MG000990
U37
21-Pin Connector,
Terminals 33 - 52
To MPU Controller Board
FIGURE 11-2 I/O Expander Board, Simplified View
May 2001
11-11
Maintenance
UM354N-1
11.6.3 Changing the Power Input Fuse
If replacing the fuse go to step 1 below, otherwise, go to Section 11.6.4 Removing the MPU Controller Board to
continue disassembling the Controller.
1.
Refer to Figure 11-1 and 11-4 or 11-5 and carefully remove the fuse (F1) from the mounting clips.
2.
Press the replacement fuse into the clips and reassemble the Controller.
Assembly Note
After re-assembly, apply power to the Controller and operate it off-line for
several minutes to be sure that a condition does not exist that will cause the
replacement fuse to fail.
11.6.4 Removing the MPU Controller Board
1.
2.
Disconnect an optional Faceplate Display.
•
If a direct mount Faceplate Display is installed, go to Section 11.6.6 and remove the Display. Then return
here to step 2.
•
If a remote mount Faceplate Display is installed and it was not disconnected in an earlier step, disconnect
the Faceplate Display’s display cable as follows. On the Controller cover, open the ribbon cable ejector
levers. Grasp the cable-mounted connector and pull the connector from the case-mounted connector.
Remove either four screws or four hex standoffs securing the MPU board and lift the board (and any
accompanying Accessory boards) from the Controller cover. Set W7 or W8 as described in Figure 11-3 or 11-4
and slip the board(s) into an anti-static bag.
Assembly Note
On the replacement MPU Controller board, set W7 or W8 as described in the
appropriate figure. Set W2 and W4 as described in Section 11.6.5 Removing an
Accessory Board.
11-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
W8 Real Time Clock Jumper,
See Detail Below
W2 LIL/Modbus Network Jumper (Terminals 3 and 4)
W8
W2
F1
H
N
Power to
Graphic
Workstation
GND
CLK
N/C
WDT
H
N
GND
AC
OUT
3
U11
To Faceplate
Display
Assembly
U5
T2
J3
Jumpers are facory set for the
circuit boards installed at time of
shipment.
J6
Battery
To Accessory
Boards
W4
26
Serial
Number
J7
Real Time Clock Jumper:
1. As shown, shunt installed on CLK pins
to enable HOT/WARM Start.
2. Place shunt on N/C pins when storing
Controller or MPU Controller board,
and for COLD Start.
To I/O Expander
Board
Power to
Graphic
Workstation
H
N
W8
CLK
N/C
WDT
GND
W4 LonWorks I/O Bus
(Terminals 25 and 26)
Modbus
Display/Configuration
Port
MG00190a
Assembly
Number
J8
AC
OUT
FIGURE 11-3 MPU Controller Board with Real Time Clock Jumper W8
May 2001
11-13
Maintenance
UM354N-1
W2 LIL/Modbus Network Jumper
(Terminals 3 and 4)
W7 Real Time Clock Jumper:
1. Place shunt on both pins, as shown, to enable Hot/Warm Start.
2. Place shunt on one pin when storing a Controller or MPU Controller Board,
and for Cold Start.
3. See detail below.
H
N
GND
H
N
GND
W7
BAT1
W2
F1
Power to
Graphic
Workstation
Battery
3
U11
To Faceplate
Display
Assembly
U5
T2
J3
Jumpers are facory set for the
circuit boards installed at time of
shipment.
J6
To Accessory
Boards
W4
Serial
Number
J7
Assembly
Number
J8
W4 LonWorks I/O Bus
(Terminals 25 and 26)
Modbus
Display/Configuration
Port
To I/O Expander
Board
MG001011
26
X03160S3
W7 Real Time Clock
MPU Board Storage
and Cold Start
Hot / Warm Start
Enabled
FIGURE 11-4 MPU Controller Board with Real Time Clock Jumper W7
11-14
May 2001
UM354N-1
Maintenance
11.6.5 Removing an Accessory Board
1.
Remove screws and nuts holding the selected Accessory board(s) to the MPU Controller board. See Figure 115.
2.
Carefully unplug the Accessory board(s) from the MPU Controller board.
3.
Place board(s) in an anti-static bag.
Assembly Notes and Jumpers W2 and W4
When reassembling, carefully align the Accessory board connector with the MPU Controller board
connector before mating.
These boards mechanically fasten and electrically connect to the MPU Controller board as shown in Figure 11-5
and listed below. Carefully align connectors before applying force to seat them.
•
LIL Network board (Figure 11-6) plugs into J3
•
LonWorks board (Figure 11-7) plugs into J6
•
RCB or RTC/CB board (Figure 11-8) plugs into a Network board. When a Network board is not installed, plug
the RCB or RTC/CB board into J3 on the MPU Controller board. See the RTC/CB procedure below.
Jumpers W2 and W4:
W4 LonWorks I/O Bus Jumper, located on the MPU Controller board:
• Install shunt when LonWorks Board is NOT installed.
• Remove and save the shunt when a LonWorks Board is installed.
If a controller is receiving one of these boards for the first time, ERR 232 may be displayed
when power is applied. This should not be a concern and can be cleared by pressing the
ENTER/EXIT configuration button. Edit the configuration to activate the board and connect
I/O or network wiring as needed.
May 2001
Shunt Installed
X03160S4
W2 LIL/Ethernet/Modbus Network Jumper, located on the MPU Controller board:
• Install shunt when network connections at rear terminals 3 and 4 are wired for Modbus.
• Remove and save the shunt when network connections at rear terminals 3 and 4 are
wired for LIL and a LIL Network board is installed.
Shunt Removed
11-15
Maintenance
UM354N-1
I/O Expander Board
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup or
Removable Configuration Board
LIL Network Board
LonWorks Board
Connector J3 on other side
Connector J6 on other side
Note: When LIL Network Board
is not installed, plug Removable
Configuration Board into J3 on
the MPU Controller Board and
secure with hardware.
MPU Controller Board
MG001023
Future Use
FIGURE 11-5 Accessory Board Installation and Replacement
RTC/CB and RCB Boards
Refer to Figure 11-5 for board location and assembly hardware; the RCB and RTC/CB board mount in the same
location and use the same hardware. The board typically mounts on and electrically connects to either a LIL
Network board or an Ethernet board. If either of these boards is not installed, the RTC/CB board will mount
directly on and electrically connect to the MPU Controller.
IMPORTANT
Before powering the controller after installing an RTC/CB board, connect a local
faceplate to the controller. The controller will power up in a hold state and the faceplate
is needed to select the controller configuration as described in the following procedure.
Board Installation
1.
To install a board, fasten a grounded wrist strap on your wrist.
2.
The MPU Controller board may have several attached boards secured by spacers and screws. Refer to Figure
11-5 for board location and fasteners. Refer to the board comments above for jumpering and other information
before attaching a board to the MPU Controller board.
3.
Insert the board or board stack into the case card guides and carefully guide the connector end of the board
until it mates with the connector(s) on the case. Only when the connectors are mated should additional force
be applied to seat the board. Install board retaining hardware. (Refer to Section 11.6.3 as needed.)
4.
Install the Display Assembly. Refer to Section 11.6.2.
5.
Remove the wrist strap.
11-16
May 2001
UM354N-1
When power is applied, an RCB->MEM message will appear in the local faceplate’s alphanumeric display.
This message is prompting you to select the controller’s operating configuration. Read the two bulleted items
below and select the desired configuration.
•
To copy the configuration stored on the RTC/CB or RCB board to the MPU Controller board: rotate the
pulser to display YES and press the STORE pushbutton.
This option is typically selected when a configuration is being transferred from one controller to another
by moving the RTC/CB or RCB board from one controller to another.
•
To retain the configuration stored on the MPU Controller board: rotate the pulser to display NO and press
the STORE pushbutton. The configuration stored on the MPU Controller board will be the operating
configuration and it will be copied to the RTC/CB or RCB board when a change is made to the
configuration.
AG00287a
6.
Maintenance
Part Number
Serial Number
Components on other
side of circuit board.
Connector, This Side
FIGURE 11-6 LIL Network Board
Serial Number and
Part Number Labels
Mates with J6 on MPU Controller Board
MG00393a
J1
J4
Mates with W4 on MPU Controller Board
Mates with J6 on MPU Controller Board
J1
MG00393a
Serial Number and
Part Number Labels
Mates with W4 on MPU Controller Board
FIGURE 11-7 LonWorks Board
May 2001
11-17
Maintenance
UM354N-1
Part Number
Serial Number
Connector, This Side
AG00286a
Components on other
side of circuit board.
FIGURE 11-8 Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup Board
11.6.6 Removing the Faceplate Display
To replace the Faceplate Display, see Section 11.6.6.1. To replace the bezel or the circuit board, perform the
procedures in Sections 11.6.6.1 and 11.6.6.2.
11.6.6.1 Replacing a Faceplate Display
REMOVAL:
1.
In a hazardous area, remove power from the Controller.
2.
Protect the station’s electronic components from electrostatic discharge. Fasten a conductive wrist
strap around your wrist and ground the strap to the ground screw on the Controller’s case, an
unpainted area on the panel, or a grounded static dissipative workmat.
3.
Loosen the Display assembly’s two faceplate screws. One is above the numeric display and one behind the
flip-down door at the bottom of the faceplate.
4.
Pull the assembly from the panel about 1.5" (38 mm).
5.
Look behind the assembly and locate the display cable from the MPU Controller board. Open the connector
locking levers on the assembly-mounted connector to eject the cable-mounted connector.
6.
Either place the Display assembly in a static shielding bag and set it aside or go to Section 11.6.6.2 to replace
the assembly’s bezel or circuit board.
INSTALLATION
1.
Hold the Display assembly close to the open case and mate the display cable with the connector on the Display
assembly circuit board. Check that the locking levers on the connector fully engaged the cable-mounted
connector. The connector is keyed.
2.
Align the Display assembly with the case. To ensure water tightness, use a torque screwdriver set to 6 inchpounds to tighten the two faceplate screws. Alternatively, use a screwdriver to tighten the screws until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten an additional ½ turn. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
3.
Remove the wrist strap.
NOTE
When changing a Display assembly with the controller powered-up and an error code
present, the displays will light in a random pattern except for the alphanumeric display
which will show the error code. Clear the error to clear the displays.
11.6.6.2 Replacing the Bezel or Circuit Board
REMOVAL
1.
Place a properly grounded wrist strap on your wrist and remove the Display assembly as described
above.
11-18
May 2001
UM354N-1
2.
Maintenance
Refer to the figure below. Notice that the circuit board is captured by a Fixed Retainer at the top of the bezel
and a Flexible Retainer at the bottom. Grasp the body of the black connector at “A” and at the same time press
the Flexible Retainer downward slightly. Pull gently on the connector to lift the bottom edge of the board
above the Flexible Retainer.
Note
The board is a snug fit. Do not squeeze the bezel sides and make removal more difficult.
3.
Remove the board from the bezel by carefully continuing to lift board while pulling the board out from under
to Fixed Retainer at the top of the assembly.
4.
If the bezel is being replaced:
1) Remove the two Display assembly mounting screws. Turn the Assembly face up and lift each mounting
screw upward until the threaded portion contacts the bezel. Turn each screw counterclockwise to unscrew
it from the bezel. A screwdriver may be needed once a screw is started.
2) Remove the flip-down door by pressing on the door near its pivot point to free the door from the bezel.
Fixed Board Retainer
Numeric Display (2)
Alphanumeric Display (2)
O-Ring Gasket
Side
View
Connector
Serial Number
Flexible Board Retainer
Mounting Screw,
2 Places
Foam
Keypad
Connector (2)
(1)
(1)
MG00387a
Part Number
Notes:
(1) - Grasp at this point
when removing board.
(2) - On other side of
board.
(3) - Press to remove and
install door.
Rear View
Flip-Down
Door
(3)
INSTALLATION
1.
Place an anti-static wrist strap on your wrist and connect the ground lead.
2.
Get the replacement bezel, or get the replacement circuit board and remove it from the anti-static
bag.
3.
If the bezel is being replaced, start threading each Faceplate mounting screw into the bezel. Use a screwdriver
to complete screw installation. Install the flip-down door; see the figure.
4.
Turn the bezel over.
5.
Install the circuit board in the bezel by slightly inserting the top edge of board under the Fixed Retainer. The
top edge is nearest the Numeric and Alphanumeric Displays.
6.
Continue to ease the board under the Fixed Retainer while lowering the bottom edge of the board into the
bezel. Be sure that the keypad connector mates with the connector on the keypad. The board is fully inserted
when it snaps under the Flexible Retainer.
7.
Install the Display assembly on the case as described above.
n
May 2001
11-19
Maintenance
11-20
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Calibration
12.0 CALIBRATION
A controller is factory calibrated to either the standard values listed in Section 8.6 or to values specified by the
purchaser at time of order. Field calibration should not be necessary.
For those cases where inputs or outputs must be adjusted either to meet a local standard or for a more critical
application, a field calibration can be performed. The field calibration becomes the default calibration.
A CAL VIEW mode is available in calibration to view the sensor input over the full range. The signal that is
viewed, in the calibration verify mode, is 0 to 100% of span in basic units of measure (e.g., °C for temperature, mv
for millivolts) and is not affected by the temperature units conversion, digital filter, scaling, or the output bias
adjustment. The full block output in engineering units with these parameters applied can be seen in the VIEW
mode within loop configuration.
This section describes calibration and calibration verification of the following function blocks:
AIN1-4
AOUT1-3
- Analog Input
- Analog Output
MPU board (3) and I/O Expander board (1)
MPU board (2) and I/O Expander board (1)
Note
AINU1-2, Analog Input Universal, refer to the AINU description in Section 3 Function
Blocks for calibration information.
When field calibrating a controller for a critical application, consider the following:
•
If the input is a current signal (e.g., 4-20 mA), use a precision current source. The 250 ohm precision range
resistor installed across the input terminals for calibration should remain with the station, connected across
that set of terminals, to eliminate the voltage drop variation due to resistor tolerance.
•
Allow the Station to warm-up for an hour prior to calibration. The ambient temperature should be close to
normal operating conditions.
The controller must be off-line during calibration. Factory calibration values are listed in Section 8.5.
Refer to Table 8.1 and to the installation wiring figures in Section 8 for power input, signal input and signal output
terminals.
Security, Calibration of Inputs/Outputs: If level 1 and level 4 security are enabled, the user-determined six-digit
security combination (e.g. 000025) for either level 1 or level 4 must be entered before new calibration parameters
can be stored. Once the security combination has been entered, access will be provided to all functions with that
security level until the user exits configuration. For additional information, refer to function block SECUR Security in Section 3.
Bargraphs: The bargraphs on the Display Assembly are not used during the calibration procedure. Ignore any
bargraph indications during calibration.
May 2001
12-1
Calibration
UM354N-1
Calibration and calibration verification are described in the following procedures.
WARNING
Electrical shock hazard
Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury.
Remove power from all wires and terminals before working
on this equipment.
12.1 ANALOG INPUT (AIN1-4)
Analog input function blocks have been factory calibrated for 1 to 5 Vdc inputs. Recalibration should not be
required unless calibration parameters are to be changed. Periodic recalibration should not be necessary. To
calibrate an analog input, use the following procedure.
1.
At the controller’s rear terminals, connect an electronic calibrator or precision reference source capable of
supplying a voltage between 0.000 and 5.000 Vdc to the selected analog input terminals (e.g. AIN1 or AIN2).
Refer to Section 8 Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines. Ensure that terminal screws are
tight.
2.
If security is enabled, a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a
calibration. Refer to SECUR-Security in Section 3 for additional information.
3.
Apply power to the station.
4.
Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level. Rotate the Pulser Knob to
select ‘STATION’ on the alphanumeric (lower) display.
5.
Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select ‘CAL’
on the alphanumeric display.
6.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level. Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the
desired input (e.g. AIN1 or AIN2).
7.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the PARAMETER level.
8.
Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired parameter, CAL ZERO, shown on the alphanumeric display.
9.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level (‘CAL’ appears on upper display).
10. Set the precision voltage source to the zero input value (0.000 to 1.000 Vdc).
11. Press STORE to lock-in the desired value. If ENTER COM appears in the alphanumeric display, security is
enabled and steps 1) through 5) must be performed to store the calibration. Otherwise, go to step 14.
1) The numeric display shows 000000 with the right-most digit flashing. Rotate the pulser knob to set the
units digit to the correct number.
2) Press the TAG/ß key to select the next digit, the tens digit. Rotate the pulser knob to select a number for
that digit.
3) Move to and select the needed number for each remaining digit.
4) Press ENTER. If the combination entered is incorrect, “ACCESS/DENIED” will be displayed and the
controller will return to the parameter level. Otherwise, go to step 14.
14. Press the STEP UP button. Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the ‘CAL FULL’ parameter.
15. Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level (‘CAL’ appears on upper display).
12-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Calibration
16. Set the voltage source to the full scale input value (4.000 to 5.000 Vdc).
17. Press STORE.
18. For verification perform the following steps:
1) Press STEP UP button. Rotate Pulser Knob to select ‘CAL VIEW’ parameter.
2) Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level. Set precision voltage source to zero input voltage. The
display should read 0%.
3) Set source to full scale voltage. The display should read 100%.
20. If all points have been calibrated and verified, press EXIT button to leave the calibration mode and enter the
operation mode. If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified, press the STEP UP button to
enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level. Perform steps 2 -19 for each function block.
If security is enabled, exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode until the security
combination is re-entered.
12.2 ANALOG OUTPUT (AOUT1-3)
Analog output function blocks have been factory calibrated to 4-20 mAdc outputs. If recalibration is necessary use
the following procedure.
1.
At the controller’s rear terminals, connect an electronic calibrator or digital multimeter capable of displaying
4.00 and 20.00 mAdc to the selected analog output terminals (AOUT1 or AOUT2). Refer to Section 8
Installation for terminal numbers and wiring guidelines. Ensure that terminal screws are tight.
2.
If security is enabled, a level 1 or level 4 security combination will be needed to store the results of a
calibration. Refer to SECUR-Security in Section 3 for additional information.
3.
Apply power to the station.
4.
Press the ENTER CONF button to enter the configuration mode at the MENU level.
5.
Rotate the Pulser Knob to select ‘STATION’ on the alphanumeric (lower) display.
6.
Press the STEP DOWN button to choose options at the station level and rotate the Pulser Knob to select ‘CAL’
on the alphanumeric display.
7.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the FUNCTION BLOCK level. Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the
desired output (e.g. AOUT1).
8.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the PARAMETER level. Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the desired
parameter, CAL ZERO, shown on the alphanumeric display.
9.
Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level (‘CAL’ appears on display).
10. Rotate the Pulser Knob to set the zero output to 4.00 mA on the digital multimeter or electronic calibrator.
11. Press the STORE button to lock-in the desired value. (If “ENTER COM” appears in the alphanumeric display,
go to Section 12.1, step 13 for entering a level 1 or level 4 security combination.)
12. Press the STEP UP button. Rotate the Pulser Knob to select the ‘CAL FULL’ parameter.
13. Press the STEP DOWN button to enter the VALUE level (‘CAL’ appears on display).
14. Rotate the Pulser Knob to set the full scale output to 20.00 mA.
15. Press STORE.
16. For verification perform the following steps:
1) Press STEP UP button and rotate Pulser Knob to select ‘CAL VIEW’ parameter.
2) Press STEP DOWN button to enter VALUE level.
May 2001
12-3
Calibration
UM354N-1
3) Rotate Pulser Knob to set display to 0.0%. Output current should be 4.00 mA.
4) Rotate Pulser Knob to set 100.0%. Output current should be 20.00 mA.
20. If all points have been calibrated and verified, press EXIT button to leave calibration mode and enter operation
mode. If additional function blocks are to be calibrated and verified, press STEP UP button to enter
FUNCTION BLOCK level. Perform steps 2-19 for each function block.
If security is enabled, the exiting the configuration mode will lock out the calibration mode until the security
combination is re-entered.
n
12-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Circuit Description
13.0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This section provides a block diagram level circuit description of the Moore 354N.
13.1 OVERVIEW
Controller hardware architecture is shown in Figure 13-1. Notice that all major plug-in assemblies interact with
the Controller Board.
The Display Assembly is used for operation and configuration. The MPU-based Controller Board performs many
of the controller’s signal processing and process control functions in addition to overseeing internal operations.
The Controller Board’s on-board power supply furnishes DC operating voltages to all plug-in assemblies and to
external process transmitters connected to the rear terminals. The I/O Expander board provides additional I/O.
Networking options include Modbus, Local Instrument Link and Ethernet (Procidia i|pac and Moore 353 only).
MPU Controller Board
Power
Input
Fieldbus
LonWorks
Protocol
MPU
LonWorks
Board
Power
Supply
26 Vdc to
Transmitters
Ethernet
Network
(RJ-45)
LIL or
Ethernet
Network
Board
Modbus or
LIL Network
(NCA/NCB)
Modbus
Analog
Inputs
1-3
Display
Assembly
with
Operator
Faceplate
Real Time Clock/Configuration
Backup Board or Removable
Configuration Board
W2 - LIL,
Modbus, or
Ethernet
Jumper
4-20 mA
Analog
Outputs
1&2
Digital
Outputs
1&2
Digital
Inputs
1-3
Universal
Analog
Inputs
1&2
RS232
(MMJ-11)
Rear
Connectors
Rear
Connectors
I/O Expander Board
26 Vdc to
Transmitters
4-20 mA
Analog
Output 3
Universal
Digital
Inputs
1&2
Relay
Outputs
1&2
X03142S3
Analog
Input 4
Digital
Input 4
FIGURE 13-1 Moore 354N Block Diagram
May 2001
13-1
Circuit Description
UM354N-1
13.2 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD
The heart of the controller is the powerful, microprocessor-based MPU Controller Board. The flexible software
supports reusable function blocks beneficial in solving a vast array of control strategies such as single loop, cascade
and dual loop.
The Controller Board assembly contains both analog and digital circuits. The analog circuitry operates in real time
while the microprocessor based digital circuitry operates at high speed under program control. The MPU
(microprocessor unit) contains a CPU32 core, System Integration Module (SIM), a queued SPI module (QSPI),
timer module and two general-purpose 8-bit ports. The MPU is capable of arithmetic, logical, and support circuit
control functions and interacts with surrounding on-board and off-board circuitry to direct the internal operation of
the controller. The MPU Board also contains 16-bit RAM, 16-bit ROM, a 2-wire RS485 connection, and an
RS232 connection.
The CPU32 communicates with the RAM, ROM and external communications boards via the SIM. All
communication between the MPU and the I/O, display and expander board is done via the QSPI. The QSPI is a
full-duplex, synchronous serial interface with a queue for receive and transmit data. Communication consists of
timing, control, data, and sequencing information.
The Controller Board has three analog inputs, 3 digital inputs, 2 analog outputs and 2 digital outputs. The
configuration in use determines the active inputs and outputs. For example, Factory Configured Option FCO101 is
configured to accept one analog input for the process signal and one analog output for the valve signal. The two
analog outputs are 4 to 20 mA current sources with shutdown control for use in redundant control systems. The
two digital outputs are open collector devices with over-voltage protection.
Two serial ports are available for bi-directional asynchronous communications. Terminals NCA and NCB provide
an RS485 connection for LIL or Modbus network communications. A DB9 connector on the underside of the
controller provides an RS232 connection for creating and editing configurations using the optional PC-Based
Graphical Configuration Utility and for communication with a local HMI operator display. Since both ports are
independent UARTs, communications with one serial port will not interfere with communications to the other.
Parameters in the STATN function block allow setting of the Modbus baud rate and transmission characteristic for
the DB9 configuration/HMI port and LIL/Modbus terminals NCA/NCB. (See STATN-Station Parameters in
Section 3.) Additional information on Modbus network communications and data mapping can be found in
Section 6 and Section 7.
The RS-232 connection uses a DB9 connector with the following six connections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
RTS - Handshaking output from MPU
TXD - Data output from MPU
Common
Common
RXD - Data input to MPU
CTS - Handshaking input to MPU
The on-board Power Supply circuit provides the power sources necessary for system power, internal analog output
power and transmitter power. Transmitter power is +26 Vdc at 0.125 amperes, to power up six process
transmitters.
13.3 I/O EXPANDER BOARD
The I/O Expander Board communicates with the Controller Board and contains hardware that increases station
capability. Additional direct connected I/O includes two isolated universal analog inputs with thermocouple, RTD,
resistance, slidewire, mA and voltage conversions, two additional digital inputs that can be used as discrete or
frequency inputs, an additional analog output and two relay outputs. All calibration data for the Expander Board is
stored in the board’s nonvolatile EEPROM making recalibration unnecessary when interchanging Expander and
Controller Boards.
13-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Circuit Description
Expander circuitry operates under the control of the MPU-based Controller Board, and like the Controller Board, it
contains both analog and digital circuitry. The analog circuitry operates in real time while the digital circuitry
operates at high speed under program control.
Relay 1 and Relay 2 are triggered by the off-board MPU to provide relay contact type outputs. Each SPDT relay
output can be connected in a normally open or normally closed contact state.
13.4 LonWorks BOARD
The LonWorks Board provides additional I/O when needed for multiple-loop applications, advanced control, or
batch sequencing. This board uses the popular LonWorks (LON stands for Local Operating Network) protocol for
high connectivity via a high-speed digital fieldbus to a large selection of standard I/O products. LonWorks remote
I/O products include many analog input and output options as well as digital inputs and outputs using relay or solid
state technology. This board plugs into the Controller Board via two connectors. An 80 pin pass-through
connector is also available for stacking additional option boards.
The LonWorks Board has an integrated circuit containing three processors, two timers, RAM, EEPROM, parallel
and serial ports and a network communication port. The board communicates with the Controller Board via a
parallel MIP interface. The MIP interface uses a token passing scheme so only the token holder can initiate a data
transfer. The board also connects directly to a remote network using a free topology transceiver that operates at a
rate of 78 kbps and connects up to 64 nodes over a twisted pair (see Section 5.0). The network wiring may be in a
bus configuration or wired in any combination of bus, star or loop topologies.
13.5 LOCAL INSTRUMENT LINK (LIL) NETWORK BOARD
An optional Local Instrument Link (LIL) Network Board is available in place of the Modbus communication
network to provide higher speed networking and peer-to-peer communication between controllers. The hardware
architecture is designed to accommodate other emerging fieldbus technologies. This includes both field
communications that may require lower power for intrinsic safety and also higher speed for interplant networking.
The LIL Board plugs into the controller board via two connectors. An 80-pin pass-through connector is also
available for stacking additional option boards. The LIL Board communicates with the main Controller Board via
a 32K, 8-bit Dual Port RAM. Two LED’s on the LIL Board indicate serial transmit and line activity.
Global LIL function blocks (AIL, AOL, DIL, DOL) can be configured to provide communication between
controllers as well as connectivity to other LIL products, such as the Models 352, 351 and 382, over a twisted pair
network. The total number of global function blocks will be limited by the number of global channels available.
Information on LIL network communications and Data Mapping can be found in Sections 6 and 7.
n
May 2001
13-3
Circuit Description
13-4
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
14.0 MODEL DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides model designation information, lists of controller accessories and service parts, detailed
controller specifications and hazardous area installation information.
IMPORTANT
Before installing or servicing a controller, refer to the controller labels and the
applicable specifications and hazardous area classifications in this section to ensure that
the correct model with the needed certifications is at hand.
Every controller is identified by several labels. Labels are located on the case and inside the drop-down door on the
Display Assembly, as shown in Figure 1-1. Typical labels are shown below.
Input
Requirements
120/240 VAC
20 W
47-63 Hz
30 VA
Max Amb. 50°C
WARNING:
Substitution of
components may impair
the suitability for Class
1, Div. 2
LR38024
WARNING: Do not connect or
disconnect configuration port cable while
in a hazardous location.
Do not remove the rear terminal housing.
Model No.
354N1D1NNLNNNAN
P/N No.
12345-678
Serial No.
01559621
Typical Input and Output Capacity:
Xmtr. Pwr. Sply. Out. - 25V @ 120 mA
CLI, Div. 2, GPS A,
B, C, & D
Temp Code T4A
See UM354N-1
Anlg. inp. V. - 0 to 5 Vdc @ 30uA
Anlg. out. cur. - 4 to 20 mA @ 800 Ohms
Dgtl. inp. V. - 0 to 30 Vdc @ 5 mAdc
Dgtl. out. cur. - 100 mA @ 30 Vdc
Rly. out. - 5A @ 120V, 2.5A @ 240 Vac
Max. Ambient Temp 50°C
14.1 MODEL DESIGNATION
Table 14.1 shows the controller’s model number sequence. The model designation is shown on a nameplate on the
top of the case. The nameplate and other labels carry important information about the controller, such as Model
Number, Bill of Material number (P/N No.), Serial Number, and Certifications.
IMPORTANT
Confirm a controller’s model number and hazardous area certifications before installing,
applying power, or servicing.
When circuit boards are added to a controller in the field, nameplate information will
not reflect the current physical configuration.
May 2001
14-1
Model Designation and Specifications
UM354N-1
TABLE 14.1 Moore 354N Model Designation*
BASIC MODEL NUMBER
354N Universal Control Station
Power Requirements
1 120/240 Vac (90-250 Vac), 47-63 Hz.
Local Faceplate Display
N Not Required
D Fixed Analog & Digital Displays - Direct Mounted
R Fixed Analog & Digital Displays - Remote Mounted
Expander I/O Board
N Not Required
1 Local I/O Expander (T/C, RTD, Frequency, Relay...)
Option Board A-1 (Remote I/O Communications)
N Not Required
L LonWorks Protocol
Option Board A-2
N Not Required
Option Board B-1 (Network Communications)
N Not Required
L Local Instrument Link (LIL)
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup
N Not Required
R Removable Configuration Board (Discontinued)
T Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup
Modification Options
N Not Required
X Controller Modified as detailed in order bill of material
Reserved for Future Use
N Reserved for Future Use
Design Level
A Design Level A
Electrical Approval
N Not Required
J CSA (NRTL) Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, & D
E CE + CSA (NRTL) Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, & D
354A 1 N N N N N N N N A N Sample Model No.
* Contact the Process Industries Division of Siemens Energy & Automation for the latest model designation information,
availability of some options, and current electrical approvals. Always refer to the labels on the controller case for
approvals and certifications.
14-2
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
14.2 ACCESSORIES
The following two tables list the accessories currently available.
ACCESSORY
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
i|config Graphical
Configuration Utility
iCONFIG-Vn.nn
Windows 95, 98 and NT compatible software for PC-based
controller configuration and creation of a function block
diagram. Transfer configuration to and from controller via
Modbus, LIL, or Ethernet.
Vn.nn - the latest software version will be supplied.
Includes:
16353-61 Cable - see description below
16353-63 Adapter - see description below
Transmitter Power Supply
15124-1
Acopian Model B24G210M, 24 Vdc, 2.0A
Adapter Bezel
15738-123
A panel cutout adapter for mounting a controller in a 3"x 6"
panel cutout.
Blank Filler Panel
15738-168
Enhances control room appearance by covering a panel
cutout intended for future mounting of a controller.
Loop Identification Card
-----
Custom printed loop identification for flip-down access
door. Specify up to 5 lines with 24 characters per line.
Permanent Instrument Tag
-----
Stainless steel tag permanently attached to the controller
case. One line with up to 24 characters can be specified.
Display Assembly Remote
Mounting Kit
16353-54
For remote panel mounting of a Display Assembly.
Includes:
Flange Assembly
Mounting Clips and Screws
Display (Ribbon) Cable, 45 inches (1143 mm) long
Installation Instruction
Does not include the Display Assembly.
Communications Cable,
MMJ11 to MMJ11
16353-61
Connects MMJ11 on adapter (connected to a personal
computer’s serial port) to MMJ11 on a Display Assembly.
Select one of the following adapters.
Adapter, DB25 to MMJ11
16353-62
Adapts personal computer serial port to above
Communications Cable.
Adapter, DB9 to MMJ11
16353-63
Faceplate Labels
AM-41
Peel and stick labels for customizing faceplate pushbuttons.
LONWORKS ACCESSORY
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
LonWorks Protocol Startup Kit
16353-65
LonWorks Startup Kit; includes:
27005-1 Adapter - see description below
15939-70Vn.nn Driver - see description
below
16353-66 Cable - see description below
Echelon 73000-1-600-6 SLTA/2
27005-1
Serial PC Interface Adapter
Echelon SLTA/2 Device Driver
15939-70Vn.nn
PC software (latest version will be supplied)
SLTA/2 to LonWorks Network Cable
16260-27
Cable assembly to connect DB9 on PC serial
port to DB9 on SLTA Adapter
Configuration Software
27005-2
Acromag 50SW-CFS-M03-1.44MB
May 2001
14-3
Model Designation and Specifications
UM354N-1
LONWORKS ACCESSORY
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
27005-4
Acromag 550L3-502-TEMPR-10-NCR
Quad V/mAdc Input Module, +/- 1 Volt
27005-5
Acromag 550L3-503-4V1-10-NCR
Quad V/mAdc Input Module, +/- 1 Volt,
with Factory Calibration
27005-6
Acromag 550L3-503-4V1-10-NCR-C
4-Channel High Level DC Input Module,
+/- 10; +/- 100 Volts
27005-7
Acromag 550L3-504-4V2-10-NCR
4-Channel High Level DC Input Module,
+/- 10; +/- 100 Volts, with Factory
Calibration
27005-8
Acromag 550L3-504-4V2-10-NCR-C
2-Channel 4-20 mA Output Module
27005-9
Acromag 570L3-701-C1-10-NCR
3-Channel Isolated DC Discrete Input
Module
27005-10
Acromag 540L3-401-3DC-10-NCR
3-Channel Isolated AC Discrete Input
Module
27005-11
Acromag 540L3-401-3AC-10-NCR
8-Channel DC Discrete Input Module
27005-12
Acromag 540L3-410-8D1-10-NCR
3-Channel Mechanical Relay Output
Module
27005-13
Acromag 560L3-601-3MR-10-NCR
3-Channel Solid State Relay Output
Module
27005-14
Acromag 560L3-601-3SS-10-NCR
8-Channel DC Discrete Output Module
27005-15
Acromag 560L3-610-8DO-10-NCR
4-Input/4-Output DC Discrete Module
27005-16
Acromag 580L3-810-4I4O-10-NCR
16 Digital Inputs, DC Powered Module
16802-3
Acromag 4925A
16 Digital Outputs, DC Powered Module
16802-4
Acromag 4926A
Power Supply, Input 115-230 Vac, Output
24 Vdc @ 2.1A
27005-24
idec PS5R-D24
1-Channel T/C, RTD Input Module
10
14.3 SERVICE PARTS KITS
Exploded view drawings of the Moore 354N appear in Section 1 Introduction and Section 11 Maintenance.
SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION
- FIRMWARE UPDATE KITS MPU Controller Firmware V1.3# to V1.32
MPU Controller Firmware V1.2# to V1.32
MPU Controller Firmware V1.3# to V2.40
- ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES AND RELATED PARTS Display Assembly Kit, for Model 354N_ D _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Display Assembly Bezel Replacement Kit
Contains gray bezel, keypad, pulsar knob, and Instruction.
Does not contain black Display Board or Display Assembly mounting screws.
10
PART NO.
15939-71V1.32
15939-77V1.32
15939-77V2.40
16353-53*
16353-163
MPU Controller Board Kit for 120/240 Vac Power Input
17354-57*
I/O Expander Board Kit
17354-40*
Local Instrument Link Network Board Kit with mounting hardware, for
Model 354N_ _ _ _ _ L _ _ _ _ _.
16297-22*
For 4-20 mA input module, order 72005-6 calibrated to 0.2 to 1V. (Replaces part 27005-3.)
14-4
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
SERVICE PART DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
LonWorks Board Kit with mounting hardware, for
Model 354N_ _ _ L _ _ _ _ _ _ _.
16353-69*
LonWorks Resistor Kit, includes:
2000 Ohm, 5%, 1/4W, qty 8
105 Ohm, 1%, 1/8W, qty 2
52 Ohm, 1%, 1/8W, qty 4
Diode, 1N4005G, 1A, 600V, qty 8
16353-141
Removable Configuration Board Kit with mounting hardware, for
Model 354N _ _ _ _ _ _ R _ _ _ _ (for firmware V1.31 or V1.32)
16353-143
Spare Parts Kit, includes:
Power Input and Range Resistor Kit, includes:
250 Ohm, 0.1%, 3W, WW resistor and insulating sleeving, qty 3 each
Crimp-on connector, qty 6
Range Resistor and Reference Junction Kit, includes:
250 Ohm, 0.1%, 3W, WW resistor, qty 1
3.75 Ohm, 1%, 3W, WW resistor, qty 2
Insulating sleeving, qty 5
Crimp-on connector, qty 6
100 Ohm reference junction for TC inputs, qty 2
Crimp-on Connector, qty 18
O-Ring, Display Assembly, qty 1
Fuses, 0.5A (for 120/240 Vac MPU Controller board) and 2A (for 24 Vdc
MPU Controller board), 250V, SloBlo, qty 1 each
Case Mounting Clip and 8-32 x 1 Fillister Hd. Screw, qty 2 each
Case Ground Screw (Green) and Rear Terminal Cover, qty 1 each
16353-131*
Real Time Clock/Configuration Backup Board Kit Model 354N_ _ _ _ _ _ T_ _ _ _
(for firmware V2.0/V2.20 or higher, see the CLOCK function block description)
16357-34*
Notes to Kits:
•
Refer to User’s Manual UM354N-1 for accessory part numbers and for servicing a controller.
•
See drawing(s) on previous page for disassembly and item reference numbers.
•
* Identifies a recommended on-hand spare part for the indicated model. Include nameplate information when ordering.
•
NS = Not Shown
14.4 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Controller and Tray Dimensions ...............................See Figure 8-2
Faceplate Display Dimensions...................................See Figure 8-3
Panel Cutout Dimensions, Faceplate Display.............See Figure 8-4
Weight
Model 354N_ _.........................................................4.5 lbs (2.0 kg)
Faceplate Display......................................................0.3 lbs (0.14 kg)
All weights are approximate.
14.5 POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS
Voltage Input
Model 354N ................................................85-264 Vac, 47-63 Hz
AC power ride through time.................25 msec. (minimum)
May 2001
14-5
Model Designation and Specifications
Power
UM354N-1
...................................................................25 Watts, 40 VA (maximum)
Wire Size, Recommended .........................................18 AWG (0.96 mm2)
Terminals .................................................................H - Hot; N - Neutral; G (or ground symbol) - Ground
Over-current Protection.............................................20A maximum fuse or circuit breaker
14.6 MPU CONTROLLER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Analog Inputs: (3)
Input Range.................................................0-5 Vdc (standard calibration 1-5 Vdc)
Zero...............................................0-1 Vdc
Span ..............................................4-5 Vdc
Type............................................................Single ended
Accuracy ....................................................0.10 %
Resolution ..................................................0.024 %
Software Output Type..................................Analog [configurable (default 0.0-100.0)]
Normal Mode Rejection............................... >50dB @ 60Hz.
Input Impedance.......................................... >1 megohm
Maximum Continuous Input
Without Crosstalk..........................+7, -30 Vdc
Without Damage............................±30 Vdc
Analog Outputs: (2)
Standard Calibration ...................................4-20 mAdc
Zero...............................................4 mAdc +/- trim
Span ..............................................16 mAdc +/- trim
Current Limits.............................................2.4 mA to 21.6 mA
Accuracy: .................................................... 0.1%
Resolution: ................................................. 0.003%
Software Input Type ....................................Analog [configurable (default 0.0-100.0)]
Signal Reference .........................................Neg. (-) output tied to station common
Output Load ................................................800 Ohms
Over-voltage Protection ...............................30 Vdc
Digital Inputs: (3)
Logic “1” Range..........................................15-30 Vdc
Logic “0” Range..........................................0-1 Vdc
Over-voltage................................................+/-30 Vdc
Minimum Required ON time.......................>Scan Time
Software Output Type..................................Digital
Isolation ......................................................100 Vdc
Digital Outputs: (2)
Type............................................................Open Collector Transistor (emitter tied to station common)
Load Voltage...............................................+30Vdc maximum
Load Current...............................................100 mA maximum
Off State Leakage Current...........................< 200 uA @ 30 Vdc
Transmitter Power ....................................................25 Vdc +/-3V, 120 mA, short circuit protected
14.7 I/O EXPANDER BOARD SPECIFICATIONS
Analog Inputs, Universal: (2)
Type ‘J’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-185°C to 1100°C (-300°F to 2010°F)
Performance Range........................0 to 1100°C
14-6
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.5°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°C
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.08°C/°C
Type ‘K’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-185°C to 1370°C (-300°F to 2500°F)
Performance Range........................0 to 1370°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.6°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.10°C/°C
Type ‘T’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-240°C to 370°C (-400°F to 698°F)
Performance Range........................-100 to 370°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.5°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.07°C/°C
Type ‘E’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-185°C to 1000°C (-300°F to 1830°F)
Performance Range........................0 to 1000°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.5°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.07°C/°C
Type ‘S’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-18°C to 1650°C (0°F to 3000°F)
Performance Range........................200 to 1650°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.7°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.14°C/°C
Type ‘R’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-18°C to 1610°C (0°F to 2930°F)
Performance Range........................200 to 1610°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.7°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.15°C/°C
Type ‘B’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-18°C to 1815°C (0°F to 3300°F)
Performance Range........................800 to 1815°C
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.7°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.15°C/°C
Type ‘N’ Thermocouple:
Range Limits .................................-200°C to 1300°C (-325°F to 2370°F)
Performance Range........................0 to 1300°C
May 2001
14-7
Model Designation and Specifications
UM354N-1
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.5°C
Conformity ....................................<= 0.06°
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.10°C/°C
Type DIN 43760/ IEC 751 RTD (à = 0.003850):
Range Limits .................................-185°C to 622°C (-300°F to 1152°F)
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.4 °C
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.04°C/°C
Type US (NBS126) RTD (à = 0.003902):
Range Limits .................................185°C to 613°C (-300°F to 1135°F)
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.4°C
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.04°C/°C
Type JIS C-1604 RTD (à = 0.003916):
Range Limits .................................-185°C to 610°C (-300°F to 1130°F)
Accuracy .......................................+/-0.4°C
Software Output Type....................Analog (configurable °C, °F, °R, °K)
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.04°C/°C
Slidewire
Resistance Range...........................500-5000 Ω
Software Output Type....................Analog (% slidewire 0.0 to 100.0)
Accuracy: ......................................+/- 0.1%
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.01°C/°C
Ohms
Resistance Range...........................0-5000 Ω
Software Output Type....................Analog (ohms)
Accuracy: ......................................+/- 0.1%
Ambient Temperature Effect: ........+/- 0.01°C/°C
Millivolt
Narrow Range ...............................-19.0 to 19.0 mVdc
Accuracy .......................................+/-5.0 uV
Ambient Temperature Effect..........1.0 uV/°C
Wide Range...................................-30.0 to 77 mVdc
Accuracy .......................................+/-8.0 uV
Ambient Temperature Effect..........2.5 uV/°C
Software Output Type....................Analog (millivolts)
Analog Input: (1)
Input Range.................................................0-5 Vdc (standard calibration 1-5 Vdc)
Zero...............................................0-1 Vdc
Span ..............................................4-5 Vdc
Type
......................................................Single ended
Accuracy ....................................................0.10 %
Resolution ..................................................0.024 %
Software Output Type..................................Analog [configurable (default 0.0 - 100.0)]
Normal Mode Rejection...............................>50dB @ 60Hz.
Input Impedance..........................................>1 megohm
Maximum Continuous Input........................+/-30 Vdc
14-8
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
Analog Output: (1)
Standard Calibration ...................................4-20 mAdc
Zero...............................................4 mAdc +/- trim
Span ..............................................16 mAdc +/- trim
Accuracy ....................................................0.10 %
Resolution ..................................................0.003 %
Software Input Type ....................................Analog [configurable (default 0.0 - 100.0)]
Current Range Limits..................................2.4 to 21.6 mA dc
Signal Reference .........................................Neg. (-) output tied to station common
Output Load ................................................800 Ohms
Overvoltage Protection ................................30 Vdc
Digital Input: (1)
Logic “1” Range..........................................15-30 Vdc
Logic “0” Range..........................................0-1 Vdc
Overvoltage.................................................+/-30 Vdc
Minimum Required ON Time......................>Scan Time
Software Output Type..................................Digital
Isolation ......................................................100 Vdc
Universal Digital Inputs: (2)
Logic “1” Range..........................................4-30 Vdc
Input Current ..............................................<7 mA @ 30 V
Logic “0” Range..........................................0-1 Vdc
Overvoltage.................................................+/-30 Vdc
Frequency Range.........................................0 to 25,000 Hz.
Accuracy .....................................................0.03 % of reading
Minimum Operating Frequency...................0.05 Hz.
Pulse Width.................................................20 µsec (minimum)
Signal Types ...............................................Sine Square, Pulse, Triangle, or Contact Closure
(contacts require external power)
Software Output Types: ..............................(a) Scaled Frequency: Analog
(b) Scaled Count: Analog
(c) Current Input State: Digital
Isolation ......................................................100 Vdc
Relay Outputs: (2)
Type............................................................Sealed (meets requirements of Division 2 applications)
Software Input Type ....................................Digital
Contact Configuration .................................SPDT
Contact Rating ............................................5A @ 115 Vac; 2.5A @ 230 Vac (resistive load)
Minimum Current .......................................100 mA @ 10 mVdc or 150 mA @ 50 mVac
14.8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS
Communication boards plug into the Controller Board and provide digital communication as required by the
application. These boards provide digital communication for remote I/O and NETWORK communication for
interstation/workstation/APACS networking. Two communication boards plug into the MPU controller board: a
LonWorks board and a LIL Network board.
14.8.1 LonWorks Board
This board provides for additional I/O, remote from the controller. The communication method allows various
configurations of analog and discrete signal types, both input and output, for use in control and/or sequencing
applications within the station.
May 2001
14-9
Model Designation and Specifications
UM354N-1
14.8.2 LIL Network Board (Local Instrument Link)
This board provides network communication, mapping station variables to the standard LIL channel/parameter
communication map. When this board is used, neither Modbus nor Ethernet communication are available. The
local configuration port under the faceplate is still available for configuration and diagnostic applications.
14.9 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.9.1 Standard Mounting
Mounting, Typical Location ......................................Control room or other protected area
Temperature Limits:
Operating ....................................................0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Storage........................................................-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Climatic Conditions..................................................IEC654-1 (Class B3)
Corrosive Conditions ................................................IEC654-4 (Class 2)
14.9.2 Enclosure Mounting
Mounting:
Typical Location .........................................Out-of-doors or other area without environmental controls
Enclosure ....................................................User supplied
Controller....................................................Installed inside enclosure
Faceplate Display ........................................Exposed through enclosure to external environment
Installation Requirements............................Refer to Section 8 Installation
Temperature Limits:
Enclosure Internal, Operating......................0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Enclosure External, Operating.....................-40 to 50°C (-40 to 122°F)
Controller Storage.......................................-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Climatic Conditions: .................................................IEC654-1 (Class B3)
Corrosive Conditions: ...............................................IEC654-4 (Class 2)
14.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ......................IEC801-2 (Electrostatic Discharge)
IEC801-3 (RFI)
IEC801-4 (Electrical Transients)
14.10 AGENCY APPROVALS
The Moore 354N has been designed to meet various agency approvals. Contact the factory or your local Siemens
Energy & Automation, Process Industries Division representative for current approvals. Labels on each controller
list the agency approvals that apply to that particular instrument.
CSA
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D; temperature code T4A
CE - see Section 14.10.2
14-10
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
14.10.1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions
This section provides CSA hazardous location precautions that should be observed by the user when installing or
servicing the equipment described in this Instruction. These statements supplement those given in the preceding
section.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Explosion can cause death or serious injury.
In a potentially explosive atmosphere, remove power from the
equipment before connecting or disconnecting power, signal
or other wiring.
All pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous
area must be observed.
Precautions - English
For Class I, Division 1 and Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations,
Ÿ
Use only factory-authorized replacement parts. Substitution of components can impair the suitability of this
equipment for hazardous locations.
For Division 2 hazardous locations:
When the equipment described in this Instruction in installed without safety barriers, the following precautions
should be observed. Switch off electrical power at its source (in non-hazardous location) before connecting or
disconnecting power, signal, or other wiring.
Précautions - Français
Emplacements dangereux de classe I, division 1 et classe I, division 2:
Ÿ
Les pièces de rechange doivent être autorisées par l'usine. Les substitutions peuvent rendre cet appareil
impropre à l'utilisation dans les emplacements dangereux.
Emplacement dangereux de division 2:
Lorsque l'appareil décrit dans la notice ci-jointe est installé sans barrières de sécurité, on doit couper l'alimentation
électrique a la source (hors de l'emplacement dangereux) avant d'effectuer les opérations suivantes branchment ou
débranchement d'un circuit de puissance, de signalisation ou autre.
May 2001
14-11
Model Designation and Specifications
UM354N-1
14.10.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use
Always refer to the labels on the controller case for approvals and certifications applicable to that instrument.
CE
•
Use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the protection provided by the
equipment.
•
Route electrical power to the station through a clearly labeled circuit breaker or on-off switch that is located
near the station and is accessible by the operator. The breaker or switch should be located in a non-explosive
atmosphere unless suitable for use in an explosive atmosphere.
•
Local Instrument Link twinaxial cable must be shielded.
•
The next page contains a Declaration of Conformance with the standards or other normative documents stated
on the certificate.
•
Environmental Conditions, Per IEC 664, Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2
•
A representative unit was tested in accordance with EN50082-2. Test results are available upon request.
•
CSA electrical classification approval as non-incendive for Division 2 service applies to installations in North
America and where recognized. Check local approval requirements.
14-12
May 2001
UM354N-1
Model Designation and Specifications
n
May 2001
14-13
Model Designation and Specifications
14-14
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Abbreviations And Acronyms
15.0 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
This section contains definitions for many of the abbreviations and acronyms that frequently appear in this User’s
Manual. Less frequently used terms are defined where they are appear. Where a term has more than one meaning,
context will usually indicate the meaning. Terms that identify a function block are indicated by (FB).
A - ampere(s)
AC - action, alternating current
ACS - Arccosine (FB)
ACT - acting
ADD - Addition (FB), address
AIE - Analog Input - Ethernet (FB)
AIN - Analog Input (FB)
AINU - Analog Input Universal (FB)
A/M - auto/manual
AOE - Analog Output - Ethernet (FB)
APACS - Advanced Process Automation and
Control System
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
ASN - Arcsine (FB)
AT - adaptive time, autotune transfer
ATD - Analog Trend Display (FB)
ATN - Arctangent (FB)
AWG - American Wire Gauge
BAT - battery
BATSW - Batch Switch (FB)
BATOT - Batch Totalizer (FB)
BPL - batch pre-load
BOD - Basic Operator Display
C - centigrade
CAL - calibrate, calibration
CHN - channel
CHR - Characterizer (FB)
CHAN - channel
CIE - Coil Input - Ethernet (FB)
CL - console/local
CMP - Comparator (FB)
COS -Cosine (FB)
D - deviation, denominator
DAM - Deviation Amplifier (FB)
DC - direct current
DEG - degrees
DEV - deviation
DG - derivative gain
DIE - Digital Input -Ethernet (FB)
DID - Digital Input Discrete (FB)
DIG - digital
DIL - Discrete Input LIL (FB)
DIN - Digital Input (FB)
DINU - Digital Input Universal (FB)
DIR - direct
DIS - Digital Input_State
May 2001
DISP - display
DIV - Division (FB)
DLY - delay
DMM - digital multimeter
DNC - Divide by N Counter (FB)
DOD - Digital Output Discrete (FB)
DOE - Digital Output -Ethernet (FB)
DOL - Discrete Output - LIL (FB)
DOS - Digital Output_State (FB)
DOUT - Digital Output (FB)
DPP - decimal point position
DTM - Dead Time Table (FB)
DWNLD - download
DYT - Delay Timer (FB)
E/I - External/Internal Transfer Switch (FB)
EM - EMER MAN - emergency manual
EN - enable, enabled
ENG - engineering (units)
ERR - error
ESL - Events Sequence Logger (FB)
ESN - Execution Sequence Number
ET - elapsed time
EXP - Natural Exponent (FB)
EXT - Exponentiation (FB)
F - Fahrenheit
FAC - factory
FB - function block
FCO - Factory Configured Option
FREQ - frequency
ft. - feet
FTG - Falling Edge Trigger (FB)
GB - Gain & Bias (FB)
GS - go to step
GW - global word (LIL)
H - hold
HART - Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
HI - high
HLD - Hold (FB)
HYS - hysteresis
Hz - Hertz
ICI - Independent Computer Interface (Model 320)
ID - ID Controller (FB), identity
in. - inch
INIT - initial
I/O - input/output
15-1
Abbreviations And Acronyms
IO - internal override
k - kilo (prefix) 10+3
K - Kelvin
lb. - pound(s)
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LIB - library
LIL - Local Instrument Link
LL - Lead/Lag (FB)
LMT - Limit (FB)
LN_ - Natural Logarithm (FB)
LO - low, lockout
LOG - Logarithm Base 10 (FB)
m - milli (prefix) 10-3, meter
M - mega (prefix) 10+6
MA - moving average
MAX - maximum
MB - Modbus
MD - Message Display
MIN - minimum
MR - manual reset
MSG - Message
MTH - Math (FB)
MUL - Multiplication (FB), multiply, multiplication
N - number, numerator
NC - normally closed
NND - NAND Logic (FB)
NO - normally open
NOR - NOR Logic (FB)
NOT - NOT Logic (FB)
NUM - number
NV - network variable
NVRAM - non-volatile random access memory
ODC - Operator Display for Controllers (FB)
ODS - Operator Display for Sequencer (FB)
ON/OFF - On/Off Controller (FB)
OP - operation
OR - OR Logic (FB), override
ORSL - Override Select (FB)
OST - One Shot Timer (FB)
P - process
PAC - Process Automation Controller
PARM - parameter
PB - Pushbutton
PB#SW - Pushbutton # Switch (FB)
PC - personal computer
PCOM - Phase Communication (FB)
PD - PD Controller (FB)
PG - proportional gain
PID - PID Controller (FB),
proportional/integral/derivative
15-2
UM354N-1
PIDAG - PIDAG Controller (FB),
proportional/integral/derivative/adaptive gain
PRSEQ - Program Sequencer (FB)
PTR - pointer
PU - Power Up
PUL - pulse
Q - quality
QHD - Quickset Hold (FB)
QS - quick set, quality status
QSPI - Queued Serial Peripheral Interface
R - reset, Rankine
RCB - Removable Configuration Board
RCT - Repeat Cycle Timer (FB)
RD - received data
Rev - revision
RG - range
RLM - Rate Limiter (FB)
RN - recipe number
ROT - Retentive On Timer (FB)
ROUT - Relay Output (FB)
RSF - RS Flip-Flop (FB)
RT - remaining time
RTD - resistance temperature detector
RTG - Rising Edge Trigger (FB)
S - setpoint, set
SCL - Scaler (FB)
SEN - sensor
SB - step backward
SEL - Signal Selector (FB)
SETPT - Setpoint (FB)
SF - step forward
SIN_ - Sine (FB)
SL - setpoint limit
SLTA - Serial Link Talk Adapter
SN - step number
SPLIM - Setpoint Limit (FB)
SQ - square root
SR - start ramp
SRF - SR Flip-Flop (FB)
SRT - Square Root (FB)
SS - stainless steel, standby synchronization
ST - status
STA - station
STATN - station
SUB - Subtraction (FB), subtract
SW - switch
TAN_ - Tangent (FB)
TC - thermocouple, track command
TD - time derivative
TH - Track & Hold (FB)
TI - time integral
TIM - timer
May 2001
UM354N-1
Abbreviations And Acronyms
TO - tracked output
TOT - totalizer
TSW - Transfer Switch (FB)
TV - track variable
WD - watchdog
V - valve, volt(s)
VAL - value
ZDO - zero drop out
XMTR - transmitter
XOR - Exclusive OR Logic (FB)
n
W - watts
May 2001
15-3
Abbreviations And Acronyms
15-2
UM354N-1
May 2001
UM354N-1
Warranty
WARRANTY
The Company warrants all equipment manufactured by it and bearing its nameplate, and all repairs made by it, to
be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. If any part of the equipment
herein described, and sold by the Company, proves to be defective in material or workmanship and if such part is
within twelve months from date of shipment from the Company's factory, returned to such factory, transportation
charges prepaid, and if the same is found by the Company to be defective in material or workmanship, it will be
replaced or repaired, free of charge, f.o.b. company's factory. The Company assumes no liability for the
consequence of its use or misuse by Purchaser, his employees or others. A defect in the meaning of this warranty
in any part of said equipment shall not, when such part is capable of being renewed, repaired or replaced, operate
to condemn such equipment. This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties, guaranties, obligations, or
liabilities, expressed or implied by the Company or its representatives. All statutory or implied warranties other
than title, are hereby expressly negated and excluded.
Warranty repair or replacement requires the equipment to be returned to one of the following addresses.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Process Industries Division
1201 Sumneytown Pike
Spring House, PA 19477 USA
Tel: +1 215 646 7400
Fax: +1 215 283-6340
Warranty will be null and void if repair is attempted without authorization by a member of the Service Department
or Technical Support Group, Process Industries Division, Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
n
May 2001
W-1
Warranty
W-2
UM354N-1
May 2001
Siemens
Energy & Automation
Software Release Memo
SR353-8
Rev: 2
August 2001
Controller Models 352P, 353, 354, and 354N
MPU Controller Board Firmware Version 2.40
PRODUCTS INVOLVED
A Model 352P, 353, 354 or 354N Controller with MPU Controller Board V2.40 firmware
INTRODUCTION
This Software Release memo discusses the enhancements and operational considerations for firmware version 2.40
MPU Controller board software (firmware).
ENHANCEMENTS
Model 353 only: V2.40 firmware adds Ethernet communication function blocks to the features provided by earlier
firmware versions. The Ethernet Communication Network option board must be installed in a Model 353 controller for
these blocks to be available. Note: Ethernet communications is not available in a Model 352P, 354, or 354N.
•
ETHERNET Function Block – Use this function block to configure Ethernet communication parameters.
•
AIE Function Block – The AIE (Analog Input Ethernet) function block allows the controller to obtain analog
data from other stations over the Ethernet network. Up to 32 AIE blocks are available.
•
AOE Function Block – The AOE (Analog Output Ethernet) function block allows the controller to send analog
data to AIE blocks in other stations over the Ethernet network. Up to 32 AOE blocks are available.
•
CIE Function Block– The CIE (Coil Input Ethernet) function block allows the controller to obtain up to 16
discrete Modbus coil data from other stations over the Ethernet network. Up to 32 CIE blocks are available.
•
DIE Function Block – The DIE (Digital Input Ethernet) function block allows the controller to obtain up to 16
digital points from another Procidia controller over the Ethernet network. Up to 32 DIE blocks are available.
•
DOE Function Block – The DOE (Digital Output Ethernet) function block allows the controller to send up to 16
digital inputs to DIE blocks in other stations over the Ethernet network. Up to 32 DOE blocks are available.
All listed controllers: V2.40 firmware adds a TOTalizer function block and enhancements to the A/M, ODC, and
QHD blocks.
•
TOT Function Block – The TOT (Totalizer) block can be created as required in any loop, up to the limit of 99
blocks per loop. The block counts input pulses and outputs the total count. A reset input is provided to zero
the counter.
•
A/M Function block – A new parameter, LOCK MANual, will override the EMergency MANual parameter, when
configured to YES. If LOCK MAN is configured for YES, the Manual Switch and the LEDs will switch to Manual
when the EM input goes high. The A/M switch will stay in Manual and the A/M button will not allow switching
to AUTO until the EM input has cleared.
SR353-8
•
ODC Function block – A new input, Input A, can be used to acknowledge all the alarms in all of the loops in a
controller.
A new parameter, V NET AC (Valve Bar Network Action), allows the LxVI network parameter to be set for direct
or reverse action. This enables the valve bar on the HMI to operate similar to the valve bar on the faceplate.
The left and right valve labels should be set accordingly (e.g. Left = OPEN; Right = CLOSED).
•
QHD Function block - the power up value can now be configured.
Version 2.40 firmware resolves the following operational consideration.
•
PRSEQ Function block – Downloading a configuration containing the PRSEQ block to a controller with V2.40
firmware will no longer reset the PRSEQ block if no parameter changes have been made. Downloading a
configuration to a controller having V2.31 or earlier firmware will cause the PRSEQ to reset to step 1.
•
LIL Configuration Download - After downloading a large configuration, the transmitted LIL data goes to 0 at the
end of the download for one scan.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
•
Before installing MPU Controller board firmware that is a lower level than that presently installed in the
controller, select and Store FCO-0 (zero) as the controller configuration.
•
AIE_ Function block – When using the Analog Input Ethernet block, leave the RANGE parameter set to “Man”.
Setting the parameter to “Auto” can cause communication problems with large configurations. This issue will be
resolved in a future firmware release.
UPGRADE CONSIDERATIONS AND MATERIALS
1.
Check the current MPU Controller Board firmware version before upgrading. To display the firmware version,
refer to the STATN – Station Parameters section in the Function Blocks chapter of the controller’s User’s
Manual.
2.
A personal computer running Microsoft ® Windows ® 95, 98 or NT is needed.
3.
Upgrading requires the following items:
1)
Communications Cable - P/N 16353-61
2)
Communications Cable Adapter; select one to mate with your computer’s COM port:
DB25 to MMJ11 - P/N 16353-62
DB9 to MMJ11 - P/N 16353-63
3)
Model 352P/353/354 Firmware Upgrade Utility P/N15939-77V2.40 (upgrades 1.xx to 2.40). Kit contains are:
• a CD-ROM with the multiple versions of the controller firmware
• a software license disk created for the station (by serial number) to be upgraded.
• a software registration card
INSTALLING VERSION 2.40
1.
Follow the instructions on the label of the supplied CD-ROM to install the utility.
2.
Read the supplied HELP file for information about downloading firmware (kernel and code) to a controller.
3.
Complete and mail the software registration card.
2
SR353-8
Technical Support
For technical support, contact the Technical Support Group at +1 215 646 7400 ext. 4993. For the address of the
Siemens Energy & Automation, Process Industries Division office nearest you, visit either of the following Internet
sites.
www.sea.siemens.com/ia/
www.procidia.com
Current revisions of User’s Manuals for the listed controllers can be found at the above sites. The manuals are in
Portable Document Format (PDF).
n
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use of
information included in this document. The information herein is subject to change without notice.
Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are considered
sound practice. Neither Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. nor these agencies are responsible for repairs made by the user.
© Copyright 2001, Siemens Energy & Automaton, Inc. All rights reserved.
3